Issuu on Google+


Politics and International Relations Research and Scholarly New Titles and Key Backlist 2011

Cover Image © Alice Pettway

Welcome to Routledge

Politics Research and Scholarly New Titles and Key Backlist 2011

contents Handbooks..............................................1

Terrorism Studies.................................101

International Relations.............................9

Intelligence Studies..............................106

Foreign Policy........................................21

Military Studies....................................107

Global Institutions..................................23

Strategic Studies..................................108


Human Rights......................................109

International Political Economy..............34


Comparative Politics..............................37



Religion and Politics.............................112



European Union.....................................54

Political Theory....................................115

European Politics...................................57

Public Policy and Administration..........119

British and Irish Politics..........................64

Political Communication......................119

Central and Eastern Europe...................65

Environmental Politics..........................120

Middle Eastern Politics...........................69

Research Methods...............................122

African Politics.......................................76


US Politics..............................................77

Order Form................... Back of Catalogue

International Security.............................81 Peace and Conflict Studies.....................95

Considering books for course use? This symbol shows books that are available as complimentary exam copies for lecturers or faculty considering them for course adoption. To obtain your copy visit the URL listed beneath the title in the catalog and select your choice of print or electronic copy. Visit or in the US you can call 1-800-634-7064. This symbol shows books that are available as electronic inspection copies only.

The Easy Way to Order Ordering online is fast and efficient, simply follow the on-screen instructions. Alternatively, you can call, fax, or see order form at the back of this catalog. UK and Rest of World Call: +44 (0)1235 400524 Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699 US, Canada and Latin America Call: 1-800-634-7064 Fax: 1-800-248-4724

The Responsibility to Protect................100


Contacts uk and rest of world Marketing: Michael King – Associate Marketing Manager Email:

Editorial: Craig Fowlie – Senior Publisher Email:

Heidi Bagtazo – Senior Editor Email:

US, Canada and latin america Marketing: Christine Swedowsky – Marketing Manager Email:

Editorial: Michael Kerns – Editor Email:

Natalja Mortensen – Editor Email:

Andrew Humphrys – Senior Editor Email:



Online: Email: Call: Toll Free: 1-800-354-1420

Online: Email: Call: +44 (0)20 7017 5544 eBook and Online Sales: Email: Call: +44 (0)20 7017 6062

Overseas: 1-215-625-8900

eBook and Online Sales: Email: Call: 1-888-318-2367

Prices, publication dates and content are correct at time of going to press, but may be subject to change without notice.

Register your email address at to receive information on books, journals and other news within your area of interest.

Trade Customers’ Representatives, Agents and Distribution For a complete list, visit:

eBooks There are over 23,000 eBooks available across the humanities, social sciences, behavioural sciences, STM and law from some of the world’s leading imprints for individual and institutional purchase.

– Individuals Download full titles or just the pages or chapters needed. You can also print or copy pages or chapters of choice, compile your own eBook or rent a title for 1 day, right up to 6 months. Full details are on

– Libraries and Institutions Subscribe or purchase a ready made package or pick & mix your own from our complete collection (50 title minimum). 30 day free trials are available. For more information, visit: or contact your local sales team.

h an dbo o k s


Routledge Handbook of Democratization Edited by Jeffrey Haynes, London Metropolitan University, UK This Handbook provides a global overview of the process of democratization, with chapter by chapter discussion at the country and regional levels, examining the interaction between the domestic and external factors that affect the progression of countries from authoritarian to democratic rule. Selected Contents: Section 1: Democratisation: The Regional Picture 1. Central and Eastern Europe Paul Lewis 2. Central America John A. Booth 3. South America Anita Breuer 4. Sub-Saharan Africa Elke Zuern 5. The Middle East and North Africa Francesco Cavatorta 6. Central Asia Verena Fritz and Jonathan Wheatley 7. South Asia Farida Jalalzai 8. Southeast and East Asia Matthew Carlson Section 2: Democratisation and Governance 9. Measuring Democratisation Edward LiPuma and Thoas A. Koelble 10. Democratic Transitions Jay Ulfelder 11. Elections Ludvig Beckman 12. ’Hybrid regimes’ Garry Rodan and Kanishka Jayauriya 13. Deviant Democracies Renske Doorenspleet 14. The Military Thomas Bruneau 15. Political Parties Vicky Randall 16. Civil Society David Herbert 17. Social Capital Bo Rothstein Section 3: Democratisation and International Relations 18. The Third and Fourth Waves of Democracy Fabrice Lehoucq 19. Political Conditionality Richard Youngs 20. The United Nations and Democratisation Aurel Croissant 21. The European Union and Democratisation Michelle Pace 22. The African Union and Democratisation Charles Manga Fombad 23. The Organisation of American States and Democratisation Monica Herz Section 4: Democratisation and Development 24. Democratisation, Poverty, and Inequality Gordon Crawford and Abdul-Gafaru Abdulai 25. Democratisation and Security Vincent Boudreau 26. Democratisation and Human Rights David Beetham 27. Democratisation and Gender Wendy Stokes 28. Democratisation and War Wolfgang Merkel 29. Democratisation and Conflict Resolution Sonja Grimm December 2011: 246 x 174: 368pp Hb: 978-0-415-57377-1: £115.00



Routledge Handbook of International Statebuilding

The Routledge Handbook of the Cold War

Edited by David Chandler, University of Westminster, London, UK and Timothy D. Sisk, University of Denver, USA

Edited by Artemy Kalinovsky, University of Amsterdam, the Netherlands and Craig A. Daigle, City College of New York, USA

This new Handbook provides a combination of theoretical, thematic and empirical analyses of the international statebuilding regime, written by leading international scholars. It will be an essential reference work for this emerging interdisciplinary field.

This new Handbook brings together recent developments in Cold War studies in a single volume, offering a wide-ranging overview of current scholarship in the field.

Selected Contents: 1. International Statebuilding: Authority, Legitimacy, and Capacity in War-Torn Societies Part 1: Conceptual Orientations 2. Problems and Perspectives 3. Historical Perspectives on Contemporary Statebuilding: Weber’s Ghost 4. Institutionalization before Liberalization 5. Regulating Statehood 6. Hybridity and Statebuilding 7. Statebuilding and the Privileging of Difference 8. Gender and Statebuilding 9. Political Economy of Statebuilding Part 2: Themes 2.1 Security 10. The Security Council and the Protection of Civilians 11. Beyond ’New Horizons:’ Whither UN Peacekeeping? 12. From Peacekeeping to Statebuilding 13. From Soldiers to Citizens? DDR and Security-Sector Reform 14. Statebuilding and the Problem of Armed Violence 2.2 Development 15. Security and Development 16. The Decline of the Developmental State 17. Statebuilding or State Capture? Natural Resource Management 18. Statebuilding in Fragile States 2.3 Democracy, Law and Human Rights 19. Interim Governments: Lessons Learned 20. Transitional Administrations 21. Power Sharing and Statebuilding 22. Statebuilding and Democracy Promotion 23. Electoral Processes and Statebuilding 24. Ending Impunity: Transitional Justice Part 3: Implementation 25. Aid Flows and Statebuilding in Fragile States 26. The United Nations Peacebuilding Commission and Peacebuilding Fund 27. EU Police Missions 28. EU Statebuilding through Enlargement 29. Liberia: Security Sector Reform 30. Kosovo: The Statebuilding Conundrum: Addressing Fragility in a Contested State 31. Bosnia: Building States without Societies? NGOs and Civil Society 32. Iraq: US Approaches to Statebuilding 33. Afghanistan: Liberal Peace and the Rule of Law. Conclusion 34. A 21st Century Challenge: The Future of International Statebuilding December 2011: 246 x 174: 384pp Hb: 978-0-415-67702-8: £110.00 For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:


Routledge Handbook of Civil-Military Relations Edited by Thomas C. Bruneau and Florina Cristiana Matei, both at Naval Postgraduate School Monterey, CA, USA This new Handbook offers a wide-ranging, internationally focused overview of the field of civil–military relations. There is currently no handbook on civil–military relations, and this work is intended to fill that gap in the scholarly literature. In the U.S., the predominant scholarly approach has focused on marginal issues, including the so-called ’crisis in civil–military relations’; that is, in America, and in the relatively limited literature on other countries, the focus has been overwhelmingly on asserting and exercising democratic civilian control over the armed forces; once control has been at least formally asserted there is nothing else to study, it seems. Also, the overwhelming focus in studies of the armed forces has been on territorial defense and fighting wars, and yet very few armed forces are prepared to fight and even fewer fight, in such wars. The reality is that the armed forces are central actors in most societies and are involved in many different roles, including the following: they engage in peacekeeping missions, support the police in fighting crime, support civilian authorities in dealing with natural disasters, and fight against terrorists and in internal conflicts. The existing literature does not capture this variety of tasks, as it has self-limited itself to war-fighting, and this Handbook aims to fill this important lacuna. Edited by one of the world’s leading scholars, this Handbook will be essential reading for students of civil-military relations, defense studies, war and conflict studies, international security and IR in general. December 2011: 246 x 174: 384pp | Hb: 978-0-415-78273-9: £110.00 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:

Selected Contents: Introduction Editors Part 1: Cold War Origins 1. The Roots of Conflict (Soviet Russia and the World before 1945) 2. The Great Powers and the End of World War II 3. The Formation of the Blocks (Marshall Plan/ NATO/Sovietization of Europe) 4. The Dawn of the Atomic Age Part 2: Cracks in the Empire 4. The Berlin Crises 5. Communism in Poland 1956 6. The Hungarian Revolution 7. The Sino-Soviet Split Part 3: The Cold War and the Third World 8. Decolonization and the Search for Models of Development 9. Soviet and American Modernization Projects in the Third World 10.The Decline of the Soviet Model/The Rise of Political Islam 11. The Cold War in Africa 12. The Cold War in Latin America Part 4: Détente 13. US-Soviet Détente 14. Sino-American Rapprochement 15. Ospolitik 16. CSCE/Helsinki Final Act Part 5: Science, Technology, and Cold War Culture 17. Soviet Scientists/ US Science and the Cold War/The Cold War University 18. Sovietology and the Cold War 19. Cold War Cinema 20. Cold War Propaganda Part 6: The End of the Cold War and the Collapse of the Soviet Union 21. The End of the Cold War: An International Perspective 22. Human Rights Activism and the End of the Cold War 23. The Catholic Church and the End of the Cold War 24. The Collapse of the Soviet Union. Conclusions December 2011: 246 x 174: 364pp Hb: 978-0-415-67701-1: £110.00 For more information, visit:

related journal


Politics, Religion & Ideology Formerly published as Totalitarian Movements and Political Religions Editor by Naveed Sheikh, University of Keele, UK Volume 12, 2011, 4 issues per year Print ISSN: 2156-7689, Online ISSN: 2156-7697 For over a decade this journal has provided a forum for the exploration of the politics of illiberal ideologies, both religious and secular. It publishes critical analyses of theory and international case studies pertaining to: the historic and ongoing interaction between religion and politics; the impact of religious radicalism on public policy, political attitudes, and political decision-making; the contemporary politics of religious revival in Europe, North America, the Middle East, and Asia; and much more.


hand b o o ks





Routledge Handbook of African Politics

Routledge Handbook of Transnational Organised Crime

Edited by David Anderson and Nic Cheeseman, both at University of Oxford, African Studies Centre, UK

Edited by Felia Allum, University of Bath, UK

Routledge Handbook of Insurgency and CounterInsurgency

Providing a comprehensive and cutting edge examination of this important continent, the Routledge Handbook of African Politics discusses a wide range of issues and includes both established scholars and emerging researchers. It is a vital resource to all students of African Studies, Democratization, Conflict Resolution and Third World Politics. Selected Contents: Section 1: The Politics of Identity and Solidarity 1. Class Politics 2. Identity and Affiliation 3. Muslim Politics in W Africa 4. Religion and Politics 5. Autochthony 6. Affiliations in Nigeria 7. Trade Unions Section 2: The Politics of the State 8. State & Patronage, Neo-Patrimonialism 9. Structure of the State/Legacy of Colonial Rule 10. Military & Politics 11. One Party State 12. Leadership 13. Colonial Legacies 14. Federalism 15. Constitutions Section 3: International Relations & the Politics of Dependency 16. Africa Union 17. Regional Organizations (COMESA/SADC/EAC) 18. Oil and Politics 19. International Aid and Politics 20. Ngos 21. Africa & the International System 22. Economic Issues, Saps to Prsps 23. Migration (Remittances, Brain Drain) Section 4: Politics and Conflict 24. Warlordism/Collapsed States 25. Guerrillas and Politics 26. Civil Wars 27. Vigilantes 28. Post-Conflict Reconstruction 29. Trcs/ICC & Legal Issues 30. Peacekeeping, UN Section 5: Democracy and Electoral Politics 31. Electioneering 32. Political Parties 33. Civil Society 34. Electoral Numbers 35. Multi-Party Systems and Electoral-Authoritarianism 36. Parliaments and Executives 37. Public Opinion Section 6: Problems and Challenges 38. Social Contract OR HIV 39. State Integrity/Collapse 40. Democracy Promotion 41. Land & the State 42. Social Policy & Welfare 43. Security, Post 9/11 44. Power-Sharing 45. China in Africa December 2011: 246 x 174: 480pp Hb: 978-0-415-57378-8: £115.00 For more information, visit:


Routledge Handbook of the Responsibility to Protect Edited by W. Andy Knight, University of Alberta, Canada and Frazer Egerton This Handbook offers a comprehensive examination of the Responsibility to Protect norm in world politics, which aims to end mass atrocities against civilians. Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: The Concept of R2P 1. From Sovereign Responsibility to R2P 2. The Responsibility to Prevent 3. The Responsibility to React 4. The Responsibility to Rebuild 5. The Journey Within the Organisation: The Evolution of R2P and the United Nations 6. NGOs and the Normative Architecture of the Responsibility to Protect 7. The Promise and Achievements of R2P 8. The Limits of R2P Part 2: Developing and Operationalising R2P 9. The Unfinished Business of R2P 10. Who Speaks for Whom? R2P and the Question of Authority and Thresholds for Action 11. Who Should Act? Collective Responsibility and R2P 12. R2P and Natural Disasters 13. Gender & The Responsibility to Protect 14. R2P and Protecting Children in Conflict Zones 15. The Need for Leadership 16. Mobilising the Troops: Generating the Political Will to Act Part 3: The View from over Here 17. South Asia and R2P 18. R2P in the Asia Pacific 19. Latin America and R2P 20. West Africa and R2P 21. R2P and the Horn of Africa 22. R2P in the Middle East. Conclusion

Transnational organized crime (TOC) is a dangerous phenomenon that crosses borders, challenges States, exploits individuals, pursues profit, wrecks economies, destroys civil society, and ultimately weakens global democracy. It is a phenomenon that is all too often misunderstood and misrepresented. This Handbook attempts to re-draw the balance, by providing a fresh and interdisciplinary overview of the problems which TOC represents. The innovative aspect of this Handbook is not only its interdisciplinary nature but also the dialogue between international academics and practitioners that it presents. Selected Contents: Introduction F. Allum and S. Gilmour Section 1: Origins and Concepts 1. Is TOC a Myth? P. Van Duyne 2. Understanding Legal Theory and TOC 3. The Political Reality of TOC A. Edwards 4. Local Difficulty: Organized Crime, Transnationality and Policy Transference Dick Hobbs and Sue Hobbs 5. TOC in America M. Woodiwiss 6. TOC in Europe T. Vander Beken 7. African TOC and its Impacts S. Ellis 8. TOC in the Indo-Pacific: A View from Australia J. McFarlene, R. Broadhurst and S. Gordon 9. TOC in Russia Serguei Cheloukhine Section 2: Contagion and Evolution 10. The Geography of TOC: Spaces, Networks and Flows T. Hall 11. The Practice of Transnational Organized Crime K. Von Lampe 12. The Drugs Question R. Perl 13. People Trafficking A. Aronowitz 14. TOC and the Market M. Kenny 15. TOC and Money Laundering M. Beare 16. Relationships between the State and TOC T. Ward Section 3: Intensity and Impact 17. TOC and Civil Society Peter Schneider and Jane Schneider 18. Women in TOC F. Allum 19. TOC and the Global Village Kelly Hignett 20. Ethnicity, Mobility and TOC J. Arsoska 21. Imitating Art: TOC’s Infiltration of the Culture Industry J. Pine 22. Explaining the Expansion of the TOC and Terrorism Nexus T. Makarenko 23. Looking Glass Values: The Moral Narratives in Media Representations of Transnational Organized Crime P. Rawinlinson Section 4: Governance 24. Observing T.O. Criminals B. Goold 25. Migration Policy and TOC L. Wyler 26. Governance by Empire M. Bishop and M. Anderson 27. TOC and Surveillance A. Gendron 28. Preserving Human Rights in Transnational Criminal Investigation C. Hartfield Section 5: Reaction 29. UK S. Gilmour 30. The Endangered Empire: American Responses to Transnational Organized Crime R. Kelly 31. The Fight Against Organised Crime: An Asia-Pacific J. McFarlene 32. The Fight against TOC in Russia A. Orlova 33. Countering the Nexus of TOC and Terrorism C. Edwards Section 6: The Future 34. Future TOC Threats – Europe D. Bolt 35. UNODC Pino Arlacchi 36. The Harm From TOC – USA J. Finkenauer 37. TOC and Lessons from Italy A. D’Altiero. Conclusions F. Allum and S. Gilmour

Edited by Paul B. Rich and Isabelle Duyvesteyn, University of Utrecht, the Netherlands This new Handbook offers a wide-ranging examination of the current state of academic analysis and debate as well as an up-to-date survey of contemporary insurgent movements and counter-insurgencies. Selected Contents: Introduction: The Study of Insurgency and Counter-insurgency Part 1: Theoretical and Analytical Issues 1. The Historiography of Insurgency 2. The Sociological and Psychological Study of Insurgency and Counter-insurgency 3. Rethinking the Nature of Insurgency 4. Changing Forms of Insurgency: Pirates and Narco-Gangs? 5. Insurgency, Counter-Insurgency and Policing 6. Insurgency and Cyber-War 7. Ethical Dimensions to Insurgency and Counter-Insurgency Part 2: Insurgent Movements 8. Insurgent Movements in Latin America 9. Insurgent Movements in Africa 10. Insurgent Movements in Iraq 11. The Insurgency of Hamas and Hizballah 12. Insurgent Movements in South East Asia 13. Insurgent Movements in Pakistan 14. Insurgency in Afghanistan 15. Insurgent Movements in India 16. Insurgent Movements in Russia Part 3: Counterinsurgency 17. The Debate on CounterInsurgency 18. The Technology and Logistics of Modern Counter-Insurgency 19. Trends in US Counter-Insurgency 20. Counter-Insurgency in Iraq and Afghanistan: A Strategic Watershed? 21. On Israeli Counter-Insurgent Doctrines and Practice 22. A ’Successful’ Model of Counter-Insurgency? The Sri Lankan Government’s War against the LTTE 23. British Counter-Insurgency since Ulster 24. CounterInsurgency in a Non-Democratic State: The Russian Example 25. Counter-Insurgency in South America 26. CounterInsurgency in India 27. Counter-Insurgency in Pakistan 28. Counter-insurgency in China 29. Counter-Insurgency in South East Asia Part 4: Insurgency and CounterInsurgency in a Globalising World 30. Contemporary Insurgency and Counter-Insurgency 31. Emerging Trends in the Twenty-first Century September 2011: 246 x 174: 400pp Hb: 978-0-415-56733-6: £110.00 For more information, visit:

September 2011: 246 x 174: 368pp Hb: 978-0-415-57979-7: £115.00 For more information, visit:

September 2011: 246 x 174: 432pp Hb: 978-0-415-60075-0: £110.00 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

h an dbo o k s




Routledge Handbook of Religion and Security

Routledge Handbook of Diplomacy and Statecraft

Routledge Handbook of Political Marketing

Theory and Practice

Edited by B.J.C. McKercher, Royal Military College of Canada

Edited by Jennifer Lees-Marshment, University of Auckland, New Zealand

Despite post-Cold War arguments about their demise, ‘Great Powers’ not only continue to thrive, with lesser Powers they form the basis of the constellation of global politics. This topical new Handbook illustrates how and why the new international order has evolved – and is still evolving – since the end of the Cold War, through the application of diplomacy and statecraft.

With the Obama campaign universally acknowledged as the most successfully marketed presidential campaign of all time, the future of political marketing is fiercely contested, provoking a wealth of high quality scholarship from across the globe.

Edited by Christopher Seiple and Dennis Hoover, both at Institute for Global Engagement, Arlington, USA and Pauletta Otis, Marine Corps University, Quantico, USA This Handbook breaks new ground by addressing global security through the lens of religion and the role religion plays in both war and peace. There has been a considerable upsurge of public concern about the role of religion in contemporary violence. However, other than historical materials, there has been a relative neglect of the subject of religion and security. The academic disciplines of anthropology, sociology, political science, international relations, geography, and economics have surprisingly little emphasis on this subject. There are two major exceptions: (1) military studies that focus on just war and justice in war studies to better inform policy, and (2) religious enclaves studying war-related issues from sectarian (and generally theological) perspectives.

A comprehensive survey of diplomacy across the world, this work will be essential reading for scholars and professionals alike.

December 2011: 246 x 174: 384pp Hb: 978-0-415-66744-9: £110.00

Selected Contents: Prologue: The International Order and the New Century BJC McKercher Section 1: The Context of Diplomacy 1. Diplomatic History: A New Appraisal Jeremy Black 2. Theorising Diplomacy Christer Jonsson Section 2: The Great Powers 3. The United States: The Contemporary World’s Indispensable Nation James M Scott 4. The Foreign Policy of Great Britain Christian Bluth 5. Unravelling the Enigma: Russian Foreign Policy in the 21st Century Jeffrey Mankoff 6. China: Great Power Rising Robert Henderson 7. France: Exercising Power and Influence Across the Ages Paul Vallet 8. German Foreign Policy Mirrored in the Achievements and Shortcomings of Its Chancellors Christian Hacke 9. Japan’s Diplomacy and Culture Alexander Buhk Section 3:Middle Powers 10. Brazil: Making Room at the Main Table Sean W Burges 11. Indian Statecraft Struggles to Come to Terms with India’s Rise Harsh V Pant 12. Contemporary Canadian Foreign Policy: A Middle Power in a Great Power World Stephane Roussel 13. The Czech Republic: The Domestic Limits to Foreign Policy Effectiveness Dan Marek and Maichael Baun 14. The Foreign Policy of Turkey Dimitris Keridis Section 4: Developing Powers 15. Cuban Revolutionary Diplomacy 1959-2009 Carlos Alzugaray 16. Peru: A Model for Latin American Diplomacy and Statecraft Ronald Bruce St John 17. Nigeria: The Foreign Policy of a Putative African Power Cyril Obi 18. Thailand: The Enigma of Bamboo Diplomacy Pavin Chachavalpongpun 19. Indonesia’s Foreign Policy after the Cold War Kai He Section 5: International Organisations and Military Alliances 20. A GLobal Great Power in the Making? The European Union in the Emerging Global Order Rikard Bengtsson 21. The Great Powers and the United Nations Stephen Ryan 22. Reconciling Different Logics of Security Provision: The Case of NATO Alexandra Gheciu 23. New Reigionalism and the African Union Andrew Grant and Thomas Kwasi Tieku 24. The Non-Aligned Movement: Collective Diplomacy of the Global South Jacqueline Ann Braveboy-Wagner Section 6: The International Economy 25. The International Monetary Fund and the World Bank: The Power of Money? Morten Boas 26. The European Union and the Economic and Financial Crisis Daniela Schwarzer 27. The Organisation of the Petroleum Exporting Countries and Contemporary International Politics and Economy Houchang Hassan-Yari 28. From Colonies to Collective: ALBA, Latin American Integration, and the Construction of Regional Political Power Larry Cata Backer 29. The G8 and the Move to a Globalised International Economy Andreas Freytag and Leo Wanger 30. The Opposition to the Globalised International Economy Bruno Wuest Section 7: Issues of Conflict and Co-operation 31. International Arms Control David Mutimer 32. The Strategy Gap: Contemporary Civil-Military Relations and the Use of Military Power Michael Roi 33. The Middle East - Strategic and Military Balance of Power Eyal Zisser 34. The Balance of Power in South Asia Sumit Ganguly 35. North Korea: The Foreign Policy of a ’Rogue’ State Balbina Y. Hwang 36. Failed States: Zimbabwe Jeremy R. Youde Public Versus Private Power: Non-Governmental Organizations and International Security Jonathan Goodhand and Oliver Walton 38. Soft Powe: Overcoming the Limits of a Concept Kostas Ifantis

For more information, visit:

August 2011: 246 x 174: 512pp Hb: 978-0-415-78110-7: £115.00

For the past ten years, people have tried with great passion but little attention to ’universals’ to explain ’religious violence’, i.e. Islamic radicalism, Christian genocide, Buddhist nationalism, and Hindu riots. The general approach has been that of comparative theologies, which has provoked a lot of debate. But theology, like ideology, is short on being able to predict behaviour. In other words, the discussion of religion and violence must include, but not be restricted to, theology. Ideas matter but what we are trying to explain is behaviour – behaviour(s) associated in some way with religious beliefs and power. That power can be approached as resources, interpersonal, cultural, and social expertise. This Handbook fills the gap for a comprehensive volume which combines theory and with contemporary case studies. The themes and issues covered by this Handbook will provide information and insight into the role of religion in contemporary war in the global environment covering all of the world’s major religions, forms of warfare and contributions to peace. This book will be of great interest to students of religion, security studies, war and conflict studies and IR in general. Selected Contents: Preface Part 1: Religion and Security 1. Introduction Part 2: Perspectives and Approaches to Religion and War 2. Theoretical Overview 3. Systematic Approaches 4. Theology: War and Peace in Comparative Religion 5. Academic Approaches 6. History and the Mysteries of History 7. The Military 8. Globalization and Religion 9. Governance and Religion Part 3: War, Culture and Religion 10. International Relations Theory, Religion, and COIN 11. Types of War and Religious Contributions: Civil, Revolutionary, Genocide, Insurgency, Criminal 12. Religious Contributions to the Stages and Phases of War 13. Types of Religious Violence: Beheading, Suicide Bombing, and Terrorism 14. War and the Ethics of Arms 15. Lessons Learned from Iraq Part 4: The Global Environment 16. The Global Statistics 17. Europe: Bosnia, Kosovo, Croatia 18. Israel and Palestine 19. Central America: Criminal Gangs and Religious Symbology. Bibliography

For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:

The Routledge Handbook of Political Marketing contains cutting edge contributions written by academic experts and informed practitioners featuring emerging areas and authors alongside established ones. The Handbook also addresses the practicalities as well as the broader impact of political marketing on politics including its role in the changing relationship between political leaders, parties and voters. With each chapter providing a comparative and carefully structured discussion of a key topic, the Handbook will examine issues within the following broad themes: • understanding the market, gathering ideas, and debate • product development, branding and strategy • internal Marketing • communicating with the public • e-marketing in government. With each chapter written to a common template using contemporary case studies, this work will combine a succinct presentation of the latest research with an accessible and systematic format that will be of great interest to scholars and practitioners alike. October 2011: 246 x 174: 448pp HB: 978-0-415-57993-3: £115.00 For more information, visit:


Routledge Handbook of European Elections Edited by Donatella M. Viola, Calabria University, Italy This Handbook is a comprehensive reference guide to the European Parliamentary Elections and an invaluable resource for all scholars of the European Union, European Parliament, Elections and Parties. Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: General Framework 1. Genesis and Evolution of the European Parliament 2. The Role of the European Parliament in the European Union 3. European Parliament Elections Theories Part 2: Case Studies: Euroelections in the EU Member States: The ‘Old’ Member States - The Original Six 3. France 4. Germany 5. Italy 6. Belgium 7. The Netherlands 8. Luxembourg The First and Second Enlargement Countries 9. The United Kingdom 10. Ireland 11. Denmark 12. Greece The Third Enlargement Countries: The Iberian Region 13. Spain 14. Portugal The Fourth Enlargement Countries 15. Austria 16. Finland 17. Sweden The ‘New’ Member States - The Fifth Enlargement: Southern Mediterranean Countries 18 Malta 19. Cyprus Central and Eastern European Countries 20. Slovenia 21. Estonia 22. Latvia 23. Lithuania 24. Czech Republic 25. Slovakia 26. Hungary 27. Poland 28. Bulgaria 29. Romania 30. Cross-Country Comparative Analysis of Euroelections Conclusion. Future Agenda of the European Parliament October 2011: 246 x 174: 368pp Hb: 978-0-415-59203-1: £115.00 For more information, visit:


hand b o o ks





Routledge Handbook of Russian The Routledge Handbook of Politics & Society Terrorism Research

Routledge Handbook of Asian Regionalism

Edited by Graeme Gill and James Young, University of Sydney, Australia

Edited by Alex P. Schmid, Terrorism Research Initiative, Vienna, Austria

Edited by Mark Beeson, University of Western Australia and Richard Stubbs, McMaster University, Canada

There are an ever-burgeoning number of books analyzing the Russian experience, or aspects of it. This Handbook is the first single volume which gives both a broad survey of the literature as well as highlighting the cutting edge research in the area. Through both empirical data and theoretical investigation each chapter in the Routledge Handbook Russian of Politics & Society examines both the Russian experience and the existing literature, points to research trends, and identifies issues that remain to be resolved.

The Routledge Handbook of Asian Regionalism is a definitive introduction to, and analysis of, the development of regionalism in Asia, including coverage of East Asia, Southeast Asia and South Asia. The result will be a comprehensive exploration of what is arguably the most dynamic and important region in the world. Significantly, this volume addresses the multiple manifestations of regionalism in Asia and is consequently organised thematically under the headings of:

• general introduction • political institutions • political economy • society • foreign policy. Politically, economically, and socially, Russia has one of the most interesting development trajectories of any major country. This Handbook seeks to answer questions about democratic transition, the relationship between the market and democracy, stability and authoritarian politics, the development of civil society, the role of crime and corruption, and the creation of a market economy. Providing, a comprehensive resource for scholars and policy makers alike, this book is an important contribution to the study of Russian Studies, Eastern European studies, and International Relations. Selected Contents: Part 1: Introduction 1. The Yeltsin Era Graeme Gill 2. The Putin Era Ronald J. Hill 3. The Medvedev Presidency Graeme Gill 4. Democratisation Richard Sakwa 5. How Russia Compares Rodney Tiffen Part 2: Politics 6. The Russian Constitution Gordon B. Smith 7. Presidency John P. Willerton 8. The Federal Assembly and the Power Vertical Paul Chaisty 9. The Duma’s Electoral System: Lessons in Endogeneity Bryon Moraski 10. Political Parties Regine Smyth 11. Communism Luke March 12. Federalism and De-Federalisation in Russia Cameron Ross 13. Regional Government Darrell Slider 14. Local Government Tomila Lankina 15. The Bureaucracy Eugene Huskey 16. Law Courts and Human Rights Eugene Huskey 17. Crime and Corruption Leslie Holmes 18. The Russian Power Ministries and Security Services Bettina Renz 19. The Military Dmitry Gorenburg 20. The Russo-Chechen Conflict James Hughes Part 3: Political Economy 21. The Political Economy of Contemporary Russia William Tompson 22. Russia’s Market Economic Reforms Anders Aslund 23. The Russian Economy and Business-Government Relations Stephen Fortescue 24. The Business Sector in Post-Soviet Russia Peter Rutland Part 4: Society 25. Class Stephen Crowley 26. Russian Labour Linda J. Cook 27. Gender Sarah Ashwin 28. Media Sarah Oates 29. Public Opinion and Voting Behaviour Stephen White 30. Civil Society Leah Gilbert and Harley Balzer 31. Informality and Informal Politics Alena Ledeneva 32. Russian Nationalism John Brookfield 33. Religion Thomas Bremmer 34. Health and Health Policy Judy Twigg Part 5: Foreign Policy 35. Russian Foreign Policy Natasha Kuhrt 36. Russia and the States of the Former Soviet Union Robert Donaldson 37. Russia and Europe Anna Jonsson 38. Reset? Russian Perspectives on US-Russian Relations Carol R. Saivetz 39. Russian Foreign Policy in Asia Gilbert Rozman September 2011: 246 x 174: 496pp Hb: 978-0-415-57627-7: £115.00 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

This major new Handbook synthesises more than two decades of scholarly research, and provides a comprehensive overview of the field of terrorism studies. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Alex P. Schmid 2. The Problem of Defining Terrorism Alex P. Schmid 3. Typologies of Terrorism and Political Violence Sarah Marsden and Alex P. Schmid 4. Theories of Terrorism Bradley McAllister and Alex P. Schmid 5. Databases on Terrorism Neil G. Bowie and Alex P. Schmid 6. World Directory of Extremist, Terrorist and Other Organizations associated with Guerrilla Warfare, Political Violence, Protest and Organized and Cyber-Crime Albert J. Jongman 7. Library and Internet Resources for Research on Terrorism Eric Price 8. The Literature on Terrorism Alex P. Schmid 9. Bibliography of Terrorism Gillian Duncan and Alex P. Schmid 10. Glossary and Acronyms on Terrorism and Counter-Terrorism Alex P. Schmid

• conceptualising the region • economic issues • political issues • strategic issues • regional organizations. The Routledge Handbook of Asian Regionalism will be an indispenable resource for students and scholars of Asia politics, international relations and regionalism.

The Journal of Nationalism and Ethnicity A publication of the Association for the Study of Nationalities

Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Conceptualizing the Asian Region 1. Theories of Regionalism 2. Competing Regions: East Asia vs the Asia-Pacific 3. The Importance of Memory 4. History of Asia 5. Maritime Connections Part 2: Economic Issues 6. Asian Models of Capitalism 7. The Overseas Chinese 8. The Developmental State 9. The Role of MNCs 10. Trade Integration 11. Financial Cooperation 12. China-ASEAN Free Trade Agreement Part 3: Political Issues 13. Asian Values and Ways 14. Globalisation and Asia 15. Sovereignty 16. Bottom up Regionalism/ASEAN People’s Forum 17. Corruption 18. Human Rights 19. Asian Legal Systems 20. Democracy and Authoritarianism Part 4: Strategic Issues 21. Geopolitical History and the Rise of China 22. Regional Leadership Competition 23. Theoretical Approaches to Asian Security 24. Comprehensive Security 25. Environmental Security 26. Non-Traditional Security 27. Energy Security Part 5: Organizations 28. ASEAN 29. Asean Regional Forum 30. APEC 31. ASEAN+3 32. EAS 33. SCO 34. ASEM 35. SAARC

Editor-in-Chief: Florian Bieber, Karl-Franzens-Universität Graz, Austria

September 2011: 246 x 174: 400pp Hb: 978-0-415-58054-0: £115.00

Volume: 39, 2011, 6 issues per year Print ISSN: 0090-5992, Online ISSN: 1465-3923

For more information, visit:

February 2011: 246 x 174: 736pp Hb: 978-0-415-41157-8: £130.00 eBook: 978-0-203-82873-1 For more information, visit:

related journal

Offering focused studies of the key elements of Russian social and political life, the book is organized into the following broad themes:

’A prodigious effort to bring together the collective wisdom of experts from around the world [...] an invaluable resource to students, scholars and policy makers, this new volume should be the starting point of every serious student of the subject.’ – Louise Richardson, University of St. Andrews, UK

Nationalities Papers

Nationalities Papers is the leading journal on nationalism, ethnicity, ethnic conflict and national identity in Central Europe, the Balkans, the former Soviet Union, the Caucasus, the Turkic world and Central Eurasia. Furthermore, the journal also publishes contributions on theories of nationalism, comparative studies of nationalism, and trans- and supranational aspects of interethnic relations and national identity. The journal publishes timely, high quality articles from a variety of disciplines, including history, political science, sociology, anthropology, and literature.

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

h an dbo o k s


Routledge Handbook of Southeast Asian Politics

Routledge Handbook of Political Islam

Edited by Richard Robison, Murdoch University, Australia

Edited by Shahram Akbarzadeh, University of Melbourne, Australia

The Routledge Handbook of Southeast Asian Politics provides a comprehensive analysis of the major themes, conflicts and ideas that have defined and shaped the politics of Southeast Asia in the modern period. Selected Contents: Part 1: The Cold War Genesis of Politics in Southeast Asia 2. Comparisons of Different Post-Colonial/Cold War Regimes 3. The Defeat of the Left and Liberal Politics Part 2: Political Regimes in the Post-Cold War Period 4. Democracy, Decentralisation and Money Politics (Indonesia, Malaysia) 5. The Rise/ Consolidation of Populist Democracies in Southeast Asia (Thaksin in Thailand) 6. One Party Democracies or the Rise of New Forms and Ideologies of Authoritarianism (Malaysia, Singapore) 7. Vietnam: The Reform of Politics and State as the Incubator of New Political Forces Part 3: The Politics of Markets and the Rise of Governance 8. Building the Regulatory State and the Politics of Governance 9. The Politics of Corruption 10. The Politics of Rule of Law 11. The Privatisation of Governance Part 4: Civil Society and Politics 12. Organized Labour, the Non-Existence of Labour Parties and the Politics of the New Urban Poor 13. Social Movements and NGOs in the Politics of the Region 14. Human Rights Issues and Women’s Organisation 15. The Politics of Public Goods 16. Land as a New Big Political Issue in the Coming Decades and the Collision of State Officials, Private Capital and the Peasantry 17. Urbanization and the Role of Citizens and the Middle Classes in Influencing State Policy Authority Part 5: National States and Secular Authority under Threat 18. The Role of Islam in Politics, Islamic Political Movements and Radical and Violent Islamic Movements 19. The War on Terror 20. Ethnic Armies, the Politics of Narcotics and Fractured States: The Case of Burma 21. Demands for Autonomy and Secession; Indonesia (Timor, Aceh, Papua) and Islamic Secession Movements (Thailand and the Philippines) 22. Resolving the Legacies of Violence and Conflict: The Case of Cambodia Part 6: Forging a Regional and Global Compact 23. Problems Across the Region: The Politics of Labour Migration and Cross-Border Flows 24. The Politics of Trade 25. The Politics of Security and the Accommodation to Shifting Global Geo-Politics 26. A Minnow in Two Spheres of Influence – Caught Between US and China. Bibliography

This Handbook provides a multidisciplinary overview of one of the key political movements of our time. Drawing on the expertise from some of the top scholars in the world it examines theoretical and historical backgrounds, terrorism, strategy, case studies of Islamist movements in the developing world and the West, and the relationship with democracy and gender issues. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Political Thoughts of Seyyed Qutb 3. The Emerging Political Philosophy of Contemporary Islamism 4. Muslim Brotherhood 5. Hamas between Pragmatism and Radicalism 6. Velayat-e Faqih 7. Hizbullah in Lebanon 8. Hizb ut-Tahrir 9. Emergence of Political Islam in Central Asia 10. Preserving Muslim Identity under Secular Rule in Turkey 11. Merging Islam and Democracy in Iran? 12. Rise of Islamism in Pakistan 13. Limits of Islamic Legitimacy in Saudi Arabia 14. Islamic Radicalism in Indonesia 15. The Significance of the Arab Israeli Conflict 16. Islamism and Political Violence – Al Qaeda 17. The Challenge of Muslim Integration in the West 18. Radicalism in the United Kingdom 19. Islamic Education as Incubator of Radicalism? 20. Attitude Towards Women 21. Islamism and the US Policy 22. The Clash of Civilizations 23. Islam and Modernity December 2011: 234 x 156: 424pp Hb: 978-0-415-48473-2: £115.00 For more information, visit:

September 2011: 246 x 174: 356pp Hb: 978-0-415-49427-4: £115.00 For more information, visit:

Routledge Handbook of Religion and Politics Edited by Jeff Haynes, London Metropolitan University, UK This Handbook provides a global survey of the interaction between religion and politics. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Part 1: The World Religions and Politics 2. Buddhism and Politics 3. Christianity: Protestantism 4. The Catholic Church and Catholicism in Global Politics 5. Confucianism, from above and Below 6. Hinduism 7. Sunni Islam and Politics 8. Shiism and Politics 9. Judaism and the State Part 2: Religion and Governance 10. Secularisation and Politics 11. Religious Fundamentalisms 12. Religion and the State 13. Does God Matter, and If So whose God? Religion and Democratization 14. Religion and Political Parties 15. Religion and Civil Society 16. Religious Commitment and Socio-Political Orientations: Different Patterns of Compartmentalisation among Muslims and Christians? Part 3: Religion and International Relations 17. Integrating Religion into International Relations Theory 18. Religion and Foreign Policy 19. Transnational Religious Actors and International Relations 20. Religion and Globalisation Part 4: Religion, Security and Development 21. On the Nature of Religious Terrorism 22. Conflict Prevention and Peacebuilding 23. Religion and Women: Canadian Women’s Religious Volunteering: Compassion, Connections, and Comparisons 24. Faith-based Development Aid 25. Religion, Climate Change and Human Suffering 2010: 246 x 174: 448pp Pb: 978-0-415-60029-3: £29.99 For more information, visit:

related journal


Journal of Political Power Official Journal of the IPSA Research Group on Political Power New name for 2011! (Formerly Journal of Power)

Editor: Mark Haugaard, National University of Ireland, Galway, Ireland Volume: 4, 2011, 3 issues per year Print ISSN: 1754-0291, Online ISSN: 1754-0305 Since Aristotle’s classification of political systems, power has been one of the most central and debated themes of the social sciences. The Journal of Political Power is a primary outlet for those doing empirical work on relations of power and powerlessness. The journal welcomes empirical analysis of the process whereby globalization, ethnicity, nationalism, war and gender are central to the constitution of power, whether conceptualised as domination or empowerment.

Browse and order online:


hand b o o ks



Routledge Handbook of the Israeli-Palestinian Conflict Edited by David Newman, Ben-Gurion University of the Negev, Israel and Joel Peters, Virginia Tech University, USA The Israeli-Palestinian conflict is one of the most prominent issues in world politics today. Few other issues have dominated the world’s headlines and have attracted such attention from policy makers, the academic community, political analysts, and the world’s media. This Handbook provides a comprehensive and accessible overview of the most contentious and protracted political issue in the Middle East. The editors have gathered together a range of the top experts from Israel, Palestine, Europe and North America to tackle a range of topics from historical background, through to peace efforts, domestic politics, critical issues such as refugees and settler movements, and the role of outside players such as the Arab states, US and EU. Sections present the reader with the historical background to the conflict, an understanding of the complexity of the issues that need to be addressed in order to resolve the conflict, and a detailed analysis of the varied interests of the actors involved. Selected Contents: Section 1: Origins and History 1. Palestinian Nationalism Ahmad Khalidi 2. Zionism Colin Schindler 3. Israeli Narratives on the Israeli-Palestinian Conflict Paul Scham 4. Palestinian Narratives on the Israeli-Palestinian Conflict Walid Salem Section 2: Critical Junctures 5. 1948 War: Origins and Consequences Kristen Schulze 6. 1967 War: Origins and Consequences Joel Peters 7. The Oslo Declaration Daniel Levy 8. The Palestinian Intifadahs Rami Nasrallah 9. Camp David Joel Peters Section 3: Seeking Peace 10. Peace Plans: 1967-1993 Laura Zittrain Eisenberg 11. Peace Plans 1993-2008 Galia Golan Section 4: Domestic Society and Actors 12. The Israeli Settler Movement David Newman 13. Palestinian Citizens of Israel Amal Jamal 14. Israeli Peace Movement Naomi Chazan 15. The PLO Nigel Parsons 16. The Palestinian Authority Nigel Parsons 17. Hamas Khaled Hroub 18. Palestinian Civil Society Michael Schulz Section 5: Critical Issues 19. Refugees Rex Brynen 20. Jerusalem Michael Dumper 21. Borders and Territory David Newman 22. Unilateralism and Separation Gerald Steinberg 23. Terrorism and Political Violence Magnus Norell 24. Economic Relations Arie Arnon 25. Human Rights Edy Kaufman 26. Religion and the Israeli-Palestinian Conflict Yehezkel Landau 27. Water and the Israeli-Palestinian Conflict Julie Trottier Section 6: International and Regional Involvement 28. Jewish Diapora Dov Waxman 29. The United States and Israeli-Palestinian Conflict Steven Spiegel 30. Russia and Israeli-Palestinian Conflict Robert Freedman 31. Europe and Israeli-Palestinian Conflict Rosy Hollis 32. The Arab World and Israeli-Palestinian Conflict D.R. Kumaraswamy November 2011: 246 x 174: 424pp Hb: 978-0-415-77862-6: £115.00

The Routledge Handbook of Energy Security

Routledge Handbook of Ethnic Conflict

Edited by Benjamin K. Sovacool, National University of Singapore

Edited by Karl Cordell, University of Plymouth, UK and Stefan Wolff, University of Birmingham, UK

This Handbook examines the subject of energy security: its definition, dimensions, ways to measure and index it, and the complicating factors that are often overlooked.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Definitions and Concepts Introduction: Defining, Measuring, and Exploring Energy Security Benjamin K. Sovacool 1. Energy Security and Climate Change: A Tenuous Link Gal Luft, Ann Korin and Eshita Gupta 2. The Fuzzy Nature of Energy Security Scott Valentine 3. Evaluating the Energy Security Impacts of Energy Policies David von Hippel, Tatsujiro Suzuki, James H. Williams, Timothy Savage and Peter Hayes Part 2: Dimensions 4. The Sustainable Development Dimension of Energy Security Ami Indriyanto, Dwi Ari Fauzi and Alfa Firdaus 5. The Maritime Dimension of Energy Security Caroline Liss 6. The Public Policy Dimension of Energy Security Andreas Goldthau 7. The Diversification Dimension of Energy Security Andy Stirling 8. The Environmental Dimension of Energy Security Michael Dworkin and Marilyn Brown 9. The Energy Poverty Dimension of Energy Security Shonali Pachauri 10. The Social Development Dimension of Energy Security Anthony D’Agostino 11. The Energy Efficiency Dimension of Energy Security Nathalie Trudeau 12. The Energy Services Dimension of Energy Security Jaap Jansen and Adriaan J. Van der Welle 13. The Industrial Dimension of Energy Security Geoffrey Pakiam 14. The Competing Dimensions of Energy Security Martin J. Pasqualetti Part 3: Metrics and Indexing 15. Indicators for Energy Security Bert Kruyt, D.P. van Vuuren, H.J.M. de Vries and H. Groenenberg 16. Measuring Security of Energy Supply with Two Diversity Indexes John Kessels 17. Measuring Energy Security: From Universal Indicators to Contextualized Frameworks Aleh Cherp and Jessica Jewell 18. Applying the Four ‘A’s of Energy Security as Criteria in an Energy Security Ranking Method Larry Hughes and Darren Shupe 19. Measuring Energy Security Performance in the OECD Benjamin K. Sovacool and Marilyn A. Brown 20. Measuring Energy Security Vulnerability Edgard Gnansounou. Conclusion: Exploring the Contested and Convergent Nature of Energy Security Benjamin K. Sovacool and Tai Wei Lim 2010: 246 x 174: 464pp Hb: 978-0-415-59117-1: £110.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83460-2 For more information, visit:

From Europe to the United States and from the Middle East to Africa, ethnicity has become an increasingly important factor in political activity and organisation and a prime source of conflict.

Featuring contributions from an international team of experts, this Handbook provides a definitive global survey of the interaction of race, ethnicity, nationalism and politics. By examining the roots of national and ethnic identity, the sources of conflict and contemporary manifestations of racial hatred such as ethnic cleansing and genocide, the book delineates a variety of possible paths to reconciliation and conflict resolution. Selected Contents: The Study of Ethnic Conflict: An Introduction Karl Cordell and Stefan Wolff Part 1: Context & Key Concepts 1. The Origin of Nations: Contested Beginnings, Contested Futures Jennifer Jackson-Preece 2. Ideology and Nationalism Daniele Conversi 3. The Nation-State: Civic and Ethnic Dimensions Colin Clark 4. Stateless Nations in a World of Nation States Ephraim Nimni 5. Ethnicity and Religion Joe Ruane and Jennifer Todd 6. Race and Ethnicity Chris Gilligan Part 2: Ethnicity and Conflict 7. Ethnicity as a Generator of Conflict Stuart Kaufman 8. Democracy and Democratization Jenny Engstrom 9. The Causes and Consequences of Ethnic Cleansing Erin Jenne 10. Genocide Jim Hughes 11. Debating Partition: Evaluating the Standard Justifications Brendan O’Leary 12. Irredentas and Secessions: Adjacent Phenomena, Neglected Connections Donald Horowitz 13. Conflict Prevention: A Policy in Search of a Theory or a Theory in Search of a Policy? David Carment and Martin Fischer 14. Managing and Settling Ethnic Conflict Asaf Siniver 15. Multilateral Frameworks for Conflict Resolution Eva Sobotka 16. Post-conflict Reconstruction in Ethnically Divided Societies Monika Heupel Part 3: Accommodation and Conciliation 17. Deepening Democracy: The Role of Civil Society Ian O’Flynn and David Russell 18. Human Rights and Ethnopolitics Josef Marko 19. Territorial Approaches to Ethnic Conflict Settlement John McGarry and Brendan O’Leary 20. Ethnic Accomodation in Unitary States Frans Schrijver 21. National Cultural Autonomy David Smith 22. Centripetalism Benjamin Reilly 23. Power Sharing Stefan Wolff and Karl Cordell 24. Playing the Ethnic Card: Liberal Democratic and Authoritarian Practices Compared Sandra Barkhof 2010: 246 x 174: 352pp Hb: 978-0-415-47625-6: £125.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84549-3 For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

h an dbo o k s

The Routledge Handbook of War and Society

The Routledge Handbook of Transatlantic Security

The Routledge Handbook of New Security Studies

Iraq and Afghanistan

Edited by Jussi Hanhimäki, Graduate Institute of International and Development Studies, Geneva, Switzerland, Georges-Henri Soutou and Basil Germond, Centre for Sustainable Development, University of Central Lancashire

Edited by J. Peter Burgess, PRIO, Oslo, Norway

Edited by Steven Carlton-Ford, University of Cincinnatti, USA and Morten G. Ender, United States Military Academy, West Point, USA

This new Handbook provides an introduction to current sociological and behavioral research on the effects of the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan.

Selected Contents: Foreword Christopher Dandeker. Introduction Steven Carlton-Ford and Morton G. Ender Part 1: War on the Ground: Combat and its Aftermath 1. Fighting Two Protracted Wars: Recruiting and Retention with an All-Volunteer Force Susan M. Ross 2. Fighting the Irregular War in Afghanistan: Success in Combat - Struggles in Stabilization Brigid Myers Pavilonis 3. Learning the Lessons of Counterinsurgency Ian Roxborough 4. Twenty-First Century Narratives from Afghanistan: Storytelling, Morality, and War Ryan D. Pengelly and Anne Irwin 5. Two US Combat Units in Iraq: Psychological Contracts When Expectations and Realities Diverge Wilbur Scott, David McCone, and George R. Mastroianni 6. Capturing Saddam Hussein: Social Network Analysis and Counterinsurgency Operations Brian J. Reed and David R. Segal 7. Apples, Barrels and Abu Ghraib George R. Mastroianni and George Reed 8. The War on Terror in the Early 21 Century: Applying Lessons from Sociological Classics and Sites of Abuse Ryan Ashley Caldwell and Stjepan G. Mestrovic Part 2: War on the Ground: Non-Combat Operations, Noncombatants, and Operators 9. Policing Post-War Iraq: Insurgency, Civilian Police, and the Reconstruction of Society Mathieu Deflem and Suzanne Sutphin 10. Policing Afghanistan: Civilian Police Reform and the Resurgence of the Taliban Mathieu Deflem 11. Managing Humanitarian Information in Iraq Aldo Benini, Charles Conley, Joseph Donahue, and Shawn Messick 12. Role of Contractors and Other Non-Military Personnel in Today’s Wars O. Shawn Cupp and William C. Latham, Jr. 13. Evaluating Psychological Operations in Operation Enduring Freedom James E. Griffith 14. Armed Conflict and Health: Cholera in Iraq Daniel Poole 15. Iraqi Adolescents: Self-Regard, Self-Derogation, and Perceived Threat in War Steve Carlton-Ford, Morten G. Ender, and Ahoo Tabatabai Part 3: The War Back Home: The Social Construction of War, its Heroes, and its Enemies 16. Globalization and the Invasion of Iraq: State Power and the Enforcement of Neo-liberalism Daniel Egan 17. The Pakistan and Afghan Crisis Riaz Ahmed Shaikh 18. Mass Media as Risk-Management in the ’War on Terror’ Christopher M. Pieper 19. Talking War: How Elite Newspaper Editorials and Opinion Pieces Debated the Attack on Iraq Alexander G. Nikolaev and Douglas V. Porpora 20. Debating Antiwar Protests: The Microlevel Discourse of Social Movement Framing on a University LISTSERV Mark Hedley and Sara A. Clark 21. Making Heroes: An Attributional Perspective Gregory C. Gibson, Richard Hogan, John Stahura, and Eugene Jackson 22. Making the Muslim Enemy: The Social Construction of the Enemy in the War on Terror Erin Steuter and Deborah Wills Part 4: The War Back Home: Families and Youth on the Home Front 23. Greedy Media: Army Families, Embedded Reporting, and War in Iraq Morten G. Ender, Kathleen M. Campbell, Toya J. Davis, and Patrick R. Michaelis 24. Military Child Well-being in the Face of Mulitple Deployments Rachel Lipari, Anna Winters, Kenneth Matos, Jason Smith, and Lindsay Rock 25. American Undergraduate Attiutdes Toward the Wars in Iraq and Afghanistan: Trends and Variations Morten G. Ender, David E. Rohall, and Michael D. Matthews 2010: 246 x 174: 320pp Hb: 978-0-415-56732-9: £130.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84433-5

This new Handbook provides readers with the tools to understand the evolution of transatlantic security from the Cold War era to the early 21st century. The contributors address the following key questions arising from the history of transatlantic security relations: • What lies behind the growing and continuing European dependency on security policy on the United States and what are the political consequences of this?

• Is this dependency likely to continue or will an independent European Common Foreign and Security Policy eventually emerge? • What has been the impact of ’out-of-area’ issues on transatlantic security cooperation? Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Transatlantic Security in the Cold War Era 1. Three Ministers and the World They Made: Acheson, Bevin and Schuman, and the Making of the North Atlantic Treaty Anne Deighton 2. The Korean War: Miscalculation and Alliance Transformation Samuel Wells 3. The Doctrine of Massive Retaliation and the Impossible Nuclear Defense of the Atlantic Alliance: From MC 48 to MC 70 (1953-1959) François David 4. IVth Republic France and the Atlantic Alliance: Between Faithfulness to the Alliance and National Interests Jenny Raflik 5. The Fourth Republic and NATO: Loyalty to the Alliance versus National Demands George-Henri Soutou 6. NATO Forever? Willy Brandt’s Heretical Thoughts on an Alternative Future Benedikt Schoenborn 7. Negotiating with the Enemy and Having Problems with the Allies: The Impact of the Non-Proliferation Treaty on Transatlantic Relations Leopoldo Nuti 8. Power Shifts and New Security Needs: NATO, European Identity, and the Reorganization of the West, 1967–75 Daniel Möckli and Andreas Wenger 9. West Germany and the United States during the Middle East Crisis of 1973: ’Nothing but a Semi-Colony’? Bernhard Blumenau 10. The United States and the ’Loss’ of Iran: Repercussions on Transatlantic Barbara Zanchetta Part 2: Transatlantic Security Beyond the Cold War 11. The Warsaw Pact, NATO and the End of the Cold War Jérôme Elie 12. The Road to Saint Malo: Germany and EU-NATO Relations after the Cold War Wolfgang Krieger 13. EU-NATO Relations after the Cold War Hanna Ojanen 14. Security of the EU Boundaries in the Post Cold-War Era Axel Marion 15. Venus Has Learned Geopolitics: The European Union’s Frontier and Transatlantic Relations Basil Germond 16. The Rise and Fall of Criticism Towards the United States in Transatlantic Relations: From Anti-Americanism to Obamania Tuomas Forsberg 17. Strategic Culture and Security: American Antiterrorist Policy and the Use of Soft Power after 9/11 Jérôme Gygax 18. European Security Identity Since the End of the Cold War Guillaume de Rougé 19. A Realistic Reset with Russia: Practical Expectations for US-Russian Relations James Goldgeier 20. The Obama Administration and Transatlantic Security: Problems and Prospects Jussi M. Hanhimäki 21. Conclusion: Is the Present Future of Transatlantic Security already History? Jean Jacques De Dardel 2010: 246 x 174: 336pp Hb: 978-0-415-57283-5: £125.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84669-8 For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:

This new Handbook gathers together state-of-the-art theoretical reflection and empirical research by a group of leading international scholars relating to recent transformations in the field of security studies.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction J. Peter Burgess Part 1: New Security Concepts 2. Civilizational Security Brett Bowden 3. Risk Oliver Kessler 4. Small Arms Keith Krause 5. Critical Human Security Taylor Owen 6. Critical Geopolitics Simon Dalby Part 2: New Security Subjects 7. Biopolitics Michael Dillon 8. Gendered Security Laura Shepherd 9. Identity Security Pinar Bilgin 10. Security as Ethics Anthony Burke 11. Financial Security Marieke de Goede 12. International Law and Security Kristin B. Sandvik Part 3: New Security Objects 13. Environmental Security Jon Barnett 14. Food Security Rachel Slater and Steve Wiggins 15. Energy Security Roland Dannreuther 16. Cyber Security Myriam Dunn Cavelty 17. Pandemic Security Stephan Elbe 18. Biosecurity Frida Kuhlau and John Hart Part 4: New Security Practices 19. Surveillance Mark Salter 20. Urban Insecurity David Murakami Wood 21. Privatization of Security Anna Leander 22. Migration William Walters 23. Security Technologies Emmanuel-Pierre Guittet and Julien Jeandesboz 24. Designing Security Cynthia Weber and Mark Lacy 25. New Mobile Crime Monica den Boer 2010: 246 x 174: 328pp Hb: 978-0-415-48437-4: £130.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85948-3 For more information, visit:

New in Paperback

The Routledge Handbook of Security Studies Edited by Victor Mauer and Myriam Dunn Cavelty, both at Swiss Federal Institute of Technology (ETH), Zurich, Switzerland ’Overall, this is the best available introduction to the field for graduate students, academics, and practitioners. Highly Recommended.’ – CHOICE Focusing on contemporary challenges, the Routledge Handbook of Security Studies offers a wide-ranging collection of cutting-edge essays from leading scholars in the field of Security Studies, and is now available in paperback. Selected Contents: Part 1: Theoretical Approaches to Security and Different ‘Securities’ Part 2: Contemporary Security Challenges Part 3: Regional Security Challenges Part 4: Confronting Security Challenges June 2011: 246 x 174: 498pp Pb: 978-0-415-66472-1: £28.99 For more information, visit:


hand b o o ks


Routledge Handbook of South Asian Politics India, Pakistan, Bangladesh, Sri Lanka, and Nepal Edited by Paul R. Brass, University of Washington, USA The Routledge Handbook of South Asian Politics examines key issues in politics of the five independent states of the South Asian region: India, Pakistan, Bangladesh, Sri Lanka, and Nepal. Written by experts in their respective areas, it introduces the reader to the politics of South Asia by presenting the prevailing agreements and disagreements in the literature. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Paul R. Brass Part 1: Colonialism, Nationalism, and Independence in South Asia: India, Pakistan, and Sri Lanka 1. India and Pakistan Ian Talbot 2. Sri Lanka’s Independence: Shadows Over a Colonial Graft Nira Wickramasinghe Part 2: Political Change, Political Parties, and the Issue of Unitary vs. Federal Forms of Government 3. Political Change, Political Structure and the Indian State Since Independence John Harriss 4. Parties and Politics in India Virginia Van Dyke 5. Pakistan’s Politics and Its Economy Shahid Javed Burki 6. Party Overinstitutionalization, Contestation and Democratic Degradation in Bangladesh Harry Blair 7. Politics and Governance in Post-Independence Sri Lanka Neil DeVotta 8. Trajectories of Democracy and Restructuring of the State in Nepal Krishna Hachhethu and David N. Gellner Federalism and Centre-State Relations 9. The Old and the New Federalism in Independent India Lloyd I. Rudolph and Susanne Hoeber Rudolph Part 3: The Judiciary 10. India’s Judiciary: Imperium in Imperio? Shylashri Shankar 11. Balancing Act: Prudence, Impunity and Pakistan’s Jurisprudence Paula R. Newberg 12. Confronting Constitutional Curtailments: Attempts to Rebuild Independence of the Judiciary in Bangladesh Sara Hossein and Tanjib-ul Alam 13. Executive Sovereignty: The Judiciary in Sri Lanka Shylashri Shankar Part 4: Pluralism and National Integration: Language Issues 14. Politics of Language in India E. Annamalai 15. Language Problems and Politics in Pakistan Tariq Rahman Part 5: Crises of National Unity 16. Crises of National Unity in India: Punjab, Kashmir and the Northeast Gurharpal Singh 17. Communal and Caste Politics and Conflicts in India Steven I. Wilkinson 18. Ethnic and Islamic Militancy in Pakistan Mohammad Waseem 19. Ethnic Conflict and the Civil War in Sri Lanka Jayadeva Uyangoda Part 6: Political Economy India 20. The Political Economy of Development in India Since Independence Stuart Corbridge 21. The Political Economy of Agrarian Change in India Jan Breman Sri Lanka 22. Economic Development and Socio-Political Change in Sri Lanka since Independence W. D. Lakshman Part 7: Comparative Chapters 23. The Militaries of South Asia Stephen P. Cohen 24. Corruption and the Criminalization of Politics in South Asia Stanley A. Kochanek 25. Radical and Violent Political Movements Sumanta Banerjee 26. The International Politics of South Asia Vernon Hewitt. Bibliography 2010: 246 x 174: 480pp Hb: 978-0-415-43429-4: £125.00 eBook: 978-0-203-87818-7 For more information, visit:


Routledge Handbook of International Law Edited by David Armstrong, University of Exeter, UK This Handbook provides a definitive global survey of the interaction of international politics and international law. Selected Contents: Part 1: The Nature of International Law 1. Is International Law Really Law? 2. The Sources of International Law 3. ‘Hard’ and ‘Soft’ Law in International Relations 4. Compliance Issues 5. International Law and International Society 6. Legal and Moral Norms in International Society 7. The Effectiveness of International Law 8. Theories of International Law 9. The Practice of International Law Part 2: The Evolution of International Law 10. The Classical World 11. The Era of Grotius 12. Nineteenth Century Positivism 13. Normative Change in International Society 14. Religion(s) and International Law 15. The ‘Legalization’ and ‘Institutionalisation’ of International Relations 16. Globalisation and Claims that We are Moving Towards a Cosmopolitan Rather than Inter-State Legal Community 17. The Increasing Role of Non-State Actors Part 3: Law and Power in International Society 18. Does Law Reflect or Constrain Power? 19. Law and Force in the Twenty First Century 20. American Hegemony and International Law (i) Pro 21. American Hegemony and International Law (ii) Anti 22. The Iraq War 23. Humanitarian Intervention Part 4: Key Issues in International Law 24. The Environment 25. Terrorism 26. The Laws of War 27. Human Rights 28. Trade 29. Finance 30. Intellectual Property 31. The United Nations 32. The International Court of Justice 33. Law of the Sea 34. Refugees and Migrants January 2011: 246 x 174: 504pp Pb: 978-0-415-61052-0: £32.99 For more information, visit:

Handbook of Conflict Analysis and Resolution Edited by Dennis J.D. Sandole and Ingrid Sandole-Staroste, both at George Mason University, Washington DC, USA, and Sean Byrne and Jessica Senehi, both at University of Manitoba, Canada This major Handbook is a collection of work from leading scholars in the Conflict Analysis and Resolution (CAR) field. The central theme is the value of interdisciplinary approaches to the analysis and resolution of conflicts. Selected Contents: Part 1: Core Concepts and Theories 1. The Role of Identity in Conflict 2. Encountering Nationalism: The Contribution of Peace Studies and Conflict Resolution 3. Gender Relations and Conflict Transformation Among Refugee Women 4. Causation as a Core Concept in Conflict Analysis 5. The Challenge of Operationalizing Key Concepts in Conflict Resolution Theory in International and Subnational Conflicts 6. The Enemy and the Innocent of Violent Conflicts 7. Identity Conflicts: Models of Dynamics and Early Warning 8. Generativity-Based Conflict: Maturing Micro Foundations for Conflict Theory Part 2: Core Approaches: Conceptual and Methodological 9. Human Agonistes: Interdisciplinary Inquiry into Ontological Agency and Human Conflict 10. The Ethnography of Peace Education: Some Lessons Learned from Palestinian-Jewish Integrated Education in Israel 11. Waging Conflicts Constructively 12. A Social-Psychological Approach to Conflict Analysis and Resolution 13. Building Relational Empathy Through An Interactive Design Process 14. Building Peace: Storytelling to Transform Conflicts Constructively 15. A Capacity Building Approach to Conflict Resolution 16. Gender Mainstreaming: A Valuable Tool in Building Sustainable Peace 17. Culture Theory, Culture Clash, and the Practice of Conflict Resolution 18. Conflict Resolution: The Missing Link between Liberal IR Theory and Realistic Practice 19. Understanding the Development-Conflict Nexus and the Contribution of Development Cooperation to Peacebuilding 20. Evaluation in Conflict Resolution and Peacebuilding 21. Toward A Conflictology: The Quest for Trans-Disciplinarity Part 3: Core Practices: Processes 22. Conflict Transformation: Reasons to be Modest 23. Mediation Frames/Justice Games 24. Interactive Conflict Resolution: Dialogue, Conflict Analysis and Problem Solving 25. Mediation and International Conflict Resolution: Analyzing Structure and Behavior 26. Ethical and Gendered Dilemmas of Moving from Emergency Response to Development in ’Failed’ States 27. Memory-Retrieval and Truth-Recovery 28. Shifting from Coherent Towards Holistic Peace Processes 29. Law and Legal Processes in Resolving International Conflicts Part 4: Alternative Voices and Complex Intervention Designs 30. Restorative Processes of Peace and Healing within the Governing Structures of the Rotinonshonni ’Longhouse People’ 31. Critical Systematic Inquiry in Conflict Analysis and Resolution: An Essential Bridge between Theory and Practice 32. From Diagnosis to Treatment: Towards New Shared Principles for Israeli/ Palestinian Peacebuilding 33. Strategies for the Prevention, Management and/or Resolution of (Ethnic) Crisis and Conflict: The Case of the Balkans 34. The Perception of Economic Assistance in Northern Ireland and Its Role in the Peace Process 35. Conflict Resolution in An Age of Empire: New Challenges to an Emerging Field Conclusions Conclusion: Revisiting the CAR Field. Epilogue: Implications for Theory, Research, Practice and Teaching 2010: 246 x 174: 576pp Pb: 978-0-415-57735-9: £29.99 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

i n te r n ati on al r e l ati o n s

Routledge Handbook of International Political Economy (IPE)

International Relations

IPE as a Global Conversation

The Rise of Post-Liberal Governance

Practical Judgement in International Political Theory

David Chandler, University of Westminster, UK

Selected Essays

Series: Critical Issues in Global Politics

Chris Brown, London School of Economics, UK

Edited by Mark Blyth, Johns Hopkins University, USA

Providing an overview of the range and scope of International Political Economy scholarship, this important work maps the different regional schools of IPE and notes the distinctive way IPE is practiced and conceptualized around the world.

Selected Contents: Introduction: IPE as a Global Conversation Mark Blyth Section 1: North American IPE 1. The Multiple Traditions of American IPE Benjamin J. Cohen 2. Realist Political Economy: Traditional Themes and Contemporary Challenges Jonathan Kirshner 3. Thinking Rationally about Hierarchy and Global Governance Alexander Cooley 4. Constructivism as an Approach to International Political Economy Rawi Abdelal 5. Of Margins, Traditions and Engagements: A Brief Disciplinary History of IPE in Canada Randall Germain Section 2: British IPE 6. Lineages of a British International Political Economy Ben Rosamond and Ben Clift 7. Empiricism and Objectivity: Reflexive Theory Construction in a Complex World Ronen Palan and Angus Cameron 8. PowerKnowledge Estranged: From Susan Strange to Poststructuralism in British IPE Paul Langley 9. Bridging the Transatlantic Divide? Toward a Structurational Approach to International Political Economy Philip G. Cerny Section 3: IPE in Asia 10. Reading Hobbes in Beijing: Great Power Politics and the Challenge of the Peaceful Ascent Giovanni Arrighi 11. States and Markets, States Versus Markets: The Developmental State Debate as the Distinctive East Asian Contribution to International Political Economy Walden Bello 12. The Rise of East-Asia: An Emerging Challenge to the Study of International Political Economy Henry Yeung 13. Neither Asia nor America: IPE in Australia Jason Sharman Section 4: IPE Elswhere - Exemptions, Exclusions, and Extensions 14. Why IPE is UNderdeveloped in Europe: A Case Study of France Nicolas Jabko 15. Why Did the Latin American Critical Tradition in the Social Sciences Become Practically Extinct? Gabriel Palma 16. What Do Sociologists Bring to International Political Economy John Campbell 17. Economic History and the International Political Economy Michael J. Oliver 18. Everyday International Political Economy Leonard Seabrooke and John Hobson

International Statebuilding

This concise and accessible new text offers original and insightful analysis of the policy paradigm informing international statebuilding interventions. The book covers the theoretical frameworks and practices of international statebuilding, the debates they have triggered, and the way that international statebuilding has developed in the post-Cold War era.

Spanning a broad remit of policy practices from post-conflict peacebuilding to sustainable development and EU enlargement, Chandler draws out how these policies have been cohered around the problematization of autonomy or self-government. Rather than promoting democracy on the basis of the universal capacity of people for self-rule, international statebuilding assumes that people lack capacity to make their own judgements safely and therefore that democracy requires external intervention and the building of civil society and state institutional capacity. Chandler argues that this policy framework inverses traditional liberal–democratic understandings of autonomy and freedom – privileging governance over government – and that the dominance of this policy perspective is a cause of concern for those who live in states involved in statebuilding as much as for those who are subject to these new regulatory frameworks. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: The Statebuilding Paradigm 2. The ‘Liberal Peace’ Critique of International Intervention 3. Rethinking the State 4. Post-Liberal Governance 5. The EU’s Export of ‘The Rule of Law’ and ‘Good Governance’ 6. Security and Statebuilding: From Intervention to Prevention 7. Development as Freedom: From Colonialism to Climate Change 8. Race, Culture and Civil Society: Statebuilding and the Privileging of Difference 9. Conclusion

2010: 246 x 174: 392pp Pb: 978-0-415-78141-1: £27.99

2010: 216 x 138: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-42117-1: £80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-42118-8: £23.99 eBook: 978-0-203-84732-9

For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:

’I urge every student of international relations and political thought to read this book. You will find yourself on an amazing journey through the essential currents of contemporary intellectual history. Chris Brown is an incomparable guide. He shows us his subject in all of its magnificent scope. His clarity, discernment and charming wit carry you lightly through even the heaviest of arguments. It is a rare collection of essays that can re-cast an entire genre of literature. This volume does so. Like all great essayists, Chris Brown gives us ideas, characters and stories that delight and instruct.’ – Joel H. Rosenthal, Carnegie Council for Ethics in International Affairs Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: A Life in Theory Part 1: Communitarians and Cosmopolitans 2. The Modern Requirement: Reflections on Normative Theory in a Post-Western World 3. Ethics of Co-Existence: The International Theory of Terry Nardin 4. International Theory and International Society: The Viability of the Middle Way 5. Universal Human Rights: A Critique 6. Towards a Neo-Aristotelian Resolution of the Communitarian Cosmopolitan Debate 7. Cultural Diversity and International Political Theory 8. The Construction of a Realistic Utopia: John Rawls and International Political Theory Part 2: The Discourse of International Relations 9. Not my Department? Normative Theory and International Relations 10. Hegel and International Ethics 11. Turtles All the Way Down: Antifoundationalism, Critical Theory and International Relations 12. Liberalism and the Globalisation of Ethics 13. Tragedy, Tragic Choices and International Political Theory Part 3: The Exercise of Judgement 14. Cosmopolitanism, World Citizenship and Global Civil Society 15. On Morality, Self-Interest and Foreign Policy 16. Selective Humanitarianism: In Defence of Inconsistency 17. Practical Judgement and the Ethics of Pre-Emption 18. Bob Dylan, Live Aid, and the Politics of Popular Cosmopolitanism 2010: 234 x 156: 320pp Hb: 978-0-415-56460-1: £85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-56461-8: £25.99 eBook: 978-0-203-85749-6 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:


i n t ernat ion al relation s


Interventions Series Edited by Jenny Edkins, University of Aberystwyth, UK and Nick Vaughan-Williams, University of Warwick, UK ‘As Michel Foucault has famously stated, “knowledge is not made for understanding; it is made for cutting”. In this spirit The Edkins – Vaughan-Williams Interventions series solicits cutting edge, critical works that challenge mainstream understandings in international relations. It is the best place to contribute post disciplinary works that think rather than merely recognize and affirm the world recycled in IR’s traditional geopolitical imaginary.’ – Michael J. Shapiro, University of Hawai’i at Manoa, USA

Autobiographical International Relations




Beyond Biopolitics

The New Violent Cartography

Theory, Violence, and Horror in World Politics

Geo-Analysis after the Aesthetic Turn

François Debrix, Florida International University, USA and Alexander D. Barder, John Hopkins University, USA

Edited by Michael J. Shapiro, and Samson Okoth Opondo, both at University of Hawaii, USA

Edited by Naeem Inayatullah, Ithaca College, USA

This volume provides a novel approach to international relations. In the course of fifteen essays, scholars write about how life events brought them to their subject matter. They place their narratives in the larger context of world politics, culture, and history.

This book moves the field of International Relations towards greater candidness about how personal narrative influences theoretical articulations. No such volume currently exists in the field of international relations. Selected Contents: Falling and Flying: An Introduction Naeem Inayatullah 1. Accidental Scholarship and the Myth of Objectivity Stephen Chan 2. Objects among Objects Jenny Edkins 3. Stammers between Silence and Speech Narendran Kumarakulasingam 4. Scenes of Obscenity: The Meaning of America under Epistemic and Military Violence Khadija F. El Alaoui 5. I, the Double Soldier: An Autobiographic Case-Study on the Pitfalls of Dual Citizenship Rainer Hülsse 6. Weakness Leaving My Body: An Essay on the Interpersonal Relations of International Politics Jacob L. Stump 7. Waiting for the Revolution: A Foreigner’s Narrative Alina Sajed 8. Am I not that? At the feet of Elders Sara-Maria Sorentino 9. Listening for the Elsewhere and the Not-yet: Academic Labor as a Matter of Ethical Witness Lori Amy 10. To Realize You’re Creolized: White Flight, Black Culture, Hybridity Joel Dinerstein 11. Goodbye Nostalgia! In Memory of a Country that has Never Existed as such Wanda Vrasti 12. Shaping Walls: Moving through Lanka’s Forts Nethra Samarawickrema 13. Three Stories: A Way of Being in the World Patrick Thaddeus Jackson 14. G(r)azing the fields of IR: Romping Buffaloes, Festive Villagers Quýnh Pham & Himadeep Muppidi - The Sound of Conversation Sorayya Khan Epilogue: Cosmography Recapitulates Biography: An Epilogue Peter Mandaville 2010: 234 x 156: 232pp Hb: 978-0-415-78142-8: £80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-78143-5: £25.99 eBook: 978-0-203-83722-1 For more information, visit:

This volume seeks to explore the relationship between violence (its quantity, its varied forms, and its daunting consequences) in the post-9/11-War on Terror era and the contemporary status of critical political theorizing. Selected Contents: Introduction: Beyond Biopolitics 1. Agonal Sovereignty: Rethinking War Politics in an Age of Terror 2. Nothing to Feat but Fear Itself: Governmentality and the Reproduction of Terror 3. The Nomos of Exception and the Virtuality of Geopolitical Space 4. The Horror of Enmity: Rethinking Alterity in the Age of Global War. Conclusion: Facing Horrific Violence September 2011: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-78059-9: £80.00 For more information, visit:


Feminism and the Transformation of International Relations The Challenge of Feminism and its Critical ‘Others’ Marysia Zalewski, University of Aberdeen, UK Examines whether feminism has succeeded in transforming International Relations by assessing what feminist theories offer to study of international politics and exploring feminism’s relationship with the study of International Relations. Selected Contents: 1. Feminists Confront International Relations 2. The Appeal of Masculinity Studies 3. Challenging the Privilege of Whiteness 4. Defying Compulsory Heterosexuality: The Queer Challenge 5. Resisting Women, Rejecting Feminism? The Challenge of Neo-Feminism 6. Transforming International Politics? Transforming Feminism October 2011: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-44921-2: £80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-44922-9: £22.99 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

This edited volume will collect a number of essays which propose and examines different though related critical responses to modern cultures of war among other cultural practices of statecraft. Taken together, these essays present a space of creative engagement with the political and draw on a broad range of cultural contexts and genres of expressions to provoke the thinking that exceeds the conventional stories and practices of international relations. Selected Contents: Introduction: The New Violent Cartography: Geo-analysis After the Aesthetic Turn Sam Okoth Opondo and Michael J. Shapiro Part 1: Violence, Literary and Narrative Cartographies 1. Maps and the Geography of Violence: Farah’s Maps and Conrad’s Heart of Darkness Russell West-Pavlov 2. Chronotopicity in Chimamanda Ngozi Adichie’s Half of a Yellow Sun Christopher Ouma 3. Beyond Imaginary Geographies: Critique, Cooptation and Imagination in the Aftermath of The War On Terror Angharad Closs Stephens Part 2: Warring Bodies and Bodies Politic 4. Mapping the Politics of Trauma: The U.S. Injured-Soldier Body in Annie Proulx’s “Tits-Up in a Ditch” Brianne Gallagher 5 . Eater of Death Shailja Patel 6. Diplomatic Dissensus: A Report on Humanitarianism and the Body in Pain Sam Okoth Opondo 7. Reassembling Memory: Rithy Panh’s S-21: The Khmer Rouge Killing Machine Alvin Cheng-Hin Lim 8. The Triad of Vision and the Grounds of the Violent Photographic Image in Israel’s “Cast Lead” Operation in Gaza Meir Wigoder 9. Violent Masculinities and the Phallocratic Aesthetics of Power in Kenya Grace Musila Part 3: Continuing Violent Cartographies and the Redistribution of the Sensible 10. The North West Frontier of Pakistan: Preoccupation with “Unveiling” the Battlefield and “Violent Cartography” Syed Sami Raza 11. Cyprus, Violent Cartography and the Distribution of Ethnic Identity Costas M. Constantinou 12. Dignity, Memory, Truth and the Future Under Siege: Reconciliation and Nation Building in Post-Apartheid South Africa Bhekizizwe Peterson 13. The International Aesthetic of the Yasukuni Jinja and Yûshûkan Museum Geoffrey Whitehall and Eric Ishiwata 14. Repartitioning the U.S.-Mexico Border: Cinematic Thought, Shock, and Empathy in Orson Welles’s Touch of Evil David Toohey 15. A Continuing Violent Cartography: From Guadalupe Hidalgo to Contemporary Border Crossings Michael J. Shapiro August 2011: 234 x 156: 232pp Hb: 978-0-415-78284-5: £75.00 For more information, visit:

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

i n te r n ati on al r e l ati o n s

Foucault and International Relations

International Relations and Non-Western Thought

New Critical Engagements

Imperialism, Colonialism and Investigations of Global Modernity

Edited by Nicholas J. Kiersey, University of Ohio, USA and Doug Stokes, University of Kent at Canterbury, UK

Edited by Robbie Shilliam, Victoria University of Wellington, New Zealand

2010: 246 x 174: 216pp Hb: 978-0-415-57983-4: £80.00

For more information, visit:

Governing Sustainable Development Partnerships, Protests and Power at the World Summit Carl Death ‘In Governing Sustainable Development, Carl Death deftly explores how mega-summits, a staple of global environmental politics, cannot be dismissed as theatrical grandstanding, because it is precisely in their theatre that they (re)produce powerful political discourses that shape the world’s responses to environmental change. As part of a growing Foucauldian literature on environmental politics, it is indispensable to understanding the role of megasummits in global politics.‘ – Matthew Paterson, University of Ottawa, Canada

2010: 234 x 156: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-57772-4: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84212-6

For more information, visit:


Madness in International Relations Psychology, Security, and the Global Governance of Mental Health Alison Howell, University of Manchester, UK

Madness in International Relations provides an important and innovative account of the role of psychology and psychiatry in global politics, showing how mental health governance has become a means of securing various populations, often with questionable effects.

For more information, visit:

Insuring Security

April 2011: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-57626-0: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-82871-7

Biopolitics, Security and Risk Luis Lobo-Guerrero, University of Keele, UK

Politics and the Art of Commemoration Katherine Hite, Vassar College, USA Memorials are proliferating throughout the globe. States recognize the political value of memorials: memorials can convey national unity, a sense of overcoming violent legacies, a commitment to political stability or the strengthening of democracy. State-sponsored memorials can also seek to silence unsavory dimensions of the past. This book explores relationships among art, representation and politics through memorials to violent pasts. Drawing on curators, art historians, psychologists, political theorists, holocaust studies scholars, and others, the book uses memorials as conceptual lenses into deep politics of conflict and as suggestive arenas for imagining democratic practice.

Selected Contents: 1. Madness in IR: An Introduction 2. Security, Order, Control: From Anti-Politics to Ethico Politics 3. Approaching Madness: The Psy Disciplines in Critical Perspective 4. Victims or Madmen? The Diagnostic Competition over ‘Terrorist’ Detainees at Guantánamo Bay 5. The Diagnostic Competition over Post-Conflict Populations: Merging the Psychosocial and Mental Health Models 6. Ordering Soldiers: Contesting Therapeutic Practices in the Canadian Military 7. Conclusion: The Global Politics of Governing Mental Health

2010: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-56926-2: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84741-1


For more information, visit:

2010: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-58343-5: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84589-9

For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:

Selected Contents: 1. Memorializing Spain’s Narrative of Empire 2. Passing Back Through the Heart in Post(?)-Conflict Peru 3.Breaking the Silence in Chile 4. Artists Making Memory in Argentina December 2011: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-78071-1: £80.00 For more information, visit:


Politics of the Event Time, Movement, Becoming Tom Lundborg, Dalarna University, Sweden

Despite occupying a central role and frequently being used in the study of international politics, the concept of the ’event’ remains in many ways unchallenged and unexplored. By combining the philosophy of Gilles Deleuze and his concept of the event with the example of ’9/11’ this book problematises the role and meaning of ’events’ in international politics.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: From ’Events’ to Events, and Back Again Part 1: Critical Encounters with the Event 2. The Singularity of Events: Encountering the Reality of Becoming 3. The Actualization of Events: Encountering the Illusion of Being 4. The Production of the ’Event’: Encountering ’9/11’ and the ’War on Terror’ Part 2: The Politics and Ethics of the Event 5. Politics of the Virtual 6. Another Encounter with the Event 7. Conclusion December 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-57934-6: £80.00 For more information, visit:


i n t ernat ion al relation s





Politics of Urbanism

Spatiality, Sovereignty and Carl Schmitt

The Politics of Speed

Seeing Like a City Warren Magnusson, University of Victoria, Canada

Geographies of the Nomos

In this book, Magnusson draws from theorists such as Weber, Wirth, Hayek, Jacobs, Sennett, and Foucault to articulate some of the ideas that we need to make sense of the city as a form of political order.

Edited by Stephen Legg

Locally and globally, the city exists by virtue of complicated patterns of government and selfgovernment, prompted by proximate diversity. A multiplicity of authorities in different registers is typical. Sovereignty, although often claimed, is infinitely deferred. What emerges by virtue of self-organization is not susceptible to control by any central authority, and so we are impelled to engage politically in a world that does not match our expectations of sovereignty. How then are we are to engage realistically and creatively? We have to begin from where we are if we are to understand the possibilities. Building on traditions of political and urban theory this volume advances a new interpretation of the role of cities/urbanism in contemporary political life. Selected Contents: Introduction: Re-Imagining the Political 1. Urbanism as Governmentality 2. Ontologies of the Political 3. The Politics of Urbanism as a Way of Life 4. The Art of Government 5. Seeing Like a State, Seeing Like a City 6. Oikos, Nomos, Logos 7. The Politics of Scale 8. The Principle of Local Self-Government. Conclusion: Otherwise than Sovereign July 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-78241-8: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-80889-4 For more information, visit:


War, Identity and the Liberal State Everyday Experiences of the Geopolitical in the Armed Forces Victoria Basham, University of Bristol, UK This book examines how the geopolitics of identity, war and liberalism are experienced and negotiated in the everyday lives of members of the armed forces, and how these experiences in turn, reinforce and sustain dominant and intersecting discourses of conflict, governance, gender, ethnicity and sexuality. The book draws on original and unique research with military personnel to take an intimate look at how soldiers negotiate, challenge, reinforce and resist the liberal state and its war machinery in their daily lives.

The aim of this book is to bring together geographers, and Schmitt experts who are attuned to the spatial dimensions of his work, to discuss The Nomos of the Earth in the International Law of the Jus Publicum Europaeum (Schmitt, 1950 [2003]).

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Geographies of the Nomos Stephen Legg and Alex Vasudevan Part 1: Positions and Concepts: Schmitt Translations 2. Forms of Modern Imperialism in International Law Carl Schmitt 1933 (translation by Matthew Hannah) 3. Großraum versus Universalism: The International Legal Struggle over the Monroe Doctrine Carl Schmitt 1939 (translation by Matthew Hannah) Part 2: Historical Geographies of the Nomos 4. Appropriating, Distributing, and Producing Space after 9/11: The Newest Nomos of the Earth? Timothy Luke 5. Echoes of Schmitt among the Ideologists of the new American Empire Gerry Kearns 6. Reading Schmitt Geopolitically: Nomos, Territory and Großraum Stuart Elden 17. “Inter-War Spatial Chaos”? Imperialism, Internationalism and the League of Nations Stephen Legg Part 3: Analytical Geographies of the Nomos 8. Colonial War: Carl Schmitt’s Deterritorialization of Enmity Mathew Coleman 9. A New Nomos of Post-Nomos? Multipolarity, Space, and Constituent Power Rory Rowan 10. Carl Schmitt and the Question of Spatial Ontology Claudio Minca 11. Between Nomos and Everyday Life: Securing the Spatial Order of Foucault and Schmitt Peter Rogers Part 4: Responses to the Nomos 12. Remembering Nazi Intellectuals David Atkinson 13. Partisan Space Daniel Clayton 14. The Virtual Nomos? Francois Debrix 15. Pastoral Power Matthew Hannah 16. Mapping Schmitt Michael Heffernan 17. Air Power Nasser Hussain 18. Postcolonialism Julia Lossau 19. Land and Sea Eduardo Mendieta 20. Free Sea Philip E Steinberg 21. No Peace Beyond the Line Peter Stirk 22. The Border Nick Vaughan-Williams 23. Ordnung und Ortung/Order and Localisation Thalin Zarmanian

Capitalism, the State and War in an Accelerating World Simon Glezos, University of Regina, Canada Everyone agrees that the world is accelerating. With advances in communication, transportation and information processing technologies, it is clear that the pace of events in global politics is speeding up at an alarming rate. The implications of this new speed however, continue to be a significant source of debate. Will acceleration lead to a more interconnected, productive, peaceful, and humane world; or a nightmarish descent into ecological devastation, economic exploitation and increasingly violent warfare? The Politics of Speed attempts to map the contours of the new global space of speed, and investigates key issue areas – including democratic governance, warfare, capitalism, globalization and transnational activism – to uncover the ways in which acceleration is shaping the world. The book uses contemporary political theory (especially the works of Deleuze and Guattari) to develop an ontological account of speed, showing how its effects are frequently far more complex and surprising than we might expect. The result is an attempt to craft a way of engaging with global acceleration that might help avoid the dangers of speed, while embracing the possibilities it provides us with to produce a safer, more egalitarian, democratic and pluralistic world. Selected Contents: Introduction: Fear of a Fast Planet 1. The Ticking Bomb: Speed, Democracy and the Politics of the Future 2. The Quick and the Dead: State and Nomad War Machines 3. The Acceleration of Inertia: Towards a Political Economy of Speed 4. Regimes of (Im)mobility: Towards an International Political Economy of Speed 5. ‘A World in Which Many Worlds Fit: On Rhizomatic Cosmopolitanism. Conclusion: ’We Have Never Been Territorial’: Fear and Hope in an Accelerating World September 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-78261-6: £80.00 For more information, visit:

May 2011: 234 x 156: 320pp Hb: 978-0-415-60067-5: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81582-3 For more information, visit:

Selected Contents: 1. The Geopolitics of the Everyday in the Military 2. Towards a ‘History of the Present’ 3. Intimacies of War and Gender 4. Forbidden Intimacies: Heteronormativity and Military ‘Values’ 5. Imperial Encounters and the Structural Privileging of Whiteness 6. The March of Progress? December 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-58341-1: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

i n te r n ati on al r e l ati o n s

The Time of the City

War and Rape

Politics, Philosophy and Genre

Law, Memory and Justice

Michael J. Shapiro, University of Hawaii, USA

Nicola Henry, La Trobe University, Australia

‘There are few political thinkers writing today who can bear the burden of breadth that an aesthetically sensitive mode of political theorizing demands. Michael Shapiro is exemplary amongst them. In The Time of the City, Shapiro’s bold bricolages take center stage by re-energizing our lethargic political methodologies and infusing them with a perspicuous attention to the aesthetic modes of association and dissociation in democratic life. This is not simply a work that anyone interested in film, urban politics, race studies, and cultural and democratic theory must read; it is a book they will want to read over and over again.‘ – Davide Panagia, Trent University, Canada Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Geophilosophy, Aesthetics, and the City 2. The Now Time(s) of the Global City: Displacing Hegel’s Geopolitical Narrative 3. Managing Urban Security: City Walls and Policing Metis 4. Neo-Noir and Urban Domesticity: The Wachowski Brothers’ Bound 5. Gothic Philadelphia: Divided Subjects and Fractionated Assemblages 6. Bodies and the City: Washington DC 7. Walt Whitman and the Ethnopoetics of New York 8. Inter-City Cinema: Hong Kong at the Berlinale

In this book, Henry asks some critical questions about the relationship between mass rape, politics and law. In what ways does law contribute to the collective memory of wartime rape? How do ‘counter-memories’ of victims compete with the denialism of wartime rape?

Providing a comprehensive overview of the politics of wartime rape and the politics of prosecuting such crimes within international humanitarian law, this text will be of great interest to scholars of gender and security, war crimes and law and society. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: How the Past is Made to Matter 2. Traces of Truth: Collective Memory and the Law 3. A History of Silence: The Nuremberg and Tokyo Trials 4. Casualties of Law: Wartime Rape and War Crimes Courts 5. Trials and Trauma: The Impossibility of Bearing Witness 6. Wartime Rape and the Legacy of Law 2010: 234 x 156: 184pp Hb: 978-0-415-56472-4: £80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-56473-1: £25.99 eBook: 978-0-203-83619-4 For more information, visit:

2010: 234 x 156: 232pp Hb: 978-0-415-78052-0: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-78053-7: £26.99 eBook: 978-0-203-85261-3 For more information, visit:

New International Relations Series Edited by Richard Little, University of Bristol, UK, Iver B. Neumann, NUPI Norwegian Institute of International Affairs, Norway and Jutta Weldes, University of Bristol, UK The field of international relations has changed dramatically in recent years. This series covers the major issues that have emerged and reflects the latest academic thinking in the area. Forthcoming

Alker and IR Global Studies in an Interconnected World Edited by Renée Marlin-Bennett Examines Hayward Alker’s contribution to the study of global IR and Politics. Selected Contents: Introduction Thomas Biersteker Part 1: Ethically Grounded Ontological and Epistemological Approaches to Global Studies 1. Ecce Hayward Alker’s Homo Politicus as Homo Humanitatis Neta C. Crawford 2. On the Nature of Empirical Evidence Renée Marlin-Bennett 3. Fairy Tale of Science: Playing with Hayward Alker L.H.M. Ling 4. Arguing Gender and International Relations Laura Sjoberg Part 2: Dialectic Interactions Among Orders, Real and Imagined 5. Two Dilemmas of Democracy in the 21st Century (’Democracy’ across orders) Ijaz Shafi Gilani 6. World Orders in Central Asia Tahir Amin 7. Modernity and Its Many Ages (Orders across time) Nicholas Onuf 8. Dialectics of Civilizations: A Cosmic Perspective Heikki Patomäki Part 3: Taking Language Seriously: An Ethically Grounded Approach to Global Studies 9. Human Nature and World Politics: Pragmatic Analysis Gavan Duffy 10. Two Cheers for Cognitive Science: Alker, Metaphor, and IR Eric M. Blanchard 11. ’Hi-Tech Hermeneutics’: Combining Rigor and Alternative Epistemologies of Social Science David Sylvan. Afterword J. Ann Tickner October 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-61597-6: £80.00 For more information, visit:

FREE P&P Online! Simple and secure online ordering, please visit and receive FREE postage & packaging* for online orders over £20. *UK customers only

Arguing Global Governance Agency, Lifeworld and Shared Reasoning Edited by Corneliu Bjola, University of Toronto, Canada and Markus Kornprobst, Diplomatic Academy of Vienna, Austria

‘This is a major constructivist contribution to our understanding of the social mechanisms by which global governance mechanisms are constructed.’ – Rodney Bruce Hall, University of Oxford, UK 2010: 234 x 156: 320pp Hb: 978-0-415-57217-0: £95.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84257-7

For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:


i n t ernat ion al relation s





China in the UN Security Council Decision-making on Iraq

NATO’s Security Discourse After the Cold War

The International Political Theory of Pierre-Joseph Proudhon

Conflicting Understandings, Competing Preferences 1990-2002

Representing the West

A World Without Sovereigns

Andreas Behnke, University of Reading, UK

Alex Prichard, University of Bristol, UK

Suzanne Xiao Yang, Balliol College, University of Oxford, UK

This book provides a critical investigation into the discursive processes through which the North Atlantic Treaty Organisation (NATO) reproduced a geopolitical order after the end of the Cold War.

An original interpretation of the influence of Pierre-Joseph Proudhon on political systems and international relations.

Examining China’s changing role in the UN security council, in the context of policy decisions and the Iraq intervention. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Part 1: The Strategic Preferences Framework 2. The reasons for Action: Strategic Preferences in Explaining Foreign Policy 3. China’s Strategic Preferences in the UN Security Council, 1971-the mid 1980s Part 2: The Case Studies 4. China’s Decisions in the Security Council over the Use of Force (1990-2002) 5. State Sovereignty vs. Humanitarian Intervention: China’s Position over the Establishment of “No-Fly Zones” (1991-1992) 6. China and the UN Sanctions Regime against Iraq (1991-2002) 7. Weapons Inspections: China, the UN and the Disarming of Iraq (1991-2002) Part 3: The Implications 8. Conclusions September 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-61769-7: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Constructing Global Enemies Hegemony and Identity in International Discourses on Terrorism and Drug Prohibition

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. On Methodology: From Space to Spatialisation 3. Space and Identity in IR Theory 4. Reading/Writing NATO 5. Mapping the Post-Cold War Order: From the London Declaration to the Strategic Concept 6. The ‘Home-Coming’: NATO and the Central and Eastern European States 7. From ‘Pangolin’ to ‘Partner’: The Construction of Russia in NATO’s Discourse 8. ’Arc of Tension and Crisis’: The South and the Mediterranean 9. ‘Out of Area or Out of Business’ – Bosnia and the Deconstruction of NATO 10. NATO Unlimited – The Washington Summit 1999 11. Conclusion. Bibliography September 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-58453-1: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Social Power in International Politics Peter van Ham, Clingendael Institute, the Netherlands

’Refreshing and original, Peter van Ham tackles a notoriously elusive concept, social power, with admirable clarity, nuance, and insight.’ – Charles A. Kupchan, Georgetown University and Council on Foreign Relations, Washington DC, USA

Eva Herschinger, Universitaet der Bundeswehr Munich, Germany Examines efforts to counteract terrorism at the international level and drug prohibition policies Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. On Hegemony and Identity in International Security Discourses 3. Opening the ‘Black Box’: The Construction of International Hegemonies 4. International Drug Prohibition: Constructing the ‘Drug-Free World’ 5. Writing the ‘War on Terror’: The Struggle of Hegemonic Projects 6. Comparing the ‘War on Drugs’ and the ‘War on Terror’ 7. Conclusion. Appendix 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-59685-5: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83638-5 For more information, visit:

Selected Contents: 1. Social Power Defined 2. Geopolitics and Hegemony 3. Culture and Constructivism 4. Institutions and Law 5. Media and Globalization 6. Public Diplomacy 7. Place Branding 8. Conclusion. Endnotes. Bibliography. Index 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-56421-2: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-56422-9: £25.99 eBook: 978-0-203-85784-7

International Relations and Identity

For more information, visit:

A Dialogical Approach


Xavier Guillaume, University of Geneva, Switzerland

Sovereignty Between Politics and Law

2010: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-56406-9: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84526-4

Tanja Aalberts, Leiden University, the Netherlands This book investigates the continuity and change of sovereignty as a key concept to the disciplines of International Relations (IR) and International Public Law, and international politics as a practice. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Narratives of Sovereignty 3. Sovereignty as Institution 4. Sovereignty as Identity 5. Sovereignty as (Language) Game 6. Sovereignty as Discipline 7. Conclusion

For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

Selected Contents: Introduction Historiography and IR Theory 1. Beyond Anarchy, Towards Anarchism Part 1: Context 2. Nationalism, Federalism and ‘L’équilibre Européene’ 3. Étatisme: The Socio-Political Origins of Anarchism 4. War, the State and Providence in the Thought of Rousseau, Kant and Comte Part 2: Exegesis 5. Individual and Social Justice 6. War and Political Order 7. Anarchism, Mutualism and Federalism. Conclusion: A World Without Sovereigns June 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-59688-6: £75.00 For more information, visit:

The Puzzles of Politics Inquiries into the Genesis and Transformation of International Relations Friedrich Kratochwil, EUI, Italy

‘A collection of Fritz Kratochwil’s essays is self-recommending - his standing as one of the most interesting and challenging of contemporary scholars of International Political Theory is incontestable. The particular merit of this collection is that it contains a number of less well-known and difficult to find pieces as well as some of his most famous contributions to the field. This is a book that deserves a very wide audience.‘ – Chris Brown, London School of Economics, UK Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: An Intellectual Biography Part 1: Defining the Approach 2. The Human Conception of International Relations 3. On the Notion in International Relations 4. Sovereignty, Property and Propriety: The Generative of Modernity Part 2: Writings on International Law 5. Thrasymmachos Revisited: On the Relevance of Norms and the Study of Law 6. The Limits of Contract 7. Has the Rule of Law become a Rule of Lawyers? Part 3: Writings on Epistemology 8. Constructing a New Orthodoxy? Wendt’s Social Theory of International Politics 9. History, Action and Identity: Revisiting the Great Debate and Assessing its Importance for Social Theory 10. Then Points to Ponder about Pragmatism: Some Critical Reflections on Knowledge Generation in the Social Sciences Part 4: Drawing Boundaries: the Inter/External and the Private/Public Nexus 11. Of Systems and Boundaries: An Inquiry into the Formation of the State System 12. The Politics of Place and Origin: An Enquiry into the Chasing Boundaries of Representation and Legitimacy 13. Global Governance and the Emergence of World Society 2010: 234 x 156: 304pp Hb: 978-0-415-58101-1: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-58102-8: £26.99 eBook: 978-0-203-84511-0 For more information, visit:

September 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-59676-3: £80.00 For more information, visit:

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

i n te r n ati on al r e l ati o n s

Routledge Advances in International Relations and Global Politics This series publishes the best new work in the field of international relations, and of politics more generally, challenging existing empirical and normative theories, and advancing new paradigms and significant new research. Forthcoming

Contemporary Anglo-American Relations A ‘Special Relationship’? Edited by Steve Marsh, Cardiff University, UK and Alan P. Dobson, University of Dundee, UK This book provides an examination of contemporary Anglo-American relations. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Nuclear Relationship John Simpson 2. Defence Relationship Steve Marsh 3. Intelligence Relationship Adam Svendsen 4. Economic Relationship Joe McKinney 5. Personal Diplomacy: Relations between Prime Ministers and Presidents John Dumbrell 6. Anglo-American Strategic Culture David Haglund 7. The Print Media and the Special Relationship Lorenzo Dus 8. Anglo-American Planning and the Environment Tony Jackson 9. Cultural Connections Robert Hendershot 10. Conclusion. Bibliography December 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-67850-6: £80.00 For more information, visit:


Corporate Risk and National Security Redefined Karen Lund Petersen, University of Copenhagen, Denmark Situated within the debate on terrorism risk and security, this book investigates the role of private companies in counter-terrorism policies. With case studies on airports, airlines, ports and food production companies it challenges the modern understandings of national security and corporate risk. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Risk Studies: Defining a Place for Politics? 3. Studying Concepts of Risk and Security 4. Counterterrorism in Denmark: A Welfare State Approach to Private Security? 5. Counterterrorism in the United States: A Liberal Approach to Counterterrorism? 6. Conclusions: Political and Private Responsibility and Authority Redefined July 2011: 234 x 156: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-57999-5: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81596-0 For more information, visit:

Defining and Defying Organised Crime Discourse, Perceptions and Reality Edited by Felia Allum and Panos A. Kostakos, both at University of Bath, UK, and Francesca Longo and Daniela Irrera, both at Università degli Studi di Catania, Italy 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-54852-6: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86034-2 For more information, visit:


Issue Salience in International Politics Edited by Kai Oppermann and Henrike Viehrig, both at University of Cologne, Germany This book analyses the salience of foreign and security policy issues to domestic actors, its role in the analysis of international politics and its consequences for foreign policy decision-making. It features studies on Western Europe and North America and addresses European Integration, Foreign and Security Policy and Transatlantic Relations.

Interrogating Democracy in World Politics

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Analyzing Issue Salience in International Politics: Theoretical Foundations and Methodological Approaches Kai Oppermann and Catherine E. de Vries Public Opinion 2. Two Indicators, One Conclusion: On the Public Salience of Foreign Affairs in Germany Before and After Reunification Harald Schoen 3. Familiarity Breeds Consent: Issue Salience and Support for the Use of Military Force Philip Everts 4. Issue Salience, Political Affiliation and the Use of Force: Germany in Comparative Perspective Jörg Jacobs 5. Salience as Priming: A Latent Class Regression Approach to EU Issue Voting in England Marco R. Steenbergen 6. How Does a Threat Become Salient? The Case of Swine Flu in Sweden Roxanna Sjöstedt Intermediary Actors: The Media and Political Parties 7. Integrating Salience and Interpretation: A Constructivist Approach to Media Framing in the Post-Cold War Era Josef Seethaler and Gabriele Melischek 8. The Salience of Frames and their Effects on the Support for CFSP and Supranational Policy Allocation Claes H. de Vreese and Thomas Klausch 9. EU Media Salience, Instrumental Thinking and Identification with the EU Florian Stöckel 10. Experts Mistaken? The Salience of European Integration in Austrian National Election Campaigns in 2006 and 2008 Sarah Meyer 11. EU Issue Salience and Domestic Party Competition Catherine E. de Vries and Marc van de Wardt Political Elites 12. The Cognitive Dimension of Parliamentary Influence: Trends in the Salience of Foreign Affairs Issues in the German Bundestag, 2005–10 Thomas Jäger, Kai Oppermann, Alexander Höse and Henrike Viehrig 13. Salient Issues in German Foreign Policy: Results from a 2009 Elite Survey Henning Riecke 14. The Salience of European Affairs in the United States Congress Alexander Höse 15. An Actor-Based Measure of Issue Salience: Information Acquisition and the Case of the United States Supreme Court Ryan C. Black, Amanda C. Bryan and Timothy R. Johnson Conclusion 16. Analyzing Issue Salience in International Politics: Preliminary Findings and Open Questions Henrike Viehrig and Kai Oppermann

Edited by Joe Hoover, Meera Sabaratnam and Laust Schouenborg, all at London School of Economics, UK, and Editors, Millennium Journal

May 2011: 234 x 156: 320pp Hb: 978-0-415-58651-1: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81695-0

Questions the history, meaning and concepts of democracy in contemporary international and global politics.

For more information, visit:

Human Security, Law and the Prevention of Terrorism Andrej Zwitter, University of Groningen, the Netherlands 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-58201-8: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83979-9 For more information, visit:

International Relations Theory and Philosophy Interpretive Dialogues Edited by Cerwyn Moore, University of Birmingham, UK and Chris Farrands, Nottingham Trent University, UK 2010: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-46226-6: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86590-3 For more information, visit:


Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Interrogating Democracy in World Politcs Part 1: Historical Interrogations 2. Democracy in America and Democracy in the World Today 3. Democracy in International Society: Promotion or Exclusion? 4. Power to the People: Nationally-embedded Development and Mass Armies in the Making of Democracy 5. Escaping the Liberal Straitjacket: Re-examining Democracy’s History 6. The Active Making of Two Foundationally Unequal Subjects: Liberal Democracy’s Achilles Heel? Part 2: Conceptual Interrogations 7. Restructuring Global Governance: Cosmopolitanism, Democracy and the Global Order 8. Democracy in a Multipolar World 9. Critiquing Global Democracy 10. Mobilising (Global) Democracy: A Political Reading of Mobility between Universal Rights and the Mob 11. Pragmatic Cosmopolitanism and the Role of Leadership in Transnational Democracy 12. Conclusion May 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-59531-5: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81594-6 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:

Federalism in Asia India, Pakistan and Malaysia Harihar Bhattacharyya, University of Burdwan, India 2010: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-31540-1: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-56337-3 For more information, visit:


i n t ernat ion al relation s





Multilayered Migration Governance

Role Theory in International Relations

The Political Economy of the Conflict Trade

The Promise of Partnership

Edited by Sebastian Harnisch, Ruprecht-KarlsUniversity of Heidelberg, Germany, and Cornelia Frank and Hanns W. Maull, both at University of Trier, Germany

Contextualising Illicit Miners and Informal Traders

Edited by Rahel Kunz and Sandra Lavenex, both at University of Lucerne, Switzerland and Marion Panizzon, University of Bern, Switzerland and World Trade Institute Examines the use of migration partnerships as a new tool in the political management of migration flows. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Governance through Partnerships in International Migration Rahel Kunz, Sandra Lavenex and Marion Panizzon Part 1: Global Perspectives 2. The Global Governance of Migration and the Role of Trans-Regionalism Alexander Betts 3. Coherence and the Regime Complex for International Economic Migration Joel P. Trachtman 4. What Government Networks do in the Field of Migration: An Analysis of Selected Regional Consultative Processes Jobst Köhler Part 2: EU Partnerships 5. Mobility Partnerships: ‘Insecurity partnerships’ for Policy Coherence and Migrant Workers’ Human Rights in the EU Sergio Carrera and Raül Hernández i Sagrera 6. ‘Partnering’ for Migration in EU External Relations Rachel Nellen-Stucky and Sandra Lavenex 7. Facilitating the Temporary Movement of Natural Persons: Economic Partnership Agreements Versus Bilateral Migration Agreements & Mobility Partnerships Natasha Ward 8.The Current Role of the International Organization for Migration in Developing and Implementing Migration and Mobility Partnerships Claire Potaux Part 3: Bilateral Partnerships 9. Franco–African Pacts on Migration: Bilateralism Revisited in Multilayered Migration Governance Marion Panizzon 10. Swiss Migration Partnerships: A Paradigm Shift Odile Rittener, Rosa Maria Losada, Laurent Perriard and Stefano Toscano 11. New Trends in Managing Migration in Canada: Towards a Mobility Paradigm? Hélène Pellerin 12. Depoliticization through Partnership in the Field of Migration: The Mexico–US Case Rahel Kunz March 2011: 234 x 156: 344pp Hb: 978-0-415-59532-2: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-82783-3 For more information, visit:

The ’War on Terror’ and the Growth of Executive Power? A Comparative Analysis Edited by John E. Owens, University of Westminster, UK and Riccardo Pelizzo, Griffith University, Australia

‘In a timely and original book, the authors merge together two traditionally separate literatures to assess in a number of important cases the impact of extraordinary critical events, such as terrorist attacks, on the domestic relationships between the executive and legislature. The reaction of democratic institutions is brilliantly singled out and shows, contra Carl Schmitt, that critical events do not always lead to an erosion of democratic quality.’ – Leonardo Morlino, Instituto Italiano di Scienze Umane, Florence, Italy, and President of the International Political Science Association 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-48933-1: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84966-8

Role Theory in International Relations provides a comprehensive, up-to-date survey of recent theoretical scholarship on foreign policy roles and extensive empirical analysis of role behaviour of a variety of states in the current era of eroding American hegemony. Selected Contents: Section 1: Role Theory in IR and Social Theory 1. Introduction and Defining of Key Terms of Analysis Sebastian Harnisch 2. Role Theory Research in IR: State of the Art and Blind Spots Marijke Breuning 3. George Herbert Mead, the Pragmatist Tradition and Role Theory Sebastian Harnisch 4. Habermas meets Role Theory: Communicative Action as Role Playing Harald Müller 5. Identity and Role Change in International Politics Dirk Nabers Section 2: Comparative Foreign Policy Analysis: Combining Role Theory with Complementary Approaches 6. Role Transformation of NATO and its New Members: Socialization as a Two Way Street? Trine Flockhart 7. Reconsidering the EU’s Role in International Relations: Do Role Performances Fit to Role Conceptions? Ole Elgström and Rikard Bengtsson 8. Civilian Power meets Transforming Euroatlanticist: Comparing Germany’s and Poland’s European Security and Defence Policies Cornelia Frank 9. Does Membership in EU and NATO Matter? Convergence of Sweden’s and Norway’s Role Concepts by Interaction with International Institutions Rachel Folz Section 3: On Hegemony and Hierarchy in IR: Foreign Policy Roles in the United States and Allied Countries 10. Agency and Role Change: The Obama Factor in the Reconstitution of US Hegemony Hanns W. Maull 11. Terrorized America? September 11 and its Impact on US Foreign Policy Raimund Wolf 12. With or Without Consensus? US hegemony and France as a Reluctant Ally Ulrich Krotz and James Sperling 13. With or Without Consensus? US Hegemony and China’s Role as a Rival but Responsible Power Jörn-Carsten Gottwald Section 4: Conclusions 14. Hegemony and Consent: The Current State of Role Theory and the International Social Order Sebastian Harnisch, Cornelia Frank and Hanns W. Maull March 2011: 234 x 156: 304pp Hb: 978-0-415-61484-9: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81875-6 For more information, visit:

The EU-Russia Strategic Partnership The Limits of Post-Sovereignty in International Relations Hiski Haukkala, Ministry for Foreign Affairs of Finland 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-55901-0: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85644-4 For more information, visit:

Morten Boas, FAFO, Norway This book focuses on the political economy of life and death for ordinary people involved in the illicit extraction and trade of diamonds, coltan, gold from conflict zones in Sub-Saharan Africa and addresses the issues of children and youth in conflict zones; child labour; the networks and economies that these people are part of; and the choices they feel compelled to make based on the agency available to them. Selected Contents: Part 1: Introduction: People, Places and Issues Part 2: The Diamond Trade and Sites in Liberia and Sierra Leone Part 3: The History of Gold and Coltan-Mining in Eastern Congo Part 4: 20 Years of War and Northern Uganda’s Camps for the Internally Displaced Part 5: Conclusion September 2011: 216 x 138: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-58084-7: £75.00 For more information, visit:

The World Bank and HIV/AIDS Setting a Global Agenda Sophie Harman, City University London, UK 2010: 234 x 156: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-56290-4: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84991-0 For more information, visit:

The Contested Politics of Mobility Borderzones and Irregularity Edited by Vicki Squire, Open University, UK

‘This impressive collection traces salient public anxieties about migrant invasions and the elaborate technologies applied to monitor foreign bodies at borders across Europe and North America. … Irregular migration is ironically becoming the norm, and the authors of this collection theorize this phenomenon in new ways that relate to ontology, govermentality, and exception. Managing disparate streams of visitors – those invited and those not – requires a constantly evolving set of tools and techniques. Theoretically savvy, and politically innovative, this book brings together a stellar lineup of thinkers whose collective work on migration, borders, and responses to state policies is unparalleled.‘ – Jennifer Hyndman, York University, Canada 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-58461-6: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83982-9 For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

i n te r n ati on al r e l ati o n s


Politicising Ethics in International Relations Cosmopolitanism as Hospitality Gideon Baker, Griffith University, Australia Series: Routledge Research in International Relations Theory ‘From Odysseus to Derrida, from the polis to the cosmopolis, Gideon Baker offers a genuinely stimulating genealogy of hospitality. Equally adept at engaging with contemporary moral and political philosophy as he is at extracting insights from literature, mythology, and the history of political thought, Baker presents the most comprehensive and important treatment yet in International Relations of hospitality’s ethical and political stakes ... [A]n engaging, erudite, and thought-provoking study of the enduring dilemmas that flow from encounters with strangers.’ – Richard Devetak, University of Queensland, Australia Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Towards a Genealogy of Hospitality 3. Spectres of Hospitality 4. Hospitality in the Law of Nature and Nations 5. Kantian Hospitality 6. Hospitality in Emmanuel Levinas’ Totality and Infinity 7. Cosmopolitanism as Hospitality 8. Conclusion: The Politics of Hospitality versus the Biopolitics of Security March 2011: 234 x 156: 152pp Hb: 978-0-415-56177-8: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-82903-5 For more information, visit:

Security and Governance Series Edited by Fiona B. Adamson, School Of Oriental and African Studies, UK, Roland Paris, University of Ottawa, Canada and Stefan Wolff, University of Birmingham, UK This series publishes high quality original research that reflects broadening conceptions of security and the growing nexus between the study of governance issues and security issues. Scholarship published in the series will meet the highest academic standards, and will be both theoretically innovative and policy-relevant. Work appearing in the series will be at the cutting edge of debates taking place at the intersection of security studies and governance studies. International Editorial Board: Mohammed Ayoob, Michigan State University, USA, Richard Caplan, University of Oxford, UK, Neta Crawford, Boston University, USA, Stuart Croft, University of Warwick, UK, Donatella della Porta, European University Institute, Michael Doyle, Columbia University, USA, Lynn Eden, Stanford University, USA, Takashi Inoguchi, Chuo University and University of Tokyo, Japan, Elizabeth Kier, University of Washington, USA, Keith Krause, Graduate Institute of International Studies, Switzerland, Bruce Russett, Yale University, USA, Timothy Sisk, University of Denver, USA, Janice Gross Stein, University of Toronto, Canada, Stephen Stedman, Stanford University, USA and Mark Zacher, University of British Columbia, Canada

Emerging Transnational (In) Security Governance


A Statist-Transnationalist Approach

Bruce Russett, Yale University, USA

Edited by Ersel Aydinli, Bilkent University, Turkey


Social Justice, Global Dynamics Theoretical and Empirical Perspectives Edited by Ayelet Banai, Goethe University Frankfurt am Main, Gemany, and Miriam Ronzoni and Christian Schemmel, both at European University Institute, Italy Series: Routledge Research in International Relations Theory Addresses fundamental problems in international justice by identifying, problematic practices and trends in the global order and offering normative views on policies and institutions including international health policies, the World Bank, taxation policies and the World Trade Organization. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Ayelet Banai, Miriam Ronzoni and Christian Schemmel Part 1: Theoretical Approaches 2. Global Distributive Justice and the State Simon Caney 3. Global Justice and the Morality of Coercion, Imposition, and Framing Andrea Sangiovanni 4. Global and Social Justice: The Possibility of Social Justice beyond States in a World of Overlapping Practices Ayelet Banai, Miriam Ronzoni and Christian Schemmel 5. Resisting ‘Global Justice’: Disrupting the Colonial Emancipatory Logic of the West Andrew Robinson and Simon Tormey Part 2: Economic Policies 6. Growth is Good! – But what Growth? Thomas Pogge 7. Tax Competition and its Effects on Domestic and Global Justice Peter Dietsch Part 3: Health 8. Compatriot Priority, Health in Developing Countries, and our Global Responsibilities Gillian Brock 9. International Health Inequalities and Global Justice Norman Daniels Part 4: The Role of Institutions: Inter-, Supra-, and Transnational 10. European and Global Inequality Glyn Morgan 11. Lifting the Resource Curse? The World Bank and Oil Revenue Distribution in Chad Mark Mattner 12. The World Trade Organisation as a Subject of Socioeconomic Justice Clara Brandi 13. Social Justice beyond Bounded Societies: Unravelling Statism within Global Supply Chains? Kate Macdonald

‘Emerging Transnational (In) security Governance provides a significant contribution to the social science literatures on terrorism, transnational organised crime, security governance, and the nexus between these topics. Written by a team of subject experts and edited by a highly respected scholar, Ersel Aydinli, the chapters in this study deliver thoughtprovoking and rigorous analysis of the current landscape of and future prospects for transnational security governance. The great strength of the study is that it relates existing mechanisms designed to facilitate domestic and transnational cooperation in the fight against crime to the urgent task of countering the threat of transnational terrorism. This is valuable reading for students and researchers of terrorism and transnational governance.’ – Alex Braithwaite, University College London, UK 2010: 234 x 156: 216pp Hb: 978-0-415-56360-4: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85745-8 For more information, visit:

March 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-57569-0: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81929-6 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:

Hegemony and Democracy

‘Exploring the relationships between democracy and hegemony, Bruce Russett deploys a rare combination of rigor and nuance. Filled with insights and evidence, these essays by a master at the top of his game teach us a great deal about central issues of world politics.’ – Robert Jervis, Columbia University, USA

Selected Contents: 1. A Democratic Hegemon? 2. Democracy, War, and Expansion through Historical Lenses 3. Dimensions of Resource Vulnerability: Some Elements of Rigor in Concept and Policy Analysis 4. U.S. Hegemony: Gone or Merely Diminished, and How Does it Matter? 5. The Real Decline in Nuclear Hegemony 6. The Future as Arbiter of Theoretical Controversies: The Scientific Study of Politics and Predictions with James Lee Ray 7. Courting Disaster: NATO vs. Russia and China with Allan C. Stam 8. A Neo-Kantian Perspective: Democracy, Interdependence and International Organizations in Building Security Communities 9. Democratic Intergovernmental Organizations Promote Peace with Jon Pevehouse 10. Security Council Expansion: Can’t and Shouldn’t 11. Liberalism 12. No Clear and Present Danger: A Skeptical View of the United States Entry into World War II 13. Democracy, Hegemony, and Collective Action March 2011: 234 x 156: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-57570-6: £85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-57571-3: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-82994-3 For more information, visit:


i n t ernat ion al relation s


The International Politics of Mass Atrocities


International Politics in Transition

The Case of Darfur

A Study of Movement and Order

Jack Snyder, Columbia University, USA

Edited by David R. Black, Dalhousie University, Canada and Paul D. Williams, George Washington University, USA


Power and Progress

This book draws together many of Jack Snyder's essays to create a coherent volume that explores a liberal realist theory of international politics. It tackles the question of change in a heterogeneous, incompletely modern international system from a perspective that draws on realism in stressing pragmatism in tactics and on liberalism in defining the ultimate goals of change. The book features a new introduction that explains the general themes that unify the prescriptive articles on international justice, the marketplace of ideas, and democratization and is divided into three parts that explore: • Anarchy and Its Effects • The Challenges of Democratic Consolidation • Empire and the Promotion of a Liberal Order. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Anarchy and Its Effects 2. Chain Gangs and Passed Bucks with Thomas Christensen 3. Averting Anarchy in the New Europe 4. Civil War and the Security Dilemma with Robert Jervis 5. Anarchy and Culture The Challenges of Democratic Transition 6. Turbulent Transitions: Why Emerging Democracies Go to War with Edward Mansfield 7. Nationalism and the Marketplace of Ideas with Karen Ballentine 8. Democratization and Civil War, with Edward Mansfield 9. Russian Backwardness and the Future of Europe Empire and the Promotion of a Liberal Order 10. Myths of Empire and Strategies of Hegemony 11. Trials and Errors: Principles and Pragmatism in International Justice, with Leslie Vinjamuri 12. Conclusion September 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-57572-0: £75.00 Pb: 978-0-415-57573-7: £18.99 For more information, visit:

Peacebuilding and Rule of Law in Africa Just Peace? Edited by Chandra Lekha Sriram, Olga MartinOrtega and Johanna Herman, all at University of East London, UK

’This timely and comprehensive book presents a thoughtful analysis of peace-building; the ’fourth pillar’ of international security. Combining perspectives from scholars and practitioners, the book offers new insight into the challenges and lessons of post-conflict reconstruction in Africa. It will be of wide interest to anyone who cares about the rule of law, global governance, and the future of a conflicted continent.’ – Alison Brysk, Professor, University of California, Irvine, USA

’For me, this important book teaches us, through the evidence provided by regional specialists on Darfur from a variety of countries, that there is less to the notions of ’international society’, ’international community’, ’good international citizenship’, ’solidarism’, and ’responsibility to protect’ than their official and academic proponents claim. Tragically, such a verdict is always likely to be starkest when ’mass atrocities’ occur in Africa.’ – Ken Booth, Aberystwyth University, UK

Selected Contents: Introduction: International Society and the Crisis in Darfur Paul D. Williams and David R. Black Part 1: Regional Politics 1. The Government of Sudan and the Darfurian Armed Groups I.D.F. and Munzoul Assal 2. Regional Politics and the Darfur Crisis Lee J.M. Seymour Part 2: Multilateral Politics 3. The United Nations Security Council Michael MacKinnon 4. The African Union Cristina Badescu and Linnea Bergholm 5. The European Union Rory Keene and Asbjorn Wee 6. The International Criminal Court William A. Schabas Part 3: Bilateral Politics 7. The United States Scott Stedjan and Colin Thomas-Jensen 8. The People’s Republic of China Ian Taylor 9. The United Kingdom Paul D. Williams 10. France Bruno Charbonneau 11. Canada David R. Black. Conclusion David R. Black and Paul D. Williams 2010: 234 x 156: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-55902-7: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-55903-4: £26.99 eBook: 978-0-203-86217-9 For more information, visit:


The Organization of European Security Governance Internal and External Security in Transition Ursula C. Schroeder, Free University Berlin, Germany

Analyses the emergence of new forms of security governance in Europe in response to changing domestic and external challenges. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. European Security: Beyond the Great Divide? 3. The Organizational Basis of European Security Governance 4. The EU Security Policy Framework 5. Europe’s Fight against Terrorism 6. European Approaches to Crisis Management 7. Conclusion

The Securitization of Migration Philippe Bourbeau, University of Ottawa, Canada

‘An insightful and challenging study that expands the horizons of securitization theory and makes an important contribution toward understanding the international politics of migration. This is a book that addresses important questions, and that will interest anyone concerned with the politics of security today.‘ – Michael C. Williams, University of Ottawa, Canada Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Part 1: Developing an Analytical Framework 2. Securitized Migration 3. Constructivism, Security, and the Movement of People Part 2: The Securitization of Migration in Canada and France 4. Political Agents and their Security Speech Acts 5. Media, Migration, and Security: An obvious Link? 6. The Powers of Contextual Factors 7. Conclusion March 2011: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-59451-6: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-82934-9 For more information, visit:

Truth Commissions and Transitional Societies The Impact on Human Rights and Democracy Eric Wiebelhaus-Brahm, University of Colorado, USA

‘This ground-breaking study of truth commissions is essential reading for anyone interested in taking stock of one of the most common measures of transitional justice. Its mixture of qualitative case studies and quantitative analysis offers new rigor to the assessment of truth commissions. His findings, that truth commissions have negative effects on human rights in the near term, and negligible impact on democratization, should be carefully considered by practitioners and scholars of transitional justice.‘ – Chandra Lekha Sriram, University of East London, UK 2010: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-55321-6: £85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-55322-3: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-86202-5 For more information, visit:

March 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-60159-7: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81972-2 For more information, visit:

2010: 234 x 156: 280pp Hb: 978-0-415-57736-6: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84849-4 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

i n te r n ati on al r e l ati o n s



Realism and World Politics

1989 as a Political World Event

Contesting Global Order

Edited by Ken Booth, Aberystwyth University, UK

Edited by Christian Lequesne and Jacques Rupnik, both at CERI, Sciences Po, France

Development, Global Governance, and Globalization

Examines the historical significance of the political events of 1989, and the changes in the subsequent world order.

James H. Mittelman, American University, USA

Selected Contents: Preface Vaclav Havel. Introduction Christian Lequene and Jacques Rupnik Part 1: The Global Resonance of 1989 1. 1989 as an Earth-Scale Narrative Karoline Postel-Vinay 2. 1989: The Illusion of Immediacy Zaki Laïdi 3. The Recasting of the Arab Political System after the Cold War Henry Laurens Part 2: Reinventing Democracy 4. From the Re-Invention of Democracy to Democratic Fatigue Jacques Rupnik 5. Civil Society: From Myth to Reality Grzegorz Ekiert 6. Democracy Promotion and its Limits Thomas Carothers 7. A ‘Tropical Democracy’? Transplanting Pluralism in Africa and Elsewhere Richard Banegas Part 3: Varieties of Capitalism in the Age of Globalization 8. 1989-2009: From Post-Communism to Democratic Welfare Capitalism Claus Offe 9. From Socialism to Capitalism: Institutional Change Leszek Balcerowicz 10. The Emergence of Authoritarian Capitalism Jean-François Huchet Part 4: Global Governance or New Power Rivalries 11. Does an ‘International Community’ Exist Jean-Marie Guéhenno 12. The Return of Geopolitics: Russia and Europe Ivan Krastev 13. American Visions of the World After 1989 John Harper 14.China Jean-Philippe Béjà September 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-61589-1: £80.00 For more information, visit:


Critical Theory in International Relations and Security Studies Interviews and Reflections Edited by Shannon Brincat, University of Queensland, Australia, and Laura Lima and Joao Nunes, both at Aberystwyth University, UK Critical Theory in International Relations and Security Studies is the first book to present first hand interviews with some of the pioneering scholars of the disciplines. Through dialogical and reflective essays, it assesses the state of critical thinking in IR and security studies, and looks to the future of the discipline and theoretical developments.

Few authors have sought to explain the links among development, global governance, and globalization, Contesting Global Order traces dominant values and patterns on a world level over the last half century. Including a framing introduction written for the volume, this book brings together for the first time James H. Mittelman’s most influential works, offering cross-regional analysis, and including fieldwork in nine countries in Africa and Asia. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Framework Part 1: Development 2. The Internationalization of Political Violence 3. Underdevelopment and Nationalisation 4. Marginalization and the International Division of Labor Opening The Market Part 2: International Organization and Global Governance 5. Collective Decolonisation and the U.N. Committee of 24 6. Rethinking “The New Regionalism” in the Context of Globalization 7. The Globalization of Organized Crime, the Courtesan State, and the Corruption of Civil Society Part 3: Globalization 8. What is Critical Globalization Studies? 9. Globalisation and Environmental Resistance Politics 10. Globalization and Development: Learning from Debates in China Part 4: Knowledge and Power 11. Rethinking the International Division of Labour in the Context of Globalization 12. Conceptualizing Resistance to Globalization 13. Globalization: An Ascendant Paradigm? Conclusion 14. Making Globalization Work for the Have-Nots February 2011: 234 x 156: 304pp Hb: 978-0-415-60095-8: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-60096-5: £26.99 eBook: 978-0-203-83666-8 For more information, visit:

Selected Contents: Introduction Shannon Brincat, Laura Limes and Joao Nunes Part 1: Interviews Robert Cox, Andrew Linklater, Ken Booth, Richard Wyn Jones Part 2: Commentaries Brooke Ackerly, Richard Ashley, Pinar Bilgin, James Der Derian, Richard Devetak, John M. Hobson, Mark Neufeld, Mustapha K. Pasha, Martin Weber, Michael C. Williams, Marysia Zalewski. Conclusion Mark Hoffman October 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-60157-3: £85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-60158-0: £25.99 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:

This book contributes to the rethinking of realism through multiple analyses of the keys works of Kenneth Waltz, arguing that a sophisticated appreciation of realism is needed to truly understand world politics and International Relations.

Bringing together a theoretically varied group of leading scholars from both sides of the Atlantic, this book is an outstanding appreciation of the work of realism’s most important theorist since the Second World War, and the persistent themes thrown up by his work over a half-century. The contributors do not engage with Waltz’s work as slavish disciples, but rather as positive critics, recognising its decisive significance in International Relations, while using the process of critical engagement to search for new or renewed understandings of unfolding global situations and new insights into long-standing problems of theory-building. The book will be of great interest to students of IR, foreign policy, security studies and politics. Selected Contents: Preface 1. Realism Redux: Contexts, Concepts, Contests Ken Booth Part 1: Political Ideas in Waltzian Realism 2. Anarchy and Violence Interdependence Daniel Deudney 3. Bringing Realism to American Liberalism: Kenneth Waltz and the Process of Cold War Adjustment Michael Foley 4. Waltz, Realism and Democracy Michael C. Williams Part 2: Challenges to Structural Realist Theory 5. Waltz’s Theory of Theory Ole Wæver 6. Structure? What Structure? Nicholas Onuf 7. ‘Big and important things in IR’: Structural Realism and the Neglect of Changes in Statehood Georg Sørensen 8. Reckless States and Realism John Mearsheimer Part 3: Realist Theories and Human Nature 9. Structural Realism, Classical Realism and Human Nature Chris Brown 10. Human Nature and World Politics: Rethinking ‘Man’ Neta Crawford 11. Women, the State, and War Jean Bethke Elshtain Part 4: War and Security, Causes and Consequences 12. Understanding Man, the State and War Hidemi Suganami 13. Lost in Transition: A Critical Analysis of Power Transition Theory Richard Ned Lebow and Benjamin Valentino 14. Hegemony, Equilibrium and Counterpower: A Synthetic Approach Cornelia Beyer 15. Nuclear Weapons in Waltz’s World: More Trust may be Better Nicholas J. Wheeler Part 5: Continuity and Change in the International and in the World 16. How Hierarchical can International Society be? Ian Clark 17. Waltz and World History: The Paradox of Parsimony Barry Buzan and Richard Little 18. Human Interconnectedness Andrew Linklater Part 6: Conclusion 19. International Politics: The Inconvenient Truth Ken Booth 2010: 234 x 156: 368pp Hb: 978-0-415-57057-2: £100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-57058-9: £26.99 eBook: 978-0-203-83396-4 For more information, visit:


i n t ernat ion al relation s





Small States in International Politics

Thinking about Global Governance

War and Ideas

Archie Simpson, Unversity of Aberdeen, UK

Why People and Ideas Matter

John Mueller, Ohio State University, USA

At the start of the 21st century, there has been a renewed academic interest into small states and their status in international relations. This book aims to bring together a comprehensive survey of issues and themes from the perspective of small states, offering a holistic analysis of small states by reviewing a range of factors that affect and influence small states.

Thomas G. Weiss, City University of New York, USA

This book collects the key essays, together with updating notes and commentary, of Professor John Mueller on war and the role of ideas and opinions.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. International Relations Theory and Small States 3. Democracy and Small States 4. The Economics of Small States 5. The Security of Small States 6. Small States and International Organisations 7. The UN and Small States 8. Roles for Small States in International Relations 9. Microstates and Nonsovereign Territories 10. Controversial Small States 11. Conclusions December 2011: 216 x 138: 144pp Hb: 978-0-415-61211-1: £80.00

related journal

For more information, visit:

New Political Science Official journal of the New Political Science Caucus with APSA Editors: Nancy S. Love, Appalachian State University, NC, USA and Mark S. Mattern, Baldwin-Wallace College, OH, USA Volume: 33, 2011, 4 issues per year Print ISSN: 0739-3148, Online ISSN: 1469-9931 New Political Science is the official journal of the New Political Science Caucus (CNPS), an Organized Section of the American Political Science Association (APSA), and serves as an organ for its goals and interests. The CNPS was formed in order to help make the study of politics relevant to the struggle for a better world. As an educational organization, it offers a forum for diverse positions within the framework of this struggle.

This collection presents Thomas G. Weiss’ most important contributions to debates on UN Reform, non-state actors and global governance and humanitarian action in a turbulent world.

Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: United Nations, Plus ça change 1. Reinvigorating the International Civil Service 2. How UN Ideas Change the World 3. What Happened to the Idea of World Government? 4. Moving Beyond North-South Theatre 5. World Politics: Continuity and Change since 1945 with Sam Daws 6. An Unchanged Security Council: The Sky Ain’t Falling Part 2: Non-State Actors and Global Governance 7. The ‘Third’ United Nations’ with Tatiana Carayannis, and Richard Jolly 8. Framing Global Governance, Five Gaps with Ramesh Thakur 9. Governance, Good Governance, and Global Governance: Conceptual and Actual Challenges 10. Pluralising Global Governance: Analytical Approaches and Dimensions with Leon Gordenker Part 3: Humanitarian Action in a Turbulent World 11. Political Innovations and the Responsibility to Protect 12. The Fog of Humanitarianism: Collective Action Problems and Learning-Challenged Organizations with Peter J. Hoffman 13. The Humanitarian Impulse 14. The Sunset of Humanitarian Intervention? The Responsibility to Protect in a Unipolar Era 15. The Politics of Humanitarian Ideas 16. Principles, Politics, and Humanitarian Action 17. A Research Note about Military-Civilian Humanitarianism: More Questions than Answers August 2011: 234 x 156: 352pp Hb: 978-0-415-78192-3: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-78193-0: £27.99 For more information, visit:


Thinking the International Differently Arlene B. Tickner, University of the Andes, Bogotá, Colombia and David Blaney, Macalester College, USA Series: Working Beyond the West This book is the second volume in a trilogy of titles that tries to put the international back into international relations by showing how international relations knowledge is actually produced around the world. The book illustrates the diversity and variation in IR around the world. It adopts a thematic structure in which four of the central concerns in IR - the state, security, globalization and secularism/religion - are examined in three or four chapters written from different parts of the world. The book makes significant progress in bringing non-Western conceptualizations into the discipline and expanding the definition of what international relations actually means.

Selected essays

Mueller has maintained that war (and peace) are, in essence, merely ideas, and that war has waned as the notion that ’peace’ is a decidedly good idea has gained currency. The first part of the book extends this argument, noting that as ideas have spread, war is losing out not only in the developed world, but now in the developing one, and that even civil war is in marked decline. It also assesses and critiques theories arguing that this phenomenon is caused by the rising acceptance of democracy and/or capitalism. The second part argues that the Cold War was at base a clash of ideas that were seen to be threatening, not of arms balances, domestic systems, geography, or international structure. It also maintains that there has been a considerable tendency to exaggerate security threats—currently, in particular, the one presented by international terrorism—and to see them in excessively military terms. The third section deals with the role public opinion plays in foreign policy, and argues that many earlier conclusions about opinion during the Korean and Vietnam Wars, including especially ones concerning the importance of casualties in determining popular support for war, apply to more recent military ventures in the Persian Gulf, Bosnia, Iraq, and Afghanistan. It also assesses the difficulties leaders and idea entrepreneurs often encounter when they try to manage or manipulate public opinion. This book will be of much interest to students of international relations, security studies, foreign policy and international history. Selected Contents: Preface: Marketing Mousetraps Part 1: War, Ideas, and Peace Introduction 1. The Obsolescence of Major War 2. Policing the Remnants of War 3. War Has Almost Ceased to Exist: An Assessment 4. Why Isn’t There More Violence? Part 2: Threat Perception, Ideas, and Foreign Policy Introduction 5. What Was the Cold War About? Evidence from Its Ending 6. Simplicity and Spook: Terrorism and the Dynamics of Threat Exaggeration 7. Faulty Correlation, Foolish Consistency, and Fatal Consequence: Democracy, Peace, and Theory in the Middle East Part 3: Public Opinion, Foreign Policy, and War Introduction 8. American Foreign Policy and Public Opinion in a New Era: Eleven Propositions 9. The Iraq War and the Management of American Public Opinion May 2011: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-78176-3: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-78177-0: £24.99 For more information, visit:

This is essential reading for anyone who cares about the history, development and future of international relations. December 2011: 234 x 156: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-78130-5: £80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-78131-2: £25.99 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

f or e i g n p o l icy


Feminism and International Relations Conversations about the Past, Present and Future Edited by J. Ann Tickner, University of Southern California, USA and Laura Sjoberg, University of Florida, USA This important introduction to feminist International Relations discusses the history, present and future of the field. With a unique format, it examines issues including global governance, the United Nations, war, peace, security, science, beauty and human rights. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: International Relations through Feminist Lenses Laura Sjoberg and J. Ann Tickner 2. Reclaiming Agency for Social Change: Feminism, International Relation and the Women’s International League for Peace and Freedom, 1945 -1975 Catia Confortini Engagement by Brooke Ackerly 3. Pursuing Interests Which are Both Deep and Wide: Women’s Human Rights and the United Nations Abigail Ruane Engagement by Brent Steele 4. Feminist Problems with Norms: Gender Mainstreaming in Global Governance Jacqui True Engagement by Jane Jaquette 5. Security as Emancipation: A Feminist Perspective Soumita Basu Engagement by Laura Sjoberg 6. Russian Veterans of the Chechen Wars: A Feminist Analysis of Militarized Masculinity Maya Eichler Engagement by Cynthia Enloe 7. The Technoscience Question in Feminist IR: Unmanning the U.S.War on Terror Eric M.Blanchard Engagement by Sandra Harding 8. Targeting Women in Wars: Gender and Intentional Civilian Death Laura Sjoberg and Jessica Peel Engagement by J.Ann Tickner 9. Beauty and the Quinceanera: Reproductive, Productive and Virtual Dimensions of the Global Political Economy of Beauty Angela McCracken Engagment by V. Spike Peterson 10. Conclusion May 2011: 234 x 156: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-58457-9: £80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-58460-9: £25.99 eBook: 978-0-203-81681-3 For more information, visit:

Foreign Policy Forthcoming

Continuity and Change in Foreign Policy Decision Making Sequential Decisions under Adverse Feedback Edited by Charles Hermann, Texas A&M University, USA Series: Foreign Policy Analysis The contributors to this book offer explanations and illustrative case studies of the critical choice points in foreign and national security policy. They offer alternative theoretical frameworks for determining if and when policy will change in response to evidence of failing efforts. Competing theories from several disciplines, primarily psychology, political science, and management, offer insights into a subject that has been very little studied in foreign policy, yet is as current as today’s headlines. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Changing Direction is Acutely Difficult but a Foundation for Learning: The Foreign Policy Challenge Charles F. Hermann 2. Responding to Negative Feedback: Group Decision-Making in Protracted Foreign Policy Problems Charles F. Hermann and Robert S. Billings 3. Group Efficacy in the LBJ Administration: From Victory to Entrapment in Vietnam Charles F. Hermann 4. The Role of Leaders in Sequential Decision-Making: Lyndon Johnson, Advisory Dynamics and Vietnam Thomas Preston 5. Policy Commitment and Resistance to Change in U.S.-Chinese Relations: The George H.W. Bush Administration’s Response to Tiananmen Square Jean Garrison 6. The British Strategy of Appeasement: Why Britain Persisted in the Face of Negative Feedback Stephen G. Walker, Mark Schafer and Gregory Marfleet 7. Applying Control Theory to Explain Responses to Signals of Failure Jeff Vancouver 8. Insights for Policy Makers and Researchers: Donald Campbell’s Concept of the Experimenting Society Charles F. Hermann October 2011: 229 x 152: 320pp Hb: 978-0-415-89528-6: £100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-89529-3: £35.99 For more information, visit:

The Unilateralist Temptation in American Foreign Policy David Skidmore, Drake University, USA Series: Foreign Policy Analysis

The Unilateralist Temptation in American Foreign Policy investigates the sources of U.S. unilateralism.

Selected Contents: 1. The Unilateralist Turn in U.S. Foreign Policy 2. The International and Domestic Sources of Unilateralism 3. Structure and Ideology in U.S. Foreign Policy: Clinton and Bush Compared 4. The United States and International Public Goods 5. Reconfiguring the Terms of U.S. Engagement with International Institutions 6. Barack Obama and the Unilateralist Temptation 2010: 229 x 152: 168pp Hb: 978-0-415-88539-3: £100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-88540-9: £25.99 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:

Routledge Studies in US Foreign Policy Series Edited by John Dumbrell, University of Durham, UK and Inderjeet Parmar, University of Manchester, UK This new series sets out to publish high quality works by leading and emerging scholars critically engaging with United States Foreign Policy. Subjects covered include the role of administrations and institutions, the media, think tanks, ideologues and intellectuals, elites, transnational corporations, public opinion, and pressure groups in shaping foreign policy, US relations with individual nations, with global regions and global institutions and America’s evolving strategic and military policies. Forthcoming

Prevention, Pre-emption and the Nuclear Option The Transition from Bush to Obama Aiden Warren, RMIT, Australia Despite its portrayal as a bold departure, the Bush Doctrine was not the ’new’ or ’revolutionary’ policy instrument that many at the time portended. This work seeks to argue that while it was clear that the Bush Doctrine certainly qualified as a preventive war policy, it is apparent that the adoption of this strategy did not mark a total break with American tradition or earlier Administrations. Selected Contents: 1. The Bush Doctrine: Implicit in Previous National Security Strategy Doctrines 2. The Bush Doctrine: Definitions and Interpretations of Prevention and Pre-emption 3. The Bush Doctrine: Preventive War in Iraq 4. The Bush Doctrine and Prevention: Evident in 20th Century US Foreign Policy – Case Studies 5.The Bush Doctrine and the Nuclear Option: The Transition from Clinton to Bush 6. The Nuclear Option: Bush and the ’Real’ Doctrine 7. The Nuclear Option: The Transition to Obama September 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-66995-5: £75.00 For more information, visit:

American Foreign Policy and Postwar Reconstruction Comparing Japan and Iraq Jeff Bridoux, Aberystwyth University, UK 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-56397-0: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84341-3 For more information, visit:


f oreign policy





Constructing US Foreign Policy

Race and US Foreign Policy

The Curious Case of Cuba

The African-American Foreign Affairs Network

Soft Power and US Foreign Policy

David Bernell, Oregon State University, USA

Mark Ledwidge, University of Manchester, UK

This book addresses the roots of the hostility that has characterized the United States’relationship with Cuba and has persisted for decades, even in the wake of the end of the Cold War. It answers the question of why America’s Cold War era policy toward Cuba has not substantially changed, despite a radically changed international environment. Cuba is indeed a ’curious case,’ as the title suggests, and the book uses it to shed light on the contours and paradoxes of US policy during the Cold War and beyond.

In addition to extending the parameters of US foreign policy literature to include race and ethnicity, the book documents case-specific analyses of the evolutionary development of the African American foreign affairs network (AAFAN).

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Imagining Latin America and Cuba 3. Constructing Reagan’s Castro 4. Waiting for Fidel 5. Conclusion March 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-78067-4: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-82926-4 For more information, visit:

Neoconservatism and American Foreign Policy A Critical Analysis Danny Cooper, Griffith University, Australia At the time of America’s 2003 invasion of Iraq, the term ’neoconservative’ was enjoying wide currency. To this day, it remains a term that engenders much debate and visceral reaction. Exploring the historical significance of this ongoing movement and its impact on American foreign policy traditions, this book will be of great interest to all scholars of foreign policy, American politics and American history. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Neoconservatism and its Authors 3. Neocons and the Idea of Human Rights 4. The Neocons and the War of Ideology 5. Neocons, Preponderance and Order 6. Neocons, American Power and Preventive War 7. Conclusion 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-59221-5: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84052-8 For more information, visit:

US Policy Towards Cuba Since the Cold War Jessica Gibbs, Aberystwyth University, UK This is a comprehensive examination of US policy towards Cuba with a particular emphasis on the post-Cold War era. As well as providing a detailed account of US policy and actions towards Castro’s regime, Jessica Gibbs also illustrates how this case study provides a revealing insight into wider debates about US foreign policy and international relations theory. Selected Contents: 1. The United States and Cuba: From the Cuban Revolution to the Fall of the Berlin Wall 2. The Cuban Democracy Act: ‘Putting the Hammer down on Fidel Castro’? 3. Continuity and Change under Clinton 4. The Rafter Crisis of 1994 5. The Helms-Burton Act: ‘Adios Fidel’? 6. The Transformation of the Anti-Embargo Movement 7. The Elian Gonzalez Case: ‘We won’t Forget, We Vote’ 8. George W. Bush: Champion of the Anti-Castro Cause? 9. Conclusion 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-43747-9: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-94612-1

Theoretical, Historical and Contemporary Perspectives Edited by Inderjeet Parmar, University of Manchester, UK and Michael Cox

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. The Forging of the African-American Foreign Affairs Community 3. A Case Study of the Italo-Ethiopian War 4. From Isolationism to Globalism: African-Americans’ Response to U.S. Entry into the Second World War 5. African-Americans and the Formation of the United Nations Organisation 6. Human Rights, Racial Reconstruction and the Cold War 7. Malcolm and Martin and the Shadow of US Foreign Policy 8. Conclusion August 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-48211-0: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Forthcoming in 2012

Strategy in US Foreign Policy After the Cold War Nicholas Kitchen, London School of Economics, UK This book studies the debates surrounding the grand strategy of the United States following the Cold War. It assesses the strategic ideas that have been advanced to conceptualise American foreign policy, grouping these thematically under the headings of primacy, neoisolationism and liberal multilateralism. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Neoclassical Realism and Strategic Ideas Section 1 2. Ideas In the American Experience Section 2: Ideal-Type Grand Strategies 3. ‘Come Home America’: Neoisolationists, Realists and the Retreat from Globalism 4. ‘Institutionalising America’: Liberal Multilateralism 5. American Primacy: Ensuring No Rivals Develop Section 3: Post-Cold War Grand Strategies 6. Bill Clinton’s Underrated Grand Strategy 7. George W. Bush and the Embrace of Empire 8. The Obama Doctrine: Renewing American leadership. Conclusions Strategies of Empire March 2012: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-60750-6: £80.00 For more information, visit:


’The volume delivers on what it sets out to do, that is to offer the most comprehensive and up-to-date discussion of the ubiquitous concepts of hard, soft and smart power.’ – The International Spectator, Vol. 45, No. 4, December 2010, 104–106

The rise of widespread negative attitudes towards US foreign policy, especially due to the war of aggression against Iraq and the subsequent military occupation of the country – has brought new attention to the meaning and instruments of soft power. In this edited collection, an outstanding line up of contributors provides the most extensive discussion of soft power to date. Soft Power has become part of popular political discourse since it was coined by Harvard’s Joseph Nye, and this volume features a brand new chapter by Nye outlining his views on soft, hard and smart power and offers a critique of the Bush administration. The other contributions to the volume respond to Nye’s views from a range of theoretical, historical and policy perspectives giving new insights in to both soft power and the concept of power itself. Selected Contents: Introduction Inderjeet Parmar and Michael Cox 1. The Future of Soft Power in US Foreign Policy Joseph Nye Jr. 2. From Hegemony to Soft Power Geraldo Zahran and Leonardo Ramos 3. Soft Power and Strategy: Developing a ’Strategic’ Concept of Power Edward Lock 4. The Unbearable Lightness of Soft Power Christopher Layne 5. The Power Game, Soft Power and the International Historian Till Geiger 6. Challenging Elite Anti-Americanism in the Cold War Inderjeet Parmar 7. Technological Leadership and American Soft Power John Krige 8. The Military Use of Soft Power - Information Campaigns: The Challenge of Application, their Audiences and Effects Angus Taverner 9. Public Diplomacy and the Information War on Terror Philip Taylor 10. Soft Power in an Era of US Decline Giles Scott-Smith 11. Cheques and Balances: The EU’s Soft Power Strategy Christopher Hill 12. The Myth and Reality of China’s Soft Power Shogo Suzuki 13. Responding to my Critics and Concluding Thoughts Joseph Nye

Gender Ideologies and Military Labor Markets in the U.S.

2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-49203-4: £85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-49204-1: £25.99 eBook: 978-0-203-85649-9

Saskia Stachowitsch, University of Vienna, Austria

For more information, visit:

Gender Ideologies and Military Labor Markets in the U.S. offers a comprehensive analysis of the relationship between changes in military gender ideologies and structural changes in U.S. military and society. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Theoretical Framework 3. Society, War and Gender: Historical and Contemporary Interrelations 4. Analysis 5. Conclusions September 2011: 234 x 156: 160pp Hb: 978-0-415-66707-4: £75.00 For more information, visit:

The US Public and American Foreign Policy Edited by Andrew Johnstone, University of Leicester, UK and Helen Laville, University of Birmingham, UK 2010: 234 x 156: 232pp Hb: 978-0-415-55315-5: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84927-9 For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

g lobal i n s ti tuti o n s

Global Institutions Global Institutions Series Edited by Thomas G. Weiss, City University of New York, USA and Rorden Wilkinson, University of Manchester, UK The Global Institutions Series provides readers with comprehensive, accessible, and informative guides to the history, structure, and activities of key international organizations as well as books that deal with topics of key importance in contemporary global governance. Every volume stands on its own as a thorough and insightful treatment of a particular topic, but the series as a whole contributes to a coherent and complementary portrait of the phenomenon of global institutions at the dawn of the millennium. Books are written by recognized experts, conform to a similar structure, and cover a range of themes and debates common to the series. These areas of shared concern include the general purpose and rationale for organizations, developments over time, membership, structure, decisionmaking procedures, and key functions. Moreover, current debates are placed in historical perspective alongside informed analysis and critique. Each book also contains an annotated bibliography and guide to electronic information as well as any annexes appropriate to the subject matter at hand. Forthcoming

Council of Europe Martyn Bond The book reviews the history of the Council of Europe from its foundation in 1949 through the early conventions on human rights and culture to its expansion into the fields of social affairs, environment and education. It supplies necessary factual information about expansion of membership and the extension of competences through tables and date charts as well as describing key debates within the organisation. Selected Contents: Section 1: History 1. In the Beginning 2. Middle Years 3. After the Fall of the Berlin Wall Section 2: Structures and Institutions 4. At the Centre 5. A Separate Trunk 6. Smaller Branches Section 3: Contemporary Issues 7. A Common Body of Standards? 8. Justice Delayed, Justice Denied? 9. Who Speaks for Europe? 10. Questions of War and Peace September 2011: 216 x 138: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-57119-7: £75.00 For more information, visit:


FIFA (Fédération Internationale de Football Association) Alan Tomlinson, University of Brighton, UK

In this book, the history and underlying political dynamics characterising the growth of FIFA and its relationships with global-regional federations and international associations provide a foundation and focus for analysing this important organization.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Origins: History and Development of FIFA 3. Leaders: FIFA and the Men Who Led It 4. World Cups: FIFA’s Exclusive Product 5. How FIFA Works 6. FIFA Crises and the Critical Response 7. FIFA’s Future: Emerging Issues and Future Directions

Global Governance, Poverty and Inequality


Edited by Rorden Wilkinson, University of Manchester, UK and Jennifer Clapp, University of Waterloo, Canada

Sophie Harman, City University London, UK

This book offers answers to questions raised about the role of global governance in the attenuation and amelioration of world poverty and inequality. The contributors interrogate the role of systems of governance at a time of global economic crisis and continuing environmental degradation against a backdrop of acceleration in inequalities within and between communities and across the globe. Selected Contents: Foreword: Poverty, Inequality and the United Nations System Louise Fréchette. Introduction: Governing Global Poverty and Inequality Rorden Wilkinson and Jennifer Clapp Part 1: Development and the Governance of Poverty and Inequality 1. Global Governance Meets Development: A Brief History of an Innovation in World Politics Eric Helleiner 2. What Type of Global Governance Would Best Lower World Poverty and Inequality? Albert Berry Part 2: Bretton Woods and the Amelioration of Poverty and Inequality 3. IMF Rhetoric on Reducing Poverty and Inequality Bessma Momani 4. The Effect of IMF Programs on Public Wages and Salaries Irfan Nooruddin and James Raymond Vreeland 5. Reforming the World Bank Catherine Weaver Part 3: Promising Poverty Reduction, Governing Indebtedness 6. Governing Global Poverty? Global Ambivalence and the Millennium Development Goals David Hulme 7. The Paris Club, Debt and Poverty Reduction: Evolving Patterns of Governance Thomas M. Callaghy Part 4: Complex Multilateralism, Public/Private Partnerships and Global Business 8. Commonwealth(s) and Poverty/Inequality: Contributions to Global Governance/Development Timothy M. Shaw 9. The Global Elite, Public-Private Partnerships and Multilateral Governance Benedicte Bull 10. Business, Development and Inequality Ananya Mukherjee Reed Part 5: Horizontal Inequalities and Faith Institutions 11. Global Aspects and Implications of Horizontal Inequalities (HIs): Inequalities Experienced by Muslims Worldwide Frances Stewart 12. Governance and Inequality: Reflections on Faith Dimensions Katherine Marshall

December 2011: 216 x 138: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-49830-2: £75.00 Pb: 978-0-415-49831-9: £17.99

2010: 216 x 138: 360pp Hb: 978-0-415-78048-3: £85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-78049-0: £26.99 eBook: 978-0-203-85213-2

For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:

Global Health Governance This book unravels the complexity and confusion surrounding global health governance. It provides a comprehensive look at conceptions of global health governance, old and new actors, the public and private, themes and approaches and emerging trends. Selected Contents: 1. What is Global Health Governance? 2. Institutions of Global Health Governance 3. New Institutions, Civil Society and the Private Sector 4. Approaches to Global Health Governance 5. The Big Three 6. Neglected Health 7. Conclusion: Global Health Governance for Whom? September 2011: 216 x 138: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-56157-0: £75.00 Pb: 978-0-415-56158-7: £17.99 For more information, visit:

Global Think Tanks Policy Networks and Governance James McGann and Richard Sabatini, both at University of Pennslyvania, USA

This volume provides a clear description of and context for the global proliferation of think tanks, highlighting that these institutions are still relatively new players in global and national politics, and clearly outlining the factors contributing to the proliferation of think tanks, the present nature of this proliferation, and the future of think tanks at the global, regional, and national level.

Examining the issues that face think tanks on a global scale, this book will be of great interest to all students of international relations and international organizations. 2010: 216 x 138: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-77978-4: £75.00 Pb: 978-0-415-77979-1: £17.99 eBook: 978-0-203-83827-3 For more information, visit:


glo ba l institution s


International Labour Organization (ILO)


Coming in from the Cold

Robert Haywood

Steve Hughes, University of Newcastle Upon Tyne, UK and Nigel Haworth, University of Auckland, New Zealand

This fresh and accessible account of the International Labour Organization provides the reader with an excellent understanding of its general purpose and structure.

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. A Brief History of the ILO 2. Structure and Organization of the ILO 3. The ILO and Globalization 4. The Declaration on Fundamental Principles and Rights at Work: A New Approach to Labor Standards 5. The ILO and the WTO: The Tortuous Case of the Social Clause 6. Decent Work, Fair Globalization and Strategic Planning: Somavia’s ILO 7. The ILO at Work in the 2007 Global Economic Crisis 8. Concluding Thoughts: Whither the ILO 2010: 216 x 138: 144pp Hb: 978-0-415-35382-3: £75.00 Pb: 978-0-415-35383-0: £16.99 eBook: 978-0-203-34764-5 For more information, visit:


International Law, International Relations and Global Governance Charlotte Ku, University of Illinois College of Law, USA International Relations and International Law have developed in parallel but distinctly throughout the 20th Century. However in recent years there has been a recognition that their shared concerns in areas as diverse as the environment, transnational crime and terrorism, human rights and conflict resolution outweigh their disciplinary and methodological divergences. The distinctive rationale for inquiry remains for both fields of study, but the need to move beyond description only in the case of law or analysis only in the case of politics has also fueled a need for new methodologies to understand the changing phenomenon of international life today. This book focuses on collaborative work within the disciplines of international law and international relations, to note sample efforts to collaborate, and to assess the cultivation of an interdisciplinary outlook. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Scholarly Collaboration Between International Law and International Relations 2. International Law and International Relations: Establishing Separate Identities 3. A Move Towards Collaboration in the Study of International Institutions 4. The Context and Background of International Activity 5. Contemporary Transnational Relations 6. Collaboration in the Study of Global Governance

Maritime Piracy Beginning with an overview and historical development of piracy and the relevant maritime governance structures, Maritime Piracy examines how 20th century shifts in global governance norms and structures eventually left the high seas open for predatory attacks on one of the world’s most fastest growing and essential industries. Moving through contemporary debates about how to best combat piracy, Haywood emphasises that a solution to this chronic global problem requires a long-term, holistic, and inclusive approach. Selected Contents: 1. Overview of the General Subject and Organizational Structure 2. The History and Development of Key Moments of Change in Forms, Intensity, and Locality of Piracy 3. The ’Nuts and Bolts’ of Today’s Maritime Governance 4. The History and Development of the Trends and Governance of Piracy 5. Current Debate in Historical Perspective 6. Key Criticisms 7. Emerging Issues and Future Directions October 2011: 234 x 156: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-78197-8: £70.00 Pb: 978-0-415-78198-5: £17.99 For more information, visit:

Non-Governmental Organizations in World Politics The Construction of Global Governance Peter Willetts, City University, London, UK Non-governmental organizations (NGOs) from Amnesty International and Oxfam to Greenpeace and Save the Children are now key players in global politics. This accessible and informative textbook provides a comprehensive overview of the significant role and increasing participation of NGOs in world politics. Peter Willetts examines the variety of different NGOs, their structure, membership and activities, and their complex relationship with social movements and civil society. He makes us aware that there are many more NGOs exercising influence in the United Nations system than the few famous ones. Conventional thinking is challenged in a radical manner on four questions:

Preventive Human Rights Strategies

• the extent of the engagement of NGOs in global policy- making

Bertrand G. Ramcharan, City University of New York, USA

• the role of NGOs as crucial pioneers in the creation of the Internet

• and the need to integrate NGOs within mainstream international relations theory.

’This book is a major break-through in the human rights literature. The human rights call to action until now has been for promotion and protection. Henceforth it will be for promotion, prevention and protection. The chapter on national protection systems should be implemented by every country. It is of the greatest importance.’ – Evance Kalula, University of Cape Town, South Africa

Selected Contents: 1. Threats, Challenges and the Responsibility to Prevent 2. Obligations to Prevent Under International Human Rights Treaties 3. The Preventive Role of National Human Rights Institutions 4. Regional Preventive Strategies 5. Global Preventive Strategies 6. Preventive Human Rights Diplomacy 7. The Preventive Roles of Peacekeepers, Observers, and Human Rights Monitors 8. Preventive Strategies of NGOs 9. The Preventive Role of International Criminal Tribunals and the International Criminal Court 10. Conclusion

• the status of NGOs within international law

This is the definitive guide to this crucial area within international politics and should be required reading for students, NGO activists, and policy-makers. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. NGOs, Social Movements, and Civil Society 2. The Access of NGOs to Global Policy-Making 3. The Status of NGOs in International Law 4. NGOs, Networking and the Creation of the Internet 5. Understanding the Place of NGOs in Global Politics 6. The Creation of Global Governance 2010: 216 x 138: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-38124-6: £80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-38125-3: £17.99 eBook: 978-0-203-83430-5 For more information, visit:

2010: 216 x 138: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-54855-7: £75.00 Pb: 978-0-415-54856-4: £16.99 eBook: 978-0-203-85650-5 For more information, visit:

December 2011: 216 x 138: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-77872-5: £75.00 Pb: 978-0-415-77873-2: £17.99 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

g lobal i n s ti tuti o n s



Regional Development Banks

Responsibility to Protect

The Forum on China- Africa Cooperation (FOCAC)

Lending with a Regional Flavor

Cultural Perspectives in the Global South

Ian Taylor, University of St. Andrews, UK

Jonathan Strand, University of Nevada, USA

Edited by Rama Mani, Oxford University, UK and Thomas G. Weiss, City University of New York, USA

The regional development banks (RDBs) are important global institutions but often are overshadowed by more widely studied institutions such as the World Bank Group and International Monetary Fund (IMF). In the past decade, high profile protests against World Bank, IMF, and World Trade Organization policies have overshadowed the political role of the RDBs.

Designed to provide readers with the definitive guide to the RDBs, Jonathan Strand exposes the political nature of RDB development lending and demonstrates the need to include the RDBs in any discussion of reform of the global economic architecture. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. What are the Regional Development Banks? 3. Who Controls the Regional Development Banks? 4. Are Regional Development Bank Projects Effective? 5. How Do the Regional Development Banks Collaborate with Other IGOs? 6. What is the Relationship between the Regional Development Banks and Civil Society? 7. Conclusions October 2011: 216 x 138: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-77594-6: £75.00 For more information, visit:


The Idea of World Government From Ancient Times to the Twenty-First Century James A. Yunker, Western Illinois University, USA

The notion of a single political organization encompassing the whole of humanity—a world state—has intrigued mankind since earliest recorded history. This book provides a concise yet comprehensive overview of the history of world government, and questions whether political globalization, in the form of a federal world government, could and should complement the ongoing processes of economic and cultural globalization.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction and Overview 2. Historical Antecedents 3. From Perpetual Peace to The Great War 4. From the Treaty of Versailles to the Nuclear Age 5. The Postwar World Government Boom 6. The Post-Cold War era 7. Is There a Future for World Government?

2010: 216 x 138: 144pp Hb: 978-0-415-54860-1: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83500-5

This volume explores in a novel and challenging way the emerging norm of the Responsibility to Protect (R2P), initially adopted by the United Nations World Summit in 2005 following significant debate throughout the preceding decade.

This work seeks to uncover whether this norm and its founding values have resonance and grounding within diverse cultures and within the experiences of societies that have directly been torn apart by mass atrocity crimes. The contributors to this collection analyze the responsibility to protect through multiple disciplines: philosophy; religion and spirituality; anthropology; and aesthetics in addition to international relations and law to explore what light alternative perspectives outside of political science and international relations shed upon this emerging norm. In each case, the disciplinary analysis emanates from the global South and from scholars located within countries that experienced violent political upheaval. Hence, they draw upon not only theory but also the first-hand experience with conscience-shocking crimes. Their retrospective and prospective analyses could and should help shape the future implementation of R2P in accordance with insights from vastly different contexts. Offering a cutting edge contribution to thinking in the area, this is essential reading for all those with an interest in humanitarian intervention, peace and conflict studies, critical security studies and peacebuilding. Selected Contents: Introduction: Reframing Responsibility— Revisiting Politics and Place Rama Mani and Thomas G. Weiss Part 1: Reflections in Practices, Cultures and Traditions 1. Religion and Spirituality: ’It Takes a Village to Protect a Child,’ Spirituality and R2P Mutombo Nkulu-NSengha 2. Philosophy and Ethics: Ethical Concepts, Values, and Strategies Relevant to R2P Yolanda Angulo Parra 3. Aesthetics and Arts: Artistic and Literary Creation in the Embers of Genocide Koulsy Lamko and Rama Mani Part 2: Country Cases 4. Rwanda: A Cultural Struggle to Bury the Demons of Genocide Paul Rutyasire and Jean-Marie Kayishema 5. Kosovo: Un/welcomed Guests, NATO Intervention in Kosova Nita Luci 6. Nepal: Atrocities Prevented? R2P, Culture, and Civic Resilience Arjun Karki, Jyoti Upadhyay, and Prerna Bomzan. Conclusion: Listening, Learning, and Reshaping R2P from the Inside Out Rama Mani and Thomas G. Weiss October 2011: 216 x 138: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-78184-8: £75.00 Pb: 978-0-415-78185-5: £18.99 For more information, visit:

February 2011: 216 x 138: 140pp Hb: 978-0-415-78162-6: £70.00 Pb: 978-0-415-78163-3: £19.99 eBook: 978-0-203-82647-8 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:

For more information, visit:


The Group of Twenty (G20) Andrew F. Cooper, University of Waterloo, Canada and the Centre for International Governance Innovation (CIGI), Waterloo, Canada and Ramesh Thakur This volume provides a concise examination of the purpose, function and practice of the Group of Twenty (G20) summit with particular attention to its designation as a new ’premier forum for international economic cooperation.’ This book will provide insight and analysis on the G20 beyond its composition, offering a detailed examination of the ongoing shift in economic power and the momentum toward global institutional reform. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Rebalancing the World Order 2. The G20 Finance as Prelude 3. Accumulating Global Deadlocks 4. Incrementalism vs. Big Bang 5. Financial Crisis as Catalyst 6. Accelerated Momentum 7. Lessons and Challenges October 2011: 234 x 156: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-78088-9: £70.00 Pb: 978-0-415-78089-6: £16.99 For more information, visit:


glo ba l institution s





The International Trade Centre

The Security Governance of Regional Organizations

The UN Global Compact

Edited by Emil J. Kirchner, University of Essex, UK and Roberto Dominguez, Suffolk University, USA

This book opens up the black-box of the UN Global Compact – the archetypical corporate social responsibility (CSR) initiative anchored within the United Nations. It appraises the ten-year history, governance, and engagement mechanisms of this unique UN initiative.

Promoting Exports for Development Stephen Browne, Future of the UN Development System (FUNDS) Project and Sam Laird, University of Nottingham, UK

In the era of rapid globalization, ITC is an important organization, and this work will seek to fill the gap in the existing literature by discussing the history, ongoing projects and future challenges of this dynamic organization. The status of ITC – half-in and half-out of the UN – could prove to be an interesting model for the future, and this work provides a comprehensive survey of the organization. Selected Contents: Introduction: Exporting for Development 1. Origins and History 2. Current Structure and Mandate 3. Trade Intelligence 4. Strategies, Polities and Negotiations 5. Trade Support Institutions 6. Enterprise Competitiveness 7. Facing the Future April 2011: 216 x 138: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-58401-2: £70.00 Pb: 978-0-415-58402-9: £16.99 eBook: 978-0-203-81737-7 For more information, visit:


The South Asian Association for Regional Cooperation (SAARC) An Emerging Collaboration Architecture Lawrence Saez, School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London, UK The text provides a comprehensive introduction to the SAARC, describing the historical developments that led to its formation, it examines the institutional structure, objectives and effectiveness of the SAARC in its role as South Asia’s leading regional institution. Drawing on original research it offers a fresh and accessible account of SAARC, arguing that South Asia forms a unique regional security complex that enables certain forms of regional cooperation and bars cooperation on other issue areas. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. The Formation of SAARC 3. The Structure and Objectives of SAARC 4. Structure and Functions of SAARC Regional Centres 5. South Asia’s Economic Cooperation and the South Asia Free Trade Agreement (SAFTA) 6. SAARC and New Security Challenges in South Asia 7. SAARC and its Observer States 8. Conclusion July 2011: 216 x 138: 144pp Hb: 978-0-415-57628-4: £70.00 eBook: 978-0-203-80880-1 For more information, visit:

The Security Governance of Regional Organizations assesses the effectiveness of regional organizations as regional or global security providers, and examines how policy preferences, resources, capabilities, institutional mechanisms and economic and political cohesion link with collective action behaviour in four security policy functions. It investigates how regional organizations meet the new security threats or respond to strategic geopolitical changes and what adaptations they make in the process. Divided into three parts and using a common analytical framework, the book explains the changing security agenda in ten key regional organizations, each organizational chapter: • identifies the nature of threats within the region • examines the historical development and the degree of institutionalization • assesses the level of governance • explores the context of interaction • investigates the compliance with the norms of the system of governance.

Catia Gregoratti

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. The UN Global Compact History 3. How the UN Global Compact Works 4. Global Bureaucracies and Local Networks 5. The UN Global Compact and the Global Governance of CSR 6. The UN Global Comact and its Critics 7. Conclusion: What’s Next for the Compact October 2011: 234 x 156: 128pp Hb: 978-0-415-60441-3: £70.00 Pb: 978-0-415-60442-0: £17.99 For more information, visit:

2nd Edition

The UN Secretary-General and Secretariat Leon Gordenker, Princeton University, USA

This collection contributes to the ongoing reconceptualization of security and definition of security governance, and explores whether regional security governance processes are unique or similar and whether some organizational experiences can be seen as models for others to follow. It combines a coherent theoretical framework with strong comparative case studies, making it ideal reading for all students of security studies. Selected Contents: 1. Regional Organizations and Security Emil J. Kirchner and Roberto Dominguez Part 1: Transatlantic Area 2. The EU as a Regional and Global Security Provider Emil J. Kirchner 3. Security Governance in the North Atlantic Treaty Organization Roberto Dominguez 4. The OSCE as a Regional Security Actor: A Security Governance Perspective Nuray Ibryamova Part 2: Western Hemisphere 5. Regional Security Governance in the Americas: The OAS Alejandro Chanona 6. The Caribbean Community’s ’Fourth Pillar’: The Evolution of Regional Security Governance Jessica Byron 7. Understanding the Complexities of Security Governance in the Andean Region Aimee Kanner Arias 8. MERCOSUR’s Incipient Security Governance Andrea Oelsner Part 3: Asia and Africa 9. Lessons from the ASEAN Regional Forum: Transcending the Image of Paper Tiger Katja Weber 10. The Shanghai Framwork and Central Asia: Chop-suey Governance? Imtiaz Hussain 11. The African Union and the Quest for Security Governance in Africa Olufemi Babarinde Conclusion 12. Performance of Regional Organizations in Security Governance Emil J Kirchner and Roberto Dominguez August 2011: 216 x 138: 304pp Hb: 978-0-415-78236-4: £85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-78235-7: £26.99 For more information, visit:

The new edition of this accessible introduction to the important role of the United Nations Secretary-General continues to offer a keen insight into the United Nations: the Secretariat and its head, the Secretary-General, summing up the history, structure, strengths and weaknesses, and continuing operations of an ever-present global institution.

Behind the public face of the Secretary-General, Ban Ki-moon and his predecessors, an active corps of officials and advisers face ceaseless pressures and challenges. This clear and concise introduction examines both the solid and substantive work of the UN’s permanent staff and the role of the Secretary-General in policy development. The 2nd edition has been thoroughly revised and updated to reflect: • the retirement of Kofi Annan and the appointment of Ban Ki-moon as the new UN Secretary General • the withdrawal of John Bolton as permanent representative of the United States and the consequent softening of the approach of his government to the UN • developments in the global economy and international security dilemmas • the change of administration in the United States. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Blueprint and Evolution of an International Office 3. The UN Secretariat and Its Responsible Chief 4. The Secretary-General as World Constable 5. Promoting Global General Welfare 6. Reaching Out to Broader Publics 7. Conclusion 2010: 216 x 138: 152pp Hb: 978-0-415-77840-4: £75.00 Pb: 978-0-415-77841-1: £17.99 eBook: 978-0-203-85748-9 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

g lobal i n s ti tuti o n s



2nd Edition

2nd Edition

The United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees (UNHCR)

UN Security Council

United Nations Educational, Scientific, and Cultural Organization (UNESCO)

Practice and Promise

Creating Norms for a Complex World

Edward C. Luck, Columbia University, USA

J.P. Singh

Written by a bestselling author, this book is suitable for a wide audience interested in key institutions of international public policy. It looks at the predecessors to the UN Security Council and the current issues and future challenges it faces.

The Politics and Practice of Refugee Protection into the 21st Century Gil Loescher, Alexander Betts and James Milner, all at University of Oxford, UK ’An important contribution’ – Claudia Seymour, School of Oriental and African Studies, UK This is a concise and comprehensive introduction to both the world of refugees and the UN organization that protects and assists them. Written by experts in the field, this is one of the very few books that trace the relationship between state interests, global politics, and the work of the United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees’ (UNHCR). Looking ahead into the twenty-first century, the authors outline how the changing nature of conflict and displacement poses UNHCR with a new array of challenges and how there exists a fundamental tension between the UN’s human rights agenda of protecting refugees fleeing conflict and persecution and the security, political and economic interests of states around the world.

Selected Contents: Section 1: Context 1. Grading the Great Experiment 2. The Founding Vision 3. Defining the Council through Charter and Practice Section 2: Tools 4. Peace Operations 5. Military Enforcement 6. Economic Sanctions, Arms Embargoes, and Diplomatic Instruments 7. Enlisting and Empowering Partners Section 3: Challenges 8. The Humanitarian Imperative 9. Terrorism and Weapons of Mass Destruction 10. Reform, Adaptation, and Evolution 11. Conclusion: Reflection and Projection October 2011: 216 x 138: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-78237-1: £75.00 Pb: 978-0-415-78238-8: £17.99 For more information, visit:

Key topics discussed include: • the UNHCR as an actor in world politics since 1950 • refugee definition and protection instruments • new challenges to the UNHCR’s mandate • institutional strengths and weaknesses • asylum crises in the global North and global South • protracted refugee situations and internally displaced persons • key criticisms and continuing relevance of the UNHCR. Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Historical Overview and Emergences of Key Issues 1. The Origins of International Concern for Refugees 2. UNHCR and the Cold War: 1950-1990 3. UNHCR Since the End of the Cold War Part 2: Key Challenges and Issues Facing UNHCR 4. The Key Challenges of Mandate, Funding and Protection 5. The Key Issues of Protracted Refugee Situations, IDPs and Asylum 6. The Future of UNHCR in the 21st Century. Conclusion September 2011: 216 x 138: 184pp Hb: 978-0-415-78282-1: £75.00 Pb: 978-0-415-78283-8: £16.99 For more information, visit:

This book traces the history of UNESCO from its foundational idealism to its current stature as the preeminent international organization for science, education, and culture, building a well rounded understanding of this important organization. The book: • details the challenges UNESCO faced through cold war and power politics, global dependence and interdependence, and the rise of identity and culture in global politics

• analyses the functioning of UNESCO administration, finance, and its various constituencies • explores the major controversies and issues underlying the initiatives in education, sciences, culture and communication • examines the current agenda and future challenges through three major issues in UNESCO: Education or All, digital divide issues, and norms on cultural diversity • assesses the role of UNESCO in making norms in complex world of multiple actors and intersecting issue-areas. Selected Contents: 1. UNESCO’s Organizational History and Structure 2. Prioritizing Education 3. Making Science 4. The Prominence of Culture 5. Debating Global Communication Orders 6. Reflections and Possibilities 2010: 216 x 138: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-49113-6: £75.00 Pb: 978-0-415-49114-3: £17.99 eBook: 978-0-203-83858-7 For more information, visit:


The UN Human Rights Council Bertrand G. Ramcharan, City University of New York, USA The Human Rights Council is already the subject of major public interest and controversy. The Council is already being criticized for having dropped some of the protection strategies of the former commission and this book aims to present a balanced view of the council, acknowledging where it has made positive contributions, point out its deficiencies, and identify options for improving the body’s future work. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. The Mandate and Roles 2. Institutional and Procedural Architecture 3. The Universal Periodic Review 4. The Legislative Role 5. Promotional and Educational Role 6. Preventive Role 7. Fact-finding Role 8. Protection Role 9. The Advisory Committee 10. NGOs and the Council Conclusions July 2011: 276 x 219: 144pp Hb: 978-0-415-58398-5: £70.00 Pb: 978-0-415-58399-2: £16.99 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:


glo ba l institution s


g lobal i z ati on

Civil Society and International Governance


The Role of Non-State Actors in the EU, Africa, Asia and Middle East

Elite Power and Consensus in World Affairs

Edited by David Armstrong, University of Exeter, UK, Valeria Bello, Barcelona Institute for International Studies, Spain, Julie Gilson, University of Birmingham, UK and Debora Spini, Syracuse University in Florence, Italy Series: Routledge/GARNET This book examines the increasing impact of nongovernmental organisations and civil society on global and regional governance, in relation to the UN, the IMF, the G8 and the WTO. The authors assess civil society interaction with the EU, Africa, East Asia and the Middle East. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction David Armstrong and Julie Gilson Part 1: Theory 2. Civil Society and the Democratisation of Global Public Space Debora Spini 3. Collective and Social Identity: A Theoretical Analysis of the Role of Civil Society in the Construction of Supra-National Societies Valeria Bello 4. Organized Civil Society and Political Representation in the EU Arena Carlo Ruzza Part 2: The European Union 5. Europeanization of Non-State Actors: Towards a Framework for Analysis Karolina BoroñskaHryniewiecka 6. Between Localisation and Europeanisation: Non-Governmental Organisations in Bosnia and Herzegovina Erica Panighello 7. European Integration, Cross-Border Cooperation and Third-Sector Mobilizations in the Basque Country Xabier Itçaina Part 3: Civil Society Outside Europe 8. Governance and Non-Governmental Organisations in East Asia: Building Region-Wide Coalitions Julie Gilson 9. Civil Society and Regional Governance in Eastern and Southern Africa Andréas Godsäter and Frederik Söderbaum 10. The Role of Civil Society in Regional Governance in the Middle East Michael Shulz 11. Transnational Labour Mobilization in the Americas Marcelo Saguier 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-59063-1: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84005-4

Bilderberg People Ian Richardson, Andrew Kakabadse, Cranfield University, UK and Nada Kakabadse

Bilderberg People explores the hidden mechanisms of influence at work in the private world, and personal interactions, of the transnational power elite. It is not concerned with conspiracy theories; instead it is about certain fundamental forces that shape the world in which we live. These forces, with their power to bring about transitions in emotion and preference within, and beyond, the elite community have potentially profound implications for all of us. Through exclusive interviews with attendees of the most prestigious of all informal transnational networks – Bilderberg – this book provides a unique insight into the networking habits and motivations of the world’s most powerful people. Moreover, it demonstrates that elite consensus is not simply a product of collective common sense among the elite group; rather, it is a consequence of subtle power relationships within the elite circle. These relationships, which are embedded in the very fabric of elite institutions and interactions, result in a particular brand of enlightened thinking within the elite community. This exciting new volume sheds light for the first time on the critical question of who runs the world and why they run it the way they do. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Transnationalism and the Transnational Policy Elite 2. Legitimacy in World Politics 3. Collaboration and Partnership in World Politics 4. Consensus and World Affairs 5. The Seductive Lure of Elite Membership 6. Elite Networks in World Affairs 7. The Consequesnces of Elite Consensus. Conclusion: Making Sense of Elite Power and Consensus

Globalization Rethinking Globalizations Series Edited by Barry Gills, University of Newcastle, UK This series is designed to break new ground in the literature on globalisation and its academic and popular understanding. Rather than perpetuating or simply reacting to the economic understanding of globalisation, this series seeks to capture the term and broaden its meaning to encompass a wide range of issues and disciplines and convey a sense of alternative possibilities for the future. Forthcoming

Alternativa Bolivariana para las Américas (ALBA) and CounterGlobalization Resistance and the Construction of 21st Century Socialism Edited by Thomas Muhr, University of Bristol, UK ALBA and Counter-Globalization uses the case of the Bolivarian Alliance for the Peoples of Our America Peoples’ Trade Agreement (ALBA-PTA) to invite to a re-thinking of resistance to global capitalism and the construction of socialism in the 21st century.

2010: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-48523-4: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85072-5

Selected Contents: Preface Pedro Páez Pérez 1. Introduction: Counter-Globalisation, Revolution, and 21st Century Socialism Thomas Muhr Part 1: Politics, Principles, Processes 2. Twenty-First Century Socialism: A Political and Pedagogical Act Eduardo Leal Chacón 3. Revolution as Process: The Confluence of ‘Top Down’ and ‘Bottom Up’ Approaches and the Permanency of Constituent Power Dario Azzellini 4. Reconfiguring the Power Geometries: The Case of Venezuela’s Communal Councils Adam Gill 5. Misiones Bolivarianas: Class Struggle, Consciousness, and Internationalization Processes Andrés Otálvaro 6. Regional Integration, Solidarity, and Revolution Desde la Base Jennifer Martínez 7. Transnationalizing the ALBA-PTA: Nicaragua, El Salvador, the United States Thomas Muhr Part 2: The Political Economy 8. A Marxian Analysis of Bolivarian Endogenous Development: The Limits of the Landlord State Thomas Purcell 9. Petroamerica: Blazing a New Trail for Energy Cooperation Maite J. Iturre 10. The SUCRE and the ALBA-PTA Monetary Union Antulio Rosales and Pablo Giménez Part 3: The Social, Cultural, Environmental 11. Raising Political Consciousness for Social Transformation: Non-Formal Education and Mobilisation in the Barrio Maura Duffy 12. La Cultura es el Pueblo: Cultural Policy for 21st Century Socialism Hazel Marsh 13. Communicational Guerrillas in Caracas: Challenging Hegemonic Models of Communication Ana Mallén 14. Post-Secularity and Identity Politics in the 21st Century Socialism Lucia Michelutti 15. Audiovisual Cultural Revolution Libia Villazana 16. From the Local to the Regional and Back: Bolivia’s Politics of Decolonising Education in the Context of the ALBA-PTA Mieke Lopes Cardozo and Jesse Strauss 17. Global Struggles for Climate Justice: The ALBA-PTA Council of Social Movements Alice Cutler Yasmine Brien Bert Russell. Reflections Thomas Muhr

For more information, visit:

September 2011: 234 x 156: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-66907-8: £75.00

For more information, visit:

The Commonwealth and International Affairs The Round Table Centennial Selection Edited by Alex May, University of Oxford, UK

‘Alex May, who is both the secretary of The Round Table and its historian, is to be congratulated on assembling this selection of the best articles published in the journal over the past century. Both the anthology and his own incisive and informative Introduction provide a fascinating insight into the evolution of the Commonwealth idea, from its genesis in Milner’s kindergarten to current preoccupations with civil society, multiculturalism, multilateralism, and democratic governance.’ – James Mayall, University of Cambridge, UK

May 2011: 198 x 129: 264pp Hb: 978-0-415-57634-5: £80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-57635-2: £20.99 For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

g lobal i z at i o n




Andre Gunder Frank and Global Development

Situating Global Resistance Between Discipline and Dissent

Global Ideologies and Urban Landscapes

Visions, Remembrances, and Explorations

Edited by Lara Coleman and Karen Tucker, both at University of Bristol, UK

Edited by Manfred B. Steger and Anne McNevin, both at RMIT University, Australia

This book explores the ways in which contemporary forms of political dissent are disciplined and provides a nuanced series of analyses of the activities, complexities and significance of the ‘anti-globalisation’ movement.

Edited by Patrick Manning, University of Pittsburgh, USA and Barry K. Gills, University of Newcastle, UK

This work focuses on the ideas and influence of Andre Gunder Frank, one of the founding figures and leading analysts of political economy at the global level. Through discussion of his work the contributors in this volume examine the shifting currents of the world economy and the accompanying controversies, advances, and regressions in the understanding of global patterns in present and past. Frank’s publications from the 1960s to his death in 2005 enlivened and advanced debates on every continent. He analyzed Latin American dependency, long-term accumulation of capital, world systems, shifting dominance in the world economy, and social movements. His style of wide-ranging scholarship, shared by a growing number of analysts, demonstrated its relevance to the basic causes and effects of economic and social change. This collection provides a comprehensive overview of the legacy of Frank’s work and takes stock of the recent and expected developments in global and historical analysis of political economy. It will be of great interest to students and scholars of international political economy, international relations and political theory. Selected Contents: Foreword Immanuel Wallerstein 1. The World Economy in Theory and Practice: The Contributions of Andre Gunder Frank in the Era of Underdevelopment and ’Globalization’ Patrick Manning and Barry K. Gills Part 1: Andre Gunder Frank’s Critical Vision 2. Frankian Triangles Albert Bergesen 3. ReOrient the 19th Century: Andre Gunder Frank’s Unfinished Manuscript Robert Denemark 4. The Modern World System under Asian Hegemony: The Silver Standard World Economy, 1450-1750 Barry K. Gills and Andre Gunder Frank Part 2: Continuing Debates 5. Exiting the Crisis of Capitalism or Capitalism in Crisis? Samir Amin 6. Human Sociocultural Evolution, Hegemonic Transitions and Global State Formation Christopher Chase-Dunn and Thomas Hall 7. The Paradoxes of Colonial/ Modernity Anibal Quijano 8. ’Dependency Theory and Cultural Studies: Lessons from Latin America John Beverley 9. Tides of Hegemonic Change: The Atypical Trajectory of the 1970s-To-Present B-Phase Crisis Jeffrey Sommers and Boris Kagarlitsky Part 3: Multidisciplinary Developments 10. Explaining the Spatial Transformations of the World Copper Market During the Long Twentieth Century Jan-Frederic Abbeloos 11. Reorienting Iran: Following Gunder Frank’s Advice One Decade at a Time Kevan Harris 12. The Korean Developmental State and Neo-Liberal Transition in the World System Hae-Yung Song 13. Watershed Management in the Wake of Transnational Migration: Honduras Carylanna Taylor 14. Conclusion Patrick Manning

Selected Contents: Foreword Ronnie D. Lipschutz 1. Introduction: Disciplining Dissent Lara Coleman and Karen Tucker 2. Global Discipline and Dissent in the Longue Durée: Global Severance against Global Presence André C. Drainville 3. Visual Technologies in Rebellion: Violence, Myth and the Convulsive Kettle Amedeo Policante 4. Uncivil Disobedience in Struggles over Access to Water: Shifting Legalities Bronwen Morgan 5. Disciplining Voice, Unhearing Dissent: A Critical Account of Democracy ‘From Below’ Nicole Doerr 6. Disciplining the Theory and Practice of Dissent: A Feminist Perspective Bice Maiguashca 7. Counter-Conducts at the Summit: Power, Government and Dissent in South Africa and Elsewhere Carl Death 8. The All-American and the Phantastic Other Hasmet M. Uluorta 9. Capitalist Cocktails and Moscow Mules: The Art-World and Alter-Globalization Protest Kirsty Robertson 10. Struggles over Knowledge and Power in NGOs and Community Organizations: The Disciplining of Dissent Aziz Choudry and Eric Shragge 11. Disciplining Poverty Eradication: the Global Call to Action Against Poverty and the Millennium Development Goals in Malawi Clive Gabay October 2011: 246 x 174: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-60050-7: £85.00 For more information, visit:


Global Civil Society in Action? Teivo Teivainen, University of Helsinki, Finland Focusing on the World Social Forum (WSF), the author analyzes the various dilemmas of democratization in a dynamic process that is explicitly global but has many local variations. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Democracy in Global Times 2. Politicizing Spirit of the Globalization Protest Movements 3. Emergence of the World Social Forum 4. Movement of Movements or Depoliticized Space 5. Who Governs the Forum: Politics of Transnational Representation 6. Global Expansion of the World Social Forum. Conclusions November 2011: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-35727-2: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-00316-9 For more information, visit:

May 2011: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-60273-0: £85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-60274-7: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-81664-6 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:

This book illuminates the spread of ideologies as both discursive and spatial phenomena in distinct contributions that ground their analysis in cities of the Global North and South.

Selected Contents: 1. Global Ideologies and Urban Landscapes: Introduction Manfred B. Steger and Anne McNevin 2. After Neoliberalization? Neil Brenner, Jamie Peck and Nik Theodore 3. Provoking ’Globalist Sydney’: Neoliberal Summits and Spatial Reappropriation James Goodman 4. Toronto’s Distillery District: Consumption and Nostalgia in a Post-Industrial Landscape Margaret Kohn 5. Delhi: Global Mobilities, Identity and the Postmodern Consumption of Place Chris Hudson 6. Materializing the Metaphors of Global Cities: Singapore and Silicon Valley Terrell Carver 7. Gaming Space: Casinopolitan Globalism from Las Vegas to Macau Timothy W. Luke 8. Border Policing and Sovereign Terrain: The Spatial Framing of Unwanted Migration in Australia and Melbourne Anne McNevin 9. Hong Kong and Berlin: Alternative Scopic Regimes Michael J. Shapiro 10. An Emergent Landscape of Inequality in Southeast Asia: Cementing Socio-Spatial Inequalities in Viet Nam James H. Spencer March 2011: 246 x 189: 144pp Hb: 978-0-415-59863-7: £85.00 For more information, visit:

Global Restructuring, Labour and the Challenges for Transnational Solidarity Edited by Andreas Bieler, University of Nottingham, UK and Ingemar Lindberg, Arena Think Tank, Sweden

‘Rich in contextual evidence, this book explains how globalizing processes elicit different responses from workers and beget varied outcomes. Bieler and Lindberg deftly weave together several case studies, showing obstacles and strategic possibilities for trade unions. Their analysis is a breakthrough in coming to grips with the nexus of globalization and social movements.’ – James H. Mittelman, American University, Washington DC, USA 2010: 234 x 156: 280pp Hb: 978-0-415-58083-0: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84245-4 For more information, visit:


glo ba lization



Globalization in Crisis


Global Social Justice

Edited by Barry K. Gills, University of Newcastle, UK

Globalization, Labor Export and Resistance

Edited by Heather Widdows and Nicola J. Smith, both at University of Birmingham, UK

This book provides a distinctive multi-disciplinary contribution to debates about global justice and global ethics and addresses issues including human rights, the environment, health, labour, peace-building and political participation, and sexuality.

Selected Contents: 1. Global Social Justice: An Introduction 2. The Globalisation of Human Rights 3. Liberal Internationalism and Global Social Justice 4. Moral Distance and Global Social Justice: An Archaeology of Borders 5. Global Justice and the Distribution of Greenhouse Gas Emissions 6. Ecological Issues of Justice 7. Torture: A Touchstone for Global Social Justice 8. Global Social Justice and Public Health 9. Cosmopolitan Social Justice and Labour Exploitation 10. Gender and Global Social Justice: Peacebuilding and the Politics of Participation 11. Sexuality, Power and Global Social Justice 12. Global Social Justice: A Conclusion May 2011: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-57941-4: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81697-4 For more information, visit:


Global South to the Rescue Emerging Humanitarian Superpowers and Globalizing Rescue Industries Edited by Paul Amar, University of California, Santa Barbara, USA This book aims to introduce globalization studies to new trends in police and military studies, highlight the cultural and political complexities of the global south, and develop new frameworks that articulate the best of feminist, political-economic, international-relations, and ethnographic perspectives. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Global South to the Rescue Paul Amar 2. From Kidnapping to Contagious Diseases: The Transnational Elite Emergency Security Industry, from Bogota, to Hollywood, to Basra Conor O’Reilly 3. Power, Inadequacy and Longing in the Reorganization of the Coercive Organization of the Indonesian State Jacqueline Baker 4. The Pacification of Soldiering, and the Militarization of Development: Contradictions Inherent in Provincial Reconstruction in Afghanistan Ryerson Christie 5. Turkey as Fulcrum and Agent of Contradictory Security-Development Agendas: Modernisation, Dependency and Reform Graham Ellison and Nathan Pino 6. Peacexploitation? India’s Female Peacekeepers Abroad Marsha Henry 7. Global-South Masculinities in Transnational Mercenary Firms: Fijians and Salvadorans in Private Military Companies Paul Higate 8. Nigerian Enforcement Reform: Internal Colonialism and ’Big Brother’ Internationalism in Liberia after Ten Years of Democracy Alice Hills 9. Kenya as ’Humanitarian CounterTerrorist’ Role Model: Juggling the Contradictions Jan Bachman September 2011: 246 x 174: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-57795-3: £75.00 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

Globalization and Crisis critically examines the causes and consequences of the global financial and economic crisis and its relation to Globalization in both theory and practice.

Selected Contents: Foreword: A Fair Globalization During Crisis Tarja Halonen 1. Introduction: Framing the Debate: One Crisis or Many? The Return of Crisis in the Era of Globalization: One Crisis, or Many? Barry K. Gills 2. The Multiple Crisis and Beyond François Houtart 3. Converging Crises: Reality, Fear and Hope Susan George Analysing Financial, Economic and Capitalist Crisis: Old and New Logics 4. A Savage Sorting of Winners and Losers: Contemporary Versions of Primitive Accumulation Saskia Sassen 5. Globalisation, Crisis and the Political Economy of the International Monetary (Dis)Order Ankie Hoogvelt 6. What Next? An Explanation of the 2008–2009 Slump and Two Scenarios of the Shape of Things to Come Heikki Patomäki 7. The Global Regulatory Consequences of an Irrational Crisis: Examining ‘Animal Spirits’ and ‘Excessive Exuberances’ Grahame F. Thompson 8. The Economic Crisis, Capitalism and Islam: The Making of a New Economic Order? Wazir Jahan Karim 9. Critical Ideas in Times of Crisis: Reconsidering Smith, Marx, Keynes, and Hayek M. Scott Solomon Security, States, and World Order Crisis 10. A Radical World Order Challenge: Addressing Global Climate Change and the Threat of Nuclear Weapons Richard Falk 11. Crisis and Global Governance: Money, Discourses, and Institutions James H. Mittelman ‘Alter-hegemonic’ Perspectives 12. In the Shadows of Globalization: Civilizational Crisis, the ‘Global Modern’ and ‘Islamic Nihilism’ Mustapha Kamal Pasha 13. A Long View of Globalization and Crisis V. Spike Peterson 14. Lessons of a ‘Good’ Crisis: Learning in, and From the Third World Craig N. Murphy 15. The Global Crisis and Latin America Henry Veltmeyer 16. Globalization, Crisis and Social Transformation: A View from the South Ronaldo Munck 17. After 30 Years of Deadlock: Labour’s Possible Strategies in the New Global Order Andreas Bieler, Ingemar Lindberg and Werner Sauerborn Radical Politics in the Global Crisis 18. Exiting the Crisis of Capitalism or Capitalism in Crisis? Samir Amin 19. Globalization, Crisis and Transformation: World Systemic Crisis and the Historical Dialectics of Capital Barry K. Gills 20. The Stakes of Radical Politics have Changed: Post-Crisis, Relevance and the State Jonathan Pugh 21. Climate and Capitalism in Copenhagen Walden Bello 22. The Invisible Summit: The UN Conference on the Global Economic Crisis—An Eyewitness Account Nick Buxton 23. The Copenhagen Global Summit on Climate Change: A View from the Ground Gemma Bone 24. Global Governance for Global Development Björn Hettne 2010: 246 x 174: 344pp Hb: 978-0-415-60048-4: £85.00 For more information, visit:

A Study of Filipino Migrant Domestic Workers in Global Cities Ligaya Lindio-McGovern, Indiana University of Kokomo Examines international labour export of Filipino migrant workers and forms of resistance to globalization. Selected Contents: 1. Globalization, Labor Export and Resistance: Rethinking Neoliberal Globalization from Below Part 1: Circuits of Power in the Globalization of Reproductive Labor 2. Circuits of the Commodifcation of Filipino Domestic Workers in the Labor Export Web of Globalization Part 2: Circuits of Resistance to Labor Export in the Context of Globalization 3. Resistance in Hong Kong 4. Resistance in Taiwan 5. Resistance in Vancouver 6. Resistance in Rome 7. Resistance and Non-Resistance in Chicago 8. Resistance in the Homefront: The Labor-Sending Country 9. Conclusion: From Retrospect to Prospects, From Theory to Policy August 2011: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-60379-9: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Power and Transnational Activism Edited by Thomas Olesen, University of Aarhus, Denmark ‘Here is a valuable collection in which top-rate thinkers offer diverse assessments of the place of transnational counter-publics in contemporary politics. It is an important question, and the book offers novel and interesting answers.’ – Jan Aart Scholte, University of Warwick, UK Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Power and Transnational Activist Framing Thomas Olesen. Critiques and Appraisals 2. Counter-Power in the Global Age: Strategies of Civil Society Movements Ulrich Beck 3. Evading the Challenge: The Limits of Global Activism David Chandler 4. Coordinated Power in Contemporary Leftist Activism Ruth Reitan. The State and the National 5. The Limits of Power and Protest: Civil Society Mobilization against North American Integration Jeffrey Ayres 6. State Power and the Control of Transnational Protests Donatella della Porta and Herbert Reiter 7. China and the Limits of Transnational Human Rights Activism: From Tiananmen Square to the Beijing Olympics Caroline Fleay 8. State-Led Social Boundary Change: Transnational Environmental Activism, ‘EcoTerrorism’ and September 11 Shannon Gibson 9. National Origin and Transnational Activism Sarah Stroup. Representation and Discourse 10. The Representational Power of Civil Society Organizations in Global AIDS Governance: Advocating for Children in Global Health Politics Anna Holzscheiter 11. Taming of the Shrew? International Women’s NGOs, Institutional Power, and the UN Jutta Joachim 12. Global Justice Movements and the Mass Media: Conceptual Reflections and Empirical Findings Dieter Rucht 13. AID(S) Politics and Power: A Critique of Global Governance Håkan Thörn 14. Conclusion: Transnational Counterpublics and Democracy Thomas Olesen 2010: 234 x 156: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-55369-8: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83665-1 For more information, visit:

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

g lobal i z at i o n



Theorising Transnational Migration

Citizenship, Migrant Activism and the Politics of Movement

’Transnationalism’ broadly refers to multiple ties and interactions linking people or institutions across the borders of nation-states. This series offers the latest empirical studies on contemporary political and cultural processes.

The Status Paradox of Migration

Edited by Peter Nyers, McMaster University, Canada and Kim Rygiel, Wilfrid Laurier University, Canada


Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Migration and Society 2. Ghana and its Migrants 3. Processes of Localisation 4. Processes of Transnationalisation 5. The Status Paradox of Migration. Conclusion

Routledge Research in Transnationalism

Migration, Nation States, and International Cooperation Edited by Randall Hansen, University of Toronto, Canada, Jobst Koehler, International Organisation for Migration, Switzerland and Jeannette Money, University of California, Davis, USA Against a background of past, limited examples of international cooperation, and ambitious hopes for extensive future efforts, this volume puts two related questions to the empirical test: under which conditions are states prepared to cooperate over international migration, and what form - bilateral, multilateral, formal, informal - will this cooperation take? Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Incentivizing Cooperation Randall Hansen, Jobst Koehler and Jeannette Money 2. Making Cooperation Work: Interests, Incentives, and Action Randall Hansen Section 1: North – North Cooperation 3. Mobility within the European Union Andrew Geddes and Jeannette Money 4. Migration Cooperation in Asia: The Trans-Tasman Travel Arrangement Sarah P. Lockhart and Jeannette Money Section 2: North – South Cooperation 5. Mexico-US Migration, NAFTA and CAFTA, and US Immigration Policy Philip Martin 6. The European Union’s Extra-Territorial Immigration Controls and International Migration Relations Andrew Geddes 7. What Government Networks Do in the Field of Migration: An Analysis of Selected Regional Consultative Processes Jobst Koehler 8. International Cooperation and International Migration: An Overview Susan Martin Section 3: South – South Cooperation 9. Interstate Cooperation in Migration Management in the Southern African Development Community (SADC) Vincent Williams 10. Managing Migration in Asia: The Role of Interstate Cooperation Rupa Chanda and Sasidaran Gopalan 11. Conclusion Randall Hansen, Jobst Koehler and Jeannette Money June 2011: 229 x 152: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-88840-0: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-80905-1 For more information, visit:

Boris Nieswand, Max Plank Institute, Germany This book seeks to understand migrant integration processes and develops a theory: the status paradox of migration. It explores the interaction between migrants’ integration into the receiving country and the maintained inclusion into the sending society; and their simultaneous loss and gain of status.

May 2011: 229 x 152: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-58455-5: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81043-9 For more information, visit:


Transnationalism, Migration and Marriage Edited by Katherine Charsley, University of Oxford, UK Exploring a previously neglected form of migration this timely volume brings together work from Europe and beyond, addressing the issue of transnational marriage from a range of interrelated perspectives, presenting substantial new empirical material, and taking a fresh look at concepts and theory in this area. Selected Contents: Part 1: Introduction and Overview 1. Introduction: Transnational Marriage Katharine Charsley 2. Transnational Marriage Migration and Marriage Migration – An Overview Lucy William Part 2: Immigration and the Regulation of Transnational Marriages 3. Corporate Families and Transnational Marriage Roger Ballard 4. (Un)tying the Knot: Marriage and Migration Bridget Anderson 5. Entry Clearance, Marriage Migration and the Shifting and Multiple Border Helena Wray 6. Danish Debates on Marriage Migration – Legislative and Public Debates on Transnational Marriages Martin Bak Jørgensen Part 3: Marriage, Transnationalism, Integration and Belonging 7. Interaction, Participation and Belonging among Transnational Marriage Migrants: Evidence from Local Areas in England with Significant Muslim Populations Hiranthi Jayaweera 8. Beyond the Stereotype of the ‘Thai-Bride’: Thai-British Families’ Experiences of Migration and Settlement Jessica Sims 9. Marrying at Home, Marrying Away Iain Walker Part 4: Transnational Marriage and Forced Migration 10. Transnational Marriage in Conflict Settings Nicholas Van Hear 11. Lost Boys, Invisible Girls: Stories of Marriage across Borders Katarzyna Grabska Part 5: Gender and Visibility 12. ‘Sukbhir weds Gurpreet (part 2)’: Wedding Videos in Transnational Punjabi Sikh Marriages Kanwal Mand 13. Transnational Divorces among Turkish-Danish Immigrants Anika Liversage 14. Dominant Discourses, Gender and Diversity in British Transnational Marriages – And Directions for Future Research Katherine Charsley December 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-58653-5: £75.00 For more information, visit:

Series: Routledge Research on The Global Politics of Migration Analyzes recent shifts in governing global mobility from the perspective of the politics of citizenship. Selected Contents: Introduction: Putting Citizenship in Motion Peter Nyers and Kim Rygiel Part 1: Re-Defining Citizenship through Mobility Rights 1. From Global Empire to Little Britain: Race, Values, and ‘Earned Citizenship’ in the UK Ruth Grove-White 2. Securitized Identities and Migrant Activist Responses among North African Migrants in France Alina Sajed 3. Ungrateful Subjects: Reflections from Refugee’s Protests in Transnational Third Worlds Carolina Moulin Aguiar Part 2: Migrant Citizenship ‘From Below’ 4. Building a Sanctuary City: Municipal Migrant Rights in the City of Toronto Jean McDonald 5. No Border Politics in North America and Europe Nandita Sharma and Cynthia Wright 6. Ethnography and Human Rights: The Experience of APDHA with Nigerian Sex Workers in Andalucía Estefanía Acién Part 3: Emerging Citizen Subjectivities and Spaces of Citizenship 7. Momentary Activism: ’Managing’ Agency, Movement and (Non)Citizens at the Border Spaces of Australia, Tanzania and Morocco/Spain Heather Johnson 8. Seeing Sanctuary like a City: Mobility, Politics and Mutuality in the UK City of Sanctuary Movement Jennifer Bagelman and Vicki Squire 9. From City to Citizen in Los Angeles: A Place-based Approach to Emerging Citizen Subjectivities Anne McNevin December 2011: 234 x 156: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-60577-9: £80.00 For more information, visit:


Globalization, Migration, and the Future of Europe Insiders and Outsiders Edited by Leila Simona Talani, Kings College London, UK Series: Routledge Research on The Global Politics of Migration Examines the political, social and economic factors affecting the social inclusion or exclusion of migrants in the EU. Selected Contents: Part 1: Islamic Migration and Anti-Terrorism Laws 1. Fight against Terror in the EU and EU Citizenship, Towards European (Dis)Integration? 2. Institutionalisation of Islam in France and Germany: The French Council of the Muslim Faith (CFCM) and the German Islankonferenz 3. Asylum, ’Terror’ and the European ’Security State’: The Construction of the ’Outsider’ Part 2: Who is an Insider and Who is an Outsider? 4. Free Movement of Persons in EU External Relations 5. Romanian Migration to Italy: Insiders and Outsiders 6. The External and Internal Dimension of the Creation of the ’Fortress Europe’ Part 3: Migration and the Construction of Identity 7. Enlargement and Beyond: Moving Boundaries and (Re) Constituting Identities in Post Wall Europe Sobrina Edwards 8. European Citizenship Construction 9. European Citizenship and IR: The Inclusion/Exclusion Dynamic and the Possibility for Re-Imagination Part 4: European Citizenship and the Future of Europe 10. The Legal Framework on Citizenship of the European Union 11. Dual Citizenship: A Review of US Law as Pertains to European and American Citizens 12. Nationality Law, Migration and European Citizenship: The Role of Dual Nationality 13. Where is EU Citizenship Going? Fraudulent Dr. Rottmann and the State of the Union in Europe 14. Conclusion September 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-66904-7: £75.00 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:


glo ba lization



Migration and Insecurity Citizenship and Social Inclusion in a Transnational Era Edited by Niklaus Steiner, University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill, USA, Robert Mason, University of Southern Queensland, Australia and Anna Hayes, University of Southern Queensland, Australia Series: Routledge Research on The Global Politics of Migration Migration and Insecurity addressess an important but rarely considered aspect of migration: how are migrants and refugees received in their new homes? What defines inclusion and exclusion for migrants, and how does this affect the concept of ’belonging’ in a transnational society? In these essays, the distinguished contributors discuss the places in which migrants and refugees construct and experience their belonging, and situate this discussion in the context of the international system and government policy. Chapters interrogate the notion of inclusivity and belonging, according to stages in the settlement process. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Niklaus Steiner, Robert Mason and Anna Hayes 2. Securing Twenty-First Century Societies Part 1: Receiving Strangeness 3. Human Security in a World of Globalised and Mobile Souls Paul James 4. Remembering Refugees Klaus Neumann 5. Living with Strangers Kay Ferres Part 2: Negotiating Integration 6. Unsettling Resettlement: Seeking Security in Everyday Life Sandy Gifford 7. Community and Different: Refugee Integration in Australia Susanne Schech 8. Transnational Practices, Active Citizenship and Muslim Migrant Integration in the West Fethi Mansouri Part 3: Securing Long-Term Belonging 9. Making Sense of (Personal) History by Experiencing the Presence Peter Herrmann 10. Equal Valued Status: Belonging, Identity and Place Hurriyet Babacan 11. Citizens of No-Where: Refugees, Integration Criteria and Social Inclusion Eileen Pittaway 12. Citizenship, Identity and Marginalization Niklaus Steiner September 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-66549-0: £75.00 For more information, visit:

Routledge/GARNET series Series Edited by David Armstrong, University of Exeter, UK and Karoline Postel-Vinay, CERI, Paris, France The Routledge GARNET series provides an outlet for research on a wide range of issues related to regulation in the context of regional and global governance, the representation and participation of the EU in global governance, and regionalism in Europe, Africa, Asia, and the Americas. Forthcoming

Comparative Regional Security Governance Edited by Shaun Breslin and Stuart Croft, both at University of Warwick, UK Focuses on security governance as a key issue of analysis to provide an important new conceptualisation of ’region’ and regional power beyond the EU. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Stuart Croft and Shaun Breslin 2. Security and Defence in the EU Jolyon Howorth 3. Regional Security Cooperation in the former Soviet Union, the Black Sea and the Balkans: Life on the Periphery of Euro-Atlantia? Andrew Cottey 4. East Asian Regional Security Governance: Bilateral Hard Balancing and ASEAN’s Informal Cooperative Security Hiro Katsumata 5. Regional Security Arrangements & South Asia Maria Sultan 6. ‘When Elephants Fight the Grass Gets Hurt’: Regional Security in Sub-Saharan Africa Paul Jackson 7. North Africa and the Middle East Anoush Ehteshami 8. North American Regionalism in Security: US, Canada, and Mexico Chris C. Demchak 9. Creating Multi-Level Security Governance in South America Daniel Flemes and Michael Radseck September 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-61768-0: £80.00 For more information, visit:


Chairing Multilateral Negotiations The Case of the United Nations Spyros Blavoukos, Athens University of Economics and Business, Greece and Dimitris Bourantonis, American University, Washington DC, USA Series: Routledge Research on the United Nations (UN) ‘This is a welcome and important study of chairs’ involvement in the UN negotiation processes. It is especially relevant for an era where multilateralism has thankfully proven to be in the ascendancy once again.’ – Oliver Richmond, University of St. Andrews, UK Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Analyzing the Chairmanship Office: Functions and Parameters of Effectiveness 3. The British Chair in the UN Security Council (1992) 4. The Presidency of the UN General Assembly and the Case of South Africa (1974) 5. The Chair of the Open-Ended Working Group on UNSC Reform 6. Chairing Committee I of UNCLOS III (1973-82) 7. The Presidency of the Sixth Conference of the Parties to the UN Framework Convention on Climate Change 8. The Eighteen Nation Disarmament Committee (ENDC) and its Co-chairmanship Office 9. Conclusions


Contemporary Political Agency Theory and Practice Edited by Bice Maiguashca, University of Exeter, UK and Raffaele Marchetti, LUISS Guido Carli University, Rome, Italy This book explores and critically reflects on the theory and practice of political agency in contemporary global politics. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Mapping Political Agency in the Era of Globalisation Bice Maiguashca and Raffaele Marchetti 2. Political Spaces between Erosion and Expansion Debora Spini 3. Competing Projects of Globalisation. On the Changing Nexus of Society/Politics/ Economy Raffaele Marchetti 4. Where is the Transnational? Conceptualising the Emergent Spatialities of Public Action Clive Barnett 5. Evaluating ‘Global Democracy’ as the Normative Directive for Ideas of Political Agency in International Relations Charlotte McEvoy 6. Political Agency and the Ambivalence of Disaffection Susan McManus 7. Exploring the Conditions of Possibility for Political Agency: Rethinking Politicisation from a Feminist Perspective Bice Maiguashca and Catherine Eschle 8. The Politics of Social and Solidarity-based Economy Xabier Itçaina 9. Political Agency in the European Union Derek Beach 10. Agency between Informality and Empowerment: The Case of Egypt Heba Raouf Ezzat 11. Transversal Dissent, Legitimacy and Burma’s Border-Based Civil Society Mary O’Kane 12. Networks and Infrastructures of Political Agency – The Political Mobilisation of the Women of the Market in Lomé Charles Heller and Branwen Gruffydd Jones 13. Conclusion: Re-thinking Political Agency in the Twenty First Century Bice Maiguashca and Raffaelle Marchetti December 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-59530-8: £80.00 For more information, visit:


The Global Governance of Knowledge Creation and Diffusion


Edited by Helge Hveem, University of Oslo, Norway and Lelio Iapadre, United Nations University (UNU-CRIS), Belgium

The European Union and Multilateral Trade Governance

Utilises case studies and a comparative country / thematic approach to prove a compehensive survey of the regulation and governance of knowledge flow, research and innovation.

The Politics of the Doha Round Arlo Poletti, University of Antwerp, Belgium Examines the EU’s role in global economic governance and the negotiations of the Doha Round. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. The Research Question: Integrating the “Whom” and the “Why” of the Politics of Preference Formation 2. Pressure Politics: The Case of Agriculture 3. Identity Politics: The Case of Competition 4. Executive Politics: The Case of Technical Assistance and Capacity Building (TACB) 5. Civil Politics: The Case of Environment 6. Conclusion November 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-59689-3: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Selected Contents: Part 1: Conceptual and Theoretical Overview 1. Governance: The Efficacy and Legitimacy of International Regulation 2. Knowledge Creation and International Transfers Part 2: Governing Knowledge Creation Process 3. Education 4. Research 5. Innovation Part 3: Governing Knowledge Diffusion Processes 6. Open Flow of Ideas 7. Co-operation Between Different Agents in Knowledge Activities 8. Migration 9. Foreign Direct Investment, Technology Transfer and Kowledge Diffusion 10. Trade in Goods and Services Part 4: Conclusion 11. Global Governance of Knowledge Policies: Summary and Conclusions May 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-60574-8: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81368-3 For more information, visit:

June 2011: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-49082-5: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81395-9 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

g lobal i z at i o n



Globalisation and European Integration

The Regional Integration Manual

Critical Approaches to Regional Order and International Relations

Quantitative and Qualitative Methods

Edited by Petros Nousios and Andreas Tsolakis, both at University of Warwick, UK, and Henk Overbeek, University of Amsterdam, the Netherlands Series: Routledge/Warwick Studies in Globalisation This volume offers a new perspective on integration in the global context through critical political economy and globalisation frameworks. Selected Contents: Section 1: Explaining European Integration: Critical Approaches 1. Introduction: Globalisation and European Integration – Towards a Genealogy of Mutual Neglect Petros Nousios, Henk Overbeek and Andreas Tsolakis 2. European Integration Theory and Antonio Gramsci: An Alternative Analytical Framework Alan Cafruny and Magnus Ryner 3. Monetary Union and the Transformation of Democracy: On the Politics of Class Werner Bonefeld 4. Governance in/of the EU: The Boundaries of a Deliberative Governmentality Owen Parker Section 2: Supranationality and International Competition 5. The World Market, Variegated Capitalism, and the Crisis of European Integration Bob Jessop 6. EU Competition Policy and the Ascendancy of Neoliberalism Angela Wigger and Hubert Buch-Hansen 7. The ‘European Sub-Prime’: Responses to the Crisis in the European Periphery Jan Drahokoupil 8. Lisbon Agenda-Setting, Structural Policy and the Role of Urban Areas Otto Holman Section 3: Europe in the Global Political Economy 9. The Rhineland Resurrected? The EU Between the Liberal Heartland and the Asian Contender States Kees Van der Pijl 10. European Globalisation and World Order Politics Hans-Jürgen Bieling 11. The Global Crisis and the Implications for the European Project Henk Overbeek 12. Globalisation and European Integration: The Internal and External Dimensions of Neo-Liberal Restructuring Andreas Bieler Section 4: Conclusions 13. ‘…and they lived happily ever after?’: Europe, Transnational Forces and the Political Economy of Global Restructuring Petros Nousios and Andreas Tsolakis September 2011: 234 x 156: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-61184-8: £80.00

related journal

For more information, visit:

Edited by Philippe De Lombaerde, United Nations University, Bruges, Belgium, Renato Flores, Fundação Getulio Vargas, Brazil, Lelio Iapadre, United Nations University (UNU-CRIS), Belgium and Michael Schulz, University of Gothenburg, Sweden Series: Routledge/Warwick Studies in Globalisation Brings together different methods for monitoring and analyzing regional integration processes together in a systematic way Selected Contents: 1. Introduction and Summary Philippe De Lombaerde, Renato Flôres, Lelio Iapadre and Michael Schulz 2. Assessing Regional Governance: An Indicative Framework for Developing Indicators Edward Best 3. Assessing Attitudes towards Regional Integration Processes Bernd Schlipphak and Timo Menikken 4. How to Measure the Level of Regional Conflict and Peace? Michael Schulz 5. Indicators of Intra-Regional Migration and Mobility Michela Ceccorulli, Frédérique Channac, Philippe De Lombaerde and Emmanuel Fanta 6. Statistical Measures of Regional Trade Integration Lelio Iapadre and Michael Plummer 7. Indicators of Regional Financial Integration Agustín S. Bénétrix and Sébastien Wälti 8. Measurement of Regional Economic Convergence José Villaverde and Adolfo Maza 9. Optimum Currency Area Criteria Lúcio Vinhas De Souza and Corina Weidinger Sosdean 10. Gravity Models Applied to Regional Integration Aurora Mordonu, Glenn Rayp, Bernard Herz and Marco Wagner 11. CGE Models Applied to Regional Integration Renato G. Flôres Jr. 12. Sustainability Impact Assessments Applied to Regional Integration Clive George, Tomasz Iwanow and Colin Kirkpatrick 13. Evaluation Techniques Applied to large-scale Regional Projects Manohar Lal Baharani and Paul J. Stephenson 14. Participatory Foresight Techniques Applied to Regional Integration Processes Nikki Slocum-Bradley and Luk Van Langenhove 15. Composite Indexes and Systems of Indicators of Regional Integration Philippe De Lombaerde, Ettore Dorrucci, Gaspare Genna and Francesco Paolo Mongelli June 2011: 234 x 156: 320pp Hb: 978-0-415-60255-6: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81371-3 For more information, visit:



Accepted for inclusion into the Thomson Reuters Social Science Citation Index®

Breakdown and Change of Private Interest Governments

Editor: Barry Gills, Newcastle University, UK Volume: 8, 2011, 5 issues per year Print ISSN: 1474-7731, Online ISSN: 1474-774X Globalizations publishes work which explores new meanings of globalization, brings fresh ideas to the concept, broadens its scope and contributes to shaping debates of the future. The journal is dedicated to opening the widest possible space for discussion of alternatives to a narrow economic understanding of globalization. The move from the singular to the plural is deliberate and implies scepticism of the idea that there can ever be a single theory or interpretation of the term. Rather, the journal encourages the exploration and discussion of multiple interpretations and multiple processes that may constitute many possible globalizations, many possible alternatives.

Claudius Wagemann, Istituto Italiano di Scienze Umane (SUM), Italy Series: Routledge/Warwick Studies in Globalisation This examines how private interest governments have changed as a form of public sector economic regulation Selected Contents: Introduction 1. The ’Theoretical Framework’ 2. Methodology and Research Techniques 3. From Government to Governance: Organizational Communities 4. From Stability to Enduring Transformation: Organizational Populations 5. From Influence to Membership: Individual Organizations 6. Environments and Organizational Changes 7. Conclusion August 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-61135-0: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:

Renewing International Labour Studies Edited by Marcus Taylor, Queen’s University, Canada Series: ThirdWorlds

Through a combination of theoretical works and a series of case studies, the volume highlights the cutting edge of international labour studies. This book was published as a special issue of Third World Quarterly.

Selected Contents: 1. Who Works for Globalisation? The Challenges and Possibilities for International Labour Studies Marcus Taylor Part 1: The Social Construction of Labour for the Global Economy 2. Modes of Production, Rules for Reproduction and Gender: The Fabrication of China’s Textile Manufacturing Workforce since the late Empire Etienne Cantin 3. Gendering Liberalisation and Labour Reform in Malaysia: Fostering ‘Competitiveness’ in the Productive and Reproductive Economies Juanita Elias 4. China’s New Labour Contract Law: Is China Moving Towards Increased Power for Workers? Haiyan Wang, Richard P. Appelbaum, Francesca DeGiuli and Nelson Lichtenstein 5. From Fields of Power to Fields of Sweat: The Dual Process of Constructing Temporary Migrant Labour in Mexico and Canada Leigh Binford Part 2: New Working Classes, Collective Organising and Modes of Resistance 6. Disciplining Capital: Export Grape Production, the State and Class Dynamics in Northeast Brazil Ben Selwyn 7. Legal Liminality: The Gender and Labour Politics of Organising South Korea’s Irregular Workforce Jennifer Jihye Chun 8. The Radicalisation of the New Chinese Working Class: A Case Study of Collective Action in the Gemstone Industry Leung Pak Nang and Pun Ngai Part 3: Transborder Struggles, Corporate Social Responsibility and the ‘New Labour Internationalism’ 9. Local Worker Struggles in the Global South: Reconsidering Northern Impacts on International Labour Standards Don Wells 10. Labouring under an Illusion? Lesotho’s ‘Sweat-Free’ Label Gay W. Seidman 11. Jumping Scale and Bridging Space in the Era of Corporate Social Responsibility: Cross-Border Labour Struggles in the Global Garment Industry Jeroen Merk 12. Afterword: Beyond the ‘New’ International Labour Studies Ronaldo Munck Review Article 13. Power, Production and Solidarity: Trends in Contemporary International Labour Studies Andrew Stevens 2010: 246 x 174: 216pp Hb: 978-0-415-59385-4: £85.00 For more information, visit:


glo ba lization



Nationalism and Globalisation Conflicting or Complementary? Edited by Daphne Halikiopoulou and Sofia Vasilopoulou, both at London School of Economics and Political Science, UK Bringing together leading international scholars to examine the relationship between nationalism and globalization, this book addresses theoretical, historical and contemporary issues. It features case studies from Europe, the US and Asia that explore regionalisation, migration and citizenship, culture, finance and capitalism. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Bridging the Gap between Nationalism and Globalisation Daphne Halikiopoulou and Sofia Vasilopoulou Part 1: Theory 2. Nationalism and Global Culture Anthony Smith 3. Nationalism might Change its Character, Again John Hall 4. Nationalism and the Politics of Culture in a Globalizing World Stephanie Lawson 5. Globalisation and NationFormation in World History John Hutchinson Part 2: History 6. Nationalism as Global History John Breuilly 7. PanNationalism Reframed: Theories of Nationalism, the Role of the ’Nation-State,’ and the Global Age Sarah Danielsson 8. Globalizing the ’Principle of Nationality’ Andre Liebich Part 3: Contemporary Issues 9. Migration and Citizenship in the Making of a Global Labour Market Stephen Castles 10. Global Crisis, National Blame Jonathan Hearn 11. Globalization and the Nation-State: The Future of Failures Ronald Grigor Suny 12. Conclusion: Nationalism and Globalisation: Conflicting or Complementary? Daphne Halikiopoulou and Sofia Vasilopoulou September 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-58196-7: £85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-58197-4: £23.99 For more information, visit:


Selected Writings of John A. Hobson 1932-1938 The Struggle for the International Mind Edited by John M. Hobson and Colin Tyler Series: Routledge/Warwick Studies in Globalisation

‘This collection of some of J. A. Hobson’s later writings makes accessible to scholars much new and exciting material. It confirms my belief that Hobson is one of the most important social and economic minds produced by twentiethcentury Britain, and shows how he kept thinking well into old age.’ – Peter Cain, Sheffield Hallam University, UK

Selected Contents: Part 1: Introduction: The International Man: A Report from Earth John M. Hobson Part 2: The South Place Ethical Society Lectures and Related Writing, 1932 -1938 1. Remaking the World 2. Is World Government Possible? 3. Our Selves 4. The Will to Power 5. The Popular Mind 6. ‘Is International Economic Government Possible?’ 7. The Causes of War 8. Thoughts on Our Present Discontents 9. The Sense of Responsibility

in ter n ati on al p ol i tical e c on omy

International Political Economy Economic Growth, the Environment and International Relations The Growth Paradigm Stephen J. Purdey, University of Toronto, Canada Series: Routledge Advances in International Political Economy 2010: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-54850-2: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86339-8 For more information, visit:


Politics of Segmentation Party Competition and Social Protection in Europe Georg Picot, University of Heidelberg, Germany Series: Routledge/EUI Studies in the Political Economy of the Welfare State This analyses the impact of party competition on reforms of unemployment benefits in Europe. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Overview 2. Party Competition and Social Policy Development 3. Comparing Italy and Germany Part 1 4. Segmentation of Unemployment Benefits in Advanced Welfare States Today 5. Similar Policy Developments in Italy and Germany up to 1945 6. Policy Divergence after World War II 7. Changing Trends during Welfare State Restructuring Part 2 8. Explaining Labour Market Reforms in Italy and Germany 9. Political Driving Forces behind Different Paths of Post War Expansion 10. Political Logics of Segmenting and De-Segmenting Reforms 11. Conclusion and Future Research December 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-66561-2: £75.00 For more information, visit:


Variety of Capitalism, Types of Democracy and Globalization Edited by Masanobu Ido, Waseda University, Japan Series: Routledge Advances in International Political Economy Variety of Capitalism, Types of Democracy and Globalization establishes the relationship between democracy and capitalism. With case studies on Italy, UK, Germany, France, Japan and China, this volume will be of interest to scholars and student of comparative politics, political economy and globalization. Selected Contents: Part 1: Theory and Method 1. Introduction H. Callaghan and M. Ido 2. Varieties of Capitalism and Types of Democracy P.C. Schmitter with A. Topor Part 2: Changing ToD-VoC Combinations in Advanced Democracies 3. Party System Change and Transformation of the Varieties of Capitalism M. Ido 4. Reversing the Causal Arrow: How Ownership Structure Shapes Party Positions in Britain, Germany and France H. Callaghan 5. Political Change and the Italian Variety of Capitalism L. Burroni and C. Trigilia 6. Between Pork and Productivity: Upending the Japanese Model of Capitalism T.J. Pempel 7. Divergent Fate of Left Parties in Political Economic Regime Transitions: Italy and Japan in the 1990s H. Magara Part 3: Emergence of New VoC in New and NonDemocracies 8. A Macro-Historical Analysis: Globalization, Party-State and Capital in China’s Emergent Capitalism C.A. McNally 9. Patterns of Political Representation and Varieties of Post-socialist Capitalism in the Era of Transnationalization L. Bruszt 10. Conclusion M. Ido

The Risk of Social Policy? The Electoral Consequences of Welfare State Retrenchment and Social Policy Performance in OECD Countries Nathalie Giger, University of Mannheim, Germany Series: Routledge/EUI Studies in the Political Economy of the Welfare State The Risk of Social Policy uses a comparative perspective to systematically analyse the effects of social policy reforms and welfare state retrenchment on voting choice. It re-examines twenty elections in OECD countries to show if and how social policy issues drive elections. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Welfare State Research: The Theoretical Background for the Research Question 3. Electoral Research and Issue Voting: The Theoretical Background for the Analyses 4. The Context: More Theoretical Background for the Analyses 5. Research Strategy, Design and Method 6. The Salience and Performance of Social Policy in Times of Permanent Austerity 7. The Impact of Social Policy Attitudes on the Incumbent Vote 8. Welfare State Retrenchment and the Incumbent Performance on Social Policy 9. Re-Election at Stake? The Impact of Social Policy on the Election Outcome 10. Discussion of Results and Conclusion 2010: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-59198-0: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83448-0 For more information, visit:

September 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-67150-7: £75.00 For more information, visit:

February 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-59823-1: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83443-5 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

i n te r n ati on al p ol i tical e c on o m y

Routledge/RIPE Studies in Global Political Economy Series Edited by Louise Amoore, University of Newcastle, UK, Jacqueline Best, University of Ottawa, Canada, Paul Langley, University of Northumbria, UK and Leonard Seabrooke, University of Warwick, UK This series, published in association with the Review of International Political Economy, provides a forum for current debates in international political economy. Forthcoming

A Critical History of the Economy



The Global Political Economy of Trade Liberalisation

The Politics of European Competition Regulation

The Textile and Clothing Industry

A Critical Political Economy Perspective

Tony Heron, University of Sheffield, UK

Hubert Buch-Hansen, Copenhagen Business School, Denmark and Angela Wigger, Radbound University, Nijmegen, the Netherlands.

Series: Routledge/RIPE Studies in Global Political Economy Examines the social, political and economic impacts of trade, paying particular attention to the textiles and clothing sector with respect to developing countries. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. The Rise and Fall of the Multifibre Arrangement 3. Assessing the Distributional Consequences of the Agreement on Textiles and Clothing 4. The United States and the European Union: T&C Trade Strategies in the Post-MFA World 5. Garment Assembly in the Caribbean Basin after the MFA: An Unravelling Developing Strategy? 6. Bangladesh: Caught Between a Rock and a Hard Place? 7. Sub-Saharan Africa and the Perils of Preferential Trade 8. Conclusion December 2011: 216 x 138: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-45490-2: £80.00

On the Birth of the National and International Economies

For more information, visit:

Ryan Walter, University of Queensland, Australia


Series: Routledge/RIPE Studies in Global Political Economy

The Political Economy of Global Remittances

This book provides a detailed intellectual and critical history of the economy, explaining how the economy came to be analytically separated from its social and political moorings in the 19th century. It offers a historical perspective on current IPE concerns, and links IPE with the growing field of contextualist intellectual history. Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Context 1. Counsellors to Government 2. Genres of Counsel and the Administrative State Part 2: Counsel on Trade 3. The State’s Strength and Wealth 4. Strength, Wealth, and State Rivalry Part 3: Political Economy 5. Smith and the Economy 6. Smith and the International Economy 7. Ricardo and the National Economy 8. Ricardo and the International Economy. Conclusion August 2011: 234 x 156: 160pp Hb: 978-0-415-58890-4: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Cosmopolitanism and Global Financial Reform A Pragmatic Approach to the Tobin Tax James Brassett, University of Warwick, UK Series: Routledge/RIPE Studies in Global Political Economy 2010: 234 x 156: 160pp Hb: 978-0-415-55217-2: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85162-3

Gender, Governmentality and Neoliberalism Rahel Kunz, University of Lucerne, Switzerland Series: Routledge/RIPE Studies in Global Political Economy

This volume examines the emergence of the global remittances trend (GRT) against the backdrop of a number of ongoing global transformations. It explores the conceptual and institutional apparatus that constitute the GRT assesses the implications beyond the intended outcome of promoting development and reducing poverty.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. A GenderSensitive Governmentality Approach 3. The GRT in the International Realm 4. The GRT in Mexico 5. The Power Technologies and Subjectivities of the GRT in Mexico 6. Resistance and Empowerment within the GRT in Mexico 7. Conclusion May 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-59062-4: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81671-4 For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:

Series: Routledge/RIPE Studies in Global Political Economy

’A critical appraisal of competition policy in Europe has long been overdue as an antidote to the cloying pro-competition orthodoxy. Wigger and Buch-Hansen provide a systematic radical overview which is refreshing, provocative and thought provoking. Above all they locate competition within a political framework which emphasises power relations and identifies winners, losers and the corporate interests behind the design of policy. This study constitutes an essential contribution to a full understanding of European competition policy and the dynamics of reform.’ – Stephen Wilks, University of Exeter, UK Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Theorising Competition Regulation: A Critical Political Economy Perspective 3. The Origins of European Competition Regulation I: National Level Developments 4. The Origins of European Competition Regulation II: The Supranational Level 5. European Competition Regulation in the Era of Embedded Liberalism 6. The Neoliberalisation of European Competition Regulation 7. Consolidating Neoliberalism: European Competition Regulation from the 1990s onwards 8. EC Competition Regulation at the Dawn of the Century: Modernisation, Contestation and Crisis 9. The Neoliberal Crusade for Bilateral and Multilateral Competition Rules 10. Concluding Remarks March 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-60579-3: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-82852-6 For more information, visit:


i n t ernat ion al political econ o my


Variegated Neoliberalism

Business and Global Governance

International Political Economy

Edited by Morten Ougaard and Anna Leander, both at Copenhagen Business School, Denmark

Debating the Past, Present and Future

Huw Macartney, University of Manchester, UK Series: Routledge/RIPE Studies in Global Political Economy

Series: Warwick Studies in Globalisation

EU Varieties of Capitalism and International Political Economy

‘Huw Macartney’s outstanding book represents a major step forward in our understanding of how neoliberalism has played out in contemporary Europe. It is also a very significant contribution to the growing literature on the role of ideas in political economy.’ – Ben Rosamond, University of Warwick, UK

Selected Contents: 1. Globalization and Financial Market Integration 2. Conceptualizing Changing Capitalisms and Gramscian Historical Materialism 3. Transnational Oriented Fractions of Capital 4. Political Agency of Transnationally Oriented Fractions 5. A Contingent Neoliberal Consensus 6. Organic Economists as Producers of Neoliberal Common Sense 7. Scientific Committees and the Atlantic Heartland 8. De-reifying the Transnational Capitalist Class 9. Conclusions 2010: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-60150-4: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83634-7 For more information, visit:

2010: 234 x 156: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-49336-9: £85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-49337-6: £25.99 eBook: 978-0-203-85026-8

For more information, visit:


Governing the Global Economy Politics, Institutions and Development Edited by Dag Harald Claes and Carl Henrik Knutsen, both at University of Oslo, Norway Series: Warwick Studies in Globalisation

Savage Economics Wealth, Poverty and the Temporal Walls of Capitalism David L. Blaney, Macalester College, USA and Naeem Inayatullah, Ithaca College, USA Series: RIPE Series in Global Political Economy

’This is an exciting and innovative book. Blaney and Inayatullah draw on the rich tradition of classical political economy to construct critical theoretical ways of refusing misleading choices between modern and savage, economy and culture, capitalism and anticapitalism in the analysis of contemporary international political economy. The book is a profound and thought-provoking contribution to postcolonial, time-travelling thinking in IR/IPE.’ – Kim Hutchings, London School of Economics, UK Selected Contents: 1. The Cultural Constitution of Political Economy 2. The Savage Smith and the Temporal Walls of Capitalism 3. Necro-economics and Steuart’s Geocultural Political Economy 4. Capitalism’s Wounds: Ferguson’s International Political Economy 5. Shed No Tears: Hegel’s Necro-Philosophy 6. Marx and Temporal Difference 7. Savage Times 2010: 234 x 156: 248pp Hb: 978-0-415-54847-2: £85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-54848-9: £22.99 eBook: 978-0-203-86495-1 For more information, visit:

Overview of the study of international political economy analysing key questions in the discipline.

Selected Contents: 1. The Global Political Economy: International Institutions, States and MNEs Dag Harald Claes and Carl Henrik Knutsen 2. The Political Economy of an Integrated Europe: Toward an Analytic Eclecticism Peter J. Katzenstein and Rudra Sil Part 1: International Institutions and Global Economic Governance 3. The West and the Rest in Global Economic Institutions Robert O. Keohane and Arild Underdal 4. Free Markets for All: The Difficulties of Maintaining a Stable Liberal World Economy Georg Sørensen 5. A New Role for the OECD? The ’Enhanced Engagement’ Strategy towards Emerging Economies Morten Ougaard 6. Paved with Good Intentions: Global Financial Integration, the Eurozone, and the Hellish Road to the Fabled Gold Standard Geoffrey R.D. Underhill 7. Reining in the Market: Global Governance and the Regulation of OTC Derivates Eric Helleiner Part 1: Domestic Institutions and Policies in the Globalized Economy 8. The African Neopatrimonial State as a Global Prototype Daniel C. Bach 9. Are Good Policies Good Politics? Kalle Moene 10. Democracy and Economic Growth: A Changing Relationship? Carl Henrik Knutsen 11. FDI-Assisted Industrial Development and EU Enlargement Rajneesh Narula and Christian Bellak 12. Japan: Dealing with Global Forces – Multilateralism, Regionalism, Bilateralism T.J. Pempel 13. Industrial Policy in an Integrated World Economy: The South Korean Paradox Chung-in Moon and Dae-yeob Yoon Part 3: Corporate Strategies in the Globalized Economy 14. Crisis… what Crisis? Exploring Multinational Enterprises’ Responsiveness to the Financial Crisis Rob van Tulder 15. Non-Triad Multinational Enterprises and Global Economic Institutions Andreas Nölke 16. States and Firms in the International Oil Market Dag Harald

Edited by Nicola Phillips, University of Manchester, UK and Catherine Weaver, University of Texas at Austin, USA

’This book captures the best contributions to the absorbing conversation that IPE has had with itself over the past few years about its origins, achievements and identity. It is essential reading for everybody interested in this important and growing part of the intellectual landscape of the contemporary social sciences.’ – Anthony Payne, University of Sheffield, UK Selected Contents: Introduction Nicola Phillips and Catherine E. Weaver Section 1: Perspectives on the ’American School’ of IPE 1. The American School of IPE Daniel Maliniak and Michael J. Tierney 2. The Old IPE and the New Robert O. Keohane 3. TRIPS across the Atlantic: Theory and Epistemology in IPE David A. Lake 4. Ontology, Methodology, and Causation in the American School of IPE Henry Farrell and Martha Finnemore 5. Of Intellectual Monocultures and the Study of IPE Kathleen R. McNamara 6. The Slow Death of Pluralism Nicola Phillips 7. The ’American School’ of IPE? A Dissenting View Randall Germain 8. Beware What you Wish for: Lessons for IPE from the Transformation of Economics Robert Wade 9. Mid-Atlantic: Sitting on the Knife’s Edge Peter J. Katzenstein Section 2: Perspectives on the ’British School’ of IPE 10. THe ’British School’ in the Global Context Robert Cox 11. Torn Between Two Lover? Caught in the Middle of British and American IPE Mark Blyth 12. IPE’s Split Brain Catherine E. Weaver 13. Political Economy, the ’US School’, and the Manifest Destiny of Everyone Geoffrey R.D. Underhill 14. Do the Left-Out Matter? Craig N. Murphy 15. Pluralist IPE: A View from Outside the ’Schools’ Helge Hveem 16. Division and Dialogue in Anglo-American IPE: A Reluctant Canadian View Eric Helleiner 17. The Proof of the Pudding is in the Eating: IPE in the Light of the Current Crisis of 2007/8 Ronen Palan Section 3: The Future of IPE 18. Mantras, Bridges and Benchmarks: Assessing The Future of IPE Jason Sharman 19. The Second Crisis in IPE Theory Jonathan Kirshner 20. The Gift of Skepticism and the Hopeful Future of IPE Louis Pauly 21. The Richness and Diversity of Critical IPE Perspectives: Moving Beyond the Debate on the ’British School’ Ian Bruff, Magnus Ryner and Bastiaan van Appeldoorn 22. The Global Financial Crisis: Lessons and Opportunities for International Political Economy Layna Mosley and David Singer 23. Towards A New Consensus: From Denial to Acceptance Benjamin J. Cohen 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-78056-8: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-78057-5: £26.99 eBook: 978-0-203-84250-8 For more information, visit:

April 2011: 234 x 156: 320pp Hb: 978-0-415-66535-3: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-66536-0: £25.99 eBook: 978-0-203-81374-4 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

c ompar ati v e p ol i t ic s


Marxism and the Global Financial Crisis Edited by Hillel Ticktin, University of Glasgow, UK The book discusses the nature of Marxist theory of crisis and applies it to the global financial crisis which began in 2007. It goes into detail into its causes in a spirited and independent manner. Selected Contents: 1. The Crisis and the Capitalist System Today Hillel Ticktin 2. ‘Its Patrimony, its Unique Wealth!’ Labour-Power, Working Class Consciousness and Crises: An Outline Consideration Marc Mulholland 3. From Marx to Goldman Sachs: The Fictions of Fictitious Capital, and the Financialization of Industry Michael Hudson 4. Value, Price and Epic Recession Jack Rasmus 5. US Economic Performance from 1929 to 2008 in Terms of the Marxian Theory of Crises, with Some Notes on the Recent Financial Crisis George Economakis, Alexis Anastasiadis and Maria Markaki 6. Greece and the World Capitalist Crisis Savas Michael-Matsas 7. Iran’s Political and Economic Crises Yassamine Mather March 2011: 246 x 174: 184pp Hb: 978-0-415-60397-3: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Marxism and World Politics Contesting Global Capitalism Edited by Alexander Anievas, University of Cambridge, UK

‘A lively, iconoclastic, but above all intelligent set of essays that shows that the marginalization of Marxism within the academy is not only politicaly unjustifiable, but intellectually counterproductive as well. A must read for those who once claimed that Marx and all his dubious thoughts had finally been consigned to the proverbial trash heap of history back in 1989.’ – Michael Cox, IDEAS, LSE, UK

Selected Contents: The Renaissance of Historical Materialism in International Relations Theory: An Introduction Alexander Anievas Part 1: The Geopolitics of Capitalist Modernity 1. Does Capitalism Need the State-System? Alex Callinicos 2. The Changing ‘Logics’ of Capitalist Competition Benno Teschke and Hannes Lacher 3. Western Hegemony and Transnational Capital: A Dialectical Perspective Kees Van Der Pijl 4. Beyond the Theory of Imperialism: Global Capitalism and the Transnational State William I. Robinson 5. Many Capitals, Many States: Logic, Contingency or Mediation? Neil Davidson 6. Globalization and Ideology: Post-Fordist Capitalism and the Politics of Imperial Consent Mark Rupert 7. To Be Or Not To Be A Reductionist Marxism—Is That the Question? John Hobson 8. Industrial Development and International Political Conflict in Contemporary Capitalism Peter Gowan Part 2: Marxism and ‘The International’ 9. Uneven and Combined Development: The Social-Relational Substratum of ‘The International’? An Exchange of Letters Alex Callinicos and Justin Rosenberg 10. Non-Synchronicity, Capitalism and Uneven and Combined Development Sam Ashman 11. The Geopolitics of Passive Revolution Adam David Morton 12. Approaching ‘The International’: Beyond Political Marxism Jamie C. Allinson and Alexander Anievas 13. Politics and the International Simon Bromley

The Future of Global Currency The Euro Versus the Dollar Benjamin J. Cohen, University of California, Santa Barbara, USA

Can the euro challenge the supremacy of the U.S. dollar as a global currency? From the time Europe’s joint money was born, many have predicted that it would soon achieve parity with the dollar or possibly even surpass it. In reality, however, the euro has remained firmly planted in the dollar’s shadow. The essays collected in this volume explain why. Because of America’s external deficits and looming foreign debt, the dollar can never be as dominant as it once was. But Europe’s money is unable to mount an effective challenge. The euro suffers from a number of critical structural deficiencies, including an anti-growth bias that is built into the institutions of the monetary union and an ambiguous governance structure that sows doubts among prospective users. As recent events have demonstrated, members of the euro zone remain vulnerable to financial crisis. Moreover, lacking a single voice, the bloc continues to punch below its weight in monetary diplomacy. The world seems headed toward a leaderless monetary order, with several currencies in contention but none clearly dominant. This collection distils the views of one of the world’s leading scholars in global currency, and will be of considerable interest to students and scholars of international finance and international political economy. Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: The Global Currency System 1. Life at the Top: International Currencies in the Twenty-First Century 2. The Euro and Transatlantic Relations Part 2: The Euro Challenge 3. EMU and the Dollar: Who Threatens Whom? 4. Global Currency Rivalry: Can The Euro Ever Challenge the Dollar? 5. Enlargement and the International Role of the Euro 6. The Euro in a Global Context: Challenges and Capacities 7. Dollar Dominance, Euro Aspirations: Recipe for Discord? Part 3: Glimpses of the Future 8. A One-and-a-Half Currency System 9. Toward a Leaderless Currency System 10. The International Monetary System: Diffusion and Ambiguity 2010: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-78149-7: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-78150-3: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-83380-3 For more information, visit:

2010: 234 x 156: 296pp Hb: 978-0-415-47802-1: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-47803-8: £26.99 eBook: 978-0-203-86186-8 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:

Comparative Politics Routledge Research in Comparative Politics Civil Society and Activism in Europe Contextualizing Engagement and Political Orientations Edited by William A. Maloney, University of Newcastle Upon Tyne, UK and Jan W. Van Deth, Mannheim University, Germany 2010: 234 x 156: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-56043-6: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85535-5 For more information, visit:


Climate Policy Changes in Germany and Japan A Path to Paradigmatic Policy Change Rie Watanabe, University of Niigata Prefecture, Japan This volume utilises a comparative approach to examine paradigm shifts in climate change policy in Germany and Japan. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Historical Background of Climate Change Issues 3. Climate Policy Changes in Japan from 1987 to 2005 4. Climate Policy Changes in Germany from 1987 to 2005 5. Beliefs of Actors in Japan and Germany 6. The Introduction of the Cap and Trading Scheme in Germany – Factors to Determine the Major Policy Change in Germany 7. A Comparative Analysis of Climate Policy Change in Germany and Japan: A Path to Paradigmatic Policy Change. Annex I: List of Interviewees. Annex II: Questionnaire Concerning Actors’ Beliefs May 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-61575-4: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81578-6 For more information, visit:


Coalition Government and Party Mandate How Coalition Agreements Constrain Ministerial Action Catherine Moury, CIES, Spain A comparative study of ministerial behaviour and coalition agreements. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Theorizing Coalition Governance 2. Methodology and Selection of Case Studies 3. Empirical Cases (Belgium, the Netherlands, Italy) 4. Cross-Country Comparison 5. Conclusion June 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-60161-0: £80.00 For more information, visit:


c o m parat ive politics


Democracy and Famine



Olivier Rubin, University of Copenhagen, Denmark

Parliamentary Oversight Tools

The Politics of Charity

Inspired by the work of Amartya Sen, whose influential hypothesis that democratic institutions together with a free press provide effective protection from famine, Democracy and Famine is a study combining qualitative and quantitative evidence, analysing the effect of democracy on famine prevention.

A Comparative Analysis

Kerry O’Halloran, Queensland University of Technology, Australia

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Presentation of Sen’s Theory of Democracy and Famine 3. Conceptualization and Operationalisation of Democracy 4. Discussion of Sen’s Understanding of Democracy 5. Famines in Bangladesh, Sudan and India 6. The Malawi Famine of 2002 7. The Niger Famine of 2005 8. Democracy and Famine – Quantitative Evidence 9. Multiple Starvation Deaths in India 10. Discussion of Other Macro-Level Causal Approaches 11. Counterproductive Democratic Mechanisms 12. Conclusion 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-59822-4: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83671-2 For more information, visit:


HIV / AIDS and Security Conflict and Gender Hakan Seckinelgin, London School of Economics and Political Science, University of London, UK Re-examines the complex relationship between gender, conflict, and the spread of HIV as a national security issue. Selected Contents: Introduction: Is There a Link between HIV/AIDS and Security? 1. Political and Social Background 2. Gender Relations 3. Gender Relations and HIV/AIDS during Conflict 4. Gender Relations and HIV/AIDS Post-Conflict 5. Politics of Knowledge: Whose Evidence Matters? 6. Bringing Gender Back In 7. Conclusion and Policy Concerns December 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-61570-9: £80.00 For more information, visit:


Inclusion and Exclusion in the Liberal Competition State The Cult of the Individual Richard Münch, University of Bamberg, Germany This book helps to understand and explain welfare state change as part of a broad and deep on going societal change of solidarity and justice. The book addresses scholars and students of political science, sociology and social policy studying welfare state change. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Material, Symbolic and Institutional Change of the Welfare State 2. Material Change: The Causes and Consequences of International Labour Division 3. Symbolic Change: The New Cult of the Individual 4. Institutional Change: Liberal, Conservative and Egalitarian Adjustment to International Labour Division 5. Relative Exclusion and Disintegration: Convergence in the Liberal Competition State? 6. Conclusion: Social Change Between Transnational Integration and National Disintegration

Riccardo Pelizzo, Griffith University, Australia and Frederick Stapenhurst, World Bank, USA Utilises a comparative approach to investigate parliaments’ capacity to oversee government activities, policies and budget legislation. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Tools of Legislative Oversight in the Lower Chambers 2. Tools of Legislative Oversight in Upper Chambers 3. Tools of Budgetary Oversight 4. Legislative Ethics and Codes of Conduct 5. Oversight Capacity: New and Old Measures 6. Control, Democracy, Good Governance and Development? 7. Conclusions November 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-61571-6: £80.00 For more information, visit:


The Funding of Political Parties Edited by Keith Ewing, Kings College London, UK, Joo-Cheong Tham, University of Melbourne, Australia and Jacob Rowbottom, University of Cambridge, UK This book explores the problems in regulating the funding of political parties and election campaigns in a comparative framework. It features case studies on in Australia, Canada, Germany, New Zealand, United Kingdom and the United States. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Part 1: The Role of Contribution Caps 2. The Role of Institutional Donations Jacob Rowbottom 3. The Trade Union Question in British Political Funding Keith Ewing 4. A Case Against Uniform Contribution Limits Joo Cheong Tham Part 2: The Role of Spending Limits 5. Spending Controls Keith Ewing and Jacob Rowbottom 6. Local Parties, Local Money and Local Campaigns Ron Johnson and Charles Pattie 7. Local Regulation and Political Activity in Britain Justin Fisher Part 3: The Role of Other Actors 8. The Press: The Media and the ‘Rupert Murdoch Problem’ Andrew Geddis 9. The Regulator: The First Decade of the Electoral Commission Navraj Ghaleigh 10. The Courts: Legal Challenges to Political Finance and Election Law Stephanie Palmer Part 4: Lessons From Abroad 11. State Intervention in Party Politics Ingrid Van Biezen 12. Canadian Political Finance Regulation and Jurisprudence Colin Feasby 13. The Transformation of the US Campaign Finance System in Presidential Elections Rick Hasen Part 5: State Funding and Party Autonomy 14. Justifications for Regulating Party Affairs Graeme Orr September 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-58001-4: £75.00 For more information, visit:

For the first time since 1601, a number of leading common law nations have almost simultaneously chosen to revise and place on the statute books the law relating to charity. The Politics of Charity examines the reasons for this and for the varying legislative outcomes. This book examines the legal framework and political significance of charity, as developed within England & Wales, contrasts this with the experiences of other common law nations and explores the resulting implications for government/sector relationships in those countries. It suggests that charity law lies at the heart of the relationship between government and the non profit sector, that there is an unmistakeable political agenda driving charity law reform and that the differential in legislative outcomes reflects important differences in the policies pursued by the governments concerned. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Part 1: Charity, Politics and the Law 2. Charity: Concept, Social Construct and Structures 3. Charity and Law 4. Charity and Politics 5. Parameters for Charity Part 2: Government and Charity: Contrasting International Models 6. International Charity Law Reform 7. The Partnership Model 8. Transitional States 9. The Open Market Model: The US Part 3: Regulating Charitable Activity: Jurisdictional Differences and their Political Significance 10. Regulating for Different Outcomes 11. Conclusion April 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-45299-1: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81904-3 For more information, visit:


The Politics of International Law and Compliance Serbia, Croatia and The Hague Tribunal Nikolas Rajkovic, Austrian Academy of Sciences, Austria This volume examines theories of politics of justice and compliance via extradition cases in Serbia and Croatia. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: The Problem of Compliance ’Theory’ as Practice 2. Rethinking ’Norm Diffusion’ as the Politics of Meaning and Influence 3. The High Politics of ’Ad Hoc’ Justice: (Re)Introducing the Problem of ICTY ’Compliance’ 4. Political Conditonality as Political Casuistry: ICTY (Non) Compliance in Post-Milosevic Serbia 5. Political Conditonality as Political Casuistry: ICTY (Non) Compliance in Post-Tudjman Croatia 6. Conclusion: The Politics of Normative Compliance and the Problem with ’Ad Hoc’ Justice September 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-67152-1: £75.00 For more information, visit:

September 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-67153-8: £75.00 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

c ompar ati v e Pol i t ic s

Routledge/ECPR Studies in European Political Science Series Edited by Thomas Poguntke, RuhrUniversität Bochum, Germany and Robert Elgie, Dublin City University, Ireland This series is published in association with the European Consortium for Political Research. It presents high quality edited volumes on topics at the cutting edge of current interest in political science and related fields. New

Administrative Reforms and Democratic Governance Edited by Jean-Michel Eymeri-Douzans, IEP, Toulouse, France and Jon Pierre, Gothenburg University, Sweden After a quarter of a century of implementation of New Public Management (NPM) reform strategies, this book assesses the major real outcomes of these reforms on states and public sectors, at both the organisational level and a more political level. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Assessing Administrative Reforms Jon Pierre and Jean-Michel Eymeri-Douzans Part 1: Administrative Reforms in Practice: Trajectories, Strategies, Acclimatizations 2. NPM Reforms Legacy: A Common Praxeologic, a Variety of Acclimatizations, a Renewed Bureaucratization Jean-Michel Eymeri-Douzans 3. Has NPM a Trust Problem? Public Sector Incentive Systems in Japan, Korea, Spain, and Sweden Carl Dahlström and Victor Lapuente 4. Administrative Reforms and the Complexification of Competencies Requested from Civil Servants: The Case of Norway Tom Christensen and Per Laegreid 5. The Un-Politics of New Public Management in Ireland Niamh Hardiman and Muiris MacCarthaigh 6. Shifting Discourses, Steady Learning and Sedimentation: The German Reform Trajectory in the Long Run Julia Fleischer and Werner Jann 7. The Rise of Managerialism as a Result of Bureaucratic Strategies and Power Games: The case of France Julie Gervais 8. Beyond the Reforms: Changing Civil Service Leadership in the European Commission Anchrit Wille Part 2: The Unanticipated Impact of Administrative Reforms: A Challenge to Democracy? 9. Bureaucracy and Democracy: Towards Result-Based Legitimacy? B. Guy Peters 10. Contending Models of Administrative Reform: The New Public Management Versus the New Weberianism Jon Pierre and Bo Rothstein 11. Markets, Morality and Democratic Governance: Insights from the UK Matthew Flinders 12. Reforming the State in France: From Public Service to Public Management? Alistair Cole 13. Assessing the Impact of Administrative Reforms on Democratic Governance: The Case of Accountability in Switzerland Aurélien Buffat and Basile Larpin 14. Administrative Reform and the Quality of Governance in Post-Socialist States: The Case of Slovenia Simona Kustec-Lipicer and Polona Kovac 15. Transforming Governance through Administrative Reforms in Emerging Countries: Mexico, South Korea and Turkey Gül Sosay 16. Conclusion Jean-Michel Eymeri-Douzans and Jon Pierre March 2011: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-55721-4: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-82033-9


Ageing Populations in Postindustrial Democracies Comparative Studies of Policies and Politics Edited by Pieter Vanhuysse, European Centre for Social Welfare Policy and Research and Achim Goerres, University of Cologne, Germany Examines generational policies, politics and electoral reform related to ageing populations in democracies. Selected Contents: 1. Mapping the Field: The Comparative Study of Generational Politics and Policies Achim Goerres and Pieter Vanhuysse 2. Explaining the Success of Pensioners’ Parties: A Qualitative-Comparative Analysis of 31 European Democracies Chapter Sean Hanley 3. The Generational Politics of Labor in Germany, Italy, and Japan: How Policies Were Implemented against Elderly Workers’ Interests Jennifer Sciubba 4. Live Longer, Work Longer? Intergenerational Justice in Retirement Age Reforms in Germany and the UK Martin Herring 5. Creating a Typology of Recent Pension Policies across OECD Countries Mehmet F. Aysan 6. The Political Determinants of the Timing of Pro-Elderly Policy Cutbacks: An Event History Analysis of Aging OECD Welfare States Marcus Tepe and Pieter Vanhuysse 7. Population Aging, the Elderly, and the Generosity of Standard and Minimum Pensions Juan Fernandez 8. The Family and the Welfare State: An Investigation of Solidarity Achim Goerres and Marcus Tepe 9. Cohort, Class and Attitudes to Redistribution: Britain and the US, 1996-2006 Jonas Edlund and Stefan Svallfors 10. How Population Policies Affect Fertility Rates and the Aging of Nations Andrej Kokkonen 11. Conclusions Achim Goerres and Pieter Vanhuysse September 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-60382-9: £75.00 For more information, visit:

Changing Government Relations in Europe From Localism to Intergovernmentalism Edited by Michael J. Goldsmith, University of Salford, UK and Edward C. Page, Londond School of Economics, UK 2010: 234 x 156: 304pp Hb: 978-0-415-54846-5: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85848-6 For more information, visit:

Dominant Political Parties and Democracy Concepts, Measures, Cases and Comparisons Edited by Matthijs Bogaards, Jacobs University Bremen, Germany and Françoise Boucek, Queen Mary University of London, UK 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-48582-1: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85011-4 For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:

New Directions in Federalism Studies Edited by Jan Erk, Leiden University, the Netherlands and Wilfried Swenden, University of Edinburgh, UK 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-54844-1: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86543-9 For more information, visit:


New Participatory Dimensions in Civil Society Professionalization and Individualized Collective Action Edited by Jan W. Van Deth, Mannheim University, Germany and William A. Maloney, University of Newcastle Upon Tyne, UK This volume explores how citizens participate in democratic politics today and the development of new participatory forms. It demonstrates that many citizens don’t find political involvement attractive and increasingly leave the floor to professional associations and opt for individualized modes of collective action. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Democracy, Professionalization and Participation Jan W. van Deth and William A. Maloney Part 1: Professionalization and Democratic Politics 2. ‘Parenting’ Civil Society Organisations through Public-Private Partnerships: A Case Study from Germany Matthias Freise 3. Entrepreneurial Participation in International Local Politics: The Case of Marseille, European Capital of Culture 2013 Nicolas Maisetti 4. Environmental Protests, Local Campaigns and the Environmental Movement in England Christopher Rootes 5. Analyzing Civil Society Organizations’ Changing Structures in the EU: Lessons from the Social Movement and Party Politics Literature Sabine Saurugger 6. Professionalization: Pushing Citizen Out? William Maloney 7. Rescuing Participation from Rational Choice Grant Jordan Part 2: Changing Democratic Engagement 8. New Modes of Participation and Norms of Citizenship Jan W. van Deth 9. A Remedy for Unequal Participation? How Welfare States Impact on Social and Political Engagement Isabelle Stadelmann-Steffen 10. The Structure and Evolution of Youth Participation: Evidence on Socialisation and Self-Selection Effects from in a Belgian Panel Study, 2006-2008 Marc Hooghe and Ellen Quintelier 11. Youth Participation from the Top-Down: Diversity and Inclusion in the Views of Government and Community Decision-Makers Ariadne Vromen 12. Deliberative Democratic Theory and Practice as a Challenge to Individualized Collective Action? Identity and Discourse in Northern New Mexico and Beyond Kersty Hobson 13. Conclusions: How Democratic is Professionalized and Individualized Political Action? Jan W. van Deth and William A. Maloney September 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-58893-5: £75.00 For more information, visit:


c o m parat ive Politics




Federal Democracies

Parliamentary Roles in Modern Legislatures

Puzzles of Government Formation

Edited by Magnus Blomgren, Umeå University, Sweden and Olivier Rozenberg, Sciences Po, Paris, France

Coalition Theory and Deviant Cases

Edited by Michael Burgess, University of Kent, UK and Alain-G. Gagnon, University of Québec at Montréal, Canada

Presenting a variety of methodological approaches, it examines the link between representative roles, institutional settings and parliamentary behaviour. It features case studies on Germany, the Netherlands, UK, France, Austria, Norway, Hungary, Australia, New Zealand and the European Parliament. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Why Legislative Roles were Abandoned and Why They are Coming Back Magnus Blomgren and Olivier Rozenberg Part 1: Analyzing Roles: Dependent or Independent Variables? 2. Roles as Dependent Variables: Determinants and Change of Legislators’ Role Perceptions Heinrich Best 3. Roles as Independent Variables: Behavioural Consequences of Representative Role Orientations Rudy Andeweg Part 2: Theorizing Roles or Emotions? 4. Fifteen Years after Westminter’s World the Motivational Approach to Parliamentary Roles Donald Searing 5. Roles as Rational Strategies: A Principal Agent Perspective Kaare Strøm Part 3: Party Constituency and Institutional Change: Three Challenges for Role Theory 6. Representation and Roles among German MPs: Rational Calculus or Habit of the Heart? Thomas Zittel 7. Party Dimensions of Representation in Westminster Parliaments: Australia New Zealand and the United Kingdom Anika Gauja 8. ’Parliamentary Roles’ in the French National Assembly: The Case for a Double Typology? Olivier Costa and Eric Kerrouche 9. MP Roles in Parliamentary Work Marcelo Jenny and Wolfgang C. Müller 10. The Controversial Impact of a Changing Political Environment on MPs’ Roles. The Case of Hungary Gabriella Ilonszki 11. The Cognitive Rationality of Role Choices: Evidences from the European Parliament Julien Navarro 12. Conclusion: Common Strategies for Avoiding Conceptual Confusion Olivier Rozenberg and Magnus Blomgren December 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-57568-3: £75.00 For more information, visit:

Political Discussion in Modern Democracies A Comparative Perspective Edited by Michael R. Wolf, Indiana University – Purdue University Fort Wayne, USA, Laura Morales, University of Manchester, UK and Ken’ichi Ikeda, Univeristy of Tokyo, Japan 2010: 234 x 156: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-54845-8: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85069-5 For more information, visit:

Edited by Rudy W. Andeweg, Leiden University, the Netherlands, Lieven De Winter, Universite Catholique de Louvain, Belgium and Patrick Dumont, University of Luxembourg This comparative volume brings together a rational choice theory perspective and the empirical testing of these theories to study government formation. Selected Contents: 1. From Coalition Theory to Coalition Puzzles Patrick Dumont, Lieven De Winter and Rudy Andeweg 2. A Neglected Alternative? Psychological Approaches to Coalition Formation Ilja Van Beest 3. When Median-Legislator Theory Fails: The Swedish Greens in 1998 and 2002 Nicholas Aylott and Torbj¢rn Bergman 4. Coalition Bargaining in an Unforgiving Environment: The Case of Bondevik II in Norway Hanne Marthe Narud and Kaare Str¢m 5. Successful Failure: Ill-conceived Pre-commitments and Welcome Bargaining Failure Paving the Way to Minority Government in Austria Wolfgang Müller 6. ‘Spain is Different’: Explaining Minority Governments by Diverging Party Goals Josep M. Reniu I Vilamela 7. The Rainbow Coalition: A Surplus Majority Coalition in Finland Ann-Cathrin Jungar 8. Purple Puzzles: The 1994 and 1998 Government Formations in the Netherlands and Coalition Theory Rudy B. Andeweg 9. The Belgian Rainbow Coalition: Optical Illusion or Mechanical Phenomenon? Patrick Dumont 10. From Puzzles to Prospects for Coalition Theory Rudy B. Andeweg March 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-35982-5: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-00781-5 For more information, visit:

The Political Representation of Immigrants and Minorities Voters, Parties and Parliaments in Liberal Democracies Edited by Karen Bird, McMaster University, Canada, Thomas Saalfeld, University of Bamberg, Germany and Andreas M. Wüst, University of Mannheim, Germany 2010: 234 x 156: 304pp Hb: 978-0-415-49272-0: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84360-4 For more information, visit:

Series: Routledge Series in Federal Studies 2010: 234 x 156: 368pp Hb: 978-0-415-55548-7: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85757-1 For more information, visit:

Defending Democracy and Securing Diversity Edited by Christian Leuprecht, Royal Military College of Canada 2010: 216 x 138: 260pp Hb: 978-0-415-57649-9: £80.00 For more information, visit:


Social Democracy A Comparative Account of the Left Wing Party Family Hans Keman, Vrije University, Amsterdam, the Netherlands Social democratic parties and the system of social democracy are a central part of political life in the West. This book focuses on social democracy as a party and a broad movement as well as a unique political force in the industrialised world. It provides a critical comparative survey of when, where, how and why social democracy developed within established capitalist democracies. Selected Contents: Power to the People 1. From Movement to Party 2. The Struggle for Political Participation and Representation 3. Cooperation or Conflict? To Be or Not to Be in Government Power to the Party 4. Making Society by Government Participation 5. State Intervention and Welfare Statism 6. Policy Performances and Electoral Backlash Power to be Lost? 7. Votes and Offices: Stateness of Social Democracy 8. Third Ways as Alternative Project 9. Party of the People or Of What? December 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-57406-8: £80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-57407-5: £26.99 For more information, visit:

The Role of Governments in Legislative Agenda Setting Edited by Bjorn Erik Rasch, University of Oslo, Norway and George Tsebelis, University of Michigan, USA 2010: 234 x 156: 304pp Hb: 978-0-415-48101-4: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83742-9 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website


The Legacies of Caribbean Radical Politics

The Rise of Regional Authority

Edited by Shalini Puri, University of Pittsburgh, USA

A Comparative Study of 42 Democracies

The year 2009 marked the 50th anniversary of the Cuban Revolution and the thirtieth anniversary of the Grenadian and Nicaraguan Revolutions, and as such offered an occasion to assess the complex legacies of revolutionary politics in the Caribbean. This volume considers what we might learn from such revolutionary projects and their afterlives, from their successes and their errors. It explores what struggles currently underway in the Caribbean share with these earlier and longer revolutionary traditions, and how they depart from them. It analyzes radical movements in Jamaica, Grenada, Cuba, Venezuela, Guadeloupe, Suriname, and Guyana, not only in their national dimensions, but in terms of their regional linkages and mutual influences.

Liesbet Hooghe and Gary Marks, both at University of North Carolina, USA and Arjan H. Schakel, University of Edinburgh, UK

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Legacies Left Shalini Puri Recovered Histories 2. Resonances of Revolution: Grenada, Suriname, Guyana Rupert Roopnaraine 3. Are you a Bolshevik Or a Menshevik?: Mimicry, Alienation and Confusion in the Grenada Revolution Merle Collins Articles 4. The Cuban Revolution and the Caribbean: Civil Society, Culture, and International Relations Rafael Hernández 5. The Content of Socialism in Cuba Today Rafael Rojas 6. Post-Grenada, Post-Cuba, Postcolonial: Rethinking Revolutionary Discourse in Dionne Brand’s In Another Place, Not Here Rafael Dalleo Maps Annalee Davis 7. History, Decolonization and the Making of Revolution: Reflections on Writing the Popular History of the Jamaican Events of 1938 Anthony Bogues 8. Revolutionary Praxis in a Post-Neoliberal Era: Media Associations and the New Coalitional Politics in Venezuela Sujatha Fernandes 9. Technification, Sweetification, Treatyfication: Politics of the Caribbean-EU Economic Partnership Agreement Norman Girvan 10. Shifting the Ground Beneath Us: Social Reproduction, Grassroots Women’s Organizing and the 2005 Floods in Guyana D. Alissa Trotz 11. Guadeloupe is Ours: The Prefigurative Politics of the Mass Strike in the French Antilles Yarimar Bonilla 12. Legacies through the Lens: A Photo Essay Kathy Sloane 2010: 246 x 189: 160pp Hb: 978-0-415-58689-4: £80.00 For more information, visit:

The Paradox of Federalism Does Self-Rule Accommodate or Exacerbate Ethnic Divisions? Edited by Jan Erk, Leiden University, the Netherlands and Lawrence M. Anderson, University of Wisconsin-Whitewater, USA. 2010: 234 x 156: 144pp Hb: 978-0-415-56494-6: £80.00 For more information, visit:

’The study of decentralized governance, multi-level politics and regional governance is of mounting importance in a broad swath of the social sciences. To date, researchers have been stuck with very dissatisfying public finance data from the IMF, horrible indicators from the Polity data set and sundry other sources of dubious value. This book fills a gaping hole in that literature.’ – Erik Wibbels, Duke University, USA 2010: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-57836-3: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-57776-2: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-85217-0

China China Policy Series Series Edited by Zheng Yongnian, East Asian Institute, National University of Singapore

China and International Relations The Chinese View and the Contribution of Wang Gungwu Edited by Zheng Yongnian, National University of Singapore

For more information, visit:

2010: 234 x 156: 384pp Hb: 978-0-415-57607-9: £95.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85003-9


For more information, visit:

Why Regions Matter: Small Worlds in Comparative Perspective


Edited by Ailsa Henderson, University of Edinburgh, UK Bringing together experts on regionalism and federalism this collection explores the impact of legislative regions on parties and voters. It reflects on the 1980 publication of Small Worlds by David Elkins and Richard Simeon, which outlined how and why voters and policies differ across Canadian provinces. Using recent data, the essays in this collection provide a comparative re-examination of the impact of regions. The book explores attitude divergence in Canada and in the US, the role and impact of regional parties in Quebec, Scotland and Bavaria, the impact of multi-level governance on how citizens understand and discharge their duties and the capacity of sub-state political systems to influence general political attitudes. The result is an empirical and analytical contribution to regionalism and federalism studies that demonstrates how and why regions matter. Selected Contents: 1. Why Regions Matter: Sub-State Polities in Comparative Perspective Ailsa Henderson 2. Regional Heterogeneity and Policy Preferences in Canada: 1979-2006 Cameron Anderson 3. Small Worlds as Predictors of General Political Attitudes Ailsa Henderson 4. The Space Between Worlds: Federalism, Public Issues and Election Issues Fred Cutler 5. Regional Subcultures and Mass Preferences Regarding Candidate Traits in the United States Christopher J. Carman and David C. Barker 6. Small Worlds in Canada and Europe: A Comparison of Regional Party Systems in Quebec, Bavaria and Scotland Eve Hepburn 7. Postscript: Many Small Worlds Richard Simeon

China Engages Global Governance Gerald Chan, Pak K. Lee and Lai-Ha Chan This book focuses on China’s increasing involvement in global governance as a result of the phenomenal rise in its global power. It provides a comprehensive assessment of China’s increasing influence over how world affairs are being managed, how other major powers are reacting to the increasing Chinese clout in global governance, and what the consequences and implications are for the evolving global system and world order as well as for China itself. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Global Governance: The Building Blocks 2. Global Governance: A Chinese View 3. Peace and Security 4. World Trade and Finance 5. Human Rights and Humanitarian Intervention 6. Environmental Protection 7. Public Health 8. Consumer Product Safety 9. Energy Security 10. Terrorism and Transnational Organized Crimes 11. Poverty Alleviation 12. Global Governance with Chinese Characteristics? August 2011: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-55713-9: £90.00 For more information, visit:

Legitimating the Chinese Communist Party Since Tiananmen

May 2011: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-66891-0: £80.00

A Critical Analysis of the Stability Discourse

For more information, visit:

Peter Sandby-Thomas, University of Nottingham, UK 2010: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-55398-8: £90.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85043-5 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:


c hina


The Domestic Sources of China’s Foreign Policy

The Institutional Dynamics of China’s Great Transformation


Regimes, Leadership, Priorities and Process

Edited by Xiaoming Huang, Victoria University of Wellington, New Zealand

Wang Xiaoqi

Lai Hongyi, University of Nottingham, UK 2010: 234 x 156: 216pp Hb: 978-0-415-56237-9: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85847-9 For more information, visit:

The Impact of China’s 1989 Tiananmen Massacre Edited by Jean-Philippe Béja, CNRS (Centre national de la recherche scientifique), Paris, France

The 1989 pro-democracy movement in China constituted a huge challenge to the survival of the Chinese communist regime. This book assesses the impact of the movement, and of the ensuing repression on the political evolution of the People’s Republic of China. It discusses how the events of 1989 are remembered and have affected China’s international relations and diplomacy; how human rights, law enforcement, policing, and liberal thought have developed over two decades. Selected Contents: Introduction: June 4th 1989: A Watershed in Chinese Contemporary History 1. June Fourth: Memory and Ethics 2. The Chinese Communist Party and 4 June 1989 —Or how to get out of it and get away with it 3. The Impact of the June 4th Massacre on the pro-Democracy Movement 4. The Chinese Liberal Camp in Post-June 4th China 5. Wang Xiaobo and the No Longer Silent majority 6. The Seeds of Tiananmen: Reflections on a Growing Chinese Civil Rights Movement 7. The Practice of Law as Conscientious Resistance: Chinese Weiquan Lawyers’ Experience 8. The Politicisation of China’s Law-Enforcement and Judicial Apparatus 9. The Enduring Importance of Police Repression: Laojiao, the Rule of Law and Taiwan’s Alternative Evolution 10. The Impact of the Tiananmen Crisis on China’s Economic Transition 11. The Tiananmen Incident and the Pro-Democracy Movement in Hong Kong 12. How China Managed to De-Isolate Itself on the International Stage and Re-Engage the World After Tiananmen 13. China and International Human Rights: Tiananmen’s Paradoxical Impact 14. A Shadow over Western Democracies: China’s Political Use of Economic Power 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-57872-1: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84260-7 For more information, visit:

This book examines the role of institutions in China’s recent large-scale economic, social and political transformation. Unlike existing literature, it offers perspectives from a variety of disciplines - including law, economics, politics, international relations and communication studies – to consider whether institutions form, evolve and change differently according to their historical or cultural environments and if their utilitarian functions can, and should be, observed, identified and measured in different ways. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Institutional Analysis and China’s Transformation: Issues and Concepts 2. China and International Institutions 3. Institution Formation, Imitation and Borrowing: Zhongguancun as a Case Study on Mechanisms of Institutional Change 4. Science and Technology Institutions and Performance in China: The Semi-Conductor Industry 5. Power, Rights and Interests: A Law and Economic Analysis of Urban Housing Demolition and Relocation in China 6. China’s Road to a Rechtsstaat: Rule of Law, Constitutional Democracy and Institutional Change 7. China’s Evolving Institutional Exclusion: The Hukou System and Its Transformation 8. China’s Changing Hukou System: Institutional Objectives, Formal Arrangements and Informal Practices 9. State Capacity, Democratic Principles and Constitutional Order: Modern State-building in Post-Totalitarian Society 10. Institutional Accumulation and Gradual Substitution: The Dynamics of Developmental Democracy in China 11. Propaganda vs. Promotion: The Political Economy of CCTV 12. Village Elections and the Institutionalization of Legitimate Authority 13. Conclusion: The Institutional Dynamics of China’s Transformation: What We Have Learnt?

China’s Civil Service Reform Series: Comparative Development and Policy in Asia As part of China’s overall reform process, China’s civil service has also been reformed, beginning in the late 1970s, undergoing a major change in 1993 with the implementation of a new Civil Service System, with the reforms continuing to unfold thereafter. This book, based on extensive original research, outlines the civil service reforms and assesses their effectiveness. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Civil Service Scope, Structure and Context 3. Reform Policy and Nationwide Implementation 4. Implementing Reform in Local China 5. State Capacity to Control 6. A Comparative Asian Picture 7. Conclusion September 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-57748-9: £85.00 For more information, visit:


China, Oil and Global Politics Philip Andrews-Speed, University of Dundee, UK and Roland Dannreuther, University of Westminster, UK Series: Routledge Contemporary China Series

2010: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-58058-8: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83687-3 For more information, visit:


China’s Soft Power and International Relations Edited by Hongyi Lai and Yiyi Lu, both at University of Nottingham, UK This book provides a comprehensive overview of China’s use of ’soft power’ and assesses the impact this is having on the world and on the process of international relations. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Soft Language, Soft Imagery and Soft Power in China’s Diplomatic Lexicon David Scott 3. The Failure of China’s Soft Power Rhetoric: The ‘Peaceful Rise’ and the Internal Debate over the Concept in China Dominik Mierzejewski 4. China’s Cultural Diplomacy: Going for Soft Power Hongyi Lai 5. Challenges for China’s International Communication Yiyi Lu 6. Challenges for China’s Harmonious Diplomacy Xiaohui (Anne) Wu and Cheng Qian 7. Debunking the Myth of China’s Soft Power: Changes in China’s Use of Foreign Assistance from 1949 to the Present Merriden Varrall 8. Is China Rising at America’s Expenses? Anti-Americanism and Pro-China Sentiments in Global Public Opinion Zixiao Yang, David Zweig, Zhengxu Wang 9. Drifting between Taoguangyanghui and Diplomatic Activism: China’s Foreign Policy as a Rising Power Suisheng Zhao 10. Managing Chinese Soft Power Yongnian Zheng and Chi Zhang November 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-60401-7: £80.00 For more information, visit:

This book provides a critical overview of how China’s growing need for oil imports is shaping its international economic and diplomatic strategy and how this affects global political relations and behaviour. It draws together the various dimensions of China’s international energy strategy, and provides insights into the impact of this on China’s growing presence across the world.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: China, Oil and Global Politics Part 1: Energy Policy, the Government and China’s Oil Industry 2. China’s Energy Challenges and Policy Priorities 3. The Wider Context of China’s Energy Policy 4. Inside China’s Energy Policy 5. China’s Growing Presence in the International Oil and Gas Arena 6. Driving Forces Behind the Internationalization of China’s Oil Industry Part 2: Energy Policy and China’s Foreign Policy 7. Integration, the West and International Energy Policy 8. The Revisionist Alternative: Energy and the Sino-Russian Axis 9. Hegemony, Oil and Asian Regional Politics 10. The Neo-Imperialist Temptation: Africa and Latin America May 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-60395-9: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81789-6 For more information, visit:

China’s Rise – Threat or Opportunity? Edited by Herbert S. Yee, Macau Polytechnic University, China Series: Routledge Security in Asia Series 2010: 234 x 156: 320pp Hb: 978-0-415-57606-2: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84269-0 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website


Overseas Chinese, Ethnic Minorities and Nationalism


De-Centering China Elena Barabantseva, University of Manchester, UK Series: Routledge Studies in Asia’s Transformations ’Elena Barabantseva’s fascinating book changes the way we think about identity and politics in China. By examining how groups at the margins – overseas Chinese and ethnic minorities – are invoked in Beijing’s nation-building and statebuilding policies, she shows how nationalism and modernization take shape in China. It challenges the view that globalization undermines the nation-state by showing how subnational, national and transnational groups can also support each other in various ways.’ – William A. Callahan, University of Manchester, UK 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-57950-6: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84546-2 For more information, visit:

Central Asian Studies Counterterrorism Policies in Central Asia Mariya Y. Omelicheva, University of Kansas, USA 2010: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-77981-4: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84494-6 For more information, visit:

Ethnicity, Authority, and Power in Central Asia New Games Great and Small


China’s Road to Peaceful Rise Observations on its Cause, Basis, Connotation and Prospect Zheng Bijian, Party School of the CPC Central Committee, China

Edited by Robert L. Canfield, Washington University, St. Louis, USA and Gabriele RasulyPaleczek, University of Vienna, Austria 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-78069-8: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84548-6 For more information, visit:

Foreword by Peter Nolan Series: Routledge Studies on the Chinese Economy


Institutional Reform in Central Asia

Zheng Bijian has been one of the most influential thinkers and policy formulators in China during its reform period. In this important book, he sets out his views and how they evolved over the reform period, including the full text of his important speeches and papers, with appropriate introductory material.

Selected Contents: Foreword Peter Nolan Part 1: Acquiring a Deeper Understanding of Ourselves in the Process of Deepening Our Understanding of the World Part 2: A Study of the ’Overall Strategy’ Connecting the Two Major Situations at Home and Abroad is of Paramount Importance Part 3: Deng Xiaoping’s New Generalization of Socialism with Chinese Characteristics Actually Mapped out in a Scientific Way China’s Unique Strategic Road to Peaceful Development Part 4: A New Period of Strategic Opportunities and a Brand New Strategic Road for the Rise of Late-Emerging Powers Modern History Has Ever Known Part 5: China Will Emerge In the World as a ’Peaceful Nation’ and A ’Civilized Nation’ May 2011: 234 x 156: 336pp Hb: 978-0-415-55271-4: £90.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81658-5 For more information, visit:

Grassroots Elections in China Edited by Kevin J. O’Brien, University of California, USA and Suisheng Zhao, University of Denver, USA 2010: 246 x 174: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-57157-9: £85.00

Politico-Economic Challenges Edited by Joachim Ahrens, Private University of Applied Sciences Göttingen, Germany and Herman W. Hoen, University of Groningen, the Netherlands This book explores key aspects of institution building as well as economic and political governance in Central Asia through an interdisciplinary approach. Selected Contents: Part 1: Overview 1. Economic Transition and Institutional Change in Central Asia: An Overview Joachim Ahrens and Herman W. Hoen Part 2: Country-Specific Investigations 2. Turkmenistan after Turkmenbashi Richard Pomfret 3. Transition Strategies in Kazakhstan and Uzbekistan since Independence: Paradoxes and Prospects Farrukh Irnazarov 4. Social Capital and the Formation of a Market Economy: The Case of Uzbekistan Manuela Troschke 5. Poverty, Governance, and Participation in Central Asia: The Example of Tajikistan Frank Bliss 6. Kazakhstan as a New Regional Power in Central Asia? Andrea Schmitz Part 3: Governance and Institutions 7. The Political Economy of Governance Reform in Central Asia Joern Graevingholt 8. The Developmental State: Lessons for Central Asia Manuel Stark 9. Informal Integration and Decentralization in Central Asia Alexander Libman Part 4: External Actors and International Structures 10. Is Russia Winning in Central Asia? Martin Spechler 11. Central Asia and Russia: Two Alternative Perspectives Alexander Libman 12. The European Union and Central Asia: A Case of Policy Transfer? Nienke de Deugd September 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-60200-6: £80.00 For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:


Party System Formation in Kazakhstan Between Formal and Informal Politics Rico Isaacs, Oxford Brookes University, UK Since the collapse of the Soviet Union, Central Asian states have developed liberal-constitutional formal institutions. However, at the same time, political phenomena in Central Asia are shaped by informal political behaviour and relations. This relationship is now a critical issue affecting democratization and regime consolidation processes in former Soviet Central Asia, and this book provides an account of the interactive and dynamic relationship between informal and formal politics through the case of party-system formation in Kazakhstan. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: In-between the Informal and Formal - Introducing Party Development in Kazakhstan and Central Asia 2. Neopatrimonialism and Party Development: A Framework for Analysis 3. Uncertain Transition: The Development of Neopatrimonialism in Kazakhstan 4. The Institutional Constraints on Political Parties: Presidency, Elections and the Law on Political Parties 5. What Type of Parties? Membership, Organisation, Ideology and Behavioural Norms 6. Passiveness and Disconnection: Parties and Society in Kazakhstan 7. Conclusion: Patrimonial Politics and Party Development Beyond Kazakhstan March 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-59023-5: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-82600-3 For more information, visit:


Violence and Resistance in Uzbekistan Matteo Fumagalli, Central European University, Hungary Showing how the combination between economic insecurity, social insecurity, and the state’s fear of any form of opposition and the declining state authority and legitimacy have all contributed to a state of fear and powerlessness among the population, the author theorises that deprived of any legal outlet for airing grievances, the country is leaning towards various forms of both violent and non-violent opposition. Selected Contents: 1. Authoritarianism, Security and (in) Stability along the Silk Road 2. Uzbekistan’s Political System 3. Opposition Politics in Uzbekistan from Birlik and Erk to Andijan 4. Continuity and Change in State-Group Relations 5. Whither Uzbekistan? October 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-48093-2: £85.00 For more information, visit:

Religion and Security in South and Central Asia Edited by K. Warikoo, Jawaharlal Nehru University, India Series: Central Asia Research Forum 2010: 234 x 156: 232pp Hb: 978-0-415-57590-4: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84023-8 For more information, visit:


a sia


Guides to Economic and Political Developments in Asia Contemporary Vietnam A Guide to Economic and Political Developments Ian Jeffries, Swansea University, UK This book provides full details of contemporary economic and political developments in Vietnam. Key topics covered include Vietnam’s success, in general, in maintaining high rates of growth in the face of inflation and the global financial crisis; continuing economic reforms; foreign trade and investment; battles against corruption; population growth; the Communist Party’s determined maintainance of power; and Vietnam’s response to public health problems such as AIDS, SARS and bird flu. Selected Contents: Introduction and Summary 1. Political Developments 2. Economic Developments 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-60400-0: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83437-4 For more information, visit:

Political Developments in Contemporary China A Guide Ian Jeffries, Swansea University, UK 2010: 234 x 156: 1040pp Hb: 978-0-415-58085-4: £125.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85084-8 For more information, visit:

Political Developments in Contemporary Russia Ian Jeffries, Swansea University, UK This book provides a comprehensive overview of political developments in Russia since late 1999. It covers all aspects of politics including central government and elections, regional government and developments in the republics, including in Chechnya and other Caucasian republics, and human rights. Selected Contents: 1. A Chronology of Political Developments since 9 December 2000 2. Human Rights 3. Developments in Chechnya and other Caucasian Republics since 22 January 2001 2010: 234 x 156: 816pp Hb: 978-0-415-60376-8: £125.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83446-6 For more information, visit:


Indian Foreign Policy

Politics and the Media in Twenty-First Century Indonesia

The Politics of Postcolonial Identity

Decade of Democracy

Priya Chacko, University of Witwatersrand, South Africa

Edited by Krishna Sen, University of Western Australia and David Hill, Murdoch University, Australia

Series: Interventions This book spans the last sixty years of Indian foreign policy from 1947 to 2008, and focuses on major moments of crisis such as the India-China war in 1962, the conducting of nuclear tests by the Hindu nationalistled government in 1998 as well as significant periods of change, such as the improvement in India’s relations with the United States in the last four years. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Identity, Foreign Policy and the Postcolonial State Part 1: The Postcolonial Subject: India as a ‘Moral Power’ 1947-1964 2. Nuclear Technology, Disarmament and the Ambivalence of Postcolonial Identity 3. Rejecting the ‘Fear Complex’: Constructing an International Politics of Friendship 4. Friendship to ‘Betrayal’: The India-China War of 1962 Part 2: Grappling with the Politics of Postcolonial Identity, 1964-1998 5. Mother India/Indira: Wither Ethical Modernity? 6. ‘Saving’ Sri Lanka Part 3: The End of Postcolonial Ambivalence? 1998-2008 7. The BJP: Making India Strong 8. The Return of the Congress 9. Conclusion October 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-66568-1: £85.00 For more information, visit:

Media, Social Mobilisation and Mass Protests in Post-colonial Hong Kong The Power of a Critical Event Francis L.F. Lee and Joseph M. Chan, both at Chinese University of Hong Kong Series: Media, Culture and Social Change in Asia

This book discusses why the Hong Kong protest movement emerged at a specific time, how it developed from a single protest into a series collective actions, and how effective it has been in changing government policy. It argues that the news media has been crucial – more so than political parties or the movement’s organisers – in determining how the protests have developed, and it examines the possible connections between the 1 July protests in Hong Kong and the pro-democracy protests in China. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: From a Critical Event to Ritualistic Protests 2. Public Opinion on the Eve of Explosion 3. Organization, Communication, and Mobilization 4. The Reshaping of Public Discourse 5. Constructing the Call for Democracy 6. Contextual Changes and Strategic Responses 7. Development of the Movement Organization 8. The Social Bases of Continual Protests 9. Making Sense of Participation 10. The June 4 Connection 2010: 234 x 156: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-59606-0: £90.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83599-9 For more information, visit:

Series: Media, Culture and Social Change in Asia

This book examines the media in the post-authoritarian politics of twenty-first century Indonesia. It considers how the media is being transformed, its role in politics, and its potential impact in enabling or hampering the development of democracy in Indonesia.

Selected Contents: 1. Reorganisation of Media Power in Post-Authoritarian Indonesia: Ownership, Power and Influence of Local Media Entrepreneurs 2. On the Border: Local Media in the Land of Papua 3. Community Radio and the Empowerment of Local Culture in Indonesia 4. Riding Waves of Change: Islamic Press in Post-Authoritarian Indonesia 5. Indonesian Journalism Post-Suharto: Changing Ideals and Professional Practices 6. Ownership and its Impact on Journalists and Their Practices 7. The Transformation of the Media Scene: From War to Peace in the Moluccas, Eastern Indonesia 8. ’Radio Active’: The Creation of Media-Literate Audiences in Post-Suharto Indonesia 9. The Construction of Women in Contemporary Indonesian Women’s Cinema 10. Media and Morality: Pornography Post Suharto 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-47652-2: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84042-9 For more information, visit:


Asia-Pacific Security Dynamics in the Obama Era A New World Emerging S. Mahmud Ali, Independent Scholar, UK Series: Politics in Asia This book examines the critical changes to the Asia-Pacific security architecture emerging in the context of shifts in the global order as the Obama Administration’s major strategic innovation and likely legacy unfold. Selected Contents: Prologue: Shifting Tectonic Plates 2. Obama’s Early Initiatives and Beijing’s Response 3. The Japan-Australia-India Strategic Triangle 4. The Kremlin’s Gamesmanship 5. ASEAN’s Security Nightmares. Epilogue: A New Cold War? July 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-67054-8: £75.00 For more information, visit:

China’s Multilateral Co-operation in Asia and the Pacific Institutionalizing Beijing’s ’Good Neighbour Policy’ Chien-peng Chung, Lingnan University, Hong Kong Series: Politics in Asia 2010: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-56914-9: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85231-6 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website


Series Edited by Duncan McCargo Southeast Asia is a dynamic and rapidlychanging region which continues to defy predictions and challenge formulaic understandings. This series will publish cutting-edge work on the region, providing a venue for books that are readable, topical, interdisciplinary and critical of conventional views. It aims to communicate the energy, contestations and ambiguities that make Southeast Asia both consistently fascinating and sometimes potentially disturbing. Forthcoming

Civil Society in the Philippines Theoretical, Methodological and Policy Debates Gerard Clarke, University of Wales, Swansea, UK This book provides a path-breaking account of civil society using the case study of the Philippines. Critically engaging with theoretical, methodological and policy debates on the analysis of civil society in the development studies, political science and sociology literature, it offers the first comprehensive, multidisciplinary, empirically-based, national-level portrait of civil society. Selected Contents: 1. Civil Society in Theory and Practice 2. Real Civil Societies: The Methodologies of Civil Society Research 3. Civil Society in the Philippines: Current Debates 4. From the Top Down: The Regulation of Civil Society in the Philippines 5. From the Bottom Up: The Social Origins of Civil Society in the Philippines 6. The Anatomy of Civil Society in the Philippines 7. Conclusion: The Future of Civil Society in the Philippines November 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-57272-9: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Decentralization and Adat Revivalism in Indonesia The Politics of Becoming Indigenous Adam D. Tyson, University of Northern Malaysia 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-78011-7: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84990-3 For more information, visit:



Transnational Islamic Actors and Indonesia’s Foreign Policy

Diminishing Conflicts in Asia and the Pacific

Transcending the State

Edited by Robin Jeffrey, Edward Aspinall and Anthony Regan, all at Australian National University

Rizal Sukma, Centre for Strategic and International Studies, Jakarta, Indonesia and Delphine Alles, Sciences Po Paris, France

Series: Routledge Advances in Asia-Pacific Studies

This book examines the growing role of transnational Islamic Non-State Actors (NSAs) in post-authoritarian Indonesia and how it has affected the making and the conduct of Indonesia’s foreign policy since the country embarked on democratization process in 1998. It considers the consequences of the parallel diplomacy undertaken by Islamic NSAs on the country’s official foreign policy interests.

Diminishing Conflicts in Asia and the Pacific identifies structures, norms, practices and techniques that have either fuelled or moderated conflicts. As such, it is an essential read for students and scholars of international relations, peace and conflict studies and Asian studies.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Political Change and the New Context of Foreign Policy Making in Indonesia since 1998 3. Islamic Non-State Actors in Foreign Policy: Outlook, Interests and Agendas 4. One Religion, Multi-Agendas, Different Strategies: NSAs Foreign Acts and Indonesia’s Image and Identity 5. Preserving Indonesia’s Image and Identity: State Responses to NSAs’ Foreign Relations 6. Conclusion

For more information, visit:

October 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-56026-9: £80.00 For more information, visit:

related journal

Rethinking Southeast Asia

Journal of Contemporary China 20th Anniversary Year Editor: Suisheng Zhao, University of Denver, USA Volume 20, 5 Issues per year Print ISSN: 1067-0564; Online ISSN: 1469-9400

Journal of Contemporary China is the only English language journal edited in North America that provides exclusive information about contemporary Chinese affairs for scholars, businessmen and government policy-makers. It publishes articles of theoretical and policy research and research notes, as well as book reviews. The journal's fields of interest include economics, political science, law, culture, literature, business, history, international relations, sociology and other social sciences and humanities.

Browse and order online:

October 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-67031-9: £85.00

The European Union and Central Asia Edited by Alexander Warkotsch, Würzburg University, Germany 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-56236-2: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86441-8 For more information, visit:


The Politics of Coalition in Korea Between Institutions and Culture Youngmi Kim, University of Edinburgh, UK Series: Routledge Advances in Korean Studies Examines how the dynamics of inter-party and intra-party coalition-building have affected governability in post-authoritarian South Korea. The main contention being that a weak institutionalisation of both the ruling party and the party system accounts for political instability and the lack of strong governability in South Korea. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Historical Background and Formation of the Korean Party System 3. Internal Factors: Party Politics and Organization 4. Regionalism and the Reform of the Electoral Law 5. Ideological Cleavages and the Debate Over the National Security Law 6. When Majority Does Not Rule: The Roh Moo-hyun and the Lee Myung-bak Administrations. Conclusion March 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-56215-7: £75.00 For more information, visit:


a sia


Routledge Advances in South Asian Studies Series Edited by Subrata K. Mitra, University of Heidelberg, Germany South Asia, with its burgeoning, ethnically diverse population, soaring economies, and nuclear weapons, is an increasingly important region in the global context. The series features innovative and original research on the region as a whole or on the countries. Its scope extends to scholarly works drawing on history, politics, development studies, sociology and economics of individual countries from the region as well those that take an interdisciplinary and comparative approach to the area as a whole or to a comparison of two or more countries from this region. Forthcoming

Decentralization, Local Governance, and Social Wellbeing in India

New Cultural Identitarian Political Movements in Developing Societies The Bharatiya Janata Party

Do Local Governments Matter?

Sebastian Schwecke, University of Göttingen, Germany

Rani D. Mullen, The College of William & Mary, USA

Applying an intercultural and comparative theoretical approach across Asia and Africa, this book analyses the rise and moderation of political movements in developing societies which mobilise popular support with references to conceptions of cultural identity.

This book examines constitutionally-mandated political decentralization across India to identify the circumstances under which local government structures can lead to improved social services and societal wellbeing. It offers a country-wide analysis of the decentralization process in India with village-level case studies in three Indian states. Selected Contents: 1. The Promise of Decentralization 2. Decentralization in India: Rooting Democracy? 3. Karnataka: Advances with the Help of Competitive Local Governments 4. West Bengal: Continuity and Domination at a Cost 5. Uttar Pradesh: Fractionalized Power and Local Government Structures 6. Conclusion: Political Power, Local Governments, and Social Welfare Appendix: Field Research Questionnaire November 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-67065-4: £85.00

Selected Contents: Foreword: New Cultural Identitarian Political Movements in a Global Perspective Hartmut Elsenhans 1. Introduction 2. The Theoretical Framework: The Concept of New Cultural Identitarian Political Movements (NCIPM) 3. Context: Politics in India 4. Ideology and Political Practice of Hindu Nationalism 5. The Rise of the BJP 6. The BJP at the Regional and at the Local Level 7. The Changing Face of the BJP 8. Conclusion: The BJP as a New Cultural Identitarian Political Movement 2010: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-59596-4: £85.00 For more information, visit:



New Dimensions of Politics in India

Jawaharlal Nehru’s Policy Choices and the Designing of Political Institutions Jivanta Schoettli, University of Heidelberg, Germany The 1950s in India were a crucial transition period when the legacy and institutions of British rule had to be transformed to fit the needs of a post-colonial state. This book analyses Indian policy-making from 1947-1964 under the Prime Minister Jawaharlal Nehru. Selected Contents: 1. The Art and Craft of Policy-Making 2. Nehru as Political Actor 3. Nehru, his World View 4. Contextualising Nehru: His Contemporaries and ‘The Structure of Opportunities’ 5. The Planning Commission 6. The Panchasheela Agreement 7. The Hindu Code Bills 8. Conclusion July 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-61522-8: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Democracy or Alternative Political Systems in Asia After the Strongmen Edited by Hsin-Huang Michael Hsiao, Academia Sinica, Taiwan Series: Routledge Contemporary Asia This book tackles the important issue of what happened to Asia’s political systems after the fall of various political strongmen. The contributors of this book show that democratic governance is only one of the three possible and feasible outcomes, the other two outcomes are either a weakening/ unstable political leadership or a sustained authoritarian system. Selected Contents: Part 1: Overview 1. The Making of Democratic Governance in Asia: After the Strongmen? Hsin-Huang Michael Hsiao and L.C. Russell Hsiao 2. Post-Authoritarian Regimes in East and Southeast Asia: The Neglected Issue of Leadership Styles during Democratization Processes Laurence Whitehead Part 2: Northeast Asia 3. Taiwan’s Democratization after the Strongmen: Leadership Matters Chih-Cheng Lo 4. After Chun Doo-Hwan: Progress of Democratization and Residue of Authoritarianism in South Korea Jong-Yil Ra 5. China after Deng Xiaoping: The Search for a Non-Democratic Development Model Steve Tsang Part 3: Southeast Asia 6. Unchanged after Changes: The Philippines after Marcos Samuel C.Y. Ku 7. Malaysia after Mahathir: Late Democratization amidst Development, the Strong Developmental State and Developmentalism Francis Kok-Wah Loh 8. Post-Suharto Indonesia: A Decade of Reformasi Peter Carey 9. Thailand After Thaksin Shinawatra: The Coup d’Etat of 19 September 2006 and the Reverse of Democratization in Thailand Hugh Pei-Hsiu Chen September 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-67725-7: £75.00 For more information, visit:


For more information, visit:

Vision and Strategy in Indian Politics


The Politics of Religion in South and Southeast Asia Edited by Ishtiaq Ahmed, National University of Singapore

The United Progressive Alliance in Power

Series: Routledge Contemporary Asia

Edited by Lawrence Saez, School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London, UK and Gurhapal Singh

This book presents comparative country case studies on the politics of religion in South and South Asia, including India, Pakistan and Indonesia.

In the aftermath of India’s general election in May 2009, this book undertakes a critical evaluation of the performance of the UPA.

Selected Contents: Preface Tan Tai Yong 1. The Politics of Religion in South and Southeast Asia Ishtiaq Ahmed 2. Religion as a Political Ideology in South Asia Ali Riaz 3. Islamism beyond the Islamic Heartland: The Case Study of Bangladesh Taj Hashmi 4. Secular versus Hindu NationBuilding: Dalit, Adivasi, Muslim and Christian Experiences in India Ishtiaq Ahmed 5. Sikh Politics and the Indo-Pak Relationship Tridivesh Singh Maini 6. Religious Nationalism and Minorities in Pakistan: Constitutional and Legal Bases of Discrimination Ishtiaq Ahmed 7. Women under Islamic Law in Pakistan Ishtiaq Ahmed 8. Religion as a Political Ideology in Southeast Asia Bilveer Singh 9. Political Islam in Indonesia Noorhaidi Hasan 10. Religion and Politics in the Philippines Raymund Jose G. Quilop 11. Creating the Muslim Majority in Plural Malaysia: Undermining Minority and Women’s Rights Maznah Mohamad 12. Keeping Politics and Religion Separate in the Public Square: Managed Pluralism and the Regulatory State in Singapore Eugene Tan 13. Transnational Religious-Political Movements: Negotiating Hindutva in the Diaspora Rajesh Rai 14. Negotiating Rights through Transnational Puritan Networks Tahmina Rashid

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Lawrence Saez and Gurharpal Singh Part 1:Governance 2. Did the Central Government’s Poverty Initiatives Help to Re-Elect It? James Manor 3. The UPA and Federalism: A Paradigm Shift? Harihar Bhattacharya 4. Educational Exclusion and Inclusive Development in India Shailaja Fennell Part 2: Secularism 5. UPA and Secularism, 2004-2009 Gurharpal Singh 6. The UPA and Muslims Steve Wilkinson 7. Beyond Identity? The UPA Rhetoric on Ssocial Justice and Reservations Rochana Bajpai Part 3: Security 8. The UPA’s Foreign Policy, 2004-2009 Kanti Bajpai 9. India’s Energy Security during the UPA Government Lawrence Saez 10. India’s Anti-Terrorism and Security Policy in the First UPA Government Rahul Roy-Chaudhury 11. Conclusion September 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-66897-2: £85.00 For more information, visit:

May 2011: 234 x 156: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-60227-3: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81713-1 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website



Russia and Europe

Social Networks and Japanese Democracy

Building Bridges, Digging Trenches

The Beneficial Impact of Interpersonal Communication in East Asia Ken’ichi Ikeda, Univeristy of Tokyo, Japan and Sean Richey, Georgia State University, USA Series: Routledge Contemporary Japan With Japan as its focus, this book examines the role of social networks and political discussion in Japanese political culture and asks whether discursive participatory democracy is indeed possible in East Asia. In order to answer this question the authors undertook the largest academic political survey ever conducted in Japan to give the book exceptional empirical credence. This data reveals how the Japanese people interact politically, concluding that through the powerful influence of social networks on Japanese political behaviour, Japan has a more globalized and less hierarchical society where Confucian culture is not dominant and where creation of a vibrant civil society is possible. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Asian-Values and Japan 3. Measuring Social Networks 4. Determinants of Social Networking 5. Social Networks, Participation and Vote Similarity 6. Social Sources of Political Knowledge in Japan 7. Social Influence on Policy Preferences 8. Tolerance and Network Diversity 9. Creating Social Networks 10. Conclusion July 2011: 234 x 156: 200pp Hb: 978-0-415-61945-5: £75.00 For more information, visit:

The Quest for Japan’s New Constitution

Edited by Kjell Engelbrekt and Bertil Nygren, both at Stockholm University, Sweden Series: Routledge Contemporary Russia and Eastern Europe With a worldwide recession, the problems as well as the opportunities in Russian-European relations are magnified. This book applies a very broad conceptual framework to analyse differences that are as relevant for Europe and the EU as it is to Russia’s immediate neighbours and, while doing so, identifies the key factors that will dominate Russia-EU ties in the next decade. Selected Contents: Preface 1. A Reassertive Russia and an Expanding European Union Kjell Engelbrekt and Bertil Nygren Part 1: Norms, Values, and Institutions 2. Russia and Europe after the Cold War: Cultural Convergence or Civilizational Clash Russell Bova 3. Perceptions of Democracy and Democratic Institution-Building – Electoral Democracy the Russian Way Bertil Nygren 4. The Theory and Practice of Reciprocity in EU-Russian Relations Tatiana Romanova 5. Beyond the Paradigm of Integration in EU-Russian Relations: Sovereignty and the Politics of Resentmen Sergei Prozorov Part 2: Moscow, Brussels and the Big Three 6. The Return of History: Hard Security Issues in the Russia-Europe Relationship Yuri Fedorov 7. Russia-EU Relations: The Economic Dimension Boris Frumkin 8. German-Russian Relations, 1992-2009 Angela Stent 9. Russia and the European Great Powers: France Isabelle Facon Part 3. ’In-Between-Europe’ 10. European Energy Policy Meets Russian Bilateralism: The Case of South Eastern Europe Kjell Engelbrekt and Ilian Vassilev 11. Ukraine’s Emerging Democracy and the Russia Factor Petro Burkovsky and Olexiy Haran 12. Riding Three Horses: Moldova’s Enduring Identity as a Strategy for Survival Patricia Fogarty 13. Conclusions and Outlook Kjell Engelbrekt and Bertil Nygren 2010: 234 x 156: 304pp Hb: 978-0-415-56105-1: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85464-8

Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series Conflict and Peacebuilding in Sri Lanka Caught in the Peace Trap? Edited by Jonathan Goodhand, School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London, UK, Benedikt Korf, University of Zurich - Irchel, Switzerland and Jonathan Spencer, University of Edinburgh, UK 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-46604-2: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83824-2 For more information, visit:


Explaining Pakistan’s Foreign Policy Escaping India Aparna Pande, Hudson Institute, USA Pakistan has over the decades become a hotbed for the terrorist ideology often referred to as Jihadism. This book investigates the underlying principles of Pakistan’s foreign policy from 1947 until the present day, and explains the rise of Jihadism as an offshoot of Pakistan’s security concerns.

For more information, visit:

Selected Contents: 1. Constructing Political Identity 2. Existential Threat 3. Strategic Depth 4. An Alliance to Ensure Survival 5. All Weather Friendship 6. Virtual Relocation 7. Pragmatic Bilateralism

The Colour Revolutions in the Former Soviet Republics

March 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-59900-9: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-82995-0

This book is a comprehensive examination of the many attempts over the last three decades to revise Japan’s constitution. As the book shows, these attempts at revision have been relatively conservative, aiming to embed in the constitution visions of a different future for Japan.

Successes and Failures

For more information, visit:

Selected Contents: 1. Conservatism: Theory and Reality in Postwar Japan 2. Framing the Issues: Conservative Criticism of Postwar Japan and the Vision of a New Japan 3. In Quest for Constitutional Reform: Introducing the Drafts Written between 1980 and 2009 4. Key Issues of Constitutional Reform and Their Meaning to the Conservative Movement

Series: Routledge Contemporary Russia and Eastern Europe

An Analysis of Visions and Constitutional Reform Proposals 1980-2009 Christian G. Winkler, Chuo University, Japan Series: Routledge Contemporary Japan

2010: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-59396-0: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84067-2 For more information, visit:

Edited by Donnacha Ó Beacháin, Dublin City University, Ireland and Abel Polese, University of Edinburgh, UK

This book explores the origins and effects, successes and failures of ’colour revolutions’ in the former Soviet Republics – the non-violent protests which succeeded in overthrowing post-communist authoritarian regimes.

Selected Contents: Part 1: The Spreading of Colour Revolutions: Achievements and Limits Georgia. Ukraine. Kyrgyzstan. Moldova. Armenia. Azerbaijan Part 2: Antidotes for the Coloured Virus: The Regimes Strike Back Belarus. Russia. Uzbekistan. Tajikistan. Kazakhstan. Turkmenistan 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-58060-1: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84895-1 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:


From Civil War to Soft Authoritarianism Ethnonationalism and Democratic Regression in Sri Lanka Neil DeVotta, Wake Forest University, USA This book shows how Sri Lanka’s civil war gradually undermined liberal democracy and caused the country to regress toward the current soft authoritarian dispensation. Selected Contents: 1. Ethnic Superordination versus Ethnic Supererogation 2. Sinhalese Buddhist Nationalist Ideology 3. The Rise and Fall of the LTTE 4. Strategizing Identities during War 5. Tamil Diaspora and the Transnational Government of Tamil Eelam 6. From Civil War to Soft Authoritarianism. Conclusion December 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-66545-2: £85.00 For more information, visit:


a sia


Mohajir Militancy in Pakistan



Violence and Transformation in the Karachi Conflict

Pakistan’s Stability Paradox

South Asian Security

Domestic, Regional and International Dimensions

21st Century Discourse

Edited by Ashutosh Misra and Michael E. Clarke, both at Griffith University, Australia

Edited by Sagarika Dutt and Alok Bansal, National Maritme Foundation, India

Pakistan, with the second largest Muslim population in the world, is a crucial country in the international system. This book identifies the factors that contribute both to Pakistan’s perceived instability and its resilience. It examines the drivers of Pakistan chronic instability and addresses the implications of its current political and security predicaments for regional, international and its own security.

This book is about the South Asian security complex which refers to security interdependencies between the states in the region but also includes the effect that powerful external actors (eg. China, the US and Russia) and geopolitical interests have/ have had on regional dynamics.

Nichola Khan, University of Brighton, UK 2010: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-55490-9: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85812-7 For more information, visit:


Nationalism and Ethnic Conflict Edited by Mahendra Lawoti, Western Michigan University, USA and Susan I. Hangen, Ramapo College, USA This book analyses the rise in ethnic mobilization, the dynamics and trajectories of these movements, and their consequences for Nepal. Selected Contents: Part 1: Introduction to Ethnic Politics and Nationalist Mobilization in Nepal 1. Ethnic Groups and Mobilization in Nepal Susan Hangen and Mahendra Lawoti 2. Ethnopolitics and Ethnodevelopment: An Emerging Paradigm in Nepal – With a Postscript Krishna Bhattachan Part 2: Historical Perspectives on Ethnic Inequality and Conflict 3. State Consolidation and Marginalization: Historical Roots of Contemporary Exclusion in Nepal Mahendra Lawoti 4. Nepali Economic History through the Ethnic Lens: Changing State Alliances with Business Elites Mallika Shakya Part 3: Identity beyond Ethnicity 5. Many Names for Mother: The Ethno-Linguistic Politics of Deafness in Nepal Erika Hoffmann-Dilloway 6. Problems of Identity for Dalits in Nepal’s Nationalist Project Steven Folmar Part 4: Nationalist, Regional and Religious Movements 7. Boycotting Dasain: History, Memory and Ethnic Politics in Nepal Susan Hangen 8. The National Muslim Forum Nepal and a Nepali Muslim ‘Nation’ Megan Adamson Sijapati 9. In Pursuit of Recognition: Regionalism, Madhesi Identity and the Madhes Andolan Bandita Sijapati 10. Refusing to Choose: The Muslim Madhesis and the Coexistence of Religious and Regional Identity in Nepal’s Tarai Mollica Dastider Part 5: Trends of Nepal’s Ethnic and Nationalist Movements and Conflicts 11. Dynamics of Mobilization: Trajectories of Dalit, Indigenous Nationalities and Madhesi Movements Mahendra Lawoti 12. Ethnic Politics and Conflicts: Future Prospects Mahendra Lawoti September 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-78097-1: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Nationbuilding, Gender and War Crimes in South Asia Bina D’Costa, Australian National University 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-56566-0: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Political Islam and Governance in Bangladesh Edited by Ali Riaz, Illinois State University, USA and C. Christine Fair, RAND Corporation 2010: 234 x 156: 200pp Hb: 978-0-415-57673-4: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84530-1 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

Selected Contents: Part 1: Domestic Dimensions 1. Understanding the Unstable Nature of Pakistan’s Triadic Politics 2. Judicialization of Politics in Pakistan: Constitutional and Political Challenges and the Role of the Judiciary 3. What are they teaching them at Schools Nowadays? Understanding Pakistan’s Social Revolution and Seminary Education 4. Women, Media, Equity and Equality: The Pakistani Context 5. The Militants’ Landscape: Pakistan’s Islamist Organizations and Their Impact on the Body Politic Part 2: Regional Dimensions 6. The India-Pakistan Peace Process 7. The State of Jihadi Organisations in Pakistan and Their Regional and International Linkages 8. PakistanAfghanistan Relations 9. The Evolution of the Pakistani Taliban Part 3: International Dimensions 10. Pakistan-US Relations: An Inconvenient Partnership of Convenience 11. Testing China’s Rise: China-Pakistan Relations 12. Pakistan and the ‘Four Faces’ of Nuclear Terrorism: A Preliminary Assessment November 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-61948-6: £85.00 For more information, visit:

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Theorizing Regional Security Sagarika Dutt State-Centric Approaches to Security 3. India-Pakistan Relations and the Kashmir Issue: An Historical Perspective Ashok Behuria 4. Afghanistan and the War on Terror Sita Bali 5. China and South Asia in the 21st Century: Conflict and Co-operation Tridib Chakraborti 6. Nuclear Weapons in South Asia: Theoretical Implications Nicolas Blarel Identity, Democracy and Order 7. Maoists in Power: Emergence of a New Nepal B.C. Upreti 8. Islamic Revivalism and Politics in Contemporary Pakistan Kunal Mukherjee 9. Ethno-Nationalism in Pakistan Alok Bansal 10. Beyond Divisive Nationalisms in Sri Lanka: Some New Perspectives on Identity and Democracy in the ‘Hybrid Island’ Martin Mulligan 11. Insurgencies in the North-East Namrata Goswami The Changing Security Agenda 12. Impact of Climate Change in South Asia Sreeradha Datta 13. Politics of Energy Pipelines in South Asia Shebonti Ray Dadwal 14. The Future of Indo-US Nuclear Energy Cooperation Sagarika Dutt 15. Multilateral Economic Co-operation and the Emergence of Regional and Sub-Regional Organisations in South Asia: An Assessment Mohor Chakraborti 16. Human Security in South Asia and the Role of UN Agencies Sagarika Dutt. Conclusion September 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-61891-5: £85.00 For more information, visit:


South Asia in the New World Order

The State in India after Liberalization

The Role of Regional Cooperation

Interdisciplinary Perspectives

Shahid Javed Burki, Professional Economist

Edited by Akhil Gupta, University of California, USA and Kalyanakrishnan Sivaramakrishnan, Yale University, USA

Rapid changes have taken place in the structure of the global economy, and this book looks at how South Asia can take advantage of these changes. The author argues that the developing global economy will be more complex than originally thought, that instead of a bipolar model with two countries, the US and China, at the centre, it will be multipolar with eight centres of economic activity, including India. Selected Contents: 1. Prologue 2. Challenges and Opportunities 3. Reshaping the Global Economy: The Dawn of the Asian Century? 4. History’s Many Burdens 5. South Asia May Have Turned the Corner 6. The South Asian Way: A Non-Conventional Approach to the Making of Economic Policies 7. A Multilayered World: Regional Integration as a Determinant of Sustained National Growth 8. South Asia: Future Growth Scenarios With or Without Integration March 2011: 234 x 156: 212pp Hb: 978-0-415-58726-6: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83006-2 For more information, visit:

2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-77553-3: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84685-8 For more information, visit:


Transforming Urban Water Supplies in India The Role of Reform and Partnerships in Globalization Govind Gopakumar, Concordia University, Canada This book is a unique study of the politics of water supply infrastructures in three metropolitan cities in contemporary India – Bangalore, Chennai and Kochi. Selected Contents: 1. Globalization and Infrastructures 2. Studying Water Reform in India 3. Transmitting Reform Policies 4. Governing Urban Water Supply Regimes 5. Forging Partnerships, Transforming Water Supply Regimes 6. Conclusion: Globalization and Infrastructure in India September 2011: 234 x 156: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-67067-8: £85.00 For more information, visit:

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website


Routledge Contemporary Southeast Asia Series New

Ending Forced Labour in Myanmar Engaging a Pariah Regime Richard Horsey The International Labour Organization’s (ILO) efforts since the early 1990s to address the forced labour situation in Myanmar represent a rare example of success in influencing the behaviour of that regime, and this book gives a first-hand account of these efforts. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. The Commission of Inquiry 2. Enforcement Efforts 3. Engaging the Regime 4. A Permanent Presence in Myanmar 5. Successes and Difficulties 6. Crisis and Re-Engagement 7. Conclusion February 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-60077-4: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-82993-6 For more information, visit:

Environmental Cooperation in Southeast Asia ASEAN’s Regime for Trans-boundary Haze Pollution



Local Politics in Indonesia Pathways to Power

The Political Resurgence of the Military in Southeast Asia

Nankyung Choi, City University of Hong Kong

Conflict and Leadership

Despite only a decade of democratic reform, elections and political parties have become so embedded in Indonesia’s political life that both Indonesians and foreign observers seem to have no difficulty in crediting Indonesia as the world’s third largest democracy. This book explores how local elections have affected Indonesia’s democracy and political dynamics.

Edited by Marcus Mietzner, Australian National University

Selected Contents: Introduction: Decentralizing Democracy? 1. Democracy and Local Power Struggle 2. Winning Mayorship by 21 Votes: Yogyakarta’s 2001 Mayoral Election 3. The Rise of Local Elites, with Money and Sosok: The Riau Archipelago’s 2005 Gubernatorial Election 4. Oligarchic and Paralyzed Political Parties: Batam’s 2006 Mayoral Election 5. The Reassertion of Patrimonial Politics: Depok’s and Banyuwangi’s 2005 Elections 6. Conclusion: Political Change and Pathways to Power August 2011: 234 x 156: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-61731-4: £85.00 For more information, visit:


Security, Development and Nation-Building in Timor-Leste A Cross-Sectoral Assessment

Paruedee Nguitragool, Albert-Ludwigs-Universität Freiburg, Germany

Edited by Vandra Harris, Flinders University, Australia and Andrew Goldsmith, University of Wollongong, Australia

2010: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-58214-8: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84488-5

Despite Timor-Leste’s high expectations when it became independent from Indonesia in 2002, the country is ranked among the least developed countries in the world. This book draws together the perspectives of practitioners, policy-makers and academics on the international efforts to rebuild the world’s newest nation.

For more information, visit:


Justice and Conflict Resolution in East Timor Integrating Indigenous Approaches into a “New Subsistence State” Rod Nixon, Charles Darwin University, Australia This book proposes the typology of the New Subsistence State as a conceptual tool for understanding governance challenges typically faced in jurisdictions characterised by subsistence social and economic relations. Selected Contents: 1. States, Weak States and New Subsistence States 2. State Development in East Timor: Geographic and Historical Factors in the Pre-Colonial and Colonial Periods 3. The Emergence of Politics and Political Conflict: Developments April 1974 to December 1975 4. The Indonesian Period: An Assessment of the Consequences for State Development 5. The Transition to Statehood 6. The RDTL State: The First Five Years 7. East Timorese Systems of Justice and Conflict Resolution 8. The Role of Suco Justice Principles in an Emerging New Subsistence State September 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-66573-5: £85.00 For more information, visit:

Selected Contents: Foreword Julio Tomás Pinto Part 1: Setting the Scene 1. The Struggle for Independence was Just the Beginning Vandra Harris and Andrew Goldsmith 2. The Nation-Building Agenda in Timor-Leste M. Anne Brown Part 2: Society and Culture 3. Women in the Post-Conflict Moment in Timorese Society Sara Niner 4. Anatomy of a Conflict: The 2006-7 Communal Violence in East Timor James Scambary 5. The Politics of Culture and the Culture of Politics: A Case Study of Gender and Politics in Lospalos, Timor-Leste Yvonne Corcoran-Nantes Part 3: Justice, Law and Security 6. The Legal Profession in Timor-Leste’s Justice Sector Reconstruction: Opportunities and Restraints Andrew Marriott 7. Promoting the Rule of Law in Timor-Leste Laura Grenfell 8. Timor-Leste Police Development Program (TLPDP): Lessons in Capacity Building Approaches Grant Edwards and Tess O’Donnell 9. Out of Step? Multilateral Police Missions, Culture and NationBuilding in Timor-Leste Andrew Goldsmith and Vandra Harris Part 4: Economy and Demography 10. Timor-Leste and the Resource Curse? An Assessment Andrew Rosser 11. Demography of Timor-Leste: A Brief Overview and Some Implications for Development and Security Gouranga Dasvarma 12. Timor-Leste’s Future Population Growth and its Economic Implications Udoy Saikia and Merve Hosgelen Part 5: Looking Forward 13. Timor-Leste’s Future(s) 2010-2020 Vandra Harris and Andrew O’Neil June 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-60124-5: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-82819-9 For more information, visit:

This book examines the role of the military in Southeast Asian politics, focusing particularly on developments since 2001. Each chapter addresses the role of the military in the politics of a particular country, including Burma, Thailand, the Philippines, Vietnam, East Timor, Indonesia and Singapore. Selected Contents: 1. Conflict and Leadership: The Resurgent Political Role of the Military in Southeast Asia 2. The Armed Forces of Burma: The Constant Sentinel 3. Thaksin, the Military and Thailand’s Protracted Political Crisis 4. Military Politics in Contemporary Vietnam: Political Engagement, Corporate Interests and Professionalism 5. The Military in Philippine Politics: Still Politicized and Increasingly Autonomous 6. The Armed Forces in Timor-Leste: Politicization through Elite Conflict 7. The Political Marginalization of the Military in Indonesia: Democratic Consolidation, Leadership and Institutional Reform 8. The Armed Forces and Politics in Singapore: The Persistence of Civil-Military Fusion August 2011: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-46035-4: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81046-0 For more information, visit:


The Politics of Religion in Indonesia Syncretism, Orthodoxy, and Religious Contention in Java and Bali Edited by Michel Picard and Rémy Madinier, both at French National Center for Scientific Research (CNRS) Indonesia is a remarkable case study for religious politics. While not being a theocratic country, it is not secular either, with the Indonesian state officially defining what constitutes religion, and every citizen needing to be affiliated to one of them. This book focuses on Java and Bali, and the interesting comparison of two neighbouring societies shaped by two different religions - Islam and Hinduism. Selected Contents: Introduction: ’Agama’, ’Adat’, and the Pancasila Michel Picard Part 1: Java 1. The Catholic Politics of Inclusiveness: A Jesuit Epic in Central Java in the Early Twentieth Century and its Memory Remy Madinier 2. The Constrained Place of Local Tradition: The Discourse of Indonesian Traditionalist Ulama in the 1930s Andree Feillard 3. Where Have All The Abangan Gone? Religionization and the Decline of Non-Standard Islam in Contemporary Indonesia Robert Hefner 4. The Return of Pancasila: Secular vs. Islamic Norms, Another Look at the Struggle for State Dominance in Indonesia Francois Raillon Part 2: Bali 5. From Agama Hindu Bali to Agama Hindu and Back: Towards a Relocalization of the Balinese Religion? Michel Picard 6. A New Perspective for ’Balinese Hinduism’ in the Light of the Pre-Modern Religious Discourse: A TextualHistorical Approach Andrea Acri 7. The Withdrawal of the Gods: Remarks on Ritual Trance Possession and its Decline in Bali Annette Hornbacher 8. Spiritualised Politics and the Trademark of Culture: Political Actors and their Use of Adat and Agama in Post-Suharto Bali Brigitta Hauser-Schaublin May 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-61311-8: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81704-9 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:


a sia


Cambodia’s Neoliberal Order


Violence, Authoritarianism, and the Contestation of Public Space

Taiwan’s Democracy

Simon Springer, National University of Singapore Series: Routledge Pacific Rim Geographies 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-56819-7: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84896-8 For more information, visit:


Gender, Development and the State in India Carole Spary, Warwick University, United Kingdom Series: Routledge Research on Gender in Asia Series This book explores how three key factors – institutions, discourse and agency – influence the formation of state policy on gender and development in India in the post-1990 period. Spary goes on to examine how this issue plays out at multiple levels of governance – at both the national and the subnational (state) level in federal India. Selected Contents: Part 1: Contextualising Gender and Development Policy in India 1. Introduction 2. Analysing Gender and Development in India: Institutions, Discourse and Agency 3. Mapping Indian National Policy Since the 1990s Part 2: Gender and Development Policy and Multi-Level Governance 4. The Broader Social Context: A Profile and History of Two Indian States 5. The Gendered Institutional Context of State-Led Development 6. State Discourses of Gendered Development 7. Gendered Developmental Subjectivities and Agency 8. Conclusion November 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-61060-5: £85.00 For more information, visit:

Religion, Politics and Gender in Indonesia Disputing the Muslim Body Sonja van Wichelen, University of Western Sydney, Australia Series: Routledge Research on Gender in Asia 2010: 234 x 156: 184pp Hb: 978-0-415-49724-4: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85065-7 For more information, visit:

Human Security in Southeast Asia Yukiko Nishikawa, Mahidol University, Thailand Series: Routledge Security in Asia Pacific 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-47868-7: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85045-9 For more information, visit:

Southeast Asia and the Rise of Chinese and Indian Naval Power

Economic and Political Challenges

Between Rising Naval Powers

Edited by Robert Ash, School of Oriental and African Studies, UK, John W. Garver, Georgia Institute of Technology, USA and Penelope Prime, Mercer University, USA

Edited by Sam Bateman and Joshua Ho, both at Nanyang Technological University, Singapore

Series: Routledge Research on Taiwan Series This book analyses the political and economic challenges Taiwan has faced since since its democratic revolution began with the lifting of martial law in 1987. Taiwan’s Democracy will be of huge interest to students and scholars of Taiwan studies, Chinese politics and economics, international politics and economics, and development studies. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction John Garver Part 1: Constitutional Debate Amidst Political Challenges 2. The Politics of Constitutional Reform in Taiwan Shelley Rigger 3. Negotiating National Identity in Taiwan: Between Nativisation and De-Sinicisation Christopher R. Hughes 4. The Polarization of Taiwan’s Party Competition in the DPP Era Dafydd Fell Part 2: Economic Restructuring in the Global Context 5. Is the Taiwan Model of Growth, Human Resource Development and Equity Sustainable in the Twenty-First Century? Anne Booth 6. Taiwan’s Industrial Policy and the Economic Rise of the PRC: Opportunities and Challenges Yun-Peng Chu and Gee San 7. Trade, Investment and Technological Upgrading: Opportunities and Challenges Facing Taiwan Barry Naughton 8. Globalization, Dynamic Comparative Advantage and Taiwan’s Drive for Sustainable Development Peter C.Y. Chow July 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-60457-4: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-60458-1: £25.99 For more information, visit:


ASEAN Regionalism Co-operation, Values and Institutionalisation Christopher Roberts, University of Canberra, Australia Series: Routledge Security in Asia Pacific This book examines the key motivations for and challenges to greater regional integration in Southeast Asia. It demonstrates how security and economic concerns – domestic, regional and international – have either contributed to, or detracted from, an increased level of unity and cooperation in ASEAN. It also explores how the patterns of interaction and socialization generated by these issues, together with the nature of domestic political systems, have affected the emergence of common values, norms and interests. It covers the full range of issues confronting ASEAN at present, and the full range of ASEAN countries, and discusses both developments in ASEAN to date and also likely future developments.

Series: Routledge Security in Asia Pacific 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-55955-3: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85602-4 For more information, visit:


Southeast Asia and the Rise of China The Search for Security Ian Storey, Institute of Southeast Asian Studies, Singapore Series: Routledge Security in Asia This book is the first to comprehensively chart the development of Southeast Asia’s relations with the People’s Republic of China (PRC) from 1949 to 2010, detailing each of the eleven countries’ ties to China. In addition to assessing bilateral ties, it also examines the institutionalization of relations between the Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN) and China, and is a timely contribution to Asia Pacific security Studies. Selected Contents: Part 1: The Evolution of Southeast Asia-China Relations, 1949-2010 1. Southeast Asia and China and the Cold War: Aversion, Alliance, Accommodation 2. Southeast Asia and China in the 1990s: Engagement and Hedging 3. Southeast Asia and China in the New Century, 2000-2010 Part 2: Mainland Southeast Asia and the PRC 4. Vietnam and China: Steering a Path Between Hostility and Dependence 5. Thailand and China: A Special Relationship 6. Burma/Myanmar and China: From Deference to Dependency 7. Laos and China: New Opportunities Test Old Loyalties 8. Cambodia and China: A Tightening Relationship Part 3: Maritime Southeast Asia and the PRC 9. Indonesia and China: Ambivalent Relations 10. Malaysia and China: Rhetoric and Reality 11. Singapore and China: The Lion City Engages the Emerging Dragon 12. The Philippines and China: Mischief in the Reefs 13. Brunei and China: Distant Relations 14. East Timor and China: Beijing Looks to Secure Long-Term Interests May 2011: 234 x 156: 352pp Hb: 978-0-415-32621-6: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81655-4 For more information, visit:

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Security, Identity and Cooperation in International Relations 2. The Rise of Southeast Asia and the Search for Regional Order 3. ASEAN Into the Third Decade: Institutional Responses, Exogenous Engagement and Membership Expansion 4. Thailand, the Philippines and Indonesia: Domestic Developments and Regional Effects 5. Myanmar in ASEAN: A Challenge to Cohesion and the ASEAN Way? 6. Contemporary Challenges: The Limits to Economic and Security Cooperation 7. Regionalism Anew? Institutional Responses and their Limitations. Conclusion: Retrospect and Prospects July 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-49001-6: £90.00 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website


Gender and Radical Politics in India



Magic Moments of Naxalbari (1967-1975)

Political Agency and Gender in India

Taiwanese Business or Chinese Security Asset

Mallarika Sinha Roy, Roskilde University, Denmark

Manuela Ciotti, University of Edinburgh, UK

Series: Routledge Studies in South Asian History

Series: Routledge/Edinburgh South Asian Studies

A Changing Pattern of Interaction between Taiwanese Businesses and Chinese Governments

This book analyses the participation of women in the Naxalbari movement and their experiences. It makes a significant contribution to the understanding of radical communist politics in South Asia, particularly in relation to issues concerning the role of women in radical politics. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: In Search of the Definition of Naxalbari 2. Through the Looking Glass of Gender 3. Multiple Patriarchies: Politics, Power, and Masculinity 4. Speaking Silence: Continuous Politics and Discrete Memory 5. Acts of Agency: Political Activism and Identity in Women’s Words 6. Weapons and Wounds: The Discourse of Violence 7. Conclusion: Third World, Second Sex: Sisterhood of Resistance 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-56235-5: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84595-0 For more information, visit:

This book explores the distinctive forms of women’s political engagement in democratic politics in contemporary India. It provides an example of how women have adapted to the modern political climate in which underdevelopment and inaccessibility of state institutions often make this role essential in everyday life. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Contextualising Political Agency 3. The Conditions of Politics 4. Women’s States 5. A Gendered Déjà Vu? Women’s Political Agency between Mimicry and Assertion 6. Forgetting Caste? 7. At the Margins of Feminist Politics? 8. Conclusions: Agency, Politics and Society December 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-48273-8: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Forthcoming New

Human Security, Transnational Crime and Human Trafficking

The Politics of Reconstruction and Development in Sri Lanka Eva Gerharz, University of Bielefeld, Germany

Asian and Western Perspectives

Series: Routledge/Edinburgh South Asian Studies

Edited by Shiro Okubo, Ritsumeikan University, Japan and Louise Shelley, George Mason University, USA

This book presents a comprehensive insight into the politics of reconstruction and development in Sri Lanka. Based on extensive empirical fieldwork, it elaborates how development was shaped by interplay and cooperation, but also by the disparities and conflicts between a variety of local and intervening actors. An innovative contribution, it links the analysis of local reconstruction with contemporary phenomena of transnationalization, diasporization, and globalization.

Series: Routledge Transnational Crime and Corruption This book fills a gap in the current literature by examining transnational crime, human trafficking and its implications for human security from both Western and Asian perspectives. Selected Contents: Part 1: Transnational Crime and Human Security 1. Globalization, Human Security, and the Right to Live in Peace 2. Human Security Objectives and the Fight against Transnational Organized Crime and Terrorism Part 2: Transnational Organized Crime and the Legal Reponse 3. Transnational Organized Crime: The German Response 4. International Organized Crime Operating in Western Europe: The Judicial and Police Approach Against Organized Crime in the European Union 5. Crime in Japan and Its Relation to International Organized Crime 6. Drug Trafficking in Korea Part 3: Human Smuggling and Trafficking 7. International Trafficking: An Important Component of Transnational Crime 8. Foreign Women’s Life and Work in the Entertainment Sector of Korea from the Human Trafficking Perspective 9. Trafficking in Persons in the Americas: An Overview Part 4: Responding to Human Smuggling and Trafficking 10. The EU Combat against Illegal Immigration, Smuggling, and Trafficking in Human Beings: Its Impact on Spanish Law 11. Japanese Experience and Response in Combating Trafficking 12. The Trafficking of Thai Women to Japan and Countermeasures of the Thai Government

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Sri Lanka between War and Peace: National Politics and the Global Development Regime 3. A Tamil Homeland: Jaffna Peninsula and the Construction of a Diaspora 4. Who Does Development? 5. Cooperation, Coalition, Conflict: Shaping Transformations 6. Development, Reconstruction and Social Change 7. Translocal Development Visions between Peace and War September 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-58229-2: £80.00 For more information, visit:

February 2011: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-43701-1: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83195-3 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:

Chun-Yi Lee, University of Duisberg-Essen, Germany Series: Routledge/Leiden Series in Modern East Asian Politics and History Combining government/business theory with empirical studies, this book is the first comprehensive work dealing with the impact of cross-Strait relations on Taiwanese business. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. State–Society/ Government–Business Relations 3. Complementary Interests of Central and Local Chinese Governments 4. The Interaction Between Taiwanese Businesses and Local Chinese Governments from 1987 to 1993 5. The Interaction Between Taiwanese Businesses and Local Chinese Governments from 1994 to 1999 6. The Interaction Between Taiwanese Businesses and Local Chinese Governments from 2000 to 2004 7. The Interaction Between Taiwanese Businesses and Local Chinese Governments from 2005 to 2009 8. Conclusion August 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-57593-5: £75.00 For more information, visit:


East Asian Transformation On the Political Economy of Dynamism, Governance and Crisis Jeffrey Henderson, University of Bristol, UK

This book brings together benchmark essays in the field of global political economy, covering the key politicaleconomic issues of East Asian development: the relation between the state and markets; the changing nature of economic governance and its relation to inequality; and the rise of China and its international consequences.

Selected Contents: Preface: An East Asian Journey. Acknowledgements 1. Making Sense of East Asian Transformation 2. Danger and Opportunity in the Transformation Process 3. States and Transformation 4. Economic Crises and Governance Failures 5. Governing Growth and Inequality 6. Limits to Industrialization with Jeffrey Henderson and Richard Phillips 7. China and Global Development 8. Towards a Global-Asian Era? Endnotes. References. Index February 2011: 234 x 156: 184pp Hb: 978-0-415-54791-8: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-54792-5: £25.99 eBook: 978-0-203-83313-1 For more information, visit:


a sia


Indian Political Thought A Reader Edited by Aakash Singh, Luiss University, Italy and Silika Mohapatra, University of Delhi, India This Reader provides a comprehensive introduction to the study of contemporary Indian political theory. It gives students a clear introduction to the most influential literature in the field. Tracing the development of the discipline, it brings together contributions by outstanding and well-known academics on contemporary Indian political thought. Presenting a canon of names and offering a framework for further research within the broad thematic categories, this is a timely and invaluable reference tool. Selected Contents: Foreword. Introduction: What is Indian Political Thought? Aakash Singh and Silika Mohapatra Part 1: Provocation 1. The Poverty of Indian Political Theory Bhikhu Parekh Part 2: Evocation 2. Gandhi’s Ambedkar Ramachandra Guha 3. The Quest for Justice: Evoking Ghandi Neera Chandhoke 4. Tagore and His India Amartya Sen Part 3: Secularization 5. Is Secularism Alien to Indian Civilization? Romila Thapar 6. Secularism Revisited: Doctrine of Destiny or Political Ideology? T.N. Madan 7. The Distinctiveness of Indian Secularism Rajeev Bharghava Part 4: Communalization 8. The Blindness of Insight: Why Communalism in India is about Caste Dilip M. Menon 9. In Search of Integration and Identity: Indian Muslims since Independence Mushiral Hasan 10. Sikh Fundamentalism: Translating History into Theory Harjot Oberoi Part 5: Modernization 11. Gandhi, Newton and the Enlightenment Akeel Bilgrami 12. Scientific Temper: Arguments for an Indian Enlightenment Meera Nanda 13. Outline of a Revisionist Theory of Modernity Sudipta Kaviraj Part 6: Reconstruction 14. Reconstructing Childhood: A Critique of the Ideology of Adulthood Ashis Nandy 15. Subaltern Studies as Postcolonial Criticism Gyan Prakash 16. The Commitment to Theory Homi Bhabha Part 7: Emancipation 17. Justice of Human Rights in Indian Constitutionalism Upendra Baxi 18. Emancipatory Feminist Theory in Postcolonial India Ratna Kapur 19. Righting Wrongs Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak Part 8: Conclusion 20. The Poverty of Western Political Theory: Concluding Remarks on Concepts like ‘Community’ East and West Partha Chatterjee 2010: 246 x 174: 328pp Hb: 978-0-415-56293-5: £85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-56294-2: £25.99 For more information, visit:

Religion and Politics in South Asia

The Diplomatic History of Postwar Japan

Edited by Ali Riaz, Illinois State University, USA

Edited by Makoto Iokibe, National Defence Academy of Japan & Kobe University, Japan

This book presents a comprehensive analysis of the interaction of religion and politics in Afghanistan, Bangladesh, India, Nepal, Pakistan and Sri Lanka. Although the specific circumstances of each country are different, in recent decades, religion, religio-political parties, and religious rhetoric have become dominant features of the political scenes in all six countries. The contributors offer a thorough examination of these developments by presenting each country’s political system and the socio-economic environment within which the interactions are taking place. Selected Contents: Introduction: Three Arguments about Religion-Politics Nexus Ali Riaz 1. The Strategic Use of Islam in Afghan Politics Abdulkader Sinno 2. The Politics of Islamization in Bangladesh Ali Riaz 3. Religion, Politics and Violence in India Amalendu Misra 4. Nepal: From Hindu Monarchy to Secular Democracy Subho Basu 5. Pakistan: A State for the Muslims or an Islamic State? Farhat Haq 6. Politicization of Buddhism and Electoral Politics in Sri Lanka A.R.M. Imtiyaz. Appendix. Glossary 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-77800-8: £85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-77801-5: £25.99 eBook: 978-0-203-85942-1 For more information, visit:

Strategic Partnerships in Asia Balancing without Alliances Vidya Nadkarni, University of San Diego, USA

This book examines the nature and implications of the increasing interaction among three secondary powers in the world: China, Russia and India. It provides an in-depth analysis of the complex and often contradictory goals underlying their emerging strategic partnerships along with an assessment of the role these partnerships play in the larger regional and global contexts. In particular, it focuses on the important region of Asia/ Eurasia, where these countries seek to increase their influence and compete against the prominence of the United States.

Translated and Annotated by Robert D. Eldridge, Osaka University, Japan

Winner of the prestigious Yoshida Shigeru Prize 1999 for the best book in public history when it was published in it’s original Japanese, this book presents a comprehensive and up-to-date overview of Japan’s international relations from the end of the Pacific War to the present. Written by leading Japanese authorities on the subject, it makes extensive use of the most recently declassified Japanese documents, memoirs, and diaries. It introduces the personalities and approaches Japan’s postwar leaders and statesmen took in dealing with a rapidly changing world and the challenges they faced. Importantly, the book also discusses the evolution of Japan’s presence on the international stage and the important – if underappreciated role – Japan has played. The book examines the many issues which Japan has had to confront in this important period: from the occupation authorities in the latter half 1940s, to the crisis-filled 1970s; from the post-Cold War decade to the contemporary war on terrorism. The book examines the effect of the changing international climate and domestic scene on Japan’s foreign policy; and the way its foreign policy has been conducted. It discusses how the aims of Japan’s foreign relations, and how its relationships with its neighbours, allies and other major world powers have developed, and assesses how far Japan has succeeded in realising its aims. It concludes by discussing the current state of Japanese foreign policy and likely future developments. Selected Contents: Introduction: Japanese Diplomacy from Prewar to Postwar Iokibe Makoto 1. Diplomacy in Occupied Japan: Japanese Diplomacy in the 1940s Iokibe Makoto 2. The Conditions of an Independent State: Japanese Diplomacy in the 1950s Sakamoto Kazuya 3. The Model of an Economic Power: Japanese Diplomacy in the 1960s Tadokoro Masayuki 4. Overcoming the Crises: Japanese Diplomacy in the 1970s Nakanishi Hiroshi 5. The Mission and Trials of an Emerging International State: Japanese Diplomacy in the 1980s Murata Koji 6. Japanese Diplomacy After the Cold War Iokibe Makoto. Conclusion: What was Postwar Japanese Diplomacy? 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-49847-0: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-49848-7: £25.95 For more information, visit:

Selected Contents: 1. Unipolarity and its Implications for Asian/Eurasian Security 2. Strategic Partnerships in Asia and Eurasia 3. The Sino-Russian Partnership 4. The Indo-Russian Partnership 5. The Sino-Indian Partnership 6. Geopolitics or Geoeconomics: Will Competition Derail Cooperation? 7. Prospects for Multilateralism in Asia/Eurasia 8. What Does the Future Hold? 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-77774-2: £80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-77775-9: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-86501-9 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website


India’s Foreign Relations, 1947–2007

Interrogating International Relations

Parallel Governance in Contemporary South India

Jayanta Kumar Ray Series: South Asian History and Culture

India’s Strategic Practice and the Return of History

Lalita Chandrashekhar

Jayashree Vivekanandan


Undermining Local Democracy

This study examines the implications of the model of development sought to be introduced in India through the governance reforms of the early 1990s — a model that bypasses Panchayat Raj institutions, resulting in a majority of the population being left outside the purview of development.

Selected Contents: List of Tables. List of Figures. List of Abbreviations. Foreword. Preface. Acknowledgements 1. Introduction 2. Local Government in India 3. Panchayat Raj in India 4. Parallel Bodies 5. Parastatal Bodies in Karnataka 6. The Sarva Shiksha Abhiyan 7. Watershed Development 8. Societies Galore 9. Conclusion. Bibliography. About the Author. Index February 2011: 216 x 138 Hb: 978-0-415-59747-0: £65.00 For more information, visit:


China and Orientalism Western Knowledge Production and the P.R.C. Edited by Daniel Vukovich, University of Hong Kong Series: Postcolonial Politics This book argues, in short, that there is a new, specifically Sinological form of orientalism at work in the world. This marks a shift within orientalism from a logic of an essential difference between East and West (as in Said’s analysis, or classic colonial discourse, a la Kipling), to one of sameness. China – the West’s ’China’ – is now seen as caught up in a halting but inevitable process of becoming-the-same as the West: liberal, modern, normal. Selected Contents: 1.Orientalism Now: ‘China’ and the New Era 2. Uncivil Society, or, Orientalism and Tiananmen, 1989 3. Maoist Discourse and Its Demonization: Producing a Famine of ‘Chinese Proportions’ 4. DeLillo, Warhol, and the Specter of Mao: The ’Sinologization’ of Global Thought 5. Screening Sinology: On the Western Study of Chinese Film 6. The China-Reference and the Sinological Mirror December 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-59220-8: £80.00 For more information, visit:

The book examines the lapses in leadership which led to certain crucial problems in foreign policy at the time of India’s independence in 1947, including communal antagonism. It traces the subtle changes in foreign policy post-1991 which set the stage for India’s movement towards acheiving a greater power status.

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Non-Alignment: Pronouncements and Practices 2. Relations with the United Kingdom 3. Relations with Pakistan 4. Relations with China 5. Relations with Bangladesh 6. Relations with Nepal 7. Relations with Sri Lanka 8. Relations with former Soviet Union/Russia 9. Relations with the United States 10. Nuclear Policy. Epilogue 2010: 216 x 138 Hb: 978-0-415-59742-5: £65.00 For more information, visit:

Series: War and International Politics in South Asia

The book interrogates the disciplinary biases that inform mainstream International Relations today. Examining the grand strategy of the Mughal empire under Akbar, it argues for a historico-cultural notion of power and critiques IR’s tendency to usher in a selective ‘return of history’.

Selected Contents: List of Maps and Tables. List of Abbreviations 1. Temporal Journeys: Reorienting International Relations 2. India’s Strategic Practice: Theory Meets Practice 3. The Making of Mughal Grand Strategy: Material and Ideational Influences 4. Strategies of Conciliation and Coercion: Two Case Studies 5. Conclusion: New Directions in International Relations. Appendix. References 2010: 216 x 138 Hb: 978-0-415-59812-5: £65.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81397-3

Rethinking the ’Coloured Revolutions’

For more information, visit:

Edited by David Lane, University of Cambridge, UK and Stephen White, University of Glasgow, UK

Citizen Initiatives and Democratic Engagement

2010: 216 x 138: 328pp Hb: 978-0-415-57169-2: £80.00 For more information, visit:


The Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty and India Edited by Rajiv Nayan, Institute for Defence Studies & Analysis, India This book examines the international perspectives on India’s involvement with the NPT, as well as those from India itself. Selected Contents: 1. Between Power & Justice: Current Problems and Perspectives of NPT Regime Harald Muller 2. Nuclear Disarmament in a Non-Proliferation Context: A Russian Perspective Alexander Nikitin 3. The Current Problems of the NPT: How to Strengthen the Nonproliferation Regime Nobuyasu Abe 4. NPT Review Conference 2010: Issues and Prospects Arvind Gupta 5. Previewing the 2010 Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty Review Conference Miles A. Pomper 6. NPT RevCon 2010: An Opportunity to Refocus Priorities Manpreet Sethi 7. India and the NPT Leonard Weiss 8. India and the NPT Aaron Tovish 9. India and the NPT: Separating Substantive Facts from Normative Fiction Anupam Shrivastava and Seema Gahlaut 10. Reforms in the NPT and Prospects for India’s Accession: A Situational Analysis A. Vinod Kumar 11. The NPT and India: Accommodating the Exception Rajiv Nayan July 2011: 246 x 174: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-59391-5: £85.00 For more information, visit:

Experiences from India Sumona DasGupta

Drawing from experiences on the field, this book looks at a series of interrelated citizens’ campaigns to energise institutions of local selfgovernance in India in the aftermath of the 73rd and 74th Amendment Acts, and analyses their potential in deepening democracy in India.

Selected Contents: Preface. Acknowledgements 1. Introduction 2. Vignettes from the Field 3. The 73rd Amendment Act: New Alignments, New Animosities 4. The Pre-election Voters’ Awareness Campaigns: An Analysis 5. PEVACs and the State Election Commission: Building Common Ground 6. Beyond Elections: Sustaining the Democratic Impulse 7. Deepening Democracy: An Overview 8. Conclusions and Reflections for the Future. Bibliography. About the Author. Index 2010: 216 x 138: 164pp Hb: 978-0-415-59632-9: £65.00 For more information, visit:

Symbolism and Power in Central Asia Politics of the Spectacular Edited by Sally N. Cummings, University of St. Andrews, UK 2010: 246 x 174: 268pp Hb: 978-0-415-57567-6: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:


a sia


e urop e an un i o n

India’s National Security

Rethinking State Politics in India

Annual Review 2010

Regions within Regions

Edited by Satish Kumar

Edited by Ashutosh Kumar

This book gives readers an in-depth and up-to-date account of India’s external and internal threats in a deteriorating global security environment. It assesses national security issues and makes policy projections showing that while partnerships with some countries have strengthened, anxieties persist with others.

Selected Contents: Part 1: National Security Review 1. National Security Environment Satish Kumar 2. India’s Neighbourhood (i) Sri Lanka: Post War Politics V. Suryanarayan (ii) Security Situation in Afghanistan Arun Sahgal (iii) Iran: A Strategic Profile K.C. Singh (iv) Myanmar and India’s Security K. Yhome (v) Political Situation in Nepal Yubaraj Ghimire 3. Relations with Asia, Africa and Latin America INSAR Research Staff 4. Sino-Indian Relations: Recent Developments V.C. Khanna 5. Pakistan’s Anti-Terrorism Operations Wilson John 6. India’s Strategic Partnership with Russia Kanwal Sibal 7. India’s Defence and Security Initiatives INSAR Research Staff Part 2: National Security Threats and Challenges 8. India’s Economic Security Chandrajit Banerjee 9. NPT, CTBT, FMCT and the Future Manpreet Sethi 10. Missile Capabilities of China, Pakistan and Iran S. Chandrashekar 11. Pakistan’s Nuclear Weapons Shalini Chawla 12. Evolving Groupings in East Asia Sudhir Devare 13. India and Climate Change Shyam Saran 14. Water Security Uttam Kumar Sinha 15. National Security System Evolution S.D. Pradhan Part 3: National Security Index Part 4: Basic Statistics Part 5: Chronology of Major Events 2009. Index 2010: 216 x 138 Hb: 978-0-415-61255-5: £65.00 For more information, visit:

Militant and Migrant The Politics and Social History of Punjab Radhika Chopra

This book explores the links between militancy and migration, two movements that transformed the socio-political landscape of late 20th-century Punjab. Re-analysing existing writings and drawing on fieldwork and local history archives, it presents a different framework to analyse the politics and social history of Punjab.

Selected Contents: Acknowledgements 1. Introduction: Bringing a Field to Focus 2. Commemorating Hurt: Memorialising Operation Bluestar 3. Binocular Disparity: Risky Strategies and Family Plans 4. Sent Away Boys: The ’Ghar Jawai’ and the Militant 5. Transacting Asylum: Transnational Communities, Hospitality and Political Asylum 6. Descent to Illegality: Transnational Migrations of Labouring Men. Bibliography. About the Author. Index

Focusing on the twin issues of identity and development, this book makes a concerted attempt to look at (and beyond) the states by exploring the specificities of the regions within these states. A comparative study from the vantage point of democratic politics as it unfurls in India.

Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: United Colours of New States 1. Rethinking ‘Regional Developmental Imbalances’; Spatial Versus the Socio-Political ‘Region’: The Case of Tribals in Jharkhand Amit Prakash 2. Constitution of a Region: A Study of Chhattisgarh Dharmendra Kumar 3. The Creation of a Region: Politics of Identity and Development in Uttarakhand Pampa Mukherjee Part 2: Quest for Territorial Homeland 4. Regions within Region and their Movements in Karnataka: Nuances, Claims and Ambiguities Muzaffar Assadi 5. Backwardness and Political Articulation of Backwardness in the North Bengal Region of West Bengal Arun K. Jana 6. Assertion of a Region: Exploring the Demand for Telengana Rama Rao Bonagani 7. Region, Caste and Politics of ‘Reverse Discrimination’: The Case of Harit Pradesh Jagpal Singh 8. Regions Within but Democracy Without: A Study of India’s Northeast Samir Kumar Das 9. Politics of Autonomy in a Comparative Perspective: Punjab and Jammu and Kashmir Ashutosh Kumar Part 3: Caste and Politics of Marginality 10. Garv Se Kahon Hum Lingayat Hain! Caste Associations and Identity Politics in Maharashtra Rajeshwari Deshpande 11. Emergence of Dalit Organizations in Tamil Nadu: Causes, Forms of Assertion and Impact on the State Politics Neeru Sharma-Mehra 12. Affirmative Action, Group Rights and Democracy: The Mala-Madiga Conflict in Andhra Pradesh Sudha Pai 13. Caste and Marginality in Punjab: Looking for Regional Specificities Ronki Ram Part 4: State Electoral Politics: Regional Variance 14. Sub-regions, Identity and the Nature of Political Competition in Rajasthan Sanjay Lodha 15. Negotiating Political Spaces: A Case Study of Karnataka Sandeep Shastri Part 5: Politics of Public Policy 16. Political Regimes and Economic Reforms: A Study of Bihar and Madhya Pradesh Ashok K. Pankaj. About the Editor. Notes on Contributors. Index 2010: 216 x 138: 516pp Hb: 978-0-415-59777-7: £65.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81399-7 For more information, visit:

War and Revolution in the Caucasus Georgia Ablaze Edited by Stephen F. Jones, Mount Holyoke College, USA Series: ThirdWorlds 2010: 246 x 174: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-56527-1: £80.00

European Union Negotiation Theory and the EU The State of the Art Edited by Andreas Dür and Gemma Mateo, both at University of Salzburg, Austria and Daniel C. Thomas, University College Dublin, Ireland This volume offers a thematic and forward-looking survey of cutting-edge research on EU negotiation dynamics, identifying findings to date and setting an empirical and methodological agenda for future research. Selected Contents: 1. Negotiation Theory and the EU: The State of the Art Andreas Dür, Gemma Mateo and Daniel C. Thomas 2. Three Islands of Knowledge about Negotiation in International Organizations John S. Odell 3. Explaining the Institutional Foundations of European Union Negotiations Jonas Tallberg 4. The Impact of Institutional Environments on Negotiation Styles in EU Decision Making Jeffrey Lewis 5. Between Bargaining and Deliberation: Decision-Making in the Council of the European Union Andreas Warntjen 6. Actor Characteristics and Negotiation Tactics in the EU Andreas Dür and Gemma Mateo 7. Issue Characteristics, Issue Linkage, and States’ Choice of Bargaining Strategies in the European Union Heather E. McKibben 8. Deliberation in Negotiations Thomas Risse and Mareike Kleine 9. (How) Do Norms Guide Presidency Behaviour in EU Negotiations? Arne Niemann and Jeannette Mak 10. What Factors Determine Bargaining Power and Success in EU Negotiations? Stephanie Bailer 2010: 234 x 156: 168pp Hb: 978-0-415-59663-3: £85.00 For more information, visit:


The European Union’s Foreign Economic Policies A Principal-Agent Perspective Edited by Andreas Dür, University of Salzburg, Austria and Manfred Elsig, World Trade Institute, Bern, Switzerland This volume offers a fresh look at the EU’s foreign economic policies using a principal-agent approach. It provides insights into the EU’s trade policy, its role in international financial governance, and its involvement in the G8 and the International Accounting Standards Board. Selected Contents: 1. Principals, Agents, and the European Union’s Foreign Economic Policies Andreas Dür and Manfred Elsig 2. Interest Groups and the Failure of EU Antidumping Reform Dirk De Bièvre and Jappe Eckhardt 3. WTO Judicialisation and Preference Convergence in EU Trade Policy: Making the Agent’s Life Easier Arlo Poletti 4. The European Presence in Global Financial Governance: A Principal-Agent Perspective Daniel Mügge 5. Variation in EU Member States’ Preferences and the Commission’s Discretion in the Doha Round Eugénia da Conceição 6. The European Union’s Role in the G8: A Principal-Agent Perspective Arne Niemann and Judith Huigens 7. EU, US and International Accounting Standards: A Delicate Balancing Act in Governing Global Finance Patrick Leblond September 2011: 234 x 156: 160pp Hb: 978-0-415-66721-0: £80.00 For more information, visit:

2010: 216 x 138 Hb: 978-0-415-59800-2: £65.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81404-8 For more information, visit: For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

e urop e an uni o n

Routledge Advances in European Politics This series features innovative and groundbreaking theoretical and empirical research on the latest transformations within European politics. Forthcoming

EU Foreign Policy and the Europeanization of Neutral States Comparing Irish and Austrian Foreign Policy Nicole Alecu de Flers, Austrian Academy of Sciences, Austria This book investigates how the Common Foreign and Security Policy impacts on national foreign policies, examining how it has impacted on policy-making, the substance of policy and national identity. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction and State of the Art in the Field 2. Conceptual and Empirical Context 3. Background of Irish and Austrian Foreign Policy 4. Ireland: Europeanization of Foreign Policy-Making 5. Ireland: Europeanization of Foreign Policy Substance 6. Ireland: Europeanization of National Identity 7. Austria: Europeanization of Foreign Policy-Making 8. Austria: Europeanization of Foreign Policy Substance 9. Austria: Europeanization of National Identity 10. Comparison of the Findings and Overall Assessment 11. Conclusions September 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-57846-2: £75.00 For more information, visit:

European Union Sanctions and Foreign Policy When and Why do they Work? Clara Portela, Singapore Management University 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-55216-5: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84751-0 For more information, visit:

Fifty Years of EU-Turkey Relations A Sisyphean Story Edited by Armağan Emre Çakır 2010: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-57963-6: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83642-2 For more information, visit:

The EU Presence in International Organizations Edited by Spyros Blavoukos, Athens University of Economics and Business, Greece and Dimitris Bourantonis, University of Athens, Greece 2010: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-56924-8: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84447-2 For more information, visit:


The European Union Diplomatic Service Ideas, Preferences and Identities Caterina Carta, London School of Economics, UK

This book is the first to comprehensively examine the institutional dynamics that characterize the diplomatic system set up by the European Communities and the European Union – currently the foremost experiment in non-state diplomacy. It analyses European Union Diplomatic Service’s work on foreign policy and external economic relations, both in Brussels and in the Commission’s Delegations across the world. Selected Contents: Introduction: The Puzzle of Non-State Diplomatic Representation Part 1: Conceptualizing the EU Diplomatic System 1. The Diplomatic System of a Non-State Actor 2. The Commission: At the Heart of the External Service Part 2: A Diplomatic Service in the Making 3. Institution-Building: The Engineering of Diplomacy 4. Anatomy of the Commission’s Diplomatic Service Part 3: The Actors in European Diplomacy 5. The Actors in the Commission’s Diplomacy: Bureaucratic and Political Views 6. Who are ‘We’ in the International Arena? Part 4: Prospects for the Near Future 7. The European External Action Service: The Puzzle of a New Kind of Service. Conclusions: Sailing the Diplomatic Sea – A Journey towards the Future July 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-55976-8: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-80850-4 For more information, visit:

The EU’s Role in World Politics A Retreat from Liberal Internationalism


New Regionalism and the European Union Dialogues, Comparisons and New Research Directions Edited by Alex Warleigh-Lack, Brunel University, UK, Nick Robinson, University of Leeds, UK and Ben Rosamond, University of Warwick, UK Series: Routledge/ECPR Studies in European Political Science This book explores regionalism in the European Union in comparative context with Latin American, African, Asian, North American regionalism. It also investigates the links between the EU and other regional organisations and assesses the implications for the study of contemporary regionalism both inside and beyond Europe. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Regions, Regionalism and Comparisons 2. Studying Regions Comparatively: Back to the Future? 3. Learning from the New Regionalism? What, if Anything, can Insights from New Regionalist Scholarship Offer for Studies of European Integration? 4. Africa Meets Europe: Towards Comparative Regionalism 5. East Asian Regionalism and the European Experience: Differences in Leadership, Possible Lessons 6. Institutions, Culture or Ethics? The Logic of Regionalism in Europe and East Asia 7. The Demise of New Regionalism: Reframing the Study of Contemporary Regional Integration in Latin America 8. The Experience of European Integration and the Potential for Integration in South America 9. Consequences of Regionalism: the Politics of North American Trade 10. The OMC in Comparative Perspective: Learning and Community Building in the OECD and Nordic Council of Ministers 11. Interregionalism, a Critique: The Four Levels of EU-ASEAN Relations 12. The Parliamentary Dimension of Regionalism: Comparing Experiences in Europe’s Neighbourhood 13. EU and its Neighbours: A Wider Europe through Asymmetrical Interregionalism or Through Dependencia Sub-regionalism? 14. Conclusions: Learning or Comparison in the Study of Regions? Fruitful Dialogues and Future Research Directions May 2011: 234 x 156: 304pp Hb: 978-0-415-56372-7: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81640-0 For more information, visit:

EU Conflict Management Edited by James Hughes, London School of Economics, London, UK Series: Association for the Study of Nationalities 2010: 246 x 174: 150pp Hb: 978-0-415-56747-3: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Richard Youngs, FRIDE, Spain 2010: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-58368-8: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84713-8 For more information, visit:

EU External Governance Projecting EU Rules beyond Membership Edited by Sandra Lavenex, University of Lucerne, Switzerland and Frank Schimmelfennig, Zurich University, Switzerland 2010: 234 x 156: 168pp Hb: 978-0-415-56750-3: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:


e uro pea n un ion


Routledge/GARNET series Series Edited by David Armstrong, University of Exeter, UK and Karoline Postel-Vinay, CERI, Paris, France Forthcoming

European Union Democracy Aid Supporting Civil Society in Post-Apartheid South Africa Lorenzo Fioramonti, University of Bologna, Italy 2010: 234 x 156: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-54854-0: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85273-6 For more information, visit:

Theoretical Approaches and Policy Implications in the New Neighbourhood Edited by Klaus Bachmann, University of Wroclaw and the Warsaw School for Social Psychology, Poland and Elzbieta Stadtmuller, University of Wroclaw, Poland Examines the impact of globalization and integration on borders within the EU, and between the EU and external countries. Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Investigating Borders and Integration: Theoretical Aspects and Their Methodological Implications 1. European Identity Making: External Challenges Ireneusz Paweł Karolewski 2. Neo-Functionalism, the Commission and the Construction of the EU’s External Borders Valentina Kostadinova 3. Externalization and Securitization of Immigration in Europe: Using the Gravity Model to Understand Citizens’ Behaviour in Italy, Germany and Poland Endri Xhaferaj 4. The EU’s External Policy towards Eastern Europe on Migration Issues: Breaking New Ground in International Relations? Bernhard Zeilinger Part 2: Assessing Policies: Neighborhood Policy, Governance and Security Issues 5. Sources of Misunderstanding: Intervening Variables Influencing the Effectiveness of the European Neighbourhood Policy towards Eastern European States Igor Lyubashenko 6. Spill over at the Border: The Social Forces Behind Poland’s Access to Schengen Klaus Bachmann 7. Avoiding New Dividing Lines? EU External Governance and the Eastern Neighbours Marie Campain 8. Promoting Stability and the Rule of Law in the EU Borderlands: The Balkans Aleksandar Fatić 9. Russia and the EU’s Neighbourhood Policy Template Przemysław Żurawski vel Grajewski 10. Defining Borders between the EU and the South Caucasus: The Role of the Energy Factor Samuel Lussac 11. Turkey, Central Asia and Energy: Dreams and Realities Gareth Jenkins 12. At the Borders of the EU: Migration and Democratization Policies Assessed Leila Mouhib 13. Immigration Control and Securing the EU’s External Borders Artur Gruszczak November 2011: 234 x 156: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-61609-6: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Debating Political Identity and Legitimacy in the European Union

related journal

The EU's Shifting Borders Journal of Balkan & Near Eastern Studies Formerly Journal of Southern Europe and the Balkans Founding and Managing Editor: Vassilis K. Fouskas, Richmond University, UK Volume: 13, 2011, 4 issues per year Print ISSN: 1944-8953, Online ISSN: 1944-8961 Journal of Balkan & Near Eastern Studies seeks to address, in a historical and theoretically informed manner, the complex historical economic, political, diplomatic, cultural and security issues that confront the region. In the light of such important developments as the process of European integration, the evolution of NATO, and the more general changes in the international governance systems after the end of the Cold War in Eurasia and the terrorist attacks on the United States on 11 September 2001.

Routledge/UACES Contemporary European Studies Series Edited by Roger Scully, University of Wales, Aberystwyth, UK, Tanja Borzel, Free University of Berlin, Germany and Federica Bicchi, London School of Economics, UK The primary objective of the new Contemporary European Studies series is to provide a research outlet for scholars of European Studies from all disciplines. The series publishes important scholarly works and aims to forge for itself an international reputation.

EU Conflict Prevention and Crisis Management Roles, Institutions, and Policies Edited by Eva Gross, Vrije Universiteit Brussel, Belgium and Ana E. Juncos, University of Bath, UK 2010: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-57235-4: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83205-9

Journal of Baltic Studies Journal of the Association for the Advancement of Baltic Studies

For more information, visit:

Editor: Terry Clark, Creighton University, USA Volume: 42, 2011, 4 issues per year Print ISSN: 0162-9778, Online ISSN: 1751-7877 The Journal of Baltic Studies, the official journal of the Association for the Advancement of Baltic Studies (AABS), is a peer-reviewed, multidisciplinary journal for the purpose of advancing the accumulation of knowledge about all aspects of the Baltic Sea region's political, social, economic, and cultural life, past and present. Preference is given to original contributions that are of general scholarly interest.

European Union Governance Effectiveness and Legitimacy in European Commission Committees Karen Heard-Laureote, Portsmouth University, UK 2010: 234 x 156: 236pp Hb: 978-0-415-43582-6: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85262-0

Edited by Sonia Lucarelli, University of Bologna, Italy, Furio Cerutti, University of Florence, Italy and Vivien A. Schmidt 2010: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-55100-7: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83464-0

For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

e urop e an p ol i t ic s

Governing Financial Services in the European Union Banking, Securities and Post-Trading Lucia Quaglia, Max Planck Institute, Cologne 2010: 234 x 156: 210pp Hb: 978-0-415-56418-2: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85552-2

The European Union as a Leader in International Climate Change Politics

European Politics

Edited by Rüdiger Wurzel and James Connelly, both at University of Hull, UK 2010: 234 x 156: 320pp Hb: 978-0-415-58047-2: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83995-9

The Multiculturalism Backlash European Discourses, Policies and Practices Edited by Steven Vertovec and Susanne Wessendorf, both at Max-Planck-Institute, Germany

For more information, visit:


The European Parliament’s Committees National Party Influence and Legislative Empowerment Richard Whitaker, University of Leicester, UK

‘In this first ever book-length treatment of the subject, Richard Whitaker provides the definitive account of how and why the European Parliament’s committees matter both to the role of the members of the European Parliament and, more importantly, to their national party leaders. To understand the committees is to understand the parliament.’ – David Farrell, University College Dublin, Ireland Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Studying a Changing Parliament 2. Committees and National Parties in the European Parliament: Responding to Legislative Empowerment 3. The Development of the European Parliament’s Committee System: Structure and Turnover 4. Member States and National Parties’ Committee Membership 5. Committee Assignments at the Individual Level in the European Parliament 6. Committee Leadership Positions in the EP: A Game of Musical Chairs? 7. Representativeness in Committee Contingents 8. Conclusions: National party Influence in a Committee-Based Parliament March 2011: 234 x 156: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-48525-8: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81927-2

For more information, visit:


The European Union, Civil Society and Conflict Edited by Nathalie Tocci, Transatlantic Academy, Washington DC, USA

Explores the EU’s relations with civil society organizations in an effort to improve the effectiveness and relevance of its conflict and peace policies.

Selected Contents: 1. The European Union, Civil Society and Conflict: An Analytical Framework Nathalie Tocci 2. The EU and Civil Society in the Georgian-Abkhaz Conflict Nicu Popescu 3. Are Civil Society Organizations the Missing Link? Assessing EU Engagement in the Nagorno-Karabakh Conflict Licínia Simão 4. The EU and Moldova’s Civil Society: Partners in Solving the Transnistria Conflict? George Dura 5. Coming too Late? The EU’s Mixed Approaches to Transforming the Israeli-Palestinian Conflict Through Civil Society Benoit Challand 6. The EU, Civil Society and Conflict Transformation in Western Sahara: The Failure of Disengagement Hakim Darbouche and Silvia Colombo 7. The EU, Civil Society and Conflict: A Comparative Analysis Nathalie Tocci and Nona Mikhelidze March 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-59671-8: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-82818-2 For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:


Federalism and the History of the European Union Iona Annett, University of Melbourne, Australia This volume examines the integration history of the European Union as a gradual process of federalisation that began with the European Coal and Steel Community in 1951. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. The European Integration Process 3. The European Union as a Federation 4. Creating the European Coal and Steel Community, 1950-1955 5. The European Economic Community, 1956-1969 6. A Developing conFederation, 1970-1979 7. From Confederation to Federation, 1980-1991 8. A Supranational Federation, 1992-2008 9. Conclusion September 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp | Hb: 978-0-415-61574-7: £80.00 For more information, visit:

’Orchestrated predictions about ’the end of multiculturalism’ are shown, in this alert but finely-tuned collection, as emanating from a panic choir without a common score. Judiciously choosing seven European and two Canadian contrasts, it shows this empirically and deepens it theoretically.’ – Gerd Baumann, University of Amsterdam, the Netherlands

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Assessing the Backlash against Multiculturalism in Europe Steven Vertovec and Susanne Wessendorf 2. The Rise and Fall of Multiculturalism? New Debates on Inclusion and Accommodation in Diverse Societies Will Kymlicka 3. British and Others: From ‘Race’ to ‘Faith’ Ralph Grillo 4. From Toleration to Repression: The Dutch Backlash against Multiculturalism Baukje Prins and Sawitri Saharso 5. ‘We’re not all Multiculturalists Yet’: France Swings Between Hard Integration and Soft Anti-Discrimination Patrick Simon and Valerie Sala Pala 6. Denmark versus Multiculturalism Ulf Hedetoft 7. Switzerland: A Multicultural Country Without Multicultural Policies? Gianni d’Amato 8. Germany: Integration Policy and Pluralism in a Self-Conscious Country of Immigration Karen Schönwälder 9. Dymanics of Diversity in Spain: Old Questions, New Challenges Ricard Zapata-Barrero 10. Multiculturalism: A Canadian Defence David Ley 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-55648-4: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-55649-1: £25.99 eBook: 978-0-203-86754-9 For more information, visit:


Europeanization and the Domestic Politics Change The Case of Italy Paolo Graziano, Bocconi University, Italy Series: Europe and the Nation State This book examines the impact of Europeanization on the domestic politics of EU member states, focussing on agricultural policy, cohesion policy and employment policy with a detailed case study on Italy in a comparative perspective. Selected Contents: Part 1 1. Europeanization and Domestic Politics Change: An Analytical Framework 2. The Italian Political System and the EU, 1958-2010 Part 2 3. Europeanization and Agricultural Policy 4. Europeanization and Cohesion Policy 5. Europeanization and Employment Policy Part 3 6. Policy Change without Institutional Change? A Policy-Centred Comparative Assessment 7. Europeanization and the Italian Political System: Concluding Remarks October 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-57491-4: £75.00 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:


e uro pea n politics




Italy Today

Denmark and the European Union

The Sick Man of Europe Edited by Andrea Mammone, Kingston University, UK and Giuseppe A. Veltri, London School of Economics and Political Science, UK

’The scandals, speeches, sex, and partisan scheming of Italian political life have always grabbed media attention. Yet the central question of Italian politics often goes unasked: How did the most successful country in postwar Europe become a basket case? […] The interdisciplinary group of authors in this collection sets aside short-term factors and explores long-term structural reasons for Italia malata (ailing Italy). They offer new insights into well-known problems […]. They also highlight problems known only to experts: little government support for families, the spread of organized crime outside of Naples and Sicily, low levels of social trust, and anti-immigrant sentiment.’ – Andrew Moravcsik (Princeton University), Foreign Affairs Italy Today should feature on all bibliographies of students of Italian studies, Italian politics and Italian cultural studies; it will also appeal to a more general readership.’ – Luciano Cheles, Université de Poitiers, France Selected Contents: Preface Paul Corner 1. A ‘Sick Man’ in Europe A. Mammone and G. Veltri Part 1: Politics and Society 2. Elites and the Democratic Disease Carlo Carboni 3. Common Manifestoes and Coalition Governance: How Italian Political Leaders Missed the Window of Opportunity Catherine Moury 4. The Programmatic Convergence of the Italian Parties and their Weakness in the Policy-Making Nicolò Conti 5. When Politics Matters: Federalism, Italian Style Christophe Roux 6. Family Politics, the Catholic Church and the Transformation of Family Life in the Italian Second Republic Stefania Bernini 7. The Italian Media between Market and Politics Chris Hanretty Part 2: History, Memory and Politics 8. The Legacy of the Strategy of Tension and the Armed Conflict in a Context of (non)Reconciliation Anna Cento Bull 9. Fascism as Heritage in Contemporary Italy Joshua Arthurs Part 3: Institutional(ized) Exclusion? 10. The Northern League and its ’Innocuous’ Xenophobia Martina Avanza 11. ’Gypsies out of Italy!’: Social Exclusion and Racial Discrimination of Roma and Sinti Nando Sigona 12. The Catholic Church, Universal Truth, and the Debate on National Identity and Immigration: A New Model of ‘Selective Solidarity’ Eva Garau Part 4: Mezzogiorno: A Never Ending Problem 13. The Strongest Mafia: ‘Ndrangeta made in Calabria Ercole Giap Parini 14. Revisiting Naples: Clientelism and Organized Crime Felia Allum and Percy Allum Part 5: Economy and Political Economy 15. Industrialization, Convergence and Governance: The Case of Italy Alfonsina Iona, Leone Leonida and Giuseppe Sobbrio 16. 20 Years of European Funding: Italy Still Struggling with Implementation Simona Milio 17. Labour and Welfare Reforms: The Short Life of Labour Unity in Contemporary Italy Marco Simoni 18. The Crisis of Family Firms and the Decline of Italian Capitalism Raoul Minetti 2010: 234 x 156: 280pp Hb: 978-0-415-56159-4: £85.00 Pb: 978-0-415-56160-0: £25.99 eBook: 978-0-203-85963-6 For more information, visit:

Edited by Martin Marcussen, Anders Wivel and Lee Miles, Karlstad University, Sweden Series: Europe and the Nation State Analyses the recent, contemporary and future challenges and possibilities facing Denmark in the European integration process. Selected Contents: Part 1: Concepts and History 1. Up-Loading and Down-Loading in a Differentiated Europe Martin Marcussen and Anders Wivel 2. A Brief History of Denmark and the European Union Morten Rasmussen Part 2: Policy Areas 3. Internal Market and Agriculture Peter Nedergaard 4. EMU Martin Marcussen 5. Justice and Home Affairs Rebecca Adler-Nissen 6. Foreign and Security Policy Anders Wivel Part 3: Denmark in Europe 7. Council of Ministers Derek Beach 8. European Commission Caroline Grøn 9. European Parliament Anne Rasmussen 10. Lobbyism Karsten Ronit Part 4: Europe in Denmark 11. Democracy and Rights Marlene Wind 12. Public Opinion Kasper Møller Hansen 13. Public Administration, Civil Servants and Implementation Dorte Sindbjerg Martinsen 14. Parliamentary Oversight of Danish EU-Policies Henrik Jensen Part 5: A Small State in Europe 15. Denmark and the European Union Martin Marcussen and Anders Wivel 16. Small States in a Fusion Perspective Lee Miles

Europe and the Management of Globalization Edited by Wade Jacoby, Brigham Young University, USA and Sophie Meunier, Princeton University, USA Series: Journal of European Public Policy Special Issues as Books This volume examines the degree of success by which EU policies have attempted to manage globalization in a variety of policy areas. This book was based on a special issue of Journal of European Public Policy. Selected Contents: 1. Europe and the Management of Globalization Wade Jacoby and Sophie Meunier 2. The Hidden Face of the Euro Nicolas Jabko 3. Globalizing European Union Environmental Policy R. Daniel Kelemen 4. Managed Globalization: Doctrine, Practice and Promise Rawi Abdelal and Sophie Meunier 5. The EU, the US, and Trade Policy: Competitive Interdependence in the Management of Globalization Alberta Sbragia 6. Europe and the New Global Economic Order: Internal Diversity as Liability and Asset in Managing Globalization Orfeo Fioretos 7. The EU and Financial Regulation: Power Without Purpose? Elliot Posner and Nicolas Véron 8. Managing Globalization by Managing Central and Eastern Europe: The EU’s Backyard as Threat and Opportunity Wade Jacoby 9. Betwixt and Between? The European Union’s Redistributive Management of Globalization Brian Burgoon

December 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-61134-3: £80.00

2010: 234 x 156: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-59213-0: £85.00

For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:


Learning and Governance in the EU Policy Making Process

The Western European Union International Politics between Alliance and Integration Sally Rohan, King’s College London, UK Series: British Politics and Society This book examines the role of the historical development of the Western European Union in regards to the evolving pan-European security environment. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Birth of the Union 1948 - 1955 2. From Activity to Dormancy 1955 - 1973 3. The Path to Revitalisation 1973 - 1989 4. Post-Cold War Challenges and Opportunities 1989 - 1997 5. The Final Compromise? 1997 - 2008. Conclusion December 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-7146-5613-7: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-34185-8 For more information, visit:

EMU and Political Science What Have We Learned?

Edited by Anthony R. Zito, University of Newcastle, UK Series: Journal of European Public Policy Special Issues as Books 2010: 246 x 174: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-57180-7: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Political Representation and European Union Governance Edited by Peter Mair, European University Institute, Italy and Jacques Thomassen, University of Twente, the Netherlands Series: Journal of European Public Policy Special Issues as Books 2010: 234 x 156: 160pp Hb: 978-0-415-58294-0: £85.00 For more information, visit:

Edited by Henrik Enderlein, Hertie School of Governance, Germany and Amy Verdun, University of Victoria, Canada Series: Journal of European Public Policy Special Issues as Books 2010: 246 x 174: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-57482-2: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

e urop e an p ol i t ic s


The Political Economy of Europe’s Incomplete Single Market Edited by David Howarth, University of Edinburgh, UK and Tal Sadeh, Tel Aviv University, Israel Series: Journal of European Public Policy Special Issues as Books This volume includes work by leading political scientists working on European market integration, with specific focus upon EU competition policy, state aid, energy markets, services, financial services, taxation, gambling and transportation. Selected Contents: 1. Preface David Howarth and Tal Sadeh 2. The Ever Incomplete Single Market: Differentiation and the Evolving Frontier of Integration David Howarth and Tal Sadeh 3. Single Market, Global Competition: Regulating the European Market in a Global Economy Mitchell P. Smith 4. Discretion by the Rules: European State Aid Policy and the 1999 Procedural Regulation Nikolaos Zahariadis 5. Are You Being Served? Europeanizing and Re-Regulating the Single Market in Services Georg Menz 6. The Political Economy of Telecoms and Electricity Internationalization in the Single Market Judith Clifton, Daniel Díaz-Fuentes and Julio Revuelta 7. Completing the Single Market in Financial Services: The Politics of Competing Advocacy Coalitions Lucia Quaglia 8. Stakes and States: Gambling and the Single Market Vincent Della Sala 9. Let’s Get Physical: The European Commission and Cultivated Spillover in Completing the Single Market’s Transport Infrastructure Paul Stephenson 10. Does Europeanization Lead to Policy Convergence? The Role of the Single Market in shaping National Tax Policies Achim Kemmerling July 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-67768-4: £80.00 For more information, visit:


Ceremony and Ritual in Parliament Edited by Shirin M. Rai, University of Warwick, UK Series: Library of Legislative Studies

This book combines mainstream historical and social science approaches with cultural theory to consider how parliamentary ritual is constructed through ceremony, space and socialisation.

Selected Contents: 1. Ceremony and Ritual in Parliament: Preface Shirin M. Rai 2. Analysing Ceremony and Ritual in Parliament Shirin M. Rai 3. The Archi-Texture of Parliament: Flaneur as Method in Westminster Nirmal Puwar 4. An Anthropology of the House of Lords: Socialisation, Relationships and Rituals Emma Crewe 5. The Speaker, Parliamentary Ceremonies and Power Faith Armitage 6. Disrupting Rituals of Debate in the Indian Parliament Carole Spary 7. Researching Ritual and the Symbolic in Parliaments: An Institutionalist Perspective Georgina Waylen 8. Rules and Rituals: The Case of South Africa’s New Committee System Victoria Hasson 9. Pinning the Butterfly: Women, Blue-Collar and Ethnic Minority MPs vis-à-vis Parliamentary Norms and the Parliamentary Role of the Group Representative Karen Celis and Bram Wauters 10. The Gendered Dimensions of Rituals, Rules and Norms in the Chilean Congress Susan Franceschet

Routledge Advances in European Politics This series features innovative and groundbreaking theoretical and empirical research on the latest transformations within European politics. Forthcoming

A Political Theory of Identity in European Integration Memory and Policies Catherine Guisan, University of Minnesota, USA This book provides a political theory of EU identity formation using an interpretative tradition, grounding political identities in the speeches and deeds of political actors. It draws on six major political theorists to illuminate constitutive elements of the EU and EU identity formation. Selected Contents: 1. Principles of Action or Clichés? Why Hermeneutics Matters to European Integration 2. ’After the Deluge:’ the Principle of Reconciliation 3. Memory, Kosovo and Serbia: Reconciliation and its Discontents 4. From the Founding of Community to the Common Foreign and Security Policy: Power as Action in Concert? 5. Enlargements and the Recognition of the Other: the Case of Turkey 6. The Question of the Demos: Truth-Telling, Right-Speaking and the Treaty of Lisbon 7. Thoughtfulness in Politics: Europe’s Borders September 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-56291-1: £80.00 For more information, visit:

EU Enlargement and Socialization Turkey and Cyprus Stefan Engert, J.W. Goethe University Frankfurt/ Main, Germany 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-55722-1: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85850-9

EU Foreign Policy and PostSoviet Conflicts Stealth Intervention Nicu Popescu, European Council on Foreign Relations, UK

‘The present book provides the ultimate guide to EU’s performance in conflict management in the post-Soviet space. This is not a book written based on research in a warm office. Nicu Popescu has crisscrossed the conflict regions. The book shows in minutiae detail how much the EU has progressed in becoming a conflict management actor, but also how difficult and contradictory that process still is.’ – Martti Ahtisaari, is Nobel Peace Prize Laureate and former President of Finland Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. EU Foreign Policy and Conflict Management 3. The EU’s Piecemeal Involvement in Transnistria 4. The EU’s Reluctant Engagment in Abkhazia and South Ossetia 5. The EU’s Non-Involvement in Nagorno-Karabakh 6. Conclusions: The EU’s Involvement and Reluctance 2010: 234 x 156: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-58720-4: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83478-7 For more information, visit:


European Foreign Policy and the Quest for a Global Role Britain, France and Germany Lisbeth Aggestam, University of Bath, UK Using the innovative role theory analysis, this book is a comparative study of British, French and German foreign policy over the last two decades offering a unique ‘insider view’, of the framing of national foreign policies, and also of the evolution of the European Union as a global security actor. Selected Contents: 1. Foreign Policy in a Changing World 2. Role Theory Analysis 3. Britain: Searching for a Role? 4. France: A Distinctive Role? 5. Germany: A ‘Normal’ Role? 6. Europe as a Global Security Actor 7. The Quest for a Global Role in a Multipolar World December 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-57889-9: £75.00 For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:

February 2011: 234 x 156: 144pp Hb: 978-0-415-55098-7: £85.00 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:


e uro pea n politics


Europeanization and Foreign Policy



State Identity in Finland and Britain

National and European Foreign Policy

Portugal in the European Union

Juha Jokela, University of Helsinki, Finland

Towards Europeanization

2010: 234 x 156: 184pp Hb: 978-0-415-57787-8: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83485-5

Edited by Reuben Wong, National University of Singapore and Christopher Hill, University of Cambridge, UK Examines how national foreign policies in the EU affect common EU positions in international politics.

For more information, visit:


Human Rights and Democracy in EU Foreign Policy Rosa Balfour, European Policy Centre, Belgium Examines the role of democracy and human rights in EU foreign policy. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Human Rights and Democracy in International Relations 3. Rhetoric and Tools: Equipping the EU with Human Rights and Democracy Policies 4. EU Foreign Policy Towards Ukraine 5. Implementing Human Rights and Democracy: Press Freedom in Ukraine 6. Implementing Human Rights and Democracy: Ukrainian Elections and the Orange Revolution 7. EU Foreign Policy Towards Egypt 8. Implementing Human Rights and Democracy: Torture in Egypt 9. Implementing Human Rights and Democracy: Election in Egypt 10. Conclusions November 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-61771-0: £80.00 For more information, visit:


Security Challenges in the EuroMed Area in the 21st Century

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Reuben Wong and Christopher Hill 2. France: Europeanization by Default? Frédéric Charillon and Reuben Wong 3. Germany in the European Union Patricia Daehnhardt 4. Resisting Europe? The Case of Italy’s Foreign Policy Elisabetta Brighi 5.Europeanization and British Foreign Policy Michael Aktipis and Tim Oliver 6. Denmark: A Committed Member – With Opt-Outs! Henrik Larsen 7. Greece: From Special Case to Limited Europeanisation Charalambos Tsardanidis and Stelios Stavridis 8. Spain and Europe: Mutual Reinforcement in Foreign Policy Esther Barbé 9. The Europeanization of Finnish Foreign Policy: Pendulum Swings in Slow Motion Hiski Haukkala and Hanna Ojanen 10. Poland: Learning to Play the Brussels Game Karolina Pomorska 11. Slovenia: Searching for a Foreign Policy Identity via the EU Sabina Kajnč 12. Many Actors, One Path? The Meaning of Europeanization in the Context of Foreign Policy Christopher Hill and Reuben Wong May 2011: 234 x 156: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-61084-1: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81603-5 For more information, visit:


Party System Change in Western Europe Gemma Loomes Examines the reasons for party system change in western Europe by focusing on the role that political parties themselves play in the process. Selected Contents: 1. Political Parties and Modern Democracies 2. Electorate-Orientated Strategies 3. Institutional Strategies 4. Selection of Cases and Measurements 5. The Use of Electorate-Orientated Strategies 6. The Use of Institutional Strategies 7. Party Strategies and Party Systems: Taking Voters Out of the Equation?

Mare Nostrum

November 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-60160-3: £80.00

Stephen Calleya, University of Malta

For more information, visit:

This book provides an empirical analysis of security challenges in the Euro-Mediterranean area and highlights the political, military, economic, societal and environmental issues that are already serving as a source of instability in the region. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Overview of Security Challenges in the Euro-Mediterranean Area 2. Regional Relations in the Euro-Med Area 3. Security Challenges in the Mediterranean 4. Regional Initiatives in the EuroMediterranean Area 5. Geo-Strategic Scenarios in the Euro-Mediterranean Area 6. Looking Ahead: Policy Recommendations for Enhancing Co-operative EuroMediterranean Relations

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Laura C. Ferreira-Pereira Part 1: Twenty-five Years After: The Evolution of the Portuguese Politics and Economics 2. Portugal in the European Union, 1985-2010 Nuno Severiano Teixeira 3. The Europeanization of the Portuguese Political System Paul Christopher Manuel 4. The Transformation of the Portuguese Economy: The Impact of European Monetary Union David Corkill 5. The Portuguese and the European Union António Costa Pinto 6. The Transformation of the Portuguese Society Michael Baum Part 2: The Adjustment to Policy Areas 7. Portugal and Common Agriculture Policy Francisco Avillez 8. Portugal and the Industrial Policy Margarida Proença 9. Portugal and European Trade Policy Maria Helena Guimarães 10. The EU’s Structural Funds in Portugal: Positive Results, Lost Opportunities and New Priorities Alfredo Marques 11. Portugal and the Lisbon Strategy Carlos Zorrinho and Arminda Neves Part 3: The Redesigning of the Portuguese Foreign Policy 12. From EPC to ESDP: Going from Orthodox Atlanticism to Committed Europeanism Laura C. Ferreira-Pereira 13. Lusophonia and the Continued Centrality of the Portuguese-Speaking Community Paulo Gorjão 14. From Failure to Success: East Timor in the Portuguese Diplomacy Rui Novais 15. The Relations between Portugal and Spain: Three Decades after Accession Sergio Caramelo 16. Portugal’s EU Experience: What Lessons for the Newcomers? Sebastian Royo 17.Conclusion AJR Groom and Laura C. Ferreira-Pereira December 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-58053-3: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Social Democracy and European Integration The Politics of Preference Formation Edited by Dionyssis G. Dimitrakopoulos, Birkbeck University of London, UK 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-55985-0: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84534-9

Challenges of Governance and Knowledge Edited by Rob Atkinson, University of the West of England, UK, Terizakis Georgios, City of Hannover, Lord Mayor’s Office, Germany and Karsten Zimmermann, Darmstadt University of Technology, Germany 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-56289-8: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84171-6

For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

Laura C. Ferreira-Pereira This volume examines the impact of membership of the EU on Portugal over the last 25 years, it explores the adjustments and transformations that have taken place in the Portuguese society, politics and economics as well as its international relations.

Sustainability in European Environmental Policy

October 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-56625-4: £80.00

Assessing Twenty-Five Years of Integration Experience

For more information, visit:

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

e urop e an p ol i t ic s


Switzerland in Europe Continuity and Change in the Swiss Political Economy Edited by Christine Trampusch, University of Bern, Switzerland and André Mach, University of Lausanne, Switzerland

The book provides the first systematic overview of Swiss political economy in comparative perspective. It provides an analysis of major socioeconomic institutions, economic actors, economic and social policies, and political institutions and their recent changes.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Christine Trampusch and André Mach Part 1: Political Economy, Political System and Relationship with the EU 2. The Swiss Political Economy in Comparative Perspective Christine Trampusch and André Mach 3. The Swiss Political System in a Comparative Perspective Fritz Sager and Christine Zollinger 4. Europe and Switzerland Wolf Linder Part 2: Economic Actors 5. Organized Capital and Coordinated Market Economy Pierre Eichenberger and André Mach 6. Swiss Trade Unions and Industrial Relations after 1990 Daniel Oesch Part 3: Major Socio-Economic Institutions 7. Swiss Corporate Governance Gerhard Schnyder and Frédéric Widmer 8. Ever More Liberal? The Regulation of Job Security and Working Time in Switzerland Patrick Emmenegger 9. Continuity and Change in the Swiss Vocational Training System Christine Trampusch and Linda Rohrer Part 4: Economic and Social Policies 12. A Prematurely Announced Death? Swiss Corporatism in Comparative Perspective Klaus Armingeon 11. Swiss Welfare Reforms in a Comparative European Perspective Giuliano Bonoli and Silja Häusermann 12. The More It Changes, the More It Stays the Same? Swiss Liberalization and Regulatory Policies in Comparative Perspective Martino Maggetti, Alexandre Afonso and Marie-Christine Fontana 13. How Much, and in What Ways is Switzerland Changing? Yannis Papadopoulos March 2011: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-58051-9: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-82939-4

The Political History of European Integration The Hypocrisy of Democracy-Through-Market Hagen Schulz-Forberg, Aarhus University, Denmark and Bo Stråth, University of Helsinki, Finland 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-57883-7: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84826-5


The Second Tier of Local Government in Europe Provinces, Counties, Départements and Landkreise in Comparison Edited by Hubert Heinelt, Darmstadt University of Technology, Germany and Xavier Bertrana Horta, Centre for Local Innovation at the Diputació de Barcelona, and University of Barcelona, Spain Identifies the differences in the institutional settings of the second level of local government among European countries, and debates reform options.

For more information, visit:

The Politics of EU Accession Turkish Challenges and Central European Experiences Edited by Lucie Tunkrova, Fatih University, Turkey and Pavel Šaradín, Palacky University, Czech Republic 2010: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-55549-4: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85281-1

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Hubert Heinelt and Xavier Bertrana Part 1: Country Studies 2. Belgium Françoise Massart-Piérard 3. Denmark Poul Erik Mouritzen 4. France Emmanuel Négrier and Fabien Nicolas 5. England Steve Martin 6. Germany Hubert Heinelt and Björn Egner 7. Hungary Gabor Soos 8. Italy Carlo Bachetti 9. Poland Pawel Swianiewicz 10. Spain Marina Espinosa, Jaume Magre 11. The Netherlands Ger Arendsen Part 2: Comparative Analysis 13. Financing the Second Level of Local Government: A Comparative Analysis Núria Bosch, Marta Espasa and Elena Costas 14. Institutional Characteristics, Tasks and Competences of the Second Level of Local Government as well as Recent Reforms and Current Reform Debates: Comparative Conclusions Xavier Bertrana and Hubert Heinelt September 2011: 234 x 156: 304pp Hb: 978-0-415-60257-0: £80.00 For more information, visit:

The Spatialities of Europeanization Power, Governance and Territory in Europe Alun Jones, University College Dublin, Ireland and Julian Clark, University of Birmingham, UK

For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:

2010: 216 x 138: 200pp Hb: 978-1-844-72167-2: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84774-9 For more information, visit:



Unequal Europe

The Political Economy of Noncompliance

James Wickham, University of Dublin Trinity College, Ireland

The Politics of Adjusting to the European Single Market

Social Divisions in an Old Continent

The Political Economy of Noncompliance explains why states fail to comply with international law.

A penetrating new study about what Europe means today, showing how 9/11 was a brief moment of trans-Atlantic solidarity that lit up the international scene, but was quick to fade. This book is about the rift that existed before this historic juncture and has developed since.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. A Theory of Noncompliance 3. Noncompliance and National Tradition: Enforcing the Free Movement of Goods in Germany and France 4. Stopping State Rescues: Complying with EU State Aid Policy in Germany and the United Kingdom 5. Conclusion

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Where is Europe Anyway? 2. Macro-Level Theories of Social Structure and their Relevance to Contemporary Europe 3. The European Social Structure and Market-Based Inequality 4. Regional Inequality 5. Migration and Ethnicity 6. Gender 7. Conclusion

May 2011: 234 x 156: 160pp Hb: 978-0-415-61585-3: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81632-5

December 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-1-85728-551-2: £75.00

Scott Siegel, Naval Postgraduate School, USA

For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:

For more information, visit:


e uro pea n politics


Parties, Elections, and Policy Reforms in Western Europe

Diversity in Europe


Voting for Social Pacts

Dilemmas of Differential Treatment in Theory and Practice

Kerstin Hamann, University of Central Florida, USA and John Kelly, Birkbeck, University of London, UK

Edited by Gideon Calder, University of Newport, Wales and Emanuela Ceva, University of Pavia, Italy

Dealing with the Legacy of Authoritarianism

Series: Routledge Research in Comparative Politics

Series: Routledge/UACES Contemporary European Studies

2010: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-58195-0: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84865-4

2010: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-58082-3: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83711-5

For more information, visit:

The New Politics of European Civil Society Edited by Ulrike Liebert, University of Bremen, Germany and Hans-Jörg Trenz, University of Oslo, Norway Series: Routledge Studies on Democratising Europe

For more information, visit:

2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-57845-5: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83668-2

European Governmentality

For more information, visit:

The Liberal Drift of Multilevel Governance Richard Münch, University of Bamberg, Germany Series: Routledge/UACES Contemporary European Studies


Regional Powers and Regional Orders

2010: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-48581-4: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85048-0

Edited by Nadine Godehardt, GIGA German Institute for Global and Area Studies and Dirk Nabers, Christian-Albrechts-Universität Kiel, Germany

This collective work deals with repressive institutions and human rights abuses as two dimensions of authoritarian legacies in southern European democracies. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: The Authoritarian Past and Contemporary South European Democracies António Costa Pinto 2. Transitional Justice and Memory: Exploring Different Perspectives Alexandra Barahona de Brito 3. Italy’s Authoritarian Past and Democracy Marco Tarchi 4. Dealing with the ’Double Legacy’ of Authoritarianism in Democratic Portugal António Costa Pinto and Filipa Raimundo 5. Attitudes towards the Authoritarian Past in Spanish Democracy Carsten Humlebaek 6. Repressive Legacies and the Democratisation of Iberian Police Systems Diego Palacios Cerezales 7. The Authoritarian Past and Contemporary Greek Democracy Dimitris A. Sotiropoulos 8. Institutionalized Legacies of Authoritarian Rule in Contemporary Memory Politics: Maintaining Turkey’s Official Narrative of the Armenian Genocide Jennifer Dixon 9. The Politics of the Past: The Southern Cone and Southern Europe in Comparative Perspective Alexandra Barahona de Brito and Mario Szajder 10. Authoritarian Legacies, Politics of Memory and Quality of Democracy in Southern Europe: Open Conclusions Leonardo Morlino September 2011: 246 x 174: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-58708-2: £85.00


This volume reconceptualizes of the concept of ’region’ and its function within power and order systems. For more information, visit:

The Structure of Political Competition in Western Europe Edited by Zsolt Enyedi, Central European University, Hungary and Kevin Deegan-Krause, Wayne State University, USA 2010: 234 x 156: 320pp Hb: 978-0-415-47880-9: £85.00

May 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-60383-6: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81598-4 For more information, visit:

Edited by Antonio Costa Pinto, University of Lisbon, Portugal and Leonardo Morlino, University of Florence, Italy

For more information, visit:

Series: Routledge/GARNET

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Nadine Godehardt and Dirk Nabers Part 1: New Theoretical Concepts in the Study of Regional Orders and Regional Powers 2. Creating International Regions: The Spatial Expression of Power Karoline Postel–Vinay 3. The Power of Ideas in International Relations David MacDonald 4. Regional Powers and Regional Governance Detlef Nolte 5. On the Economics of Regional Powers: Theory and Empirical Results Robert Kappel Part 2: Regional Powers and Their Neighbourhood 6. The European Union as a Regional Power Anne–Marie Le Gloannec 7. China and the Definition of the Asian Region Nadine Godehardt 8. Roles and Actions of Leadership: Brazil and the South American Others Leslie Wehner 9. Regional Leadership? Understanding Power and Transformation in the Middle East Louise Fawcett Part 3: Regional Powers and the Global Power Distribution 10. The Omnipower: The United States and Regional Orders Jeffrey Legro 11. Pakistan: Regional Power, Global Problem? Rajesh Rajagopalan 12. ‘A Fine and Delicate Balance …’: South Africa’s Middle Power Complexities, 1994–2009 Janis van der Westhuizen 13. Israel: Extra-Regional Foundations of a Regional Power Manqué Mark A. Heller 14. Conclusion Nadine Godehardt and Dirk Nabers

The “Politics of the Past” in Southern European Democracies

For more information, visit:

European Neighbourhood through Civil Society Networks? Policies, Practices and Perceptions Edited by James Wesley Scott and Ilkka Liikanen, both at University of Eastern Finland This book pursues a dual objective: on the one hand, it focuses on the actual and potential roles of civil society in developing new forms of political, economic, and socio-cultural cooperation between the European Union and its neighbours. On the other hand, through this investigation of civil society networks it contributes to the debate on the EU’s role as promoter of greater regional co-operation. Selected Contents: 1. Civil Society and the ‘Neighbourhood’ — Europeanization through Cross-Border Cooperation? James Wesley Scott and Ilkka Liikanen 2. Post-Socialist Transformation, European Neighbourhood and Civil Society Networks between Poland, Russia and Ukraine: A Case of Multi-level Contingency Iwona Sagan 3. Civil Society Discourses in Russia: The Influence of the European Union and the Role of EU–Russia Cooperation Elena Belokurova 4. Civil Society Cooperation in the Face of Territorial Adversity: The Estonian–Russian Case Gulnara Roll 5. Europeanization at the EU’s External Borders: The Case of Romanian–Moldovan Civil Society Cooperation Contiu Soitu and Daniela Oitu 6. Civil Society in Turkey and Local Dimensions of Europeanization Ayca Ergun 7. Re-shaping Civil Society in Morocco: Boundary Setting, Integration and Consolidation Bohdana Dimitrovova February 2011: 246 x 174: 136pp Hb: 978-0-415-58719-8: £85.00 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

e urop e an p ol i t ic s

European Security in a Global Context

New Challenges for Stateless Nationalist and Regionalist Parties


Edited by Thierry Tardy, Geneva Centre for Security Policy, Geneva, Switzerland

Edited by Eve Hepburn, University of Edinburgh, UK

This new edited volume examines contemporary European security from three different standpoints. It explores security dynamics, first, within Europe; second, the interaction patterns between Europe and other parts of the world (the United States, Africa, the Middle East, China and India); and, finally, the external perceptions of European security.

2010: 234 x 156: 186pp Hb: 978-0-415-57181-4: £85.00

Edited by Gamze Avci, University College Utrecht, the Netherlands and Ali Carkoglu, Koç University, Turkey

Selected Contents: Introduction Thierry Tardy Part 1: European Security: Internal Dynamics 1. The European Union, a Regional Security Actor with Global Aspirations Thierry Tardy 2. NATO and the Search for Strategic Credibility Julian Lindley-French 3. Where is the OSCE Going? Present Role and Challenges of a Stealth Security Organisation Victor-Yves Ghebali 4. The Changing Political Geography of Europe: After EU and NATO Enlargements Pál Dunay 5. Europe and Russia: From Strategic Dissonance to Strategic Divorce? Graeme P. Herd Part 2: European Security: External Dynamics 6. The United States and Europe: Waiting to Exhale Catherine McArdle Kelleher 7. Europe and the Middle East: Attempting to Bridge the Divide Roland Dannreuther 8. Africa: Still a Secondary Security Challenge to the European Union Gorm Rye Olsen 9. Chinese Outlook on European Security: Towards Ideological Convergence? Lanxin Xiang 10. Does Europe Matter to India? Christophe Jaffrelot and Waheguru Pal Singh Sidhu. Conclusion: The Unbearable Weight of Not Being François Heisbourg. Bibliography

Rewards for High Public Office in Europe and North America

Internal and External Dynamics

2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Pb: 978-0-415-59077-8: £24.95 For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:


Edited by B. Guy Peters, University of Pittsburgh, USA and Marleen Brans, Katholieke Universiteit Leuven, Belgium This book addresses an important element of public governance, and does so in longitudinal and comparative manner. The approach enables us to make a number of interesting statements now only about the development of political systems but also about the differences among those systems. It provides an unique systematic investigation of both formal and informal rewards for working in high-level positions in the public sector, and seeks to determine the impacts of the choices of reward structures. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Comparing the Rewards of High Public Office Country Chapters 2. United Kingdom 3. France 4. Germany 5. Netherlands 6. Belgium 7. Spain 8. Sweden 9. Norway 10. United States 11. Estonia 12. Slovakia 13. Romania 14. Conclusion December 2011: 246 x 174: 400pp Hb: 978-0-415-78105-3: £80.00


For more information, visit:

Euroscepticism in Southern Europe

Spain’s ’Second Transition’?

Edited by Susannah Verney, University of Athens, Greece

The Socialist Government of Jose Luis Rodriguez Zapatero

This book traces the evolution of euroscepticism in each South European country, assessing its significance and highlighting both continuity and change, it illuminates the factors which have shaped opposition to integration and the form and content which it has assumed in each country.

Edited by Bonnie N. Field, University of Bentley, USA

Selected Contents: 1. Is there a South European Euroscepticism? Susannah Verney 2. The Ebb and Flow of Euroscepticism in Italy Lucia Quaglia 3. From the Mainstream to the Margins: Euroscepticism in Greece Susannah Verney 4. Euroscepticism in Portugal: Party and Mass Perspectives Marina Costa Lobo and Pedro Magalhães 5. Spain: Euroscepticism in a Pro-European Country Antonia M. Ruiz Jiménez and Alfonso Egea de Haro 6. Towards a Framework of Analysis for Euroscepticism: The Case of Cyprus Kalliope Agapiou-Josephides 7. Maltese Euroscepticism Roderick Pace 8. Euroscepticism in Turkey in Comparitive Perspective Hakan Yilmaz

2010: 246 x 174: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-55052-9: £85.00 For more information, visit:

June 2011: 246 x 174: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-44828-4: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:

Turkey and the EU: Accession and Reform

This book provides a comprehensive, integrated study of both classic and ‘new’ topics in Turkey-EU relations, combined with fresh insights from renowned scholars on the domestic sources of politics. This book was published as a special issue of South European Society and Politics. Selected Contents: Part 1: Historical Perspectives 1. EU from the Perspective of Turkish Political Development: A Conceptual Guideline Gamze Avcı and Ali Çarkoğlu 2. Enlargement Driven Change: Lessons from the Post-Communist States Adaptation to the European Union and their Relevance for Turkey Antoaneta Dimitrova 3. The Tanzimat and Sevres Syndromes Hakan Yılmaz Part 2: Constitutional and Administrative Reform 4. Turkish-EU Odyssey and Political Regime Change in Turkey Ersin Kalaycıoğlu 5. Is Corruption a Drawback to Turkey’s Accession to the EU? Fikret Adaman Part 3: Economy 6. Economic Dynamics as a Source of Support for and Resistance against EU Reforms Kamil Yılmaz 7. The Role of Turkey in the European Energy Market within the Context of Economic Relations with Russia Bahri Yilmaz Part 4: Human Rights and Minorities 8. Human Rights and Turkey’s EU Accession Process, 2005-2010 William Hale 9. The Kurdish Issue and Limits to EU Reform Kemal Kirisci 10. Alevi Minority and the EU Ali Çarkoğlu and Nazlı Çağın Bilgili Part 5: Military and Foreign Policy 11. EU Reforms and Political Autonomy of the Military in Turkey Yaprak Gürsoy 12. Turkish Foreign Policy and its Domestic Determinants: The Role of the EU Meltem Müftüler Baç 13. Challenges of Triangular Relations: The U.S., Europe, and Turkey’s EU Accession Sabri Sayarı Part 6: Political Parties and Mass Public Opinion 14. AKP: From EU-Mania to EU-Fatigue Gamze Avcı 15. Social Democrats Odul Celep 16. Defending Turkey?: The Nationalist Movement Party and European Integration Gamze Avcı 17. Diagnosing Trends and Determinants in Public Support for Turkey’s EU Membership Ali Çarkoğlu and Çiğdem Kentmen 18. European Turks as a Force in EU-Turkey Relations Ayhan Kaya Part 7: Elites, Civil Society and the Candidacy 19. Between Reason and Emotion: Popular Discourses on Turkey’s Membership Bernard Steunenberg, Simay Petek and Christiane Rueth 20. Turkish Elites and the EU Sait Aksit, Ozgehan Senyuva and Isik Gurleyen 21. Turkish Accession and Defining The Boundaries of Nationalism and Supranationalism: Discourses in the European Commission Senem Aydın-Düzgit and Semin Süvarierol 22. Turco-Scepticism vs Turco-Apathy? A Comparative Analysis of European Public and Elite Opinion Ebru Canan Sokullu 23. Civil Society and EU Affairs in Turkey: Myths and Realities Ahmet Icduygu 24. Conclusions: Whither Turkey? Gamze Avcı and Ali Çarkoğlu October 2011: 246 x 174: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-61532-7: £85.00 For more information, visit:


b rit ish and ir ish politics


British and Irish Politics Government Official History Series The Government Official History series began in 1919 with wartime histories, and the peacetime series was inaugurated in 1966 by Harold Wilson. The aim of the series is to produce major histories in their own right, compiled by historians eminent in the field, who are afforded free access to all relevant material in the official archives. The Histories also provide a trusted secondary source for other historians and researchers while the official records are not in the public domain. The main criteria for selection of topics are that the histories should record important episodes or themes of British history while the official records can still be supplemented by the recollections of key players; and that they should be of general interest, and, preferably, involve the records of more than one government department. Forthcoming


The Official History of North Sea Oil and Gas

The Official History of the British Civil Service

Vol. I: The Growing Dominance of the State

Reforming the Civil Service, Volume I: The Fulton Years, 1966-81

Alex Kemp, University of Aberdeen, UK

Whitehall Histories Series Edited by Keith Hamilton and Patrick Salmon, both at Foreign and Commonwealth Office, Information Management Group, London, UK FCO historians are responsible for editing Documents on British Policy Overseas (DBPO) and for overseeing the publication of FCO Internal Histories. The latest DBPO volumes, published in Series III, are composed almost wholly of documents from within the thirty-year ‘closed period’, which would otherwise be unavailable to the public. Forthcoming

The Invasion of Afghanistan and UK-Soviet Relations, 1979-82

Written by the leading expert in the history of UK energy, this study provides new, in-depth analysis of the development of UK petroleum policies towards the North Sea based on full access to the Government’s relevant archives.

Rodney Lowe, Cabinet Office, London

Documents on British Policy Overseas, Series III, Volume VIII

This first volume of the Official History of the UK Civil Service covers its evolution from the Northcote-Trevelyan Report of 1854 to the first years of Mrs Thatcher’s government in 1981.

Edited by Richard Smith and Stephen Robert Twigge, both at Foreign and Commonwealth Office, Information Management Group, London, UK

Selected Contents: 1. Initial Legislation and Licensing 2. The Early North Sea Boundary Issues 3. What Role for the State? 4. The First Gas Contracts 5. The Coming of Oil, the Fourth Round Controversy and its Consequences 6. Further Gas Developments and the Frigg Contracts 7. Designing the Tax Package 8. Providing for BNOC and Enhanced State Control 9. The New Policy in Action: State Participation 10. The New Policy in Action: Further Licensing and Related Issues 11. Increasing the Government Take 12. Depletion and Conservation Policies 13. Utilising the Benefits. Conclusions to Volume 1

Despite current concerns with good governance and policy delivery, little serious attention has been paid to the institution vital to both: the Civil Service. This Official History is designed to remedy this by placing present problems in historical context and by providing a helpful structure in which others, and particularly former officials, may contribute to the debate.

August 2011: 234 x 156: 624pp Hb: 978-0-415-44754-6: £95.00

• the need for a Prime Minister’s Department

September 2011: 234 x 156: 512pp Hb: 978-0-415-67853-7: £90.00

• the evolution of Parliamentary Select Committees to resolve the potential tension between bureaucracy and Parliamentary democracy.

For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:


The Official History of North Sea Oil and Gas Vol. II: Moderating the State’s Role Alex Kemp, University of Aberdeen, UK Written by the leading expert in the history of UK energy, this study provides new, in-depth analysis of the development of UK petroleum policies towards the North Sea based on full access to the Government’s relevant archives. Selected Contents: 1. Natural Gas in the New market Environment 2. Oil Policies in the New Market Environment 3. Taxation for Changing Market Conditions 4. Licensing in Changing Market Conditions 5. The Demise of State Intervention 6. Further Taxation Developments 7. The Onshore Impact and Policies 8. Licensing and Related Issues into the 1990s 9. Health and Safety 10. Decommissioning and Environment 11. Concluding Reflections August 2011: 234 x 156: 720pp Hb: 978-0-415-57094-7: £95.00 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

Particular light is shed on the origins of such current concerns as • the role of special advisers

This Official History is based on extensive research into both recently released and unreleased papers as well as interviews with leading participants. It has important lessons to offer all those, both inside and outside the UK, seeking to improve the quality of democratic government. Selected Contents: Part 1: The Legacy 1. The Northcote-Trevelyan Report and the Evolution of the Civil Service, 1854 - 1916 2. The Fisher-Bridges Settlement, 191656 Part 2: The Reform Momentum 3. Modernisation before Fulton, 1956-66 4. The Fulton Committee, 1966-8 Part 3: The Politics and Planning of Reform 5. Modernisation’s Moment, 1968-72 6. The Crisis of Consensus, 1973-9 7. Mrs Thatcher and the Demise of the Civil Service Department, 1979-81 Part 4: Wider Issues, 1966-81 8. Whitleyism, 1966-81 9. Management Challenges 10. Political Pressures Part 5: Conclusion 11. Ringing out the Old, Ringing in the New January 2011: 234 x 156: 568pp Hb: 978-0-415-58864-5: £70.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83155-7 For more information, visit:

The documents in this volume describe the development of British policy towards the Soviet Union during the eventful years after the Russian invasion of Afghanistan in 1979. The book will be of much interest to students of British politics and foreign policy, Russian history, US foreign policy, Central Asian politics, and IR in general. Selected Contents: Preface. Abbreviations for Printed Sources. Abbreviated Designations. List of Persons. Chapter Summaries. I: December 1979-November 1981. II: December 1981-December 1982. Index


The Nordic Countries: From War to Cold War, 1944–51 Documents on British Policy Overseas, Series I, Vol. IX Edited by Tony Insall and Patrick Salmon, Foreign and Commonwealth Office, Information Management Group, London, UK This book is a collection of diplomatic documents describing the development of British relations with the Nordic countries between the end of the Second World War and the defeat of the Labour Government in 1951. Selected Contents: Preface Abbreviations for Printed Sources Abbreviated Designations List of Persons Chapter Summaries 1. 1944-1945 2. 1946-1947 3. 1948 4. 1949-1951 February 2011: 234 x 156: 440pp Hb: 978-0-415-59476-9: £90.00 eBook: 978-0-203-82865-6 For more information, visit:

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

c e n tr al a n d e as te r n e uro p e New

British National Party Contemporary Perspectives Edited by Nigel Copsey and Graham Macklin, both at University of Teesside, UK

This book examines the recent development of the far right in Britain, with a particular focus on the British National Party (BNP) the most electorally successful far right party in British history. It brings fresh perspectives to our understanding of the BNP in order to make a significant contribution to scholarly debate on the nature of far right extremism both nationally and internationally.

The book is significantly different from other literature in the field primarily because of its focus on three important yet underdeveloped themes, which are reflected in the structure of the book itself. These are: • the ideological and cultural politics of contemporary BNP • responses to the BNP • the BNP’s place within the contemporary domestic and international far-right milieu. Written by an outstanding line-up of renowned experts in this field, this is essential reading for all those with an interest in British politics, fascism, political parties, race relations and extremism. Selected Contents: Introduction: Contemporary Perspectives on the BNP Nigel Copsey Part 1: Ideological and Cultural Politics 1. Modernising the Past for the Future Graham Macklin 2. Race and Racial Difference: The Surface and Depth of BNP Ideology John E. Richardson 3. Multiculturalism and the Sub-Cultural Politics of the BNP James Rhodes Part 2: Responses to the BNP 4. ’The Media = Lies, Lies, Lies!’ The BNP and the Media in Contemporary Britain Nigel Copsey and Graham Macklin 5. Ambivalent Admiration: The Response of Other Extreme Right Groups to the Rise of the BNP Steven Woodbridge 6. From Direct Action to Community Action: The Changing Dynamics of Anti-Fascist Opposition Nigel Copsey 7. The BNP in Local Government: Support for the Far Right or for Community Politics? Karin Bottom and Colin Copus Part 3: International Perspectives 8. Assessing the Political Influence of Anti-Immigrant Parties: The BNP in Comparative European Perspective Anthony Messina 9. Alien Influence: Contextualising the ‘Modernised’ BNP Roger Griffin 10. Local Embedding as a Factor in Electoral Success: The BNP and NPD Compared Fabian Virchow and Nigel Copsey. Conclusion: Further Avenues for Research Graham Macklin

Continuity, Change and Crisis in Contemporary Ireland Edited by Brian Girvin, University of Glasgow, UK and Gary Murphy, Dublin City University, Ireland

Central and Eastern Europe BASEES/Routledge Series on Russian and East European Studies

2010: 234 x 156: 216pp Hb: 978-0-415-56573-8: £80.00 For more information, visit:


The British General Election of 2010 Explaining the Outcome Edited by Justin Fisher, Brunel University, UK and Christopher Wlezien, Temple University, USA This book features a comprehensive and data-rich examination of the 2010 General Election outcome. Drawing on the latest surveys, it explains how different factors came together to produce the Election Day result. Selected Contents: Introduction Justin Fisher and Christopher Wlezien 1. Valence and the Vote: Evidence from the British Election Study Clarke, Sanders, Stewart and Whiteley 2. The Impact of the Electoral System Johnston and Pattie 3. Impact of the Expenses Scandal Cowley 4. The Issue Agenda and the Vote Green and Hobolt 5. The Impact of Party Leaders Evans and Andersen 6. Voter Turnout Carman and Johns 7. The Virtual Campaign Gibson 8. Tactical Voting Fisher and Curtice October 2011: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-58301-5: £80.00 For more information, visit:

The Europeanization of Party Politics in Ireland, North and South Edited by Katy Hayward, Queen’s University, Belfast and Mary C. Murphy, University College Cork, Ireland 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-57891-2: £80.00 For more information, visit:

February 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-48383-4: £80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-48384-1: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-83019-2 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:

Series Edited by Richard Sakwa, University of Kent at Canterbury, UK This series is published on behalf of BASEES (the British Association for Slavonic and East European Studies). The series comprises original, high-quality, research-level work by both new and established scholars on all aspects of Russian, Soviet, post-Soviet and East European Studies in humanities and social science subjects. New

Citizens in the Making in Post-Soviet States Olena Nikolayenko, Fordham University, USA

This book, based on extensive original research, including new survey research amongst young people, examines the political attitudes of Russian and Ukrainian adolescents without any firsthand experience with communism.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Attitudes toward Democracy 3. Trust in Authorities 4. Building the New Political Community, Remembering the Old One 5. Learning about Politics 6. Construction of Soviet History in School Textbooks 7. Growing Up, but Growing Apart February 2011: 234 x 156: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-59604-6: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83075-8 For more information, visit:


c ent ral a nd e aste r n e urope



Russia and Islam

Khrushchev in the Kremlin

State, Society and Radicalism

Policy and Government in the Soviet Union, 1953–64

Edited by Roland Dannreuther, University of Westminster, UK and Luke March, University of Edinburgh, UK

Edited by Jeremy Smith, University of Birmingham, UK and Melanie Ilic, University of Gloucestershire, UK

This book presents a new picture of the politics, economics and process of government in the Soviet Union under the leadership of Nikita Khrushchev. Based in large part on original research in recently declassified archive collections, the book examines the full complexity of government, and provides an overview of the internal development of the Soviet Union in this period, locating it in the broader context of Soviet history. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Khrushchev as Leader 3. The Rise of Political Clans in the Era of Nikita Khrushchev: The First Phase, 1953-1959 4. The Central Committee Apparatus under Khrushchev 5. The Outer Reaches of Liberalization: Combating Political Dissent in the Khrushchev Era 6. Leadership and Nationalism in the Soviet Republics, 1953 - 1959 7. Moscow-Kiev Relations and the Sovnarkhoz Rreform 8. Failings of the Sovnarkhoz Reform: The Ukrainian Experience 9. Khrushchev and the Challenge of Technological Progress 10. Khrushchevism after Khrushchev: The Rise of National Interest in the Eastern Bloc 11. The Economy of Illusions: The Phenomenon of Data-inflation in the Khrushchev Era 12. The Modernisation of Soviet Railways Traction in Comparative Perspective 13. From Khrushchev (1935-6) to Khrushchev (1956-64): Construction Policy Compared January 2011: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-47648-5: £90.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83179-3 For more information, visit:

Political Theory and Community Building in Post-Soviet Russia Edited by Oleg Kharkhordin, European University at St. Petersburg, Russia and Risto Alapuro, University of Helsinki, Finland This book revisits many aspects of current social science theories, such as actor-network theory and the French school of science and technology studies, to test how the theories apply in a specific situation: in this case the role of Soviet era infrastructure in the city of Cherepovets in Russia, home of Russia’s second biggest steel producer, Severstal. Selected Contents: Introduction: The Theory of Res Publica and Contemporary Russia: How Do Things Matter Together with Publics? Part 1: Links with Conventional Theories 1. Goods, Res Publica, Actor-Networks, and Collective Action 2. Categories of Goods in Economics and Public Choice Literature as Applied to Heat and Water Utilities Part 2: Case Studies 3. Things and People in the Housing and Utility Sector Reform in Russia, 1991-2006 4. Common and Dividing Things in Homeowners’ Associations 5. Looking for the Common and the Public in a Town. Conclusion: Commonality at Different Levels: Infrastructures of Liberty 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-59601-5: £90.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83524-1 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

This book examines contemporary developments in Russian politics, how they impact on Russia’s Muslim communities, how these communities are helping to shape the Russian state, and what insights this provides to the nature and identity of the Russian state both in its inward and outward projection.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Part 1: Discourses and Frameworks of Analysis 2. Russian Approaches to Extremism, Nationalism and Religion Alexander Verkhovsky 3. Discourses and Approaches to Islam and Islamism in Russia Roland Dannreuther Part 2: Russia and Islam in Comparative Perspective 4. Comparing Islamic Communities in the North Caucasus and Volga-Urals Region Galina Yemelianova 5. Comparative Approaches to Muslim Integration: Russia, France and the UK Ekaterina Braginskaia 6. Moderating Anti-Islamicism: The Comparative Dimension Stephen Hutchings and Galina Miazhevich 7. Radical Islam in the North Caucasus: Domestic and International Aspects Domitilla Sagramoso Part 3: Russian Muslim Communities: State Interaction and Responses 8. Moscow and Muslims: The Limits of Multiculturalism Luke March 9. Tatarstan: Islam and Nationalism Azat Khurmatullin 10. ‘Kadyrov’ Strategies against Radical Extremism in Chechnya and Beyond John Russell 11. North Caucasus: Dynamics of Radicalisation and De-Radicalisation Akmet Yarlykapov Part 4: Russia and the Muslim World 12. Russia and the Muslim World: Interests, Power Projection and Identity Dina Malysheva 13. Framing Islam: Religion, Regime Stability and Security and RussianCentral Asian Relations Matteo Fumagalli 14. Russia and Iran: The Limits of Pragmatism Elaheh Koolaee 15. Conclusion 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-55245-5: £90.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85421-1 For more information, visit:

Constitutional Bargaining in Russia, 1990-93 Institutions and Uncertainty Edward Morgan-Jones, University of Kent, UK This book examines the constitutional bargaining processes in Russia in the critical period of 1990-1993. It is a valuable resource to those interested in Russia and post-communist politics, origins of political institutions, comparative government, democratisation and development studies. Selected Contents: 1. Explaining the Beginning of Constitutional Negotiations 2. Explaining the Outcomes of Constitutional Negotiations before the fall of the Soviet Union 3. Yeltin’s Missed Opportunity? 4. Constitutional Negotiations within Congressional Institutions after the Fall of the Soviet Union 5. Explaining the Breakdown of Constitutional Negotiations 2010: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-49991-0: £90.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86128-8

Television and Presidential Power in Putin’s Russia Tina Burrett, Temple University, Japan Campus, Japan

As a new president takes power in Russia, this book provides an analysis of the changing relationship between control of Russian television media and presidential power during the tenure of President Vladimir Putin. It argues that the conflicts within Russia’s political and economic elites, and President Putin’s attempts to rebuild the Russian state after its fragmentation during the Yeltsin administration, are the most significant causes of changes in Russian media. Selected Contents: 1. Covering the President: An Introduction 2. Television and the 2000 Presidential Election 3. Elite Conflict and the End of Independent Television 4. Controlling the News Agenda 5. National Television and the 2003 State Duma Election: Coverage of the Candidates, Corruption and Khodorkovsky 6. Securing the System and a Second Term: Television Coverage 2004 Russian Presidential Election 7. Television in Putin’s Second Term 2010: 234 x 156: 320pp Hb: 978-0-415-56182-2: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83559-3 For more information, visit:


The Decline of Regionalism in Putin’s Russia Boundary Issues J. Paul Goode, University of Oklahoma, USA

This book reassesses the process whereby after 2000 Putin reversed the process by which in the 1990s power had shifted from Moscow to the regions. It focuses on the dynamics of regional boundaries: juridical boundaries, which defined a region’s territorial extent and thereby its resources; institutional boundaries that sustained regional differences; and cultural boundaries that defined the ethnic or technocratic principles on which a region could claim legitimate existence. Selected Contents: 1. The Puzzling Decline of Regionalism in Russia 2. Regions, Regionalism, and Regional Boundaries 3. A Brief History of Russia’s Regional Boundaries 4. Putin’s Federal Districts and Regional Identities 5. Constitutions, Charters, and Institutional Boundaries 6. The Push for Regional Enlargement 7. Assessing the Boundaries Approach to Regionalism May 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-60807-7: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81623-3 For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website


The Czech Republic and the European Union Dan Marek, Palacký University, Czech Republic and Michael Baun, Valdosta State University, USA Series: Europe and the Nation State 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-46097-2: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84739-8 For more information, visit:


The EU and the Western Balkans Stabilization and Europeanization through Enlargement John O’Brennan, National University of Ireland, Ireland Series: Europe and the Nation State This volume examines the EU’s deepening relationship with the countries of the Western Balkans from a constructivist perspective, analyzing the different ways in which the enlargement process has impacted on the region, and the extent to which enlargement has helped stabilize, democratize and Europeanize the region. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Part 1: Country Studies 2. Croatia 3. Serbia and Montenegro 4. Bosnia and Herzegovina 5. FYR Macedonia 6. Kosovo Part 2: Issues and Analysis 7. Geopolitical Issues 8. Economic Issues 9. Diffusing EU Norms through SAA and Enlargement 10. Conclusions March 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-42608-4: £75.00 For more information, visit:


Post-Communist Parliaments The Second Decade Edited by David M. Olson, University of North Carolina at Greensboro, USA and Gabriella Ilonszki, Corvinus University of Budapest, Hungary



Poland Within the European Union

Russian Energy Security and Foreign Policy

New Awkward Partner or New Heart of Europe? Aleks Szczerbiak, University of Sussex, UK

Edited by Adrian Dellecker and Thomas Gomart, both at IFRI, France

Series: Routledge Advances in European Politics

Series: Routledge/GARNET

This book is a detailed empirical case study of the impact of the EU on Poland and Poland’s impact on the EU in the first three years of membership from 2004-2007. Selected Contents: Introduction: Why Does Poland Matter to the EU and the EU Matter to Poland? 1. Returning to Europe: The Political and Economic Context of Polish EU Membership 2. A New European Player? Poland’s Policy Impact as a New EU Member 3. Looking Eastwards: Poland’s Impact on the EU’s Eastern Policy 4. Eurosceptics, Europhiles or Eurorealists? Polish Public Attitudes Towards the EU in the Post-Accession Period 5. (Not) A Re-aligning Issue? The (Non-)Impact of EU Membership on Party Politics in Poland. Conclusion: New Awkward Partner or New Heart of Europe? August 2011: 234 x 156: 296pp Hb: 978-0-415-38073-7: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-09953-7 For more information, visit:

Perceptions of the European Union in New Member States A Comparative Perspective Edited by Gabriella Ilonszki, Corvinus University of Budapest, Hungary Series: Routledge Europe-Asia Studies 2010: 246 x 174: 184pp Hb: 978-0-415-57490-7: £80.00 For more information, visit:

The European Union, Russia and the Shared Neighbourhood Edited by Jackie Gower, King’s College London, UK and Graham Timmins, University of Stirling, UK

Series: Library of Legislative Studies

Series: Routledge Europe-Asia Studies

The parliaments of post-Communist Europe continue to improvise and elaborate their working relationships with both their chief executives and electorates.

This book draws together research which examines the objectives of EU and Russian foreign policy and the complexities of the security challenges in this region.

This book examines these adaptations in seven parliaments, comparing both among them and with parliaments of west Europe. Their changes are traced through four distinct sets in context, members, internal structure, and working relationship with the executive. This research develops a common perspective for our understanding of both new and developed legislatures by tracing the steps through which new parliaments begin, adapt and become established.

This book was based on a special issue of Europe-Asia Studies.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Introduction 1. Beyond the Initial Decade Part 2: The Parliaments 2. Stable Democratic Parliaments 3. Presidentially Dominated Parliaments Part 3: Post-Communist Parliaments Compared 4. Legislative-Executive Relations 5. Internal Organization: Party, Committee, Leadership 6. Interest Representation and Parliaments 7. Varieties of Bicameralism Through Two Decades Part 4: Conclusion 8. Two Decades of Divergent Parliamentary Development August 2011: 234 x 156: 160pp Hb: 978-0-415-56083-2: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: The European Union, Russia and the Shared Neighbourhood Jackie Gower and Graham Timmins 2. Competing Rationalities: Russia, the EU and the ‘Shared Neighbourhood’ Derek Averre 3. EU Governance and the European Neighbourhood Policy: A Framework for Analysis Stefan Gänzle 4. The Contribution of the Visegrad Group to the European Union’s ‘Eastern’ Policy: Rhetoric or Reality? Martin Dangerfield 5. Lost in Translation? Why the EU has Failed to Influence Russia’s Development Hiski Haukkala 6. ‘Bashing about Rights’? Russia and the ‘New’ EU States on Human Rights and Democracy Promotion Rick Fawn 7. Power without Influence? The EU and Trade Disputes with Russia Tuomas Forsberg and Antti Seppo 8. Diversionary Role of the Georgia–Russia Conflict: International Constraints and Domestic Appeal Mikhail Filippov 2010: 246 x 174: 184pp Hb: 978-0-415-59712-8: £85.00 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:

This book provides an original and thoroughly academic analysis of the link between Russian energy and foreign policies in Eurasia, as well as offering an interpretation of Russia’s coherence on the international stage. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Solving the Eurasian Energy Equation Adrian Dellecker and Thomas Gomart Part 1: Energy’s Link to Domestic and Foreign Policies 2. Energy Security in Eurasia: Clashing Interests Franz Umbach 3. Hydrocarbon Production and Exports in Central Asia: The Impact of Institutions and Politics William Tompson 4. How To Get a Pipeline Built: Myth and Reality Jérôme Guillet 5. The Role of Central Asian Gas: Is It Possible to Bypass Russia? Maureen Crandall Part 2: Russian Foreign and Energy Relations with NIS Net Exporters 6. Ups and Downs of the Russia-Turkmenistan Relationship Vladimir Milov 7. Kazakhstan’s Oil and Gas Development: Views from Russia and Kazakhstan Martha Brill Olcott 8. Uzbekistan: Central Asian Key Andrew Monaghan 9. The Uncertain Trajectory of Russia-Azerbaijan Relations in the Multiple-Pipeline Era Pavel K. Baev Part 3: Russian Export Policy and Relations with Transit Countries 10. Russia, Gazprom and the CAC: Interests and Relations Leonid Grigoriev 11. After the War: The Southern Corridor John Roberts 12. Brothers to Neighbors: Russia-Belarus Relations in Transit Folkert Garbe, Felix Hett, and Rainer Lindner 13. Conclusion Adrian Dellecker and Thomas Gomart May 2011: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-54733-8: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81673-8 For more information, visit: The Communist Quest for

The Communist Quest for National Legitimacy in Europe, 1918-1989 Edited by Martin Mevius, University of Amsterdam, Netherlands Series: Association for the Study of Nationalities This book tackles popular misunderstandings about the incompatibility of communism and nationalism, and shows how communist parties throughout Europe consistently made appeals to popular nationalism. Selected Contents: 1. Reappraising Communism and Nationalism Martin Mevius 2. The First Great Patriotic War: Spanish Communists and Nationalism, 1936–1939 Xose-Manoel Nunez and Jose M. Faraldo 3. The National Discourse of the Bulgarian Communist Party on National Anniversaries and Commemorations (1944–1948) Yannis Sygkelos 4. Nation and Empire: Dilemmas of Legitimacy during Stalinism in Poland (1941–1956) Jan C. Behrends 5. Nationalism as a Heavy Mortgage: SED Cadres Actions between Demand and Reality Jan Kiepe 6. The Role of Portugal on the Stage of Imperialism: Communism, Nationalism and Colonialism (1930–1960) Jose Neves 7. East German Music and the Problem of National Identity Laura Silverberg 8. Building the Nation, Instrumentalizing Nationalism: Revisiting Romanian National-Communism, 1956–1989 Dragos Petrescu 2010: 246 x 174: 184pp Hb: 978-0-415-58712-9: £85.00 For more information, visit:






European Integration and the Western Balkans

Eastern Partnership: A New Opportunity for the Neighbours?

European Enlargement, Domestic Challenges and Institutional Challenges

Edited by Elena Korosteleva, Aberystwyth University, UK

Edited by Arolda Elbasani, Freie Universitat, Berlin, Germany

The volume comprehensively explores success and problems of EU relations with Eastern Europe, under the European Neighbourhood Policy and Eastern Partnership.

Series: Routledge/UACES Contemporary European Studies This book focuses on the challenges of the European Union integration process for the Western Balkans. Selected Contents: Introduction: EU Enlargement in the Western Balkans 1. Europeanization and Institutional Change in the Balkans Arolda Elbasani 2. EU Enlargement Policy in the Balkans David Phinnemore Part 1: EU Enlargement and Contested States 3. Secessionism, Irredentism and EU Enlargement Rafael Bierman 4. Europeanization and State Building in Kosovo Dimitris Papadimitriou 5. Compliance without Governance: The Role of NGOs Adam Fagan Part 2: EU Enlargement and Weak States 6. EU Conditionality and Cooperation with International Court of Justice in Serbia Jelena Stojanovic 7. Conditionality as a Transforming Power in Macedonia: Evidence from Electoral Mangement Jesicca Giandomenico 8. EU and Citizenship in Former Yugoslavia Igor Stick Part 3: Enlargement and Governance 9. Public Administration Reform in Albania Arolda Elbasani 10. The EU and Governance in South Eastern Europe Martin Mendelski 11. Conclusions Philippe Schmitter September 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-59452-3: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Cohesion Policy and Multi-level Governance in South East Europe Edited by Ian Bache, University of Sheffield, UK and George Andreou, Aristotle University of Thessaloniki, Greece This book considers the extent to which EU cohesion policy and related pre-accession instruments are contributing to the development of more compound polities in south east Europe and, specifically, promoting multi-level governance. Selected Contents: 1. Europeanization and Multi-Level Governance: Introduction Ian Bache 2. The Domestic Effects of EU Cohesion Policy in Greece: Islands of Europeanization in a Sea of Traditional Practices George Andreou 3. Europeanization and Multi-Level Governance in Slovenia Ian Bache and George Andreou 4. The Europeanization of Bulgarian Regional Policy: A Case of Strengthened Centralization? Alexander Yanakiev 5. Europeanization and New Patterns of Multi-Level Governance in Romania Ana Maria Dobre 6. Europeanization and Nascent Multi-Level Governance in Croatia Ian Bache and Daniel Tomšií 7. Europeanization and FYR Macedonia: Towards a Compound Polity? Gorica Atanasova and Ian Bache 8. Europeanization and Multi-Level Governance in Turkey Ebru Ertugal 9. Building Multi-Level Governance in South East Europe? Ian Bache 2010: 246 x 174: 136pp Hb: 978-0-415-59419-6: £85.00 For more information, visit:

Selected Contents: 1. The Eastern Partnership Initiative: A New Opportunity for the Neighbours? Elena Korosteleva 2. Contested Neighbourhood or How to Reconcile the Differences Tanya Radchuk 3. Ukraine and the Eastern Partnership: ‘Lost in Translation? Oleksander Stegniy 4. Belarus in the Context of the European Neighbourhood Policy: Between the EU and Russia David Rotman and Natalia Veremeeva 5. Moldova under the European Neighbourhood Policy: ’Falling between stools?’ Olga Danii and Mariana Mascauteanu 6. Russia-EU Relations or How the Russians Really View the EU Sergey Tumanov, Alexander Gasparishvili and Elena Romanova 7. Eastern Europe between East and West Ronald Hill 8. The EU and Eastern Europe: Forging a Sustainable Future? Stephen White November 2011: 216 x 138: 160pp Hb: 978-0-415-67607-6: £80.00 For more information, visit:

European Parliament Elections after Eastern Enlargement Edited by Hermann Schmitt, University of Mannheim, Germany

Party Politics in Central and Eastern Europe Does EU Membership Matter? Edited by Tim Haughton, University of Birmingham, UK 2010: 216 x 138: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-56749-7: £80.00 For more information, visit:


The European Union and South East Europe The Dynamics of Europeanization and Multilevel Governance Andrew Geddes, Charles Lees and Andrew Taylor, University of Sheffield Explores the degree to which the European Union’s engagement with the democracies of South East Europe has promoted Europeanization and Multi-Level Governance. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Theory and Method 3. The Politics of South East Europe 4. Cohesion 5. Environment 6. Migration 7. Conclusions September 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-66906-1: £75.00 For more information, visit:

2010: 246 x 174: 168pp Hb: 978-0-415-55675-0: £80.00

The Security Context in the Black Sea Region

For more information, visit:

Edited by Dimitrios Triantaphyllou, International Centre for Black Sea Studies (ICBSS), Greece


2010: 246 x 174: 184pp Hb: 978-0-415-56088-7: £85.00

Memory and Pluralism in the Baltic States

For more information, visit:

Edited by Eva-Clarita Pettai, University of Tartu, Estonia


While much has been written about top-down attempts by states and political actors to mould people’s memories of the past through public commemoration, textbooks or monuments, this volume takes a view from below by focusing on different types of societal actors and the ways in which they interact with the political world in order to influence collective memory.

European Foreign Policy and the Challenges of Balkan Accession

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Memory and Democratic Pluralism in the Baltic States – Rethinking the Relationship Eva-Clarita Pettai 2. Memory, Identity, and Citizenship in Lithuania Neringa Klumbyte 3. Different History, Different Citizenship? Competing Narratives and Diverging Civil Enculturation in Majority and Minority Schools in Estonia and Latvia Maria Golubeva 4. Experiences of Collective Trauma and Political Activism: A Study of Women ’Agents of Memory’ in Post-Soviet Lithuania Dovile Budryte 5. Generating Meaning Across Generations: The Role of Historians in the Codification of History in Soviet and Post-Soviet Estonia Meike Wulf and Pertti Grönholm 6. Politicians Versus Intellectuals in the Lustration Debates in Transitional Latvia Ieva Zake 7. Memory, Pluralism and the Agony of Politics Siobhan Kattago

Sovereignty Contested Gergana Noutcheva Series: Routledge/UACES Contemporary European Studies This volume analyses the impact of EU policy on integration in the Balkans. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Sovereignty and the Compliance Patterns of Balkan States 2. Legitimization and European Foreign Policy 3. Legitimization and the EU’s Policy in the Balkans 4. The Record of Balkan Compliance with EU Conditionality 5. The Politics of Compliance in the Balkans 6. Conclusion September 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-59684-8: £80.00 For more information, visit:

May 2011: 234 x 156: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-66841-5: £70.00 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

mi ddl e e as te r n p ol i t ic s

Middle Eastern Politics Islamic Reform and Arab Nationalism Expanding the Crescent from the Mediterranean to the Indian Ocean (1880s-1930s) Amal N. Ghazal, Dalhousie University, Canada Series: Culture and Civilization in the Middle East 2010: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-77980-7: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85529-4 For more information, visit:


The UAE and Foreign Policy Foreign Aid, Identities and Interests Khalid S. Almezaini Series: Culture and Civilization in the Middle East This book offers a concise and detailed analysis of the United Arab Emirates (UAE) foreign aid as a main instrument in its foreign policy. Exploring the cultural factors that have impacted on the foreign policy behaviour of the UAE and its foreign aid, the author argues that Arabism and Islamic traditions have shaped the country’s foreign policy in general and foreign aid in particular. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Foreign Aid and State Behaviour in the Arab Middle East 2. The UAE’s Political System and Foreign Policy 3. The UAE’s Foreign Aid Programme 4. Motives and Purposes of the UAE’s Foreign Aid 5. UAE Aid to Palestine 6. UAE Aid to Pakistan. Conclusion July 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-59711-1: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81575-5 For more information, visit:


Political Reform in Bahrain Institutional Transformation, Identity Conflict and Democracy Katja Niethammer, Georgetown University School of Foreign Service in Qatar Series: History and Society in the Islamic World This book examines the current political situation in Bahrain and in particular the process of reform that has taken place in recent years. It explores both the roles of the ruling elites as well as opposition actors and shows the major influence of identity politics in this important Gulf state. Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Context 1. The Locale 2. Years Preceding the Reforms Part 2: Reforms, Actors and Processes 3. Institutions and Laws 4. Actors and their Outlooks 5. Forms, Places, and Debates in Interaction Part 3: Conclusion


Gender in Contemporary Iran Pushing the Boundaries Edited by Roksana Bahramitash, University of Montreal, Canada and Eric Hooglund, Bates College, USA Series: Iranian Studies This book examines gender and the dynamics of social change in contemporary Iran, documenting the changes in women’s lives and showing how women have now become agents of social change rather than victims. Selected Contents: Introduction: The Case for a Gendered Analysis of Contemporary Iran 1. Authority, Modernity and Gender-Relevant Legislation in Iran 2. Gendering Shi’ism in Post-revolutionary Iran 3. Women and Social Protest in the Islamic Republic of Iran 4. Exploring Women’s Experience of Higher Education and the Changing Nature of Gender Relations in Iran 5. Exclusionary Cartographies: Gender Liberation and the Iranian Blogosphere 6. Areas of Iranian Women’s Voice and Influence 7. Post-revolutionary Iranian Youth: Case of Qom and the New Culture of Ambivalence 8. Changing Attitudes among Women in Rural Iran 9. Women’s Employment Trends: Advance or Retreat? 10. Extra-lagal/Informal Settlements: Does Gender Matter 11. Iran in a Regional Context: Socio-Demographic Transformations and Effects on Women’s Social Status March 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-78101-5: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83071-0 For more information, visit:


Islamist Radicalisation in North Africa Politics and Process Edited by George Joffé Series: History and Society in the Islamic World This book focuses on the current issues and analytical approaches to the phenomenon of radicalisation in North Africa. Taking a comprehensive approach to the subject, it looks at the processes that lead to radicalisation, rather than the often violent outcomes. At the same time, chapters expand the discussion historically and conceptually beyond the preoccupations of recent years, in order to develop a more holistic understanding of a complex individual and collective process that has represented a permanent challenge to dominant political, social and, on occasion, economic norms. Selected Contents: Introduction: Antiphonal Responses, Social Movements and Networks 1. Islam in Libya 2. Social Change, Regime Performance and the Radicalisation of Politics: The Case of Libya 3. Tunisia: The Radicalisation of Religious Policy 4. Radicalisation in Tunisia 5. The Causes of Radicalisation in Algeria 6. Trajectories of Radicalisation: Algeria 1989-1999 7. Morocco’s Radicalised Political Movements 8. Salafism in Morocco: Between Religious Radicalism and Political Conformism 9. The Paradoxes of Islamic Radicalisation in Mauritania September 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-58806-5: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-80633-3 For more information, visit:

October 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-55914-0: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:

Exeter Studies in Ethno Politics Series Edited by Gareth Stansfield, University of Exeter, UK Forthcoming

Memory and Conflict in Lebanon Remembering and Forgetting the Past Craig Larkin, University of Exeter, UK This book examines the legacy of Lebanon’s civil war and how the population has learnt to cope. The author explores the efforts of those who wish to forget and those who wish to remember, so as not to repeat past mistakes, shedding new light on trauma and the persistence of ethnic and religious hostility. October 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-58779-2: £75.00 For more information, visit:

Unrecognized States in the International System Edited by Nina Caspersen, Lancaster University, UK and Gareth Stansfield, University of Exeter, UK States that are not recognized in the international system are usually viewed as an anomaly. This book draws on both theory and case studies to better understand this phenomenon, demonstrating that their existence is less unusual than previously assumed. Selected Contents: Introduction: Unrecognized States in the International System Part 1: Concepualizing Unrecognized States 1. Theorizing Unrecognized States: Sovereignty, Secessionism, and Political Economy 2. Complex Terrains: Unrecognized States and Globalization 3. International Actions and the Making and Unmaking of Unrecognized States 4. What do Unrecognized States Tell us About Sovereignty? Part 2: The Interactions of the Recognized and the Unrecognized State 5. States without Sovereignty: Imitating Democratic Statehood 6. After the War Ends: Violence and Viability of Post-Soviet Unrecognized States 7. ‘Seperatism is the Mother of Terrorism’: Internationalizing the Security Discourse on Unrecognized States 8. The Foreign Policies of Unrecognized States Part 3: Conflict Management and Unrecognized States 9. The Limits of International Conflict Management in the Case of Abkhazia and South Ossetia 10. The Politics of Unrecognized States and the Business of International Peace Mediation: Enablers or Hindrance for Conflict Resolution? 11. Reintegrating Unrecognized States: Internationalizing Frozen Conflicts. Appendix 1: Maps of Unrecognized States 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-58210-0: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83451-0 For more information, visit:


m id d le ea s te r n politics



Navigating Contemporary Iran Challenging Economic, Social and Political Perceptions Edited by Eric Hooglund and Leif Stenberg, both at Lund University, Sweden Series: Iranian Studies In this detailed examination of contemporary Iran, renowned scholars explore issues relating to politics, international relations and society, and the way in which the country is perceived by the outside world. Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Political Economy 1. Ideals, Interests and Economic Liberalization in the Islamic Republic of Iran 2. Three Placement Modes of the Economy in Post-Revolutionary Iranian Society Part 2: Dimensions of Society 3. Gender Transformation in Iran: Thirty Years and Thirty Revolutions 4. Double Agency: Women’s Political Participation in Post-revolutionary Iran 5. The One Million Signatures Campaign and its Impact on Legislators and Legislative Policy in Iran 6. Gender, Ethnicity and Identity: Surrender without Consent among Baluchi Women in Changing Contexts 7. Discourses of Nationalism, Modernization and Gender in 20th Century Iran 8. Changing Drug Policies: Institutionalizing a New Social Order 9. The Post-Election Protests: Reflections from a Country in Transition Part 3: International Relations 10. Iran’s Influence: A Religio-political State in its Region and in the World 11. Decoding Amadinejad’s Rhetoric on Israel November 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-67866-7: £75.00 For more information, visit:


Political Liberalism in Muslim Societies Fevzi Bilgin, St Mary’s College, Maryland, USA Series: Islamic Studies Series This book examines Rawls’s theory of political liberalism in the context of Muslim societies. Contrasting a sociological analysis with a theoretical approach, the author explores the political questions brought up by religious individuals, organizations, and minorities, and examines fundamental notions such as neutrality of state, public/private distinction, and individual autonomy. Offering a rich set of conceptual and normative instruments, the author presents new ways to incorporate political liberalism into political discourses and advocating policy prescriptions for the advancement of democracy in Muslim societies. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. The Idea of Political Liberalism 3. Political Liberalism and Islam 4. Political Liberalism in Muslim Societies 5. Tolerating Religion 6. Religion and Impartiality of the State 7. Conclusion January 2011: 216 x 138: 160pp Hb: 978-0-415-78182-4: £70.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83084-0 For more information, visit:

Israeli History, Politics and Society Series Edited by Efraim Karsh, King’s College London, University of London, UK This series provides a multidisciplinary examination of all aspects of Israeli history, politics and society and serves as a means of communication between the various communities interested in Israel: academics, policy-makers, practitioners, journalists and the informed public.

Secularism and Religion in Jewish-Israeli Politics Traditionists and Modernity Yaacov Yadgar, Bar-Ilan University, Israel Offering a fresh approach to the study of contemporary Jewish identity, the author explores the implications of this identity from the perspective of traditionism, covering issues of religion, tradition, modernity and secularisation within Jewish Israeli society and politics. Selected Contents: Introduction. Theoretical Framework 1. Traditionism and Choice 2. ’Method’, ’Consistency’ and Guilt 3. Traditionism and Observance 4. Cross-Pressures and Traditionist Solitude 5. Traditionism, Ethnicity and Gender 6. Traditionists’ Images of ’The Orthodox’ and ’The Secular’ 7. Rabbis, Halachic Reform, and the Non-Orthodox Movements. Conclusion


2010: 234 x 156: 304pp Hb: 978-0-415-56329-1: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84724-4

Israel’s National Security Law

For more information, visit:

Political Dynamics and Historical Development Amichai Cohen, Ono Academic College, Israel and Stuart Cohen, Bar-Ilan University, Israel This book analyses both the substance of Israel’s National security law and the dynamics of its historical development. It examines the normative principles up on which Israel’s national security law is based, institutional arrangements for the formulation and protection of national security law, and the style in which Israeli national security law is formulated. Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Foundations 1. Frameworks of Analysis 2. Cultural Contexts Part 2: Development 3. Centralisation, 1948-63 4. Diffusion, 1963-77 5. Realignment, 1977-95 6. Legislation, 1995-2008 Part 3: Perspectives and Prescriptions 7. Diagnosis: Israel’s Hybrid National Security Legal Framework 8. Prognosis: Modes of Reform July 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-54914-1: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-80614-2 For more information, visit:


Politics of Memory Israeli Underground’s Confrontations Over Boundaries of State Pantheon Udi Lebel, Ben Gurion University of the Negev, Israel Providing a new angle on state control and political legitimacy, this book addresses the efforts of successive Israeli governments to establish their political dominance and legitimacy through the selective production and collective assimilation of cultural practices associated with bereavement and commemoration of those who fell on their country’s behalf. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Conceptual Frameworks for a Politics of Bereavement 2. The Politics of Total Confrontation (1920-49) 3. The Political Sphere 4. Commemorative Landscapes: The Politics of Hegemony in Physical Space 5. The Language of Sovereignty 6. The Politics of Historiography 7. Incremental Subversion of Memory Monopoly 1963-77 8. Shared Memorial Retrieval-Post-1977 Political Turnabout. Conclusion: Private Versus Public Heroes November 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-41239-1: £75.00 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

mi ddl e e as te r n p ol i t ic s

Routledge Advances in Middle East and Islamic Studies This series includes the latest research on a broad range of topics from the social sciences and humanities. It aims to provide a comprehensive forum for cutting edge monographs and edited volumes on this vital region and religion.

Chaos in Yemen Societal Collapse and the New Authoritarianism Isa Blumi, Georgia State University, USA 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-78077-3: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84742-8 For more information, visit:


Rethinking Israeli Space Periphery and Identity Erez Tzfadia and Haim Yacobi, both at Ben Gurion University of the Negev, Israel This book examines the issue of Israeli space and in particular looks at cities, suburbs, development towns and Zionist agricultural landscape. Taking a multidisciplinary approach it contributes to the field of planning theory, political science, urban sociology, critical geography and Middle East studies. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Nationalism, Identity and the Production of a Periphery 2. Periphery, Architecture and Diasporic Sense of Place 3. Frontier in the Core: Russian Migrants in a Jewish-Arab ’Mixed City’ 4. Labour Migration and the Urban Geographies of the Periphery 5. The Production of Global Peripheral Agricultural Landscape 6. Revisiting Multiculturalism in the City 7. Recognition, Land Allocation and the Periphery. Conclusions: In-between Periphery and Frontier April 2011: 234 x 156: 144pp Hb: 978-0-415-57324-5: £70.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81699-8 For more information, visit:

The Myth of the Clash of Civilizations Chiara Bottici, New School for Social Research, USA and Benoît Challand, University of Bologna, Italy and Graduate Institute for International and Development Studies, Geneva, Switzerland 2010: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-57327-6: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84884-5 For more information, visit:


Human Development in Iraq 1950-1990 Bassam Yousif, Indiana State University, USA Series: Routledge Studies in Middle Eastern Economies This book takes a political economy approach in order to detail the human resource development of Iraq from 1950 up to the Gulf war in 1990. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Brief History of Iraq from 1950 3. Economic Growth 4. Education 5. The Provision of Basic Services, Nutrition and Health 6. The Status of Women 7. Human Rights and Political Freedoms 8. Conclusion October 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-78263-0: £75.00 For more information, visit:

Industrialization in the Gulf A Socioeconomic Revolution Edited by Jean-Francois Seznec and Mimi Kirk, both at Georgetown University, USA Series: Routledge Studies in Middle Eastern Economies In recent years, we have witnessed huge economic and socio-political change in the Gulf. This book examines the rapid industrialization of the region and how local economies are starting to diversify away from petroleum, exploring how this transformative process is starting to impact on the region’s economy and social make-up. Selected Contents: Foreword. Introduction Part 1: Financing the Growth Part 2: Competing Models: The Gulf Arab States and Iran Part 3: Labour Constraints and Migration Issues Part 4: The Role of Women in Industrialization Part 5: Gulf Industrialization in Perspective 2010: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-78035-3: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84665-0 For more information, visit:


The Israeli Central Bank Political Economy, Global Logics and Local Actors Daniel Maman, Ben Gurion University of the Negev, Israel and Zeev Rosenhek, Open University of Israel Series: Routledge Studies in Middle Eastern Economies This book examines the political and institutional processes that have led to the strengthening of the Israeli central bank within the context of the now predominant neoliberal regime. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. The Political Economy of Central Banks 2. The Dynamics of the Israeli Political Economy 3. The Israeli Central Bank in the Developmental State Era 4. The Reconfiguration of the Political-Economic Field 5. Knowledge, Institutional Arrangements and Policy 6. Struggling for Preeminence. Conclusions: Politics of Depoliticization

Routledge Studies in Middle Eastern Politics This series is concerned with recent political developments in the region covering issues such as international relations, foreign intervention, security, political Islam, democracy, ideology and public policy.

Civil Society and Democratization in the Arab World The Dynamics of Activism Francesco Cavatorta, Dublin City University, Ireland and Vincent Durac, University College Dublin, Ireland 2010: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-49129-7: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85058-9 For more information, visit:


Conflict and Peacemaking in Israel-Palestine Theory and Application Sapir Handelman, Wayne State University, USA This book takes an in-depth look into specific models for peacemaking and applies them to the situation in Israel/ Palestine. Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: General Background 1. Intractable Conflict as a Complex Phenomenon 2. The Palestinian-Israeli Conflict 3. Between ConflictResolution and Conflict-Management Part 2: Interactive Models of Peacemaking 4. The Strong-Leader Model 5. The Social-Reformer Model 6. The Political-Elite Model 7. The Public-Assembly Model. Summary and Conclusion February 2011: 216 x 138: 160pp Hb: 978-0-415-49215-7: £70.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83250-9 For more information, visit:

Democracy in the Arab World Explaining the Deficit Edited by Ibrahim Elbadawi, The World Bank, Washington DC, USA and Samir Makdisi, American University of Beirut, Lebanon 2010: 234 x 156: 352pp Hb: 978-0-415-77999-9: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85286-6 For more information, visit:

February 2011: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-57328-3: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83044-4

Democracy in Turkey

For more information, visit:

Ali Resul Usul, Bahcesehir University, Turkey

The Impact of EU Political Conditionality 2010: 234 x 156: 248pp Hb: 978-0-415-56698-8: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84738-1 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:


m id d le ea s te r n politics


Europe and Tunisia


Democratization via Association

Post-Oslo Palestine

Brieg Powel, University of Plymouth, UK and Larbi Sadiki, University of Exeter, UK

Public Policy and State Building

Population, Territory and Power

Rana Alhelsi

2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-49789-3: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85498-3

This book examines the policy decision making process inside the Palestinian authority since Oslo. In particular it explores the context, structures and participants involved.

Edited by Elia Zureik and David Lyon, both at Queen’s University, Canada and Yasmeen AbuLaban, University of Alberta, Canada

For more information, visit:

Israeli Nationalism Social Conflicts and the Politics of Knowledge Uri Ram, Ben Gurion University of the Negev, Israel

November 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-56638-4: £80.00

For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:

Nationalisms and Politics in Turkey Public Management in Israel Political Islam, Kemalism and the Kurdish Issue

Development, Structure, Functions and Reforms

Edited by Marlies Casier, University of Gent, Belgium and Joost Jongerden, Wageningen University, the Netherlands

Itzhak Galnoor, Hebrew University of Jerusalem, Israel

For more information, visit:

NATO and the Middle East The Geopolitical Context Post-9/11 Mohammed Moustafa Orfy, Embassy of Egypt, Moscow, Russia This book analyses the limits of NATO’s role in the Middle East region and examines whether or not the Alliance is able to help in improving the fragile regional security environment through cooperative links with select Middle Eastern partners. Selected Contents: Introduction: The Geopolitical Context of NATO’s Role in the Middle East 1. Western Interests and Stability in the Middle East 2. NATO’s New Global Role and its Relevance to the Middle East 3. NATO’s Role in the Middle East Before 9/11 4. NATO’s Role in the Middle East Post-9/11 5. The United States and NATO’s Role in the Middle East. Conclusion: NATO and Security Challenges in the Middle East 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-59234-5: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84235-5 For more information, visit:

Politics in Morocco Executive Monarchy and Enlightened Authoritarianism Anouar Boukhars, Wilberforce University, USA 2010: 234 x 156: 216pp Hb: 978-0-415-49274-4: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84897-5 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. State-Building and Policy Making in Post-Oslo Palestine 2. Theoretical Issues 3. Analysis Framework and Research Methodology 4. Analysis at the Macro-level Policy Decision-Making as Rational Government Action 5. Analysis at the Mezzo-Level Policy Decision-making as an Organisational Process 6. Analysis at the Micro-level Policy Decision-Making by Policy Elite 7. Patterns of Bureaucratic Politics in Post-Oslo Palestine 8. Persistent Patterns? Conclusion

2010: 234 x 156: 184pp Hb: 978-0-415-55316-2: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84441-0

2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-58345-9: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84706-0

Surveillance and Control in Israel/Palestine

This book examines the several layers of surveillance that control the Palestinian population in Israel and the Occupied Territories. It shows how they operate, how well they work, how they are augmented, and how in the end their chief purpose is population control.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Introduction Part 2: Theories of Surveillance in Conflict Zones Part 3: Civilian Surveillance Part 4: Political Economy and Globalization of Surveillance Part 5: Citizenship Criteria and State Construction Part 6: Surveillance, Racialization, and Uncertainty Part 7: Territory and Population Management in Conflict Zones Part 8: Social Ordering, Biopolitics and Profiling 2010: 234 x 156: 416pp Hb: 978-0-415-58861-4: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84596-7

As government management in Israel is gradually replaced by private sector management, this book provides a timely analysis of the machinery of government in Israel. It highlights the inadequacy of the private sector as an alternative and how Israeli public management will need to cope with the new challenges and pressures of the 21st century.

For more information, visit:

Selected Contents: 1. Civil Service: A Comparative Perspective 2. The Public Sector in Israel Broadly Defined 3. The Legal Framework of the Civil Service 4. The Functioning of the Israeli Civil Service 5. Regulation 6. Civil Servants 7. The Senior Echelons 8. The Budget Process 9. Oversight and Control of the Civil Service 10. The Culture of Administration in Israel 11. Public Management Reforms

Dilemmas of Late Formation

2010: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-56394-9: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84496-0 For more information, visit:


Saudi Maritime Policy


The Arab State Adham Saouli, University of Edinburgh, UK This book is examines the conditions under which states remain intact during late formation and how they resist various internal and external pressures. Selected Contents: 1. International Anarchy and the Middle East: External Determinants, Indigenous Responses 2. State Weakness and International Penetration in the Middle East 3. Anarchy and State Survival in the Middle East 4. Saudi Arabia: Conditions of State Survival 5. Iraq: State Formation and Deformation. Conclusion October 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-60295-2: £75.00 For more information, visit:

Integrated Governance Hatim Al-Bisher, Selina Stead and Tim Gray, all at University of Newcastle, UK This book is concerned with the integrated governance and enactment of Saudi maritime policy. Taking a comparative approach to examine the concept of integrated national maritime policy (INMP), analysing its application in four countries – Australia, Canada, UK and USA – and discussing at length how it might be applied to Saudi Arabia. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Origin and Development of the Concept of INMP 3. Current Sectoral Maritime Policy in Saudi Arabia 4. Opinions on INMP held by Government Officials and Other Stakeholders in Saudi Arabia 5. Need for, and Obstacles to, INMP in Saudi Arabia 6. INMPs in Australia, Canada, UK and USA 7. Conclusion and Recommendations October 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-66425-7: £75.00 For more information, visit:

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

mi ddl e e as te r n p ol i t ic s


The Iran-Iraq War

The Arab State and Women’s Rights

Antecedents and Conflict Escalation

The Trap of Authoritarian Governance

2010: 216 x 138: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-57989-6: £70.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83935-5

Elham Manea, University of Zurich, Switzerland

Jerome Donovan, Swinburne University, Australia

Researchers studying gender politics in Arab societies have been puzzled by a phenomenon common in many Arab states – while women are granted suffrage rights, they are often discriminated against by the state in their private lives.

For more information, visit:

This book addresses this phenomenon, maintaining that the Arab state functions according to a certain ‘logic’ and ‘patterns’ which have direct consequences on its gender policies, in both the public and private spheres. Using the features of the Arab Authoritarian state as a basis for a theoretical framework of analysis, the author draws on detailed fieldwork and first-hand interviews to study women’s rights in three countries - Yemen, Syria, and Kuwait. She argues that the puzzle may be resolved once we focus on the features of the Arab state, and its stage of development.

International Relations in the Middle East since 1945

Selected Contents: Part 1: Theoretical Framework 1. Suffrage Rights vs Personal Status Rights in Arab States 2. State and Gender Politics in Comparative Politics and Middle Eastern Studies 3. The Arab Authoritarian State and Women’s Rights: A Framework for Analysis Part 2: Arab State Formation, Social Fragmentation and Gender Politics 4. State Formation in the Pre-Independence Periods 5. Family Laws and Suffrage Rights in the Pre-Independence Periods Part 3: The Arab Authoritarian State and Women’s Rights 6. Features of the Post-Colonial Arab Authoritarian State and Gender Politics: An Approach 7. First Case Study: Yemen 8. Second Case Study: Kuwait 9. Third Case Study: Syria 10. Conclusion July 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-61773-4: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-80758-3 For more information, visit:


The Contradictions of Israeli Citizenship Land, Religion and State Edited by Guy Ben-Porat, Ben-Gurion University of the Negev, Israel and Bryan S. Turner, City University of New York, USA This book provides an integrated analysis of the complex nature of citizenship in Israel. Contributions from leading social and political theorists explore different aspects of citizenship through the demands and struggles of minority groups to provide a comprehensive picture of the dynamics of Israeli citizenship and the dilemmas that emerge at the collective and individual levels.

The Kurds and US Foreign Policy Marianna Charountaki

Routledge Studies in Political Islam Islam and Political Reform in Saudi Arabia The Quest for Political Change and Reform Mansoor Jassem Alshamsi, Ministry of Labour, United Arab Emirates 2010: 234 x 156: 304pp Hb: 978-0-415-41241-4: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-96112-4

This book provides a detailed survey and analysis of US–Kurdish relations and their interaction with domestic, regional and global politics.

For more information, visit:

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. The Multi-faceted Nature of the Kurdish Issue 3. US Foreign Policy: Structures, Determinants and Pressures 4. US Foreign Policy Towards the Kurds, 1945-1990 5. US Foreign Policy Toward the Kurds, 1991-2003 6. US and the Kurds in the Post-Saddam Era (2003-2009) 7. Conceptual Implications and General Conclusions


2010: 234 x 156: 336pp Hb: 978-0-415-58753-2: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84261-4

This book examines Syria’s present day Islamic groups – particularly their social profile and ideology – and offering an explanation of their resurgence.

For more information, visit:

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction to the Subject of Secularism and Islamic Revivalism in Syria Part 1: The Origins of the Conflict 2. The Rise of a Secular Party to Power 3. The Rise and Fall of Political Islam in Syria Part 2: Hafez al-Asad’s Era and the Conflict with the Muslim Brotherhood: Muting of Ba’thist Secularism in Syria 4. Conflict with the Muslim Brotherhood 5. Resurgence of Neo-fundamentalism and Decline of Political Islam as a Model for Change (1982-2000) Part 3: Bashar al-Asad’s Era: Fundamentalist and Islamist Revivalism 6. Bashar al-Asad Following in his Father’s Footsteps: the Promotion of Moderate Islam from Above in the Name of De-Radicalization 7. Islamization from Below: Islamic Revivalism as a Model for Social Change and the Erosion of Ba´thist Secularism 8. Re-emergence of Political Islam: Syria’s Islamist Groups 9. Islamic Activism and Secularism in Syria 10. Conclusion

The Second Palestinian Intifada Civil Resistance Julie M. Norman, Concordia University, Canada 2010: 234 x 156: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-77995-1: £70.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84829-6 For more information, visit:


Arab Minority Nationalism in Israel The Politics of Indigeneity

Islamic Revivalism in Syria The Rise and Fall of Ba’thist Secularism Line Khatib, McGill University, Canada

July 2011: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-78203-6: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-80736-1 For more information, visit:

Amal Jamal, Tel Aviv University, Israel National minorities and their behaviour have become a central topic in comparative politics in the last few decades. Using the relationship between the state of Israel and the Arab national minority as a case study, this book provides a thorough examination of minority nationalism and state-minority relations in Israel.

Considering the many complex layers of membership in the state of Israel including gender, ethnicity and religion, the book identifies and explores processes of inclusion and exclusion that are general issues in any modern polity with a highly diverse civil society. While the focus is unambiguously on modern Israel, the interpretations of citizenship are relevant to many other modern societies that face similar contradictory tendencies in membership. As such, the book will be of great interest to students and scholars of political science, political sociology and law.

Selected Contents: Introduction: Understanding the Politics of Indigenous National Minority 1. The Theory and Epistemology of Indigeneity 2. Politicizing Arab Indigeneity in Israel 3. The Changing Modes of Patriotism and Longing for the Homeland 4. Internally Displaced Palestinians and the Dialectics of Presence and Absence 5. Arab-Palestinian Leadership in Israel and the Politics of Contention 6. Reframing the Future through Presencing the Past: Visionary Documents and Political Mobilization 7. Civil Society and the Challenges of Empowerment Development and Democratization 8. Reframing Arab Political Thought in Israel: Azmi Bishara and Beyond. Epilogue: Future Visions and Horizons of Expectations in State-Minority Relations in Israel

May 2011: 234 x 156: 320pp Hb: 978-0-415-78250-0: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81718-6

March 2011: 234 x 156: 336pp Hb: 978-0-415-56739-8: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83069-7

For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:


The Essence of Islamist Extremism Recognition through Violence, Freedom through Death Irm Haleem, Seton Hall University, USA This book provides a conceptual analysis of Islamist extremism that focuses on the ‘what is’ and not the ‘why’ of Islamist extremism. Selected Contents: Preface. Introduction 1. Struggles for Recognition and Moral Consequentialism 2. Self-Recognition through Violence 3. Self-Transcendent Recognition 4. Violence as Morality 5. Nothing Islamic about Islamic Extremism November 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-78298-2: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-80927-3 For more information, visit:


m id d le ea s te r n politics


Routledge Studies on the ArabIsraeli Conflict

The Political Economy of Aid in Palestine Relief from Conflict or Development Delayed?

Series Edited by Michael Dumper, University of Exeter, UK

Sahar Taghdisi-Rad, United Nations Conference on Trade and Development (UNCTAD), Switzerland

Palestinian Refugees

This book examines the nature of donor operations in Palestine and questions the viability of aid as an instrument of ‘economic development’ in conflict zones. It highlights the political and ideological determinants of aid allocation and effectiveness, arguing that aid to Palestine cannot bring about significant improvement as long as the Palestinian economy is fundamentally affected by Israeli occupation, settlement and blockade.

Identity, Space and Place in the Levant Edited by Are Knudsen, Chr. Michelsen Institute (CMI), Norway and Sari Hanafi, American University of Beirut, Lebanon 2010: 234 x 156: 248pp Hb: 978-0-415-58046-5: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83925-6 For more information, visit:

Reparations to Palestinian Refugees A Comparative Perspective Shahira Samy, University of Oxford, UK 2010: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-48579-1: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85703-8 For more information, visit:

Series: Routledge Political Economy of the Middle East and North Africa

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Aid Effectiveness Debate Disputed 3. Palestinian Economic Performance and Donor Response: A Pre-and Post-Intifada Analysis 4. (De-) Development and Collapse of Palestinian Trade: 1967-Present 5. Trade-Related Assistance in Palestine 6. Evaluation of the Trends in Donor Assistance to Palestine 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-56325-3: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84419-9 For more information, visit:

Nationalism and Liberal Thought in the Arab East Ideology and Practice Edited by Christoph Schumann, University of Erlangen Nuremberg, Germany Series: SOAS/Routledge Studies on the Middle East 2010: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-55410-7: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85836-3 For more information, visit:

State-Society Relations in Ba’thist Iraq

Durham Modern Middle East and Islamic World Series Series Edited by Anoushiravan Ehteshami, University of Durham, UK Forthcoming

Iran and the International System Edited by Anoushiravan Ehteshami and Reza Molavi, both at Durham University, UK Much attention in the West has focused on Iran as a problem. This book goes further however by discussing how international relations are viewed from inside Iran itself, outlining the factors which underpin Iranian thinking on international relations and considering what role Iran, as a large and significant country in the Middle East, ought to play in a fairly constructed international system. Selected Contents: 1. Iran’s Religious Fundaments and Principles in Interactions with International System 2. Political Rationality of the Islamic Republic of Iran in Comparison with Contemporary Fundamentalism 3. The Islamic Republic of Iran and the Ideal International System 4. Peace and Security in the International System: An Iranian Approach 5. The Islamic Republic of Iran and the International System: Clash with the Domination Paradigm 6. Transnational Culture and International Relations of Iran 7. Two Different Faces of Iran-West Relations: Incompatibility of Official Levels with Everyday Life 8. Domestic Politics and Foreign Policy in Contemporary Iran 9. Foreign Policy as Social Construction 10. Discourse and Violence: The Friend-Enemy Conjunction in Contemporary IranianAmerican Relations 11. Energy Security and Iran’s Role in International Relations 12. The Impact of the Iran’s Tenth Presidential Election on its Relations with the EU and Mediterranean States 13. The 2009 Iranian Presidential Elections in Comparative Perspective July 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-55966-9: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-80913-6 For more information, visit:

Achim Rohde, University of Marburg, Germany

Iraq, Democracy and the Future of the Muslim World

Series: SOAS/Routledge Studies on the Middle East

Edited by Ali Paya and John L. Esposito

Facing Dictatorship

2010: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-47551-8: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85461-7

2010: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-58228-5: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84880-7

For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

mi ddl e e as te r n p ol i t ic s

Islam in the Eyes of the West


Images and Realities in an Age of Terror

Turkish-American Relations, 1800-1952

Edited by Tareq Y. Ismael, University of Calgary, Canada and Andrew Rippin, University of Victoria, Canada 2010: 234 x 156: 304pp Hb: 978-0-415-56414-4: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85438-9

For more information, visit:

Islamic Extremism in Kuwait From the Muslim Brotherhood to Al-Qaeda and other Islamic Political Groups Falah Abdullah al-Mdaires, Kuwait University 2010: 234 x 156: 304pp Hb: 978-0-415-56719-0: £90.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85429-7

Suhnaz Yilmaz, Koc University, Turkey Series: Studies in International Relations Through the extensive use of both Turkish and American archival documents, this book examines TurkishAmerican relations from 1800 to 1952, starting with the earliest contacts and ending with the institutionalization of the alliance after Turkey’s entry into NATO. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. The Long Prelude: Ottoman-American Relations (1800-1918) 2. The Problematic Era: Challenges of Post-War Settlement 3. The Interwar Period: Turkish-American Rapprochement 4. World War II: Complexities of Turkish Neutrality 5. Cold War Context: Formation of Turkish-American Alliance. Conclusion


The International Politics of the Red Sea Anoushiravan Ehteshami and Emma C. Murphy, both at Durham University, UK

This book examines the international politics of the Red Sea region from the Cold War to the present.

Selected Contents: 1. Weakness and Instability: National Politics and their Sub-Regional Implications 2. International Politics of the Red Sea in the Cold War Era 3. Red Sea Sub-regional Developments in the Post-Cold War Era 4. Security, Militarisation and Arms Flows 5. Land Boundaries, Maritime Borders and Territorial Issues 6. The Economics of the Red Sea: Trade, Migration and Capital Flows 7. Red Sea Networks: Regional and International Transport July 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-67705-9: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-80875-7 For more information, visit:

Edited by Efraim Karsh, Michael Kerr and Rory Miller, all at Kings College London, UK 2010: 234 x 156: 168pp Hb: 978-0-415-56063-4: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Islamization of Turkey under the AKP Rule Edited by Birol Yesilada, Porland State University, USA and Barry Rubin, Interdisciplinary Center Herzliya, Israel

October 2011: 229 x 152: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-96353-4: £70.00

2010: 234 x 156: 136pp Hb: 978-0-415-56056-6: £85.00

For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:

Communicating Security

Israel at the Polls 2009

Civil-Military Relations in Israel

Edited by Shmuel Sandler and Hillel Frisch, both at Bar-Ilan University, Israel, and Manfred Gerstenfeld, Jerusalem Center for Public Affairs, Israel

Edited by Udi Lebel, Ben Gurion University of the Negev, Israel This book analyzes the changes and tendencies expressed in the relation between army and society in Israel against the backdrop of globalization, individualism, liberalism, and social burn-out in the face of survival and change.

For more information, visit:

Conflict, Diplomacy and Society in Israeli-Lebanese Relations

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Communicating Security: Civil-Military Relations in Israel Udi Lebel Security and Politics 2. Political-Military Relations in Israel, 1996-2003 Amir Bar-Or 3. The Growing Militarisation of the Israeli Political System Giora Goldberg 4. Civil-Military Relations and Strategic Goal Setting in the Six Day War Arye Naor Security and Social Strength 5. Society Strength as a Base for Military Power: The State of Israel During the Early 1950s Ze’ev Drory 6. Under the Threat of Terrorism: A Reassessment of the Factors Influencing the Motivation to Serve in the Israeli Reserves Gabriel Ben-Dor and Ami Pedahzur Security and the Shaping of Culture Memory, Loss and Bereavement 7. The Creation of Israeli ’Political Bereavement Model’ - Security Crises and their Influence on the Public Behaviour of Loss: A Psycho-Political Approach to the Study of History Udi Lebel 8. Holocaust Survivors in the Israeli Army during the 1948 War: Documents and Memory Hanna Yablonka Military–Media Relations 9. The Military and the Media in the Twenty-First Century: Towards a New Model of Relations Yehiel Limor and Hillel Nossek 10. Three ’Travelling’ Models of Politics and the Mass Media in the Context of Israeli National Security Gideon Doron 11. Nuclear Ambiguity and the Media: The Israeli Case Yoel Cohen 12. The Media and National Security: The Performance of the Israeli Press in the Eyes of the Israeli Public Martin Sherman and Shabtai Shavit Security and Territory 13. Competing Land Uses: The Territorial Dimension of Civil-Military Relations in Israel Ami Oren and David Newman 14. Defending Territorial Sovereignty Through Civilian Settlement: The Case of Israel’s Population Dispersal Policy Matt Evans 2010: 234 x 156: 250pp Pb: 978-0-415-58506-4: £23.99 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:

2010: 234 x 156: 220pp Hb: 978-0-415-56065-8: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Law and Government in Israel Edited by Gideon Doron, Tel Aviv University, Israel, Arye Naor, Ben Gurion University, Israel and Assaf Meydani, Academic College of Tel Aviv-Yaffo, Israel 2010: 234 x 156: 160pp Hb: 978-0-415-57652-9: £80.00 For more information, visit:


a f rican politics


African Politics



’Progress’ in Zimbabwe?


Federalism and Ethnic Conflict in Ethiopia A Comparative Regional Study

Ethnic Politics and Democratic Transition in Rwanda David Kiwuwa, University of Nottingham Ningbo, China Series: Democratization Studies Examines the place of ethnic politics and ethnopolitical mobility in the success or failure of democratic transition in deeply divided societies. Selected Contents: 1. Ethnicity and Ethnopolitics 2. Democratic Transition: The ‘New’ Approach 3. A Critic of Existing Transition Models 4. Rwanda 5. A Failed Transition? Examining the First Republic (1961-1973) 6. When Democratic Transition Killed 7. Post ‘94’: Re-engaging with the Transition 8. ‘Inaugurating’ Democratic Transition? The 2003 Rwanda Elections 9. Conclusion September 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-61608-9: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Asnake Kefale, Addis Ababa University, Egypt Series: Routledge Series in Federal Studies Examines the impact of federal restructuring in Ethiopia upon regional and ethnic conflict. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. The History and Ideology of Federalism in Ethiopia 3. Asymmetries and Emerging Trends of Conflicts in Federal Ethiopia 4. Federalism and Autonomy Conflicts in the Somali Region 5. Federalism and Autonomy Conflicts in the BenishangulGumuz Region 6. Inter-Regional Conflicts: The Somali Region 7. Inter-Regional Conflicts: The Benishangul-Gumuz Region 8. Center-Regional Relations 9. Conclusion September 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-61593-8: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Kenya’s Uncertain Democracy The Electoral Crisis of 2008


African Parliamentary Reform Edited by Frederick Stapenhurst, Alexander Hamilton and Cindy Kroon, all at The World Bank, USA, Rasheed Draman, Parliamentary Centre, Ghana and Parliamentary Centre, Canada, and Andrew Imlach, Commonwealth Parliamentary Association Secretariat, UK, Series: Routledge Research in Comparative Politics This book presents recent reforms in selected African parliaments – Ghana, Kenya, Uganda, Tanzania, Rwanda, Benin, Zambia, Ethiopia, Liberia and Nigeria. It also presents cross-cutting innovations by African parliaments – in fighting corruption, in providing development to constituents and in combatting climate change.

Edited by Peter Kagwanja, Rhodes University, South Africa and Roger Southall, University of Witwatersrand, South Africa 2010: 246 x 174: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-55042-0: £80.00 For more information, visit:


Nigeria at Fifty The Nation in Narration Edited by Ebenezer Obadare, University of Kansas, USA and Wale Adebanwi, University of CaliforniaDavis, USA

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Engaging Civil Society: Ghana’s First PAC Hearing 3. Enhancing Research & Information: Uganda’s Parliamentary Budget Office - Hon. Beatrice Kiraso 4. Promoting Gender Equality in the Tanzanian Parliament 5. Peace-Building and National Reconciliation: The Role of the Rwandan Parliament - Sen. Joseph Kamerera 6. Reaching Out to Citizens: Enhancing the Opportunity for Private Members Bills & Constituency Offices in Zambia 7. Promoting Parliamentary Reforms in Kenya: We Have Come a Long Way 8. Benin; Citizen Participation in the Budget Debate via the Budget Committee (A Note) Parliamentary Centre Staff 9. Strengthening Financial Accountability & Parliamentary Oversight in Ethiopia 10. Rebuilding Parliament in a Conflict Affected Country: Interview with Senator Franklin Siakor (Liberia) 11. Changing Standing Orders in Tanzania 12. The Parliamentary PACs in Nigerian States: Structure, Working Practices and Networking 13. Role Model for the World: The Formation of the African Parliamentarians Network Against Corruption 14. Providing Services to the Community: Constituency Development Funds 15. Climate Change: Establishing a Continental Parliamentary Task Force 16. Strengthening Public Accounts Committees Through Regional Networks Across Africa 17. The Role of Parliamentarians in the Governance of Petroleum Resources

On the special occasion of the fiftieth anniversary of Nigeria’s political independence, this book frames the socio-historical and political trajectory of Nigeria while examining the many dimensions of the critical choices that has shaped the country.

June 2011: 216 x 138: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-67723-3: £80.00

For more information, visit:

This book was published as a special issue of the Journal of Contemporary African Studies. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction – Nigeria at 50: The Nation in Narration Ebenezer Obadare and Wale Adebanwi 2. The Limits of Charismatic Authority and the Challenges of Leadership in Nigeria Eghosa Osaghae 3. Between Elite Protectionism and Popular Resistance: The Political Economy of Nigeria’s Fractured State since Juridical Independence Kunle Amuwo 4. The Petroleum Industry: A Paradox or (Sp) oiler of Development? Cyril Obi 5. The Nigerian Federal System: Performance, Problems and Prospects Rotimi Suberu 6. How God became a Nigerian! Religious Impulse and the Unfolding of a Nation Afe Adogame 7. Nigerian Elections and the Neopatrimonial Paradox: In Search of the Social Contract Darren Kew

The Past and Present of a Concept and a Country Edited by David Moore, University of Johannesburg, South Africa and Norma Kriger, Cornell University, USA This book assesses how the idea of ’progress’ has informed scholarly debate about the present and future of Zimbabwe. This book was published as a special issue of the Journal of Contemporary African Studies. Selected Contents: 1. The Philosophy of Progress and ZImbabwe John Hoffman 2. Narratives of Progress: Historiography in and on Zimbabwe Ian Phimster 3. Progress and Primitive Accumulation in Zimbabwe David Moore 4. Elections and Democracy in Zimbabwe since 1980 Norma Kriger 5. Zimbabwe in Africa: Comparative Historical Perspective Bill Freund 6. Zimbabwe and South Africa: Progress in Foreign Policy? Brian Raftopoulos 7. Labour, Capital and the State in Zimbabwe: Past, Present and Future Lloyd Sachikonye 8. The Ruling Party: Conflict and Cohesion in ZANU-PF Ibbo Mandaza 9. Landed Economies: Then and Now Blessing Karumbidza 10. NGOs, ’Civil Society’ and the Zimbabwean State Kirk Helliker August 2011: 246 x 174: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-59465-3: £85.00 For more information, visit:

Regional Organizations in African Security Edited by Fredrik Soderbaum, University of Gothenburg, Sweden and Rodrigo Tavares, United Nations University, Belgium This book examines the role of regional organizations in Africa’s security from a theoretical and practical perspective. Selected Contents: 1. Problematizing Regional Organizations in African Security Fredrik Söderbaum and Rodrigo Tavares 2. The African Union’s New Peace and Security Architecture: Toward an Evolving Security Regime? Ulf Engel and João Gomes Porto 3. The African Union’s Peace Operations: A Comparative Analysis Paul D. Williams 4. Economic Community of West African States on the Ground: Comparing Peacekeeping in Liberia, Sierra Leone, Guinea Bissau, and Côte D’Ivoire Cyril I. Obi 5. InterGovernmental Authority on Development on the Ground: Comparing Interventions in Sudan and Somalia Tim Murithi 6. Regional Conflict Management in Central Africa: From FOMUC to MICOPAX Angela Meyer 7. Southern African Development Community as Regional Peacekeeper: Myth or Reality? Maxi Schoeman and Marie Muller 8. Regional Organizations in African Security: A Practitioner’s View João Gomes Cravinho 9. Regional Organizations and African Security: Moving the Debate Forward James J. Hentz, Fredrik Söderbaum and Rodrigo Tavares 2010: 246 x 174: 160pp Hb: 978-0-415-59787-6: £80.00 For more information, visit:

April 2011: 246 x 174: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-60840-4: £85.00

For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

US p ol i t ic s


Somalia: State Collapse, Terrorism and Piracy Edited by Brian J. Hesse, Northwest Missouri State University, USA The situation in Somalia today embodies some of the most pressing issues in international relations. How should the international community deal with the collapsed state that is Somalia? From the presence of al-Qaeda operatives to pirates, to what extent is Somalia a threat to global peace and commerce? Which aspects of Somalia’s economic, social and political landscape can be considered successful, and how do these ‘success stories’ reflect some of the more problematic issues the country faces? This book sheds light on all of these topics and more. The book is written to appeal to a wide audience, from specialists in international security, development and/or humanitarian issues, to students and casual readers. Its six contributing authors, with their focus on current events mixed with historical perspective, ensure readers get varying views of what is happening today in the Horn of Africa. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: The Myth of ‘Somalia’ Brian J. Hesse 2. The UN-led Djibouti Peace Process for Somalia 2008–2009: Results and Problems Apuuli Phillip Kasaija 3. Somalia and Global Terrorism: A Growing Connection? Mohamed Ibrahim 4. The Fourth Point: An Examination of the Influence of Kenyan Somalis in Somalia Donovan C. Chau 5. An Open Letter to Uncle Sam: America, Pray Leave Somalia to its Own Devices Said S. Samatar 6. Putting Somali Piracy in Context J. Peter Pham 7. Where Somalia Works Brian J. Hesse March 2011: 246 x 174: 128pp Hb: 978-0-415-59463-9: £85.00

related journal

For more information, visit:

African Security Review Published in association with the Institute for Security Studies Editor: Deane-Peter Baker, United States Naval Academy, USA Volume 20, 2011, 4 issues per year Print ISSN: 1024-6029 (print only) African Security Review, the respected quarterly journal of the Institute for Security Studies, creates an essential forum for African perspectives and practitioner insights, as well as the best of international scholarship, this informs and influence security policy and practice.

US Politics

The United States and Cuba Intimate Enemies


Debating U.S.-Cuban Relations Shall We Play Ball?

Marifeli Pérez-Stable, Florida International University, USA, and Inter-American Dialogue Series: Contemporary Inter-American Relations

Edited by Jorge I. Domínguez and Lorena Barberia, both at Harvard University, USA, and Rafael Hernandez Two decades ago affairs between the United States and Cuba had seen little improvement from the Cold War era. Today, U.S.-Cuban relations are in many respects still in poor shape, yet some cooperative elements have begun to take hold and offer promise for future developments. The differences that divide the two nations are real, not the result of misperception, and this volume does not aspire to solve all points of disagreement. Drawing on perspectives from within Cuba as well as the United States, Canada, and Europe, the authors set out to analyze contemporary policies, reflect on current circumstances, and consider possible alternatives for improved U.S.-Cuban relations. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Jorge I. Domínguez and Rafael M. Hernández 2. Intimate Enemies: Paradoxes in the Conflict between the United States and Cuba Rafael M. Hernández 3. Reshaping the Relations between the United States and Cuba Jorge I. Domínguez 4. Cuba’s National Security vis-à-vis the United States: Conflict or Cooperation? Carlos Alzugaray Treto 5. Cuban-United States Cooperation in the Defence and Security Fields: Where Are We? Where Might We Be Able to Go? Hal Klepak 6. Terrorism and the Anti-Hijacking Accord in Cuba’s Relations with the United States Peter Kornbluh 7. The European Union and Its Role in U.S.-Cuban Relations Eduardo Perera Gómez 8. European Union Policy in the Cuba-U.S-Spain Triangle Susanne Gratius 9. U.S.-Cuba Relations: The Potential Economic Implications of Normalization Archibald R.M. Ritter 10. United States-Cuba Economic Relations: The Pending Normalization Jorge Mario Sánchez Egozcue 11. U.S. Immigration Policies toward Cuba Lorena G. Barberia 12. U.S.-Cuba: Emigration and Bilateral Relations Antonio Aja D’az 13. The Subject(s) of Academic and Cultural Exchange: Paradigms, Powers, and Possibilities Sheryl Lutjens 14. Academic Diplomacy: Cultural Exchanges between Cuba and the United States Milagros Martínez Reinosa August 2011: 229 x 152: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-89322-0: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-89323-7: £24.99 For more information, visit:

It publishes thought-provoking and highly relevant articles on the spectrum of human security issues, including security sector transformation, civil-military relations, crime, justice and corruption, small arms control, peace support initiatives and conflict management, as well as papers dealing with the interplay between economics, politics, society and culture with human security and stability.

‘Marifeli Pérez-Stable’s book, The United States and Cuba, is not only a splendid piece of historical scholarship but also a singularly relevant work book for the present and the future. For anyone who wants to understand what will happen in the myriad exchanges across the Florida Straits, this is indispensable reading.‘ – Jorge G. Castaeda, New York

University, USA Selected Contents: 1. The United States and Cuba Have Never Had Normal Relations 2. ’Next Christmas in Havana’ 3. ’Half Drunk and Throwing Bottles at Each Other’ 4. ’We Need to De-Americanize the Problem of Cuba’ 5. ‘The Policy We’ve Had in Place for 50 Years Hasn’t Worked‘ The United States and Cuba: Comparative Reflections (essay by Ana Covarrubias Velasco) 2010: 229 x 152: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-80450-9: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-80451-6: £26.99 For more information, visit:


Helping America Vote The Limits of Election Reform Martha E. Kropf, University of North Carolina at Charlotte, USA and David C. Kimball, University of Missouri-St. Louis, USA Series: Controversies in Electoral Democracy and Representation

Helping America Vote is focused on the conflict between values of access and integrity in the U.S. election administration. Kropf and Kimball examine both what was included in the ’Help America Vote Act’, and what was not. There is still reason to be concerned about key aspects of electronic voting, ballot design, and the politics of partisan administrators.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. How Does Definition of the Problem Affect the Solution? 3. Did the Reforms Increase Accuracy? 4. At What Cost? What are the Unintended Consequences of Reform? 5. We Eliminated the Butterfly Ballot - Isn’t that Enough? 6. Defining the Problem in Human, not Mechanical Terms: Who Implements Reform 7. What Have Reforms Accomplished? November 2011: 229 x 152: 150pp Hb: 978-0-415-80407-3: £75.00 Pb: 978-0-415-80408-0: £20.99 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:


US po lit ics



Black Politics Today

Everyday Practice of Race in America


The Era of Socioeconomic Transition

Ambiguous Privilege

Black Politics after the Civil Rights Revolution

Theodore J. Davis Jr., University of Delaware, USA

Utz McKnight, University of Alabama, USA

Dianne Pinderhughes, University of Notre Dame, USA

Series: Routledge Series on Identity Politics

Series: Postcolonial Politics

Black Politics after the Civil Rights Revolution brings together three decades of hard-to-find essays by influential scholar Dianne Pinderhughes. The essays provide a window into the institutional, political, and policy developments in African American politics in the post civil rights era. Although written separately, the chapters form a corpus for understanding a number of dimensions of African American politics, as well as for addressing the intellectual and theoretical issues explored in political science by scholars of racial and ethnic politics. The book also offers the opportunity to describe the academic institutions and intellectual communities that have framed this work and these political groups, and to describe how these groups have also served as sources of stimulation for the author. Finally the book allows us to see how Pinderhughes’s personal perspective has evolved over decades of efforts at understanding these areas of racial politics. Integrating these decades of work, along with new introductory and concluding essays, and short introductory essays for each of the sections into which the chapters are placed, provides a clear perspective on African American Politics in the post civil rights era.

The late 1980s ushered in a new era of black politics, the socioeconomic transition era. Coming on the heels of the protest era and politics era, the current stage is characterized by the emergence of a new black middle class that came of age after the Civil Rights struggle. Although class still isn’t a strong factor in the external politics of the black community, it is increasingly a wedge issue in the community’s internal politics. Black politics today is increasingly less about the interest of the larger group and more about the interest of smaller subgroups within the community. Theodore J. Davis Jr. argues that the greatest threat to the social and political cohesiveness of the so-called black community may be the rise of a socially and economically privileged group among the ranks of black America. This rift has affected blacks’ ability to organize effectively and influence politics. Davis traces the changes in economic status, public opinion, political power and participation, and leadership over three generations of black politics. The result is an insightful analysis of black politics today. Selected Contents: 1. Black Politics Today: The Evolution 2. A Community in Transition and Dividing by Class 3. The Foundations for a Political Divide 4. Attitudes and Perceptions in Black and White: What They Suggests About Race and Politics 5. Blacks’ Public Opinion Today: A Question of Consensus 6. Black Politics and the Continuing Struggle for Political Influence in the Socioeconomic Transition Era 7. Black Political Leadership Today 8. Beyond Socioeconomic Status: Other Factors Influencing Black Politics Today August 2011: 229 x 152: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-87914-9: £100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-87915-6: £29.99 For more information, visit:


Jim Crow Citizenship How Southern Progressives Remade Race, Citizenship and Liberalism in America Marek Steedman, University of Southern Mississippi, USA Series: Routledge Series on Identity Politics Jim Crow Citizenship relates familiar developments in American state-building, legal development, and political thought to race, showing how race intertwines with these developments, often shaping them in decisive fashion. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Social Construction, Race, and Liberalism 2. Familial Relations: Dependents-byNature and the Republican Household 3. ‘Dead Votes‘: The Redemption of the Planter Household 4. New Beings: Race and the ‘Foundations of Free Government‘ September 2011: 229 x 152: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-89053-3: £75.00 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

An original contribution to political theory and cultural studies this work argues for a reinterpretation of how race is described in US society. McKnight develops a line of reasoning to explain how we accommodate racial categories in a period when it has become important to adopt anti-racist formal instruments in much of our daily lives.

Selected Contents: 1. Representation: Class Ambiguity and Racial Subjectivity 2. The Everyday and Ordinary: Developing a Theory of Race 3. Cody’s, Foucault, and Race 4. Working Together: Conditional Subjectivity 5. Walking the Streets 6. Passing and Mixing: Challenging the Racial Subject 2010: 234 x 156: 128pp Hb: 978-0-415-78054-4: £80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-78055-1: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-85266-8 For more information, visit:


Pathways to Polling The Professionalization of Public Opinion and the Road Back from the Brink Amy Fried, University of Maine, USA In midcentury America, the public opinion polling enterprise faced a crisis of legitimacy. Every major polling firm predicted a win for Thomas Dewey over Harry Truman in the 1948 presidential election - and of course they all got it wrong. This failure generated considerable criticisms of polling and pollsters were forced to defend their craft, the quantitative analysis of public sentiment. Pathways to Polling argues that early political pollsters, market researchers, and academic and government survey researchers were entrepreneurial figures who interacted through a broad network that was critical to the growth of public opinion enterprises. This network helped polling pioneers gain and maintain concrete, financial support to further their discrete operations. After the Truman-Dewey debacle, such links helped political polling survive when it could have just as easily been totally discredited. Amy Fried demonstrates how interactions between ideas, organizations, and institutions produced changes in the technological, political, and organizational paths of public opinion polling, notably affecting later developments and practice.

Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Political Power and Participation 1. The Black Vote: The Sleeping Giant (1984) 2. Political Choices: A Realignment in Partisanship Among Black Voters? (1986) 3. Power and Progress: African American Politics in the New Era of Diversity (1992) Part 2: Civil Society: Interest Groups and Political Parties 4. The Articulation of Black Interests by Black, Civil Rights, Professional and Religious Organizations in the Jackson Campaign (1990) 5. Divisions in the Civil Rights Community (1992) 6. Civil Rights Reform in the 21st Century (2001) 7. The Renewal of the Voting Rights Act (2005) Part 3: National Institutions 8. Legislating Racial and Economic Equality in 97th Congress (1984) 9. Civil Rights and the Future of the American Presidency (1988) 10. Faults in the Movement: The End of One Era and the Beginning of Another (1995) Part 4: Domestic and International Policy 11. The Case of African Americans in the Persian Gulf (1991) 12. Viewpoint: An Essay From A Contributor, on the occasion of the 40th Anniversary of the U.S. Commission on Civil Rights (1997) Part 5: Black Politics in the Age of Obama 13. The Obama Questions: Race, Presidencies and American Crises (2008) 14. Barack Obama The First Black President: Hope At Last for America? (2009) 15. The Obama Administration at Six Months: Change or Just Hope? (2009) Part 6: Conclusion August 2011: 229 x 152: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-88155-5: £100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-88156-2: £25.99 For more information, visit:

Selected Contents: 1. Building the Polls 2. Media, Markets and Men from Mars 3. From the Fields of Hunger through the Cauldron of War 4. Pols, Politics and Polls 5. ’Survivors of the More Recent Wreck’ 6. A Defense Against ’Extensive and Unjustified Repercussions’ 7. Diverging Paths August 2011: 229 x 152: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-89141-7: £100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-89142-4: £22.99 For more information, visit:

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

us p ol i t ic s

Forthcoming Barack Obama and the Politics of Redemption Stanley A. Renshon, City University of New York Graduate Center, USA ‘As he did for Bill Clinton and George W. Bush, Stanley Renshon has now shed important new light on the personal presidency of Barack Obama. Noting that Obama’s life story is more a part of his presidency than was true for Clinton or Bush, Renshon probes the links between his psychology and personal development and his leadership style and policy choices. The result is the clearest explanation yet of a man and a president who remains an enigma to many.‘ – Bruce Buchanan, University of Texas at Austin, USA Based on extensive biographical, psychological, and political research and analysis, noted political psychologist Stanley Renshon follows Obama’s presidency through his first two years in office. He digs into the question of who is the real Obama and assesses the advantages and limitations that he brings to the presidency. These questions cannot be answered without recourse to psychological analysis. And they cannot be answered without psychological knowledge of presidential leadership and the presidency itself. Renshon explains that underlying Obama’s ambition lies a need for redemptions of himself, of his parents, and ultimately of America itself.

Framing Sarah Palin Pitbulls, Puritans, and Politics Linda Beail, Point Loma Nazarene University, USA and Rhonda Kinney Longworth, Eastern Michigan University, USA Using the notion of ’framing’ as a way of understanding political perception, the authors analyze the narratives told by and about Sarah Palin in the 2008 election - from beauty queen, maverick, faithful fundamentalist and post-feminist role model to pit bull, hockey mom, frontier woman, and political outsider. They discuss where those frames are rooted historically in popular and political culture, why they were selected, and the ways that the frames resonated with the electorate. Selected Contents: Part 1: Analytical Framework 1. Introduction 2. Women Candidates and the Strategic Environment Part 2: The Republican Frames 3. Frontier Woman 4. Political Outsider/Ordinary Citizen 5. Reformer/’Maverick’ 6. Faithful Fundamentalist Part 3: The Gender Frames 7. The Beauty Queen 8. Hockey Mom 9. Post-feminist Role Model Part 4: Framing Forward – The 2008 Campaign and Beyond 10. Late-night Comedy and the Campaign 11. Sarah Palin’s Reception and Reframing in the Blogosphere 12. Conclusion: Post-2008: Going Rogue and Running for the White House? December 2011: 229 x 152: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-89333-6: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-89336-7: £26.99 For more information, visit:

Manipulating Democracy Democratic Theory, Political Psychology, and Mass Media Edited by Wayne Le Cheminant and John M. Parrish, both at Loyola Marymount University, USA

Selected Contents: Part 1: Foundations 1. The Early Obama Presidency: From Campaigning to Governing 2. The Puzzle of Obama’s Political Identity 3. The Arc of Ambition and the Development of a Style Part 2: Understanding the Obama Presidency 4. Obama’s Presidential Leadership: Transformation and Redemption 5. The Moral Thrust of Obama’s Ambition: Fairness 6. The Question of Leadership Integrity 7. Ambition’s Confidence


8. A Zen-like President’s Emotional Undercurrents 9. Psychology in the White House Part 3: The Future of the Obama Presidency 10. Transformation’s Demise and the Redemption of the Obama Presidency Appendix A: Analyzing Barack Obama: A Note on Theory, Method, Evidence and Inference Appendix B: A Mysterious President: Puzzlement from the Left, Right and Center

July 2011: 229 x 152: 400pp | Hb: 978-0-415-87394-9: £95.00 | Pb: 978-0-415-87395-6: £21.99 For more information, visit:

‘In this time of great partisan conflict in politics, threats from abroad, and fear amplified by the mass media, I cannot think of a more timely and important volume. It is high time that the manipulation of public opinion – and American democracy – is given this kind of broad and thoughtful treatment it deserves.‘ – Robert Y. Shapiro, Columbia University, USA

Selected Contents: Introduction Manipulating Democracy: A Reappraisal Wayne Le Cheminant and John M. Parrish Part 1: Democratic Theory 1. Manipulation and Democratic Theory James Fishkin 2. Manipulation: As Old As Democracy Itself (and Sometimes Dangerous) Terence Ball 3. When Rhetoric Turns Manipulative: Disentangling Persuasion and Manipulation Nathaniel Klemp Part 2: Political Psychology 4. Changing Brains: Lessons from the Living Wage Campaign George Lakoff 5. Emotional Manipulation of Political Identity Rose McDermott 6. Mimesis, Persuasion, and Manipulation in Plato’s Republic Christina Tarnopolsky Part 3: Mass Media 7. ’News You Can’t Use’: Politics and Democracy in the New Media Environment Richard Fox and Amy Gangl 8. The Betrayal of Democracy: The Purpose of Public Opinion Survey Research and Its Misuse by Presidents Lawrence Jacobs 9. The Political Economy of Mass Media: Implications for Informed Citizenship Shanto Iyengar and Kyu Hahn 10. Exploiting the Clueless: Heresthetic, Overload, and Rational Ignorance Andrew Sabl 2010: 229 x 152: 280pp Hb: 978-0-415-87804-3: £100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-87805-0: £30.99 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:






Mexican Security Failure

New Media, Campaigning and the 2008 Facebook Election

Collapse into Criminal Violence Edited by Monica Serrano, Ralph Bunche Institute for International Studies, CUNY, USA, Paul Kenny With Arturno C. Sotomayer Because Mexico has failed to achieve internal security, it poses serious threats to its neighbors. This volume takes us inside the Mexican state to explain the failure there, but also reaches out to assess the impacts of Mexico’s security failure beyond its borders. The key innovative idea of the book, security failure, brings these perspectives together on an intermestic level of analysis. What doesn’t work within the state accounts for its negative impact on other states. It is a view that runs counter to the standard emphasis on the external, trans-national nature of criminal threats to a largely inert state. Security failure expresses the idea that, while it’s unhelpful to talk of states failing, it’s also misleading to leave out of the account how states struggle and change in interaction with those threats. Selected Contents: Acknowledgements. Introduction: Security Failure versus State Failure Paul Kenny and Mónica Serrano Part 1: The Background 1. The Mexican State and Organized Crime: An Unending Story Paul Kenny and Mónica Serrano 2. Transition to Dystopia: 1994-2008 Paul Kenny and Mónica Serrano Part 2: Security Failure at Home… 3. Arbitrariness and Inefficiency in the Mexican Criminal Justice System Ana Laura Magaloni 4. Accounting for the Unaccountable: The Police in Mexico Ernesto López-Portillo 5. Security versus Human Rights: The Case of Contemporary Mexico Alejandro Anaya Muñoz Part 3: … and Abroad 6. Drug Trafficking and US-Mexico Relations: Causes of Conflict Jorge Chabat 7. Mexico’s War on Terrorism: Rhetoric and Reality Athanasios Hristoulas 8. The Mesoamerican Dilemma: External Insecurity, Internal Vulnerability Raúl Benítez and Arturo Sotomayor. Conclusion: Authoritarian Evolution Paul Kenny and Mónica Serrano October 2011: 229 x 152: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-89327-5: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-89328-2: £21.99 For more information, visit:

Narcos Over the Border Gangs, Cartels and Mercenaries Edited by Robert J. Bunker, Counter-OPFOR Corporation, USA

2010: 246 x 174: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-56072-6: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Edited by Thomas J. Johnson, University of Texas at Austin, USA and David D. Perlmutter, University of Iowa, USA This book examines the way social media changed how candidates campaigned in the 2008 US presidential election, how the media covered the election and how voters received information. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: The Facebook Election Thomas J. Johnson and David D. Perlmutter 2. Intermedia Agenda-Setting and Political Activism: and the 2008 Presidential Election Matthew Ragas and Spiro Kiousis 3. The 2008 Presidential Campaign: Political Cynicism in the Age of Facebook, MySpace and YouTube Gary Hanson and Paul Haridakis 4. Did Social Media Really Matter? College Students’ Use of Online Media and Political Decision Making in the 2008 Election Matthew Kushin and Masahiro Yamamoto 5. The 2008 Presidential Election, 2.0: A Content Analysis of User-Generated Political Facebook Groups Julia Woolley, Anthony Limperos and Mary Oliver 6. The Writing on the Wall: A Content Analysis of College Students’ Facebook Groups for the 2008 Presidential Election Juliana Fernandes, Magda Giurcanu, Kevin Bowers and Jeffrey Neely May 2011: 234 x 156: 160pp Hb: 978-0-415-67393-8: £80.00 For more information, visit:


Strategy, Money and Technology in the 2008 Presidential Election Edited by Costas Panagopoulos, Fordham University, USA This book provides keen insights about emerging technological and financial developments in the way that presidential elections are conducted. It also demystifies the 2008 election and extracts lessons for future elections. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Part 1: Strategy and Choice in the 2008 Election 2. Beyond the Battlegrounds? Electoral College Stratgeies in the 2008 Presidential Election 3. Context and Strategy in Presidential Campaigns: Incumbency and Political Climate 4. Grassroots Mobilization in the 2008 Presidential Election 5. Prejudice, Black Threat and the Racist Voter in the 2008 Presidential Election 6. The Contemporary Effects of Vice-Presidential Nominees: Sarah Palin and the 2008 Presidential Campaign Part 2: Money and Technology in the 2008 Elections 7. Riding the Waves of Money: Contribution Dynamics in the 2008 Presidential Nomination Campaign 8. Looking Beyond the Voting Constituency: A Study of Campaign Donation Solicitations in the 2008 Presidential Primary and General Election 9. Filled Coffers: Campaign Contributions and Contributors in the 2008 Elections 10. The American Internet Voter 11. Can Online Videos Increase Turnout?: A Field Experiment Testing the Effect of Online Peer-Created Online Videos on Youth Turnout 12. Many Sources, One Message: Political Blog Links to Online Videos during the 2008 Campaign 13. Plugged In or Tuned Out? Youth, Race and Internet Usage in the 2008 Election 14. The Search is On: Googling ’Barack Obama’ and ’Hillary Clinton’ in the 2008 Democratic Primary 15. The Web 2.0 Election: Does the Online Medium Matter? 16. From Networked Nominee to Networked Nation: Examining the Impact of Web 2.0 and Social Media on Political Participation and Civic Engagement in the 2008 Obama Campaign

Rethinking Foreign Policy Analysis States, Leaders, and the Microfoundations of Behavioral International Relations Edited by Stephen G. Walker, Arizona State University, USA, Akan Malici, Furman University, USA and Mark Schafer, Louisiana State University, USA ‘Rethinking Foreign Policy Analysis is a bold and exciting undertaking. It expands a behavioral theory of foreign policy that draws out the logical and empirical linkages between foreign policy and international relations, reconfiguring the two as a unified subject of study. By building on the insights of branches of psychology and what the authors term thick rational choice, they solve many of the problems that have bedeviled international relations researchers for decades. Rethinking Foreign Policy Analysis will stand as a foundational book that helps propel forward our understanding of foreign affairs.‘ – Bruce Bueno de Mesquita, New York University, USA and Stanford University, USA Selected Contents: Part 1: Foreign Policy Analysis 1. Foreign Policy Analysis and Behavioral International Relations Stephen G. Walker 2. Macropolitics and Foreign Policy Decisions: The Billiard Ball Model of IR Stephen G. Walker 3. Micropolitics and Foreign Policy Decisions: The Behavioral Model of IR Stephen G. Walker 4. Quantum Politics and Operational Code Analysis: Theories and Methods Stephen G. Walker Part 2: Foreign Policy Decision Making 5. The United States and Rogue Leaders: Understanding the Conflicts Akan Malici 6. Deceptive Bargaining and Nuclear Ambitions: Prospect Theory and North Korea’s Decision to Go Nuclear Kai He and Huiyun Feng 7. Small Group Dynamics: The Psychological Characteristics of Leaders and the Quality of Group Decision Making Mark Schafer, Jonathon Nunley, and Scott Crichlow 8. Alliances and Their Microfoundations: France and Britain in the 9/11 Era Akan Malici Part 3: Foreign Policy Learning 9. Learning to Resist or Resisting to Learn? The Operational Codes of Fidel Castro and Kim Il Sung Akan Malici 10. Stability and Change in Belief Systems: The Operational Code of George W. Bush from Governor to Second Term President Jonathan Renshon 11. Experiential Learning by U.S. Presidents: Domestic, International, and Psychological Influences in the Post-Cold War World Samuel Robison 12. Cognitive Responses by U.S. Presidents to Foreign Policy Crises: Belief Changes in Response to Positive and Negative Experiences B. Gregory Marfleet and Hannah Simpson Part 4: Foreign Policy Dynamics 13. Dueling with Dictators: Explaining the Strategic Interaction Patterns of U.S. Presidents and Rogue Leaders Stephen G. Walker and Mark Schafer 14. Binary Role Theory: Reducing Uncertainty and Managing Complexity in Foreign Policy Analysis Stephen G. Walker 15. The Integration of Foreign Policy Analysis and International Relations Stephen G. Walker. Appendix. Formal Models of Symbolic and Strategic Interaction Stephen G. Walker 2010: 229 x 152: 336pp Hb: 978-0-415-88697-0: £100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-88698-7: £32.99 For more information, visit:

September 2011: 246 x 174: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-66942-9: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

i n te r n ati o n a l s e c ur i t y

The Politics of Inclusion and Exclusion


Identity Politics in Twenty-First Century America

Essays on Congressional Change

’These essays present a panoply of ideas, analysis and case studies of the contours and reactions to the multicultural and transracial nature of politics in the U.S. These scholars present new challenges to old issues that need re-examination and re-analysis to help this society advance to a 21st century understanding of what it means to be included or excluded in the U.S.’ – Robert Stanley Oden, California State University, Sacramento, USA Selected Contents: 1. Introduction David F. Ericson Part 1: Politics of Inclusion 2. Minimal Political Inclusion of Minorities at Risk: The Case of the Americas, 1870-2000 Victor Asal 3. Race, Nativity, and the Political Participation of Asian and Other Americans Pei-te Lien 4. The Home Styles of California Latino Representatives: Policy, Constituency, and Symbolic Representation Sally Friedman and Shannon Scotece 5. Puerto Rican Politics in New York City During the 1960s: Structural Ideation, Contingency, and Power José E. Cruz 6. Inclusion, Exclusion, and Citizenship Kathleen Sullivan and Patricia Strach Part 2: Politics of Exclusion 7. The Micro-Politics of Immigration: Local Government Policies of Inclusion and Exclusion Nadia Rubaii-Barrett 8. Outside the Binary: Transgendered Politics on a Global Stage Jenna Basiliere 9. Politics and the Disabled Body: Diverse Thoughts about Human Diversity William Roth 10. The Conservative Attack on Affirmative Action: Toward a Legal Genealogy of Color Blindness Julie Novkov 2010: 229 x 152: 232pp Hb: 978-0-415-87619-3: £100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-87620-9: £22.99 For more information, visit:

The US Secretaries of State and Transatlantic Relations Edited by Klaus Larres, University of Ulster, UK 2010: 246 x 174: 136pp Hb: 978-0-415-55323-0: £80.00

For more information, visit:

International Security

Lawrence C. Dodd, University of Florida, USA

This volume charts the thinking of scholar Lawrence Dodd in his development of theoretical explanations for Congressional change over time - explained by members’ pursuit of power, institutional and electoral contexts, clyclical rhythms, social learning, and polarization within society.

Selected Contents: Foreword Eric Schickler Part 1: Introduction 1. Congress as Public Mirror: Reflections on Congress across Time/Reflecting on our Illusive Congress/Reflections on our Illusive Congress Part 2: Member Goals and Institutional Context 2. Congress and the Quest for Power: 1977 3. Congress, the Constitution and the Crisis of Legitimation: 1981 4. Bicameralism in Congress: The Changing Partnership, with Edward Carmines: 1985 Part 3: Cyclical Rhythms, Agenda Shifts and Era Transformations 5. The Cycles of Legislative Change: Building a Dynamic Model: 1986a 6. The Theory of Congressional Cycles: Solving the Puzzle of Change: 1986b 7. Woodrow Wilson’s Congressional Government and the Modern Congress: 1987 Part 4: Idea Innovation, Social Learning and Political Renewal 8. Congress, The Presidency and the American Experience: A Transformational Perspective: 1991 9. Congress and the Politics of Renewal: Redressing the Crisis of Legitimation: 1993 10. The New American Politics: Reflections on the Early 1990s: 1995 Part 5: The Multiple Dimensions and Processes of Change 11. Re-Envisioning Congress: Theoretical Perspectives on Congressional Change: 2001 12. Making Sense Out of Our Exceptional Senate: 2002 13. Congress And the Space/Time Continuum: Theoretical Unities and Behavioral Disjunctures December 2011: 229 x 152: 432pp Hb: 978-0-415-99155-1: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-99156-8: £22.99 For more information, visit:

related journal

Edited by David F. Ericson, George Mason University, USA

Thinking About Congress

The Washington Quarterly Journal of the Center for Strategic and International Studies (CSIS) Editor-in-Chief: Alexander T. J. Lennon, Center for Strategic and International Studies, USA Volume 34, 2011, 4 issues per year Print ISSN: 0163-660X, Online ISSN: 1530-9177 The Washington Quarterly (TWQ) is a journal of global affairs that analyzes strategic security challenges, changes, and their public policy implications. TWQ is published out of one of the world’s preeminent international policy institutions, the Center for Strategic and International Studies (CSIS), and addresses topics such as: • The US role in the world • Emerging great powers: Europe, China, Russia, India, and Japan • Regional issues and flashpoints, particularly in the Middle East and Asia • Weapons of mass destruction proliferation and missile defenses • Global perspectives to reduce terrorism.

Browse and order online:

Adelphi series The Adelphi series is The International Institute for Strategic Studies’ flagship contribution to policy-relevant, original academic research. Eight books are published each year. They provide rigorous analysis of contemporary strategic and defence topics that is useful to politicians and diplomats, as well as academic researchers, foreign-affairs analysts, defence commentators and journalists.

Climate Conflict How Global Warming Threatens Security and What to Do about It Jeffrey Mazo This Adelphi explores how cultures have met the climate challenge and provides lessons for how the modern world can handle the new security threats posed by unprecedented global warming. 2010: 234 x 156: 168pp Pb: 978-0-415-59118-8: £9.99 eBook: 978-0-203-82410-8

For more information, visit:

Ending Wars, Consolidating Peace Economic Perspectives Mats Berdal, King’s College London, UK and Achim Wennmann, Graduate Institute of International and Development Studies, Geneva, Switzerland This Adelphi offers a series of economic perspectives on conflict resolution, to show how the challenges of peacebuilding can be more effectively tackled. 2010: 234 x 156 Pb: 978-0-415-61387-3: £9.99

For more information, visit:


i n t ernat ion al se curity


Europe and Global Security

No Exit


Bastian Giegerich

North Korea, Nuclear Weapons, and International Security

The Future of Conflict

In the twenty-first century, the European Union is confronted by myriad security problems that demand concerted action and cooperation. Will it be possible to enhance cooperation between member states? How can the EU complete its transition from a security actor with great potential to a player that credibly aligns available policy instruments and resources? These and other issues about the very nature and identity of the Union are explored in this Adelphi. From the need to establish its hard-power credentials, overcome its reluctance to demonstrate them against non-compliant states, and leverage its relationships with other great powers, to attempts to break its dependence on Russian energy, it is clear the EU has its work cut out. But, by affirming its commitment to multilateralism and defining a careful balance between closer cooperation and the national security concerns of EU member states, this book suggests, the European Union can build on its status as a global security power in the making. 2010: 234 x 156 Pb: 978-0-415-66934-4: £9.99 For more information, visit:


India as a Rising Great Power: Challenges and Opportunities Rahul Roy-Chaudhury, International Institute for Strategic Studies, London, UK At a time when India’s economic growth is driving greater engagement with and influence in the world, this Adelphi will provide a comprehensive strategic assessment of India’s rise as a great power. It will discuss India’s new status and responsibilities, the obligations and risks that India will have to accept as part of this new role, and the wider impact on regional and global stability. It will also explore the key issues where economics, business, politics and security converge, including India’s search for energy security and stability, transnational security challenges, India’s relations with the great powers, and defence diplomacy. July 2011: 234 x 156: 120pp Pb: 978-0-415-46632-5: £16.99 For more information, visit:

Jonathan D. Pollack

H.R. McMaster, International Institute for Strategic Studies, London, UK

This book chronicles the political-military development of the Korean Peninsula since 1945, with particular attention to North Korea’s pursuit of nuclear technology and nuclear weapons, and how it has shaped Northeast Asian security and non-proliferation policy and influenced the strategic choices of the United States and all regional powers. It focuses on North Korea’s leaders, institutions, political history, and the system’s longerterm prospects. How has an isolated, highly idiosyncratic, small state repeatedly stymied or circumvented the policy preferences of much more powerful states, culminating with its withdrawal from the Non Proliferation Treaty (the only state ever to do so) and the testing of nuclear weapons in open defiance of adversaries and allies alike? What does this portend for the region’s future?

A fundamentally flawed and ahistorical vision of future conflict that de-emphasises the human, psychological, political and cultural dimensions of war persists in strategic thought in spite of recent experience. This paper will challenge the widely held belief that ‘revolutionary’ surveillance, information-gathering and precision-strike technologies will permit modern military forces to win future wars rapidly and efficiently. The paper will examine the character of recent and ongoing conflicts in Lebanon, Afghanistan and Iraq to illuminate future challenges to security and recommend changes to military and inter-agency doctrine, organisation and professional education to address those challenges.

Unlike most of the literature that focuses on US non proliferation policy, this is a book about decision making in North Korea and the state’s survival in the face of daunting odds. It draws on extensive interviews with individuals in China, South Korea, Japan, Russia, and the EU who have had ample experience in and with North Korea, additional interviews with former US policy makers, and the results from two visits to the North. The author makes extensive use of archival materials from the Cold War International History Project, enabling a far fuller rendering of North Korean history than appears in most of the literature on the North Korean nuclear weapons issue.

For more information, visit:

July 2011: 234 x 156: 120pp Pb: 978-0-415-46582-3: £16.99


The US Role in the World Patrick M. Cronin, International Institute for Strategic Studies, UK


The United States continues to be the dominant military power on the international stage. But dominance is not what it used to be; the ability of military power to address modern security challenges is open to debate, and America has had a difficult time translating its preponderance into influence. To preserve an international capability for responding to security threats, the United States will need to repair its legitimacy problem, strengthen relations with its allies, and develop comprehensive solutions to problems beyond the use of force.

The Future of Asia-Pacific Sea Power

This Adelphi explores how part of the solution to the US’s difficulties may be found in adopting an approach of strategic restraint; aiming to manage disorder rather than striving to solve too many of the world’s ills.

December 2010: 234 x 156 Pb: 978-0-415-67083-8: £9.99 For more information, visit:

Geoffrey Till, Joint Services Command and Staff College / Defence Studies, Kings College London, UK Navies are going through a period of radical change, in large part due to new technologies and the effects of globalization. In this changing strategic context, a collaborative approach to maintaining good order at sea needs to be sustained; by navies acting with, rather than against each other; by the development of specialized fleets; and by the acceptance of shared R&D and production in naval equipment. At the same time, increasing concerns about national energy security and the survival of more traditional national security concerns suggest a continued focus on older conceptions of sea control and much more exclusive views of maritime security. This Adelphi will explore the tensions between these approaches, with particular reference to the naval interactions of the United States, China, Japan and India, especially in the waters around Southeast and Northeast Asia.

July 2011: 234 x 156: 120pp Pb: 978-0-415-46581-6: £16.99 For more information, visit:

Trapped Giant China’s Troubled Military Rise Jonathan Holslag This issue analyses China’s inexorable rise from peasant society to economic powerhouse. 2010: 234 x 156 Pb: 978-0-415-66989-4: £9.99 For more information, visit:

July 2011: 234 x 156: 120pp Pb: 978-0-415-46584-7: £16.99 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

i n te r n ati on al s e c ur i t y

Asian Security Studies Series Edited by Sumit Ganguly, Indiana University, USA and Andrew Scobell, RAND Corporation, Washington DC, USA Few regions of the world are fraught with as many security questions as Asia. Within this region it is possible to study great power rivalries, irredentist conflicts, nuclear and ballistic missile proliferation, secessionist movements, ethnoreligious conflicts and inter-state wars. This series publishes the best possible scholarship on the security issues affecting the region, and includes detailed empirical studies, theoretically oriented case studies and policy-relevant analyses as well as more general works. Forthcoming

Autonomy and Ethnic Conflict in South and South-East Asia Rajat Ganguly, Murdoch University, Australia This book addresses the question as to whether territorial or regional autonomy can offer a viable option for the pacific settlement of intractable nationalist and secessionist ethnic conflicts in South and Southeast Asia. Selected Contents: 1. Is Autonomy a Solution or an Obstacle to Resolving Separatist Ethnic Conflicts? Rajat Ganguly 2. Ethnic Peacemaking in Sri Lanka: The Politics of Autonomy Solution P. Sahadevan 3. Limits of Autonomy: Cross-Border Demographic Dynamics and Ethnic Conflict in Assam, India Sanjib Baruah 4. Addressing Different Aspirations in Jammu and Kashmir: From Autonomy to Self-Rule D. Suba Chandran 5. Ending the War in Aceh: Leadership, Money and Autonomy in Yudhoyono’s Indonesia Marcus Mietzner 6. When Autonomy is Not an Option? Governing Violence in Southern Thailand Chaiwat Satha-Anand 7.The Pitfalls in Working for Peace in a Time of Political Decay in the Philippines Nathan Quimpo 8. Conclusion Rajat Ganguly. Bibliography October 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-57016-9: £80.00 For more information, visit:



Indian Foreign and Security Policy in South Asia

Non-State Actors and Security in South Asia

Regional Power Strategies

Monika Barthwal-Datta

Sandra Destradi, GIGA Institute for Asian Studies, Germany

This book aims to explore the ways in which non-state actors (NSAs) in South Asia – media actors, epistemic communities, non-governmental organisations (NGOs), civil society groups and others – are involved in securitising non-traditional security challenges in the region at the domestic and regional levels.

This book provides an in-depth analysis of India’s foreign policy towards its eastern neighbourhood in the field of security. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: India and its Troubled Neighbourhood 2. Empire, Hegemony and Leadership: Assessing Regional Powers’ Strategies 3. India: The Regional Power in South Asia 4. The Sri Lankan Civil War and India’s Unsuccessful Hegemony 5. Nepal’s Peace Process and India’s Partially Successful Hegemony 6. Security Threats from Bangladesh and India’s Failed Hegemony 7. South Asia: Lessons Learned. Bibliography October 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-68078-3: £80.00 For more information, visit:

China, Europe and International Security Interests, Roles, and Prospects Edited by Frans-Paul van der Putten, Netherlands Institute of International Relations, Clingendael and Chu Shulong, Tsinghua University, China 2010: 234 x 156: 232pp Hb: 978-0-415-58580-4: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84460-1

Managing the New World Order Edited by Robert Ross, Harvard University, USA, Øystein Tunsjø, Norwegian Insititute of Defence Studies and Zhang Tuosheng, China Foundation for International & Strategic Studies Series: Asian Security Studies 2010: 234 x 156: 320pp Hb: 978-0-415-55233-2: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86020-5

States, Security and Non-state Actors Ryan Clarke, Nanyang Technological University, Singapore This book examines the crime-terror nexus in South Asia, focusing in particular on the activities of non-state actors that operate out of Pakistan, and challenges the conventional wisdom that the Pakistan Taleban (TTP) and Al-Qaeda are Pakistan’s most serious security threats.

April 2011: 234 x 156: 232pp Hb: 978-0-415-61031-5: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81894-7

November 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-68834-5: £80.00

US-China-EU Relations

Crime-Terror Nexus in South Asia

This book examines in detail Pakistan’s strategies in the war that it has fought against Islamist armed groups beginning in late 2001.

Strategies for Combating Armed Jihadist Groups

For more information, visit:


Samir Puri, Sidney Sussex College, Cambridge University, UK

Pakistan’s War on Terrorism

November 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-61631-7: £80.00

For more information, visit:

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Analysis of Current Research 2. Misgovernance and Proxy Warfare in Kashmir: Laying the Groundwork for the Crime-Terror Nexus 3. The Crime-Terror Nexus and Chinese Arms in Indian-Held Kashmir 4. Lashkar-i-Taiba: The Fallacy of Subservient Proxies and the Future of Islamist Terrorism in India 5. LeT and D-Company in Pakistan – Selective Justice, Sectarianism, and Artificial Distinctions 6. Breakdown of Order in FATA: Driven by the Pakistani Taliban and Al-Qaeda but Ideologically Underwritten by LeT 7. The Pakistani Economy – Imbalances and Contradictions, Incomplete Islamization, and D-Company as a Strategic Asset


Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Part 1: Security and South Asia 2. Widening the Securitisation Lens 3. Understanding Security in South Asia Part 2: Non-State Actors and Non-Traditional Security Threats 4. Media actors in Bangladesh and Societal Security 5. Human Trafficking and Anti-Trafficking NGOs in Nepal 6. Scientific Communities in India and the Threat of Climate Change 7. Conclusion. Bibliography

For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:

For more information, visit:


US-Japan-North Korean Security Relations Irrepressible Interests Anthony DiFilippo, Lincoln University, USA This book examines the major security and related issues between the United States, Japan and North Korea (DPRK). Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Nuclear Armed to the Teeth 3. Unlikely Bedfellows: U.S.-North Korean Inducements in the Rearming of Japan 4. The Making of DPRK Policies in Washington and Tokyo 5. Caught in the Crossfire: North Korean Loyalists in Japan 6. Politics, Partisanship, and the Stalemate in Japan-North Korean Relations 7. Conclusion: Separate Concerns and Rapprochement Possibilities. Selected Bibliography August 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-78297-5: £80.00 For more information, visit:


i n t ernat ion al se curity



Israeli Statecraft National Security Challenges and Responses Yehezkel Dror, Hebrew University of Jerusalem, Israel This book offers a systematic examination, analysis and evaluation of Israeli national security statecraft in terms of challenges and responses. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Israel’s Uniqueness 3. Value Compass 4. Israel’s Arena: The Twenty-First Century World 5. Turning Points 6. Mega-Trends 7. Contingencies and Response 8. Fateful Fuzzy Gamble: Confronting Iran 9. Conflict Morphology 10. Conflict System Dynamics Proto-Model 11. Statecraft Response: Heroic Achievements, Dismal Failures 12. Intermezzo: Crafting Novel Statecraft Paradigms 13. ’Israeli Embassy in Riyadh’ Peace Paradigm 14. ’Jekyll and Hyde’ Violence Paradigm 15. ’Dwelling in the World’ Global Paradigm 16. Epilogue: Statecraft Knowledge for What? May 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-61630-0: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81432-1 For more information, visit:

The New Citizen Armies Israel’s Armed Forces in Comparative Perspective Edited by Stuart A. Cohen, Bar-Ilan University, Israel 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-56546-2: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86171-4

related journal

For more information, visit:

European Security Editor-in-Chief: David J. Galbreath, University of Bath, UK Volume 20, 2011, 4 issues per year Print ISSN: 0966-2839, Online ISSN: 1746-1545 European Security is a forum for discussing challenges and approaches to security within the region as well as for Europe in a global context. The journal seeks to publish critical analyses of policies and developments in European institutions and member states, their relations with European and other immediate neighbours, and their relations with the wider world, including other regional and international organisations. It is also interested in non-European perspectives on Europe in a global context.

Contemporary Security Studies Series Edited by James Gow and Rachel Kerr, both at King’s College London, University of London, UK This series focuses on new research across the spectrum of international peace and security, in an era where each year throws up multiple examples of conflicts that present new security challenges in the world around them. Forthcoming

European Homeland Security Politics, Coincidence and Strategy Edited by Christian Kaunert and Sarah Leonard, both at University of Salford, UK and Patryk Pawlak, School of Advanced International Studies, Johns Hopkins University, Washington DC, USA This book examines the processes and factors shaping the development of homeland security policies in the EU, within the wider context of integration. Selected Contents: Introduction: Towards European Homeland Security: Strategy or Coincidence? Patryk Pawlak, Sarah Leonard and Christian Kaunert Part 1: Homeland Security and Strategy Part 2: European Homeland Security: A Counter-Terrorism-Driven Process? Part 3: Pushing the Boundaries of the European Homeland. Conclusions: What European Homeland Security Strategy after Lisbon and Stockholm? Sarah Leonard, Christian Kaunert, and Patryk Pawlak. Bibliography September 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-67794-3: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Global Biosecurity Threats and Responses Edited by Peter Katona, UCLA, USA, John P. Sullivan, National Terrorism Early Warning Resource Center, Los Angeles Sheriff’s Department, USA and Michael D. Intriligator, UCLA, USA 2010: 234 x 156: 352pp Hb: 978-0-415-46053-8: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86024-3 For more information, visit:


International Law, Security and Ethics Policy Challenges in the post-9/11 World Edited by Aidan Hehir, University of Westminster, UK, Natasha Kuhrt, King’s College London, UK and Andrew Mumford, University of Hull, UK This book examines the different ways in which the laws governing the use of force and the conduct of warfare have become subject to intense scrutiny and contestation since the initiation of the war on terror. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Policy Challenges to International Law, Security and Ethics in the Post-9/11 World Andy Mumford and Natasha Kuhrt Part 1: Framing the Issue 2. Terrorism, Security and International Law Nigel White 3. Al Qaeda and Networked International Insurgency Andy Mumford 4. Ethical and Legal Reasoning about War in a Time of Terror James Connelly and Don Carrick Part 2: International Law and Security 5. Law and War in the Global War on Terror Rachel Kerr and James Gow 6. Security, Discretion and International Law Aidan Hehir 7. The Human Security Agenda after 9/11: From Humanitarian Intervention to Peacebuilding Natasha Kuhrt Part 3: Self Defence 8. Principles of Pre-Emption: A Commentary on Issues and Scenarios for Self-Defence in the 21st Century James Gow 9. Who Killed the Right to Self-Defence? Thomas Jones 10. Computer Network Attacks, Self-Defence and International Law Elaine Korzak 11. Conclusion: War, Law and Ethics Aidan Hehir April 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-60742-1: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81608-0 For more information, visit:

Justifying America’s Wars The Conduct and Practice of US Military Intervention Nicholas Kerton-Johnson, Bristol University, UK 2010: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-56168-6: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86167-7 For more information, visit:

Legitimacy and the Use of Armed Force Stability Missions in the Post-Cold War Era Chiyuki Aoi, Aoyama Gakuin University, Tokyo 2010: 234 x 156: 304pp Hb: 978-0-415-55954-6: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86576-7 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

i n te r n ati on al s e c uri t y


Territory, War, and Peace

US Foreign Policy and Iran

Multipolarity in the 21st Century

John A. Vasquez and Marie T. Henehan, both at University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign, USA

American-Iranian Relations since the Islamic Revolution

Donette Murray, Royal Military Academy, Sandhurst, Camberley, UK

Edited by Donette Murray and David Brown, both at Royal Military Academy, Sandhurst, Camberley, UK This book seeks to help shape the debate surrounding power and polarity in the twenty-first century both by assessing the likelihood of US decline and by analysing what each of the so-called ’rising powers’ can do. Selected Contents: Introduction Donette Murray 1. The American Eagle Rob Singh 2. The Chinese Dragon Donette Murray 3. The Russian Bear Dmitri Polikanov 4. The Indian Tiger Sumit Ganguly and Manjeet S Pardesi 5. The EU: A Different Kind of Beast? John McCormick. Conclusion: A New World Order – An Emerging Multipolar Framework? David Brown November 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-47547-1: £80.00 For more information, visit:

US Hegemony and International Legitimacy Norms, Power and Followership in the Wars on Iraq Lavina Rajendram Lee, Macquarie University, Australia 2010: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-55236-3: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85949-0 For more information, visit:

Rethinking Security Governance The Problem of Unintended Consequences Edited by Christopher Daase and Cornelius Friesendorf, both at Goethe University, Frankfurt 2010: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-48535-7: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85115-9 For more information, visit:

Russia’s Foreign Security Policy in the 21st Century Putin, Medvedev and Beyond Marcel De Haas, Netherlands Defence College, Netherlands Defence Academy, Ministery of Defence 2010: 234 x 156: 232pp Hb: 978-0-415-47730-7: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85440-2 For more information, visit:

This book presents a collection of new and updated essays on what has come to be known as the territorial explanation of war.

The book argues that a key both to peace and to war lies in understanding the role territory plays as a source of conflict and inter-group violence. Of all the issues that spark conflict, territorial disputes have the highest probability of escalating to war. War, however, is hardly inevitable; much depends on how territorial issues are handled. More importantly, settling territorial disputes and establishing mutually recognized boundaries can produce long periods of peace between neighbors, even if other salient issues arise. While territory is not the only cause of war and wars arise from other issues, territory is one of the main causes of war, and learning how to manage it can, in principle, eliminate an entire class of wars.

US Foreign Policy and Iran is a study of US foreign policy decision-making in relation to Iran and its implications for Middle Eastern relations. Selected Contents: Introduction: The Iran Syndrome 1. The Crucible of Revolution: Carter’s Bitter Legacy 2. Reagan: After the Revolution, in Search of a Policy 3. George H.W. Bush: War and Peace 4. Clinton: Volte-Face 5. George W. Bush: The Enemy of my Enemy. Conclusion: The Carcass of Dead Policies. Select Bibliography 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp Pb: 978-0-415-58139-4: £24.99 For more information, visit:

Private Security Contractors and New Wars

This book will be of great interest to all students of war and conflict studies, causes of war and peace, international security and strategic studies.

Risk, Law, and Ethics

Selected Contents: Part 1: Theory 1. Why Do Neighbors Fight? Proximity, Interactions, or Territoriality John A. Vasquez 2. Distinguishing Rivals That Go To War from Those That Do Not: A Quantitative Comparative Case Study of the Two Paths to War John A. Vasquez Part 2: Territory and War 3. Territorial Disputes and the Probability of War, 1816-1992 John A. Vasquez and Marie T. Henehan 4. Mapping the Probability of War: The Role of Territorial Disputes Compared to the Role of Contiguity John A. Vasquez 5. The Effect of Territory on Dispute Escalation among Initiators Marie T. Henehan 6. The Probability of War, 1816-1992 John A. Vasquez Part 3: Identifying Paths to War 7. Territorial Paths to War: Their Probability of Escalation, 1816-2001 John A. Vasquez 8. Paths to War: The Territorial Origins of War John A. Vasquez Part 4: Territory and Peace 9. The Changing Probability of Interstate War, 1816-1992 Marie T. Henehan and John A. Vasquez 10. Peace, Globalization, and Territoriality John A. Vasquez and Marie T. Henehan Part 5: Conclusion 11. The Significance of Territory John A. Vasquez

2010: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-77171-9: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85689-5

2010: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-42413-4: £100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-42414-1: £24.99 For more information, visit:


Transitional Justice, Peace and Accountability Outreach and the Role of International Courts after Conflict Jessica Lincoln, King’s College, London, UK The book looks at the outreach and communication strategies employed by internationalised courts to try to understand the wider impact of international justice. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. International Justice: from Nuremberg to Sierra Leone 2. Sierra Leone: Conflict and Judicial Intervention 3. Establishment of the Special Court for Sierra Leone 4. Internationalised Justice for Sierra Leone 5. Outreach 6. Legacy. Conclusion: Transitional Justice, Accountability and Outreach April 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-59839-2: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81727-8 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:

Kateri Carmola, Middlebury College, Vermont, USA

For more information, visit:

related journal

A New World Order

New in 2011

Journal of Policing, Intelligence and Counter Terrorism Centre for Policing, Intelligence and Counter Terrorism (PICT), Macquarie University Editor-in-Chief: Colin Wastell Managing Editor: Dr. Julian Droogan Editorial Assistant: Rebecca Mitchell, all at Macquarie University, Australia Volume 6, 2 issues per year Print ISSN: 1833-5300 The Journal of Policing, Intelligence and Counter Terrorism (JPICT) is a fully refereed journal, produced by the Centre for Policing, Intelligence and Counter Terrorism at Macquarie University, Sydney, Australia. The Journal is published twice a year and is an international scholarly journal that acts as a forum for those around the world undertaking high quality research and practice in the areas of: • Security studies • Policing • Intelligence • Counter terrorism • Critical incidents and political violence • Terrorism and the media • Reportage of war, insurgency and conflict • Cyber-security and cyber-crime • Threats to financial security • Technology and security


i n t ernat ion al se curity


Women, Peace and Security


War, Ethics and Justice New Perspectives on a Post-9/11 World Edited by Annika Bergman-Rosamond, Danish Institute for International Studies and Mark Phythian, University of Leicester, UK This edited volume addresses the key issues of ethics, war and international relations in the post-9/11 world. Selected Contents: Introduction: War, Ethics and Justice – New Perspectives on a Post-9/11 World Annika BergmanRosamond and Mark Phythian 1. Tactics of Mistake: ‘Torture’, Security and the Ethics of ‘Liberal’ Wars After 9/11 Caroline Kennedy-Pipe 2. ‘Let us Re-order This World Around Us’: The Problematic Subject of British Military Ethics Dan Bulley 3. An Australian Approach to Ethical Warfare? Australia and the ‘War on Terror’ Thomas Moore 4. The Cosmopolitan- Communitarian Divide and the Swedish Military Annika Bergman-Rosamond 5. Ambivalent Spectators and Enthusiastic Fans? Mapping Civilian-Military Engagement in Canada Lori Crowe and Chris Hendershot 6. Ethics, Gender and Forces for Good: Military Masculinities in British Soldiers’ Accounts of Iraq and Afghanistan Claire Duncanson 7. Feminist International Relations and Intelligence in a High-Tech Age Gillian Youngs 8. The Problem of Intelligence Ethics Mark Phythian 9. Justice and Ethics in Israeli Counter-Terrorism Shlomo Shpiro 10. Jihad and the ‘War on Terror’: Intelligence, Ethics, and Justice in Pakistan and Afghanistan Rob Johnson January 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-55234-9: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86852-2 For more information, visit:


Transatlantic Relations in the 21st Century Europe, America and The Rise of the Rest

Translating Policy into Practice

Edited by Funmi Olonisakin and Eka Ikpe, both at Kings College, London, UK, and Karen Barnes, OECD, Paris, France This book provides a critical assessment of the impact of UN Resolution 1325 by examining the effect of peacebuilding missions on increasing gender equality within conflict-affected countries. Selected Contents: Part 1: Introduction 1. Introduction Karen Barnes and ‘Funmi Olonisakin 2. The Evolution and Implementation of United Nations Security Council Resolution 1325: An Overview Karen Barnes Part 2: Country Case Studies 3. Kosovo Gendered Violence and UNSCR 1325: Shifting paradigms on Women, Peace and Security Catherina H. Hall-Martin 4. Security Council Resolution 1325 Implementation in Liberia: Dilemmas and Challenges E. Njoki Wamai 5. Nepal and the Implementation of United Nations Security Council 1325 Lesley Abdela 6. Implementation of United Nations Security Council Resolution 1325 in Nigeria Eka Ikpe 7. Rwanda and the Implementation of United Nations Security Council Resolution 1325 Kiri-Ann E. Richardson Olney 8. Lost in Translation? UNAMSIL, Security Council Resolution 1325 and Women Building Peace in Sierra Leone Karen Barnes 9. The Impact of UN Security Council Resolution 1325 and Peacekeeping Operations in Sudan Gihan Eltahir 10. Women and Gender Issues in Peacebuilding: Lessons Learned from Timor-Leste Sumie Nakaya Part 3: Regional Case Studies 11. The African Union and Implementation of UNSCR 1325 Bineta Diop 12. The Gender Dimensions of the ECOWAS Peace and Security Architecture: a Regional Perspective on UN Security Council Resolution 1325 Awa Ceesay- Ebo 13. A look at Security Council Resolution 1325 in SADC Nyaradzo Machingambi-Pariola 14. Turning Policies into Action? The European Union and the Implementation of UNSCR 1325 Karen Barnes Part 4: Conclusion 15. Conclusion Funmi Olonisakin and Eka Ikpe 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-58797-6: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83708-5 For more information, visit:

Erwan Lagadec, Johns Hopkins University, USA December 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-68321-0: £80.00 For more information, visit:


Hamas and Suicide Terrorism

America, the UN and Decolonisation

Multi-Causal and Multi-Level Approaches

Cold War Conflict in the Congo

Rashmi Singh, St. Andrews University, UK

John Kent, London School of Economics and Political Science, UK

Series: LSE International Studies Series This book analyses the root causes of suicide terrorism at both the elite and rank-and- file levels of the Hamas and also explains why this tactic has disappeared in the post-2006 period. Selected Contents: 1. Introductory Remarks 2. Rationality, Nationalism and Political Islam 3. A Brief Political History of the Israeli-Palestinian Conflict 4. Rationality and the Convergence of Expressive and Instrumental Violence 5. Palestinian Nationalism, Identity and the Norm of Militant Heroic Martyrdom 6. Political Islam and the Rhetoric of Jihad and Martyrdom 7. Concluding Remarks. Appendix A: List of Interviews. Appendix B: Suicide Bombings Conducted by Hamas, 1993-2006. Glossary. Bibliography January 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-49804-3: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

Series: LSE International Studies Series 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-46414-7: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85192-0 For more information, visit:


EU Foreign Policymaking and the Middle East Conflict The Europeanization of National Foreign Policy Patrick Müller, Austrian Academy of Sciences, Vienna, Austria Series: CSS Studies in Security and International Relations This book examines the interplay between the national and the European levels in EU foreign policymaking, focusing on a central area of EU engagement – the Israeli-Palestinian conflict. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. National and EU Foreign Policy 3. EU Foreign Policy and the Israeli-Palestinian Conflict 4. France 5. The UK 6. Germany 7. Toward a More Coherent EU Conflict Resolution Policy? 8. Conclusion. Bibliography September 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-67699-1: £80.00 For more information, visit:

European-American Relations and the Middle East From Suez to Iraq Edited by Victor Mauer and Daniel Möckli, both at Swiss Federal Institute of Technology (ETH), Zürich, Switzerland Series: CSS Studies in Security and International Relations This book examines the evolution of European-American relations with the Middle East since 1945. Selected Contents: Introduction Daniel Möckli and Victor Mauer Part 1: Changing Roles and Interests: From Suez to Iraq 1. Suez 1956: European Colonial Interests and US Cold War Prerogatives Tore T. Petersen 2. Iraq 2003: Regime Change and Its European Discontents Victor Mauer Part 2: The Arab-Israeli Conflict and the West 3. Anglo-American Relations and the Palestine Question, 1945-56 John Sakkas 4. At Odds in the Middle East: Paris, Washington, and the Six-Day War, 1967 Garret Martin 5. The EC-Nine and Transatlantic Conflict During the October War and the Oil Crisis, 1973/74 Daniel Möckli 6. The Euro-Arab Dialogue, the Venice Declaration, and Beyond: The Limits of a Distinct EC Policy, 1974-89 David Allen and Andrin Hauri 7. From Madrid to Camp David: Europe, the US, and the Middle East Peace Process in the 1990s Patrick Müller and Claire Spencer 8. The Middle East Quartet: A New Role for Europe? Constanza Musu Part 3: Gulf Security and Transatlantic Relations 9. Dealing with Iran: The US, Britain, and Regime Change 1951-3 Malcolm Byrne 10. Securing Gulf Oil: Britain, NATO, and the Question of Military Intervention East of Suez, 1949-68 Stephen Blackwell 11. Subcontracting Security: The US, Britain, and Gulf Security Before the Carter Doctrine Roland Popp 12. Great Game Redux: The US, Europe, and Gulf Security in the Late Cold War Peter John Brobst 13. Europe, the US, and the Gulf After the Cold War Gerd Nonneman 14. Iran and the Bomb: Washington, the EU, and Iranian Nuclear Ambitions Harsh V. Pant. Conclusion: Major Trends in European-American Relations and the Middle East since 1945 Daniel Möckli and Victor Mauer 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-47664-5: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85144-9 For more information, visit:

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

i n te r n ati on al s e c ur i t y

Media, War and Security


Military Media Management

Series Edited by Andrew Hoskins, University of Nottingham, UK and Oliver Boyd-Barrett, Bowling Green State University, OH, USA

Negotiating the Frontline

This book series interrogates and seeks to illuminate the mutually shaping relationship between war and media as transformative of contemporary society, politics and culture.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. What is Media Operations? 3. The Shaping of Military Media Management: Organisation through Interaction 4. The Aim of Media Operations: Mulitiple Audiences, Generating Responses 5. Defining Military Action: Strategies and Limitations 6. Performing Military Impression Management 7. Reconfiguring the Battle Space: Impression Management and ‘Mediated War’. Bibliography

Global Terrorism and New Media

December 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-58005-2: £80.00

The Post-Al Qaeda Generation

Sarah Maltby, City University, London, UK

Series Edited by J. Peter Burgess, PRIO, Oslo, Norway

This book argues that we are moving towards an increasingly ‘Mediated War’, where the practice of war is enacted through, involves, and is dependent upon media reportage.


For more information, visit:

Philip Seib, University of Southern California, USA and Dana M. Janbek, Lasell College, MA, USA


Radicalisation and Media

Global Terrorism and New Media carefully examines the content of terrorist websites and extremist television programming to provide a comprehensive look at how terrorist groups use new media today.

Based partly on a content analysis of discussion boards and forums, the authors share their findings on how terrorism 1.0 is migrating to 2.0 where the interactive nature of new media is used to build virtual organization and community. Although the creative use of social networking tools such as Facebook may advance the reach of terrorist groups, the impact of their use of new media remains uncertain. The book pays particular attention to terrorist media efforts directed at women and children, which are evidence of the long-term strategy that some terrorist organizations have adopted, and the relationship between terrorists’ media presence and actual terrorist activity. This volume also looks at the future of terrorism online and analyzes lessons learned from counterterrorism strategies. Selected Contents: 1. Communicating Terror 2. High Tech Terror: Al Qaeda and Beyond 3. Terrorists’ Online Strategies 4. Targeting the Young 5. Women and Terrorism 6. Terrorism’s Online Future 7. Responding to Terrorism 2010: 234 x 156: 160pp Hb: 978-0-415-77961-6: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-77962-3: £23.99 eBook: 978-0-203-84537-0 For more information, visit:

PRIO New Security Studies

Connectivity and Terrorism in the New Media Ecology Andrew Hoskins, University of Nottingham, UK, and Akil Awan and Ben O’Loughlin, both at Royal Holloway, University of London, UK This book examines the circulation and effects of radical discourse by analysing the role of mass media coverage in promoting or hindering radicalisation and acts of political violence. Selected Contents: 1. Media and Radicalization: Grappling Uncertainties in the New Media Ecology 2. Legitimising Jihadist ideology 3. Media Jihad 4. Media Events: Televisual Connections 2004-2006 5. The Mainstream Nexus of Radicalization: The 2008-09 Gaza Conflict 6. Audience Uncertainties: Imagining the Mainstream and Extremes 7. Conclusion: The New Media Ecology Model February 2011: 234 x 156: 168pp Hb: 978-0-415-55035-2: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-82967-7 For more information, visit:


Hollywood and the CIA Cinema, Defense and Subversion Oliver Boyd Barrett, Bowling Green State University, OH, USA, David Herrera, Missouri School of Journalism, Columbia, USA and James A. Baumann, Saint Ambrose University, USA

Biopolitics of Security in the 21st Century A Political Analytic of Finitude Michael Dillon, University of Lancaster, UK This book is a volume of essays on the Biopolitics of Security in the 21st Century. It is at first of its kind in that no other study currently available covers the same field of research with the same degree of innovation. There is clearly growing attention to biopolitics in general, and the biopolitics of security in particular, beyond international relations and into the social sciences more generally (Geography, Sociology, Criminology, Law, and the Management Sciences). This volume will provide a genealogy of the biopolitics of security beginning with Michel Foucault’s original account of the rise of biopolitics at the beginning of the 18th century, and will clarify and further develop Foucault’s original analytic of the biopolitics of security. This work is an original introduction to the emerging field of the biopolitics of security, tracking its development into the 21st century, which will serve as an intellectual provocation to researchers as much as it will a pedagogical guide to graduate and undergraduate teachers. Selected Contents: Introduction: Problematising Security 1. The Life and Times of Species Being: Radical Contingency and the Unconscious Metaphysics of the Biopolitical Philosophy of Life 2. Governing Through Security: Biopolitics of Security as the Extension of War by Other Means 3. Securing Species Life: The Biopolitical Economy of Circulation, Connectivity and Complexity 4. Compressing Morbidity: Securing Population in the 20th and 21st Centuries 5. Underwriting Security: Risk, Finance and Futures 6. Preferred Lives: Race and Sorting Mechanisms 7. Extra and Post Human Biopolitics: Digitalisation, Disease, and Virtuality 8. Necropolitics: The Biopolitics of the Living Dead 9. Conclusion: In Excess of Biopolitics September 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-48432-9: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-48433-6: £24.99 For more information, visit:

Critical Perspectives on Human Security Rethinking Emancipation and Power in International Relations

This book investigates representations of the Central Intelligence Agency (CIA) in Hollywood films, and the synergies between Hollywood product, U.S. military/ defense interests and U.S. foreign policy.

Edited by David Chandler, University of Westminster, London, UK and Nik Hynek, Institute of International Relations, Prague, Czech Republic

Selected Contents: 1. Hollywood and the CIA: ’A Bunch of Seedy, Squalid Bastards’ 2. The 1960s: In the Shadows 3. The 1970s: ’There are no more secrets’ 4. The 1980s: ’We’ve wiped out entire cultures! And for what?’ 5. The 1990s: Black Ops Meet Terror 6. The 2000s: History Interrupted 7. Conclusion: Once upon a time in Hollywood

2010: 234 x 156: 216pp Hb: 978-0-415-56734-3: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84758-9

February 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-78006-3: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-82821-2 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:

For more information, visit:


i n t ernat ion al se curity



Feminist Security Studies


Securitization, Accountability and Risk Management

A Narrative Approach

Politics of Catastrophe

Annick T.R. Wibben, University of San Francisco, USA

Genealogies of the Unknown

Claudia Aradau, Open University and Rens Van Munster, University of Sotuhern Denmark

Transforming the Public Security Domain

This book rethinks security theory from a feminist perspective – uniquely, it engages feminism, security, and strategic studies to provide a distinct feminist approach to Security Studies.

Edited by Maria Bergström, Uppsala University, Sweden, Karin Svedberg Helgesson, Stockholm School of Economics, Sweden and Ulrika Mörth, Stockholm University, Sweden This book examines the reconstitution of the public security domain since 911, and its implications for the division of roles between public and private actors, focusing on the banking sector and anti-money laundering (AML) activity. Selected Contents: Preface Part 1: The Second Wave of Transforming Anti-Money Laundering 1.The Analytical Framework The Editors 2. FATF as the Central Promoter of the Transnational AML Regime Anja P. Jacobi 3. Scope and Effects of EC Legal Instruments Sideek Mohamed Seyad Part 2: The Processes of Securitization 4. Managerialization of Security Michael Power 5. Security and Securitization in AML Jan Hallenberg and Ulrika Mörth 6. European Security Management of Financial Flows Anthony Amicelle Part 3: Bringing the Private Sector Back In 7. Banks as Providers of Policing Gilles FavarelGarrigues, Thierry Godefroy and Pierre Lascoume 8. Actors, Interests and Multi-Blurring of Boundaries in Anti-Money Laundering Implementation: A Procedural Approach Maria Bergström Part 4: Public vs. Private: A Grand Dichotomy Revisited 9. Private Actor Accountability Karin Svedberg Helgesson 10. A New Security Public Domain? – The Democratic Challenges. Bibliography December 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-68014-1: £80.00 For more information, visit:


Militarism, Gender and (In)Security Biopolitical Technologies of Security and the War on Terror Cristina Masters, University of Manchester, UK This book explores how masculinity is being rearticulated within the context of modern war’s festishation of technology, providing a sustained critique of US militarism. Selected Contents: Introduction: Reading Moments of US Militarism from the Margins of International Politics Part 1: Contextualising Moments of US Militarism 1. Technologies of (In)Security: Contextualising Moments of Militarism Part 2: Technologies of (In)Security 2. There are Monsters Among ‘US’: The War on Terror and Homeland (In)Security 3. Tales of the Shield: Missiles, Masculinity & Biopower 4. Bodies of Technology: Cyborg Soldiers and Militarised Masculinities Part 3: Productions of Bare Life 5. The Biopolitics of Death: Ritual Burials in the War on/of Terror and the Production of Homo Sacer 6. Femina Sacra: The War on/of Terror, Women, and the Feminine. Conclusion: Fleshy Politics August 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-57775-5: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

The volume explicitly works toward an opening up of security studies that would allow for feminist (and other) narratives to be recognized and taken seriously as security narratives. To make this possible, it presents a feminist reading of security studies that aims to invigorate the debate and radicalize critical security studies. Since feminism is a political project, and security studies are, at their base, about particular visions of the political and their attendant institutions, this is of necessity a political intervention. The book works through and beyond security studies to explore possible spaces where an opening of security, necessary to make way for feminist insights, can take place. While it develops and illustrates a feminist narrative approach to security, it is also intended as an intervention that challenges the politics of security and the meanings for security legitimized in existing practices. This book provides develops a comprehensive framework for the emerging field of feminist security studies and will be of great interest to students and scholars of feminist IR, critical security studies, gender studies and IR and security studies in general. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Feminist Interventions: The Politics of Identity 2. Challenging Meanings 3. Toward a Narrative Approach 4. Security as Narrative 5. Feminist Security Narratives. Conclusion: The Future of Feminist Security Studies 2010: 234 x 156: 168pp Hb: 978-0-415-45727-9: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-45728-6: £23.99 eBook: 978-0-203-83488-6 For more information, visit:


Liberal Terror Global Security, Divine Power and Emergency Rule Brad Evans, University of Leeds, UK This book offers a genealogical investigation into the phenomenon of terror in the 21st century. Selected Contents: 1. Battle for the Soul of the 21st Century 2. The Liberal Theology 3. Life in Circulation 4. Deliverance from Evil 5. Pure Violence 6. Terror in all Eventuality December 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-58882-9: £80.00 For more information, visit:

‘This book advances our understanding of the complex and often paradoxical terrain of the catastrophe as a field of knowledge and target of anticipatory governance. In doing so, its authors stand at the forefront of new thinking about contemporary regimes of security, power and governmentality.’ – Mitchell Dean, Macquarie University, Australia Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Securing Catastrophic Futures 3. Conjectures of Catastrophe: ‘The Next Terrorist Attack’ 4. Economies of Catastrophe 5. Imagining Catastrophes 6. Aesthetics of Catastrophe 7. Catastrophe, Exception, Event 8. Conclusion May 2011: 234 x 156: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-49809-8: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81579-3 For more information, visit:

Securitization Theory How Security Problems Emerge and Dissolve Edited by Thierry Balzacq, University of Namur and Louvain, Belgium

This volume aims to provide a new framework for the analysis of securitization processes, increasing our understanding of how security issues emerge, evolve and dissolve.

Selected Contents: 1. A Theory of Securitization: Origins, Core Assumptions, and Variants Thierry Balzacq 2. Enquiries Into Methods: A New Framework for Securitization Analysis Thierry Balzacq Part 1: The Rules of Securitization 3. Reconceptualizing the Audience in Securitization Theory Sarah Léonard and Christian Kaunert 4. Securitization as a Media Frame Fred Vultee 5. The Limits of Spoken Words: From Meta-Narratives to Experiences of Security Claire Wilkinson 6. When Securitization Fails: The Hard Case of Counter-terrorism Programmes Mark B. Salter Part 2: Securitization and De-securitization in Practice 7. Rethinking the Securitization of Environment: Old Beliefs, New Insights Julia Trombetta 8. Health Issues and Securitization: HIV/AIDS as a US National Security Threat Roxanna Sjostedt 9. Securitization, Culture and Power: Rogue States in US and German Discourse Holger Stritzel and Dirk Schmittchen 10. Religion Bites: The Securitization of – and Desecuritization Moves by – Falungong Practitioners in the People’s Republic of China Juha A. Vuori 11. The Continuing Evolution of Securitization Theory Michael C. Williams 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-55627-9: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-55628-6: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-86850-8 For more information, visit:

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

i n te r n ati on al s e c uri t y

Security and Global Governmentality Globalization, Governance and the State Edited by Miguel de Larrinaga, University of Ottawa, Canada and Marc G. Doucet, Saint Mary’s University, Canada 2010: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-56058-0: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86573-6


Security, the Environment and Emancipation

Manabrata Guha

Matt McDonald, University of Queensland, Australia

Series: Routledge Critical Security Studies

This book offers an examination of the role of emancipation in the study and practice of security, focusing on the case of environmental change.

2010: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-56166-2: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84864-7

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. The Construction of Security 3. Emancipation 4. Deforestation in the Brazilian Amazon 5. Global Climate Change in the Australian Context 6. Conclusion

For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:


Security, Risk and the Biometric State

Geopolitical Reason and the Threat Against Europe

Benjamin J. Muller, King’s University College at University of Western Ontario, Canada

This book examines a series of questions associated with the increasing application and implications of biometrics in contemporary everyday life.

In the wake of the events of 9/11, the reliance on increasingly sophisticated and invasive technologies across a burgeoning field of applications has accelerated, giving rise to the term ’biometric state’. This book explores how these ‘virtual borders’ are created and the effect they have upon the politics of citizenship and immigration, especially how they contribute to the treatment of citizens as suspects. Finally and most importantly, this text argues that the rationale of ’governing through risk’ facilitates pre-emptory logics, a negligent attitude towards ’false positives’, and an overall proliferation of borders and ubiquitous risk, which becomes integral to contemporary everyday life, far beyond the confined politics of national borders and frontiers.

From Clausewitz to Network-Centric Warfare

Contestation over Environmental Change

August 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-67106-4: £80.00

Governing Borders and Bodies

Reimagining War in the 21st Century

The Ethical Subject of Security J. Peter Burgess, PRIO, Oslo, Norway While critical security studies largely concentrates on objects of security, this book focuses on the subject position from which ‘securitization’ and other security practices take place. Selected Contents: Introduction: Security as Ethos and Episteme Part 1: Theory of the Ethical Subject 1. Nietzsche, or Value and the Subject of Security 2. Foucault, or Genealogy of the Ethical Subject 3. Lacan, or the Ethical Subject of the Real 4. Butler, or the Precarious Subject Part 2: Holding Together 5. Identity, Community and Security 6. Insecurity of the European Community of Values 7. Psychoanalysis of the National Thing 8. Security Clture and the New Ethos of Risk 9. Intolerable Insecurity Part 3: Geopolitical Rationalities of Europe 10. The Modernity of a Cosmopolitan Europe 11. The New Nomos of Europe 12. A Federalist Europe between Economic and Cultural Value 13. Justice in Political, Legal and Moral Community 14. War in the Name of Europe and the Legitimacy of Collective Violence. Conclusion: The Many Faces of European Security February 2011: 234 x 156: 248pp Hb: 978-0-415-49982-8: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-49981-1: £25.99 eBook: 978-0-203-82894-6 For more information, visit:

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Security, Risk, and the Biometric State: Governing Borders and Bodies 2. Are You Who You Say You Are? Biometrics and the Management of Borders and Bodies 3. Suspect(ing) Biometrics: Identity, Security and National ID Cards 4. Catastrophe, Narrative, and the Failure of Imagination 5. Securing the Political Imagination: Popular Culture, The Security Dispositif and the Biometric State 6. A North American Biometric State? 7. Securitizing the Global Norm of Identity: Biometrics and Homo Sacer in Fallujah. Conclusion 2010: 234 x 156: 160pp Hb: 978-0-415-48440-4: £80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-67009-8: £24.95 eBook: 978-0-203-85804-2 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:

The New Spatiality of Security Operational Uncertainty and the US Military in Iraq Caroline M. Croser, University of New South Wales at the Australian Defence Force Academy Series: Routledge Critical Security Studies 2010: 234 x 156: 184pp Hb: 978-0-415-56522-6: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84203-4 For more information, visit:


Territorial Disputes and Conflict Management The Art of Avoiding War Rongxing Guo Series: Routledge Studies in Security and Conflict Management This book examines the problems of boundary demarcation and its impact on territorial disputes, and offers techniques to manage and resolve the resulting conflicts. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Boundary, Territory, and War 2. Territorial Disputes: From Dormancy to Activation 3. Options for Territorial-Dispute Settlements 4. Engaging in Settlement Negotiations 5. The Art of Avoiding War. Epilogue. Bibliography September 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-68209-1: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-80296-0 For more information, visit:


i n t ernat ion al se curity


Routledge Global Security Studies Series Edited by Aaron Karp and Regina Karp, both at Old Dominion University, Norfolk, USA Global Security Studies is a series for cutting-edge books on international security. It emphasizes cutting-edge scholarship on the forces reshaping global security and the dilemmas facing decisionmakers the world over. The series stresses security issues relevant in many countries and regions, accessible to broad professional and academic audiences as well as to students, and enduring through explicit theoretical foundations. Forthcoming

A Perpetual Menace Nuclear Weapons and International Order William Walker, University of St. Andrews, UK Written by a leading scholar in the field of nuclear weapons and international relations, this book examines ‘the problem of order’ arising from the existence of weapons of mass destruction. This central problem of international order has its origins in the nineteenth century, when industrialization and the emergence of new sciences, technologies and administrative capabilities greatly expanded states’ abilities to inflict injury, ushering in the era of total war. It became acute in the mid-twentieth century, with the invention of the atomic bomb and the pre-eminent role ascribed to nuclear weapons during the Cold War. It became more complex after the end of the Cold War, as power structures shifted, new insecurities emerged, prior ordering strategies were called into question, and as technologies relevant to weapons of mass destruction became more accessible to non-state actors as well as states. William Walker explores how this problem is conceived by influential actors, how they have tried to fashion solutions in the face of many predicaments, and why those solutions have been deemed effective and ineffective, legitimate and illegitimate, in various times and contexts. Selected Contents: Preface 1. Introduction: The Problems of Nuclear Order and its Understanding 2. The Awakenings, 1938-46 3. Sculpting an Order out of Disorder: Nuclear Weapons and the Cold War 4. Two Crises of Nuclear Order, 1973-1986 5. A Fortuitous Sequence of Events: The Nuclear Order’s Consolidation, 1986-1997 6. The Shifting and Expanding Problems of Nuclear Order, 1997-2008: The Regular and Irregular Domains of Interaction 7. Back to the Pursuit of Nuclear Disarmament: A Futile Endeavour? 8. Conclusion: Reflections on the Evolution of Nuclear Order. Bibliography October 2011: 234 x 156: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-42105-8: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-42106-5: £24.99 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy



Why Did the United States Invade Iraq?

Arms Control and Missile Proliferation in the Middle East

Edited by Jane K. Cramer, University of Oregon, USA and A. Trevor Thrall, University of Michigan, Dearborn, USA

Edited by Bernd W. Kubbig and Sven-Eric Fikenscher, both at Peace Research Institute, Frankfurt, Germany

This volume presents the best scholarly thinking about why the U.S. invaded Iraq in 2003, a pivotal event in modern US foreign policy and international politics.

This edited volume provides a comprehensive, systematic and innovative analysis of the missile threat/proliferation issue in the Middle East.

The years since the announcement of the invasion of Iraq by George W. Bush in 2003 have revealed that the WMD threat was not the urgent threat the administration declared and that Saddam Hussein was not involved with Al Qaeda or 9/11. At least in part because of these revelations a majority of Americans (not to mention a majority of people globally) now believe that invading Iraq was a mistake and that the Bush administration misled the public to build support for war. Lending credibility to public doubts is a growing number of critical scholarly analyses and in-depth journalistic investigations about the invasion, which mostly suggests that the administration was not fully candid about its reasons for wanting to move against Iraq when it did.

Selected Contents: Foreword Egon Bahr, Shlomo Ben-Ami, Hans Blix, Boutros-Boutros Ghali, Felipe González, Thorvald Stoltenberg and Heidemarie Wieczorek-Zeul. Introduction: Coping Constructively with the Missile Threat in the Middle East: The Central Role of Cooperative Security and Incremental Arms Reductions Bernd W. Kubbig. Regional WMD Disarmament Efforts: Understanding Past Experiences Emily B. Landau and Dalia Dassa Kaye. New Need for Security Cooperation: The Destabilizing Role of Missiles Dennis M. Gormley and Colin P. Clarke. Taking Overall Military Asymmetries into Account: Objections against Missile Disarmament Bernd W. Kubbig, Mohamed Noman Galal, Michael Haas, Murhaf Jouejati, Sabahat Khan, Ahmed Saif, and Mahmood Sariolghalam. Taking Israel’s Security Interests into Account: Israel’s Deterrence Policy in a Changing Strategic Environment Uri Bar-Joseph. Offering Nuclear Control Measures as a Prerequisite for the Gradual Arms Reductions Process Towards a Missile Free Zone Giorgio Franceschini, Gawdat Bahgat, Avner Cohen, and Patricia Lewis. Taking the Ambivalent Role of External Actors as Arms Suppliers and Norm-builders into Consideration Sven-Eric Fikenscher, Sameh Aboul-Enein, Gülden Ayman, Anton Khlopkov, and Hui Zhang. The Need for Adequate Verification Issue: Concepts, Requirements, and Technologies Jürgen Scheffran, Bharat Gopalaswamy, Bernd W. Kubbig, Dennis M. Gormley, Uzi Rubin, and Hartwig Spitzer. Outlining Disarming Strategies I: The Case of Hamas Margret Johannsen, Ghassan Khatib and Anat Kurz. Outlining Disarming Strategies II: The Case of Hezbollah Judith Harik and Walid Abu-Dalbouh. (Re)assuring Confidence-building and Transparency: The Expansion of the UN Register of Conventional Weapons Sven-Eric Fikenscher, Bernd W. Kubbig,Patrick Flamm, and Lina Golob. Restrictions and Incentives for Containing Missile Proliferation: Tackling Constructively the Missile Technology Control Regime (MTCR) and the Hague Code of Conduct (HCoC) Dinshaw Mistry and Mark Smith. Caps and Bans: Missile Limitation Regimes and the Doubtful Role of Missile Defence Martin Senn, Jürgen Altmann, Bernd W. Kubbig, Hans-Joachim Schmidt, and Oleg Shulga. Research Findings and New Perspectives Bernd W. Kubbig.

Thus the question remains: Why did the United States invade Iraq? The central purpose of this volume is to spur and inform the debate by organizing the best recent thinking of foreign policy and international relations experts about why the U.S. invaded Iraq. Taking a broad range of arguments – about the role of ideas, Israel, and oil, in partcular – and organizing them around a coherent structure, the book highlights current areas of agreement and disagreement, and allows scholars directly to talk to each other. The volume will be of much interest to students of the Iraq War, US foreign and security policy, strategic studies, Middle Eastern politics and IR/Security Studies in general. Selected Contents: Preface: The Causes of War Stephen Van Evera 1. Introduction: Hypotheses on Iraq War: Reflections from a Survey of Experts Jane K. Cramer and A. Trevor Thrall 2. WMD, the Stated Motive: Pretext or Sincere Belief? Robert Jervis Part 1: The Role of Ideas in the Iraq Decision 3. Ideas and Alternatives in American Grand Strategy, 2000-04 Colin Dueck 4. The Road to Baghdad: Ideas and Intellectuals in Explanations of the Iraq War Andrew Flibbert Part 2: The Israel Lobby and the Neoconservatives 5. The Iraq War and the Israel Lobby Jerome Slater 6. Neoconservative Motives and Influence Michael Lind Part 3: Oil and Profits 7. A Motive Hiding in Plain Sight: War for Oil Michael Klare 8. Oil and the Iraq War John S. Duffield 9. The Myth of Neoconservative Power and Invading Iraq for Primacy and Profits Jane K. Cramer and Edward Duggan Part 4: Other Views of the Iraq War 10. Why Iraq? The View from Britain Jane M.O. Sharp August 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-78212-8: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-78213-5: £24.99 For more information, visit:

August 2011: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-60111-5: £80.00 For more information, visit:


Iran’s Nuclear Programme Strategic Implications, Negotiations and Solutions Edited by Joachim Krause, Kiel University, Germany This book examines the strategic implications of Iran’s nuclear programme, providing an inventory of the negotiations and a discussion of possible solutions to this pressing international security issue. October 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-68856-7: £80.00 For more information, visit:

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

i n te r n ati on al s e c uri t y


Causes and Consequences of Nuclear Proliferation Edited by Robert Rauchhaus, University of California, Santa Barbara, USA, Matthew Kroenig, Georgetown University, Washington, DC, USA and Erik Gartzke, University of California, San Diego, USA This book offers valuable insights into the causes and consequences of nuclear proliferation. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: The Causes and Consequences of Nuclear Proliferation Matthew Kroenig, Erik Gartzke and Robert Rauchhaus 2. International Nonproliferation: Why Delegate to the International Atomic Energy Agency? Robert Brown 3. Membership Has Its Privileges: Conventional Arms and Influence within the Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty Jennifer Erickson and Christopher Way 4. Importing the Bomb: Sensitive Nuclear Assistance and Nuclear Proliferation Matthew Kroenig 5. Taking a Walk on the Supply Side: The Determinants of Civilian Nuclear Cooperation Matthew Fuhrmann 6. A Bargaining Model of Nuclear Weapons Development and Disarmament Brett V. Benson and Quan Wen 7. Nuclear Politics: The Political Decision to Acquire, Sustain or Discard a Nuclear Arsenal James Wirtz 8. Bargaining, Nuclear Proliferation, and Interstate Disputes Erik Gartzke and Dong-Joon Jo 9. The Spread of Nuclear Weapons and International Conflict: Does Experience Matter? Michael Horowitz 10. Evaluating the Nuclear Peace Hypothesis: A Quantitative Approach Robert Rauchhaus 11. Winning with the Bomb Kyle Beardsley and Victor Asal 12. Risk Analysis of Nuclear Deterrence Martin Hellman 13. Nuclear Disarmament: Can Risk Analysis Inform the Debate? Paul Nelson 14. The Perils of Predicting Proliferation Alexander Montgomery and Scott Sagan April 2011: 234 x 156: 352pp Hb: 978-0-415-59833-0: £80.00 For more information, visit:


Disarmament Diplomacy and Human Security Regimes, Norms and Moral Progress in International Relations Denise Garcia, Northeastern University, Boston, USA This book assesses how progress in disarmament diplomacy in the last decade has improved human security. It examines moral and normative progress in international relations by investigating three cases: the Arms Trade Treaty (ATT); the ban on cluster munitions; and the international regime on small arms and light weapons. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Norms: Progress and Evolution in the Conduct of International Affairs 2. The Arms Trade Treaty 3. Small Arms and Light Weapons Regimes and the Geneva Declaration on Armed Violence 4. Banning Cluster Munitions. Conclusion February 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-58003-8: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83070-3 For more information, visit:

Great Powers and Strategic Stability in the 21st Century Competing Visions of World Order Edited by Graeme P. Herd, Geneva Centre for Security Policy, Switzerland 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-56054-2: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86582-8 For more information, visit:

International Conflict in the Asia-Pacific Patterns, Consequences and Management Jacob Bercovitch, University of Canterbury, New Zealand and Mikio Oishi 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-58004-5: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84708-4 For more information, visit:


Regional Powers and Security Orders A Theoretical Framework Robert Stewart-Ingersoll, Grand Valley State University, MI, USA and Derrick Frazier, University of Illinois, Urbana-Champaign, USA This book presents a new theoretical framework through which to understand the role of regional powers in creating and maintaining regional security orders. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction to the Regional Powers and Security Framework 2. Regional Security Orders 3. Regional Structures and Regional Power Capabilities 4. Regional Leadership 5. Regional Custodianship 6. Regional Protection 7. Status Quo vs. Revisionist Orientations 8. Unilateralist vs. Multilateralist Orientations 9. Proactive vs. Reactive Orientations 10. Incorporating the Global System Level July 2011: 234 x 156: 296pp Hb: 978-0-415-56919-4: £80.00 For more information, visit:

The Globalization of NATO Nuclear Disarmament and Non-Proliferation Towards a Nuclear-Weapon-Free World? Sverre Lodgaard, Norwegian Institute of International Affairs, Oslo, Norway 2010: 234 x 156: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-58634-4: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84259-1 For more information, visit:

Nuclear Energy and Global Governance Ensuring Safety, Security and Non-Proliferation Trevor Findlay, Carleton University, Canada 2010: 234 x 156: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-49364-2: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83450-3 For more information, visit:

Intervention, Security and Identity Veronica M. Kitchen, University of Waterloo, Canada 2010: 234 x 156: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-57017-6: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84948-4 For more information, visit:

Unipolarity and World Politics A Theory and its Implications Birthe Hansen, University of Copenhagen, Denmark 2010: 234 x 156: 160pp Hb: 978-0-415-47820-5: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83230-1 For more information, visit:

US Strategy in Africa AFRICOM, Terrorism and Security Challenges Edited by David J. Francis, University of Bradford, UK

Nuclear Proliferation and International Order Challenges to the Non-Proliferation Treaty Edited by Olav Njølstad, Norwegian Nobel Institute, Oslo, Norway 2010: 234 x 156: 304pp Hb: 978-0-415-58098-4: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84482-3 For more information, visit:

2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-48510-4: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85530-0 For more information, visit:


Reconceptualising Deterrence Towards Rationality in Enduring Rivalries Elli Lieberman, Missouri State University, USA December 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-68213-8: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:


i n t ernat ion al se curity



Human Security and International Law The Role of the United Nations Emma McClean, University of Westminster, London, UK Series: Routledge Studies in Human Security This book evaluates how far the UN has embraced human security as a policy agenda and explores its relevance for international law. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Mapping Human Security 2. We the Peoples: Human Security in Historical Perspective 3. Towards a Life in Larger Freedom: Human Security and the UN 4. Securing Humanity: A Role for UN Human Rights Law 5. Human Security, Intervention and the Responsibility to Protect 6. Human Security, the Rule of Law and the UN Institutional Architecture. Conclusion: Towards a UN Human Security Framework? Bibliography December 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-67851-3: £80.00 For more information, visit:


National, European and Human Security From Co-existence to Convergence Edited by Mary Kaldor, Centre for Global Governance, London School of Economics, London, UK and Mary Martin, Centre for Global Governance, London School of Economics, UK Series: Routledge Studies in Human Security Employing a discourse-based methodology, this book examines European national security strategies to see how the strategy in question relates to an emerging common European or global vision of security, on the one hand, and, on the other, to human security ideas. Selected Contents: Foreword Narcis Serra Introduction Mary Kaldor and Mary Martin 1. Human Security, British National Security Discourse and (Counter-)Terrorism: A ‘Force for Good’? Natasha Marhia 2. Human Security in Spain’s Strategic Thinking: Getting Close but Not That Close Gemma Collantes Celador 3. Development of German Security Strategy after the End of the Cold War Thomas Bauer 4. A Human Security Perspective on the French Security Policy Geneviève Schméder 5. Human Security in the Security Policy of the Czech Republic Miloš Balabán, Vladimír Karaffa, Antonín Rašek and Libor Stejskal 6. Swedish Security Strategy in the 21st Century: What Role for Human Security? Arita Holmberg 7. Russia’s Strategic Use of Human Security: Lone Wolves or Part of the Pack? Andrei Makarychev and Nizhny Novgorod 8. Conclusion Mary Kaldor and Mary Martin. Bibliography

Routledge Studies in Intervention and Statebuilding Series Edited by David Chandler, University of Westminster, UK The series publishes monographs and edited collections analysing a wide range of policy interventions associated with statebuilding. It asks broader questions about the dynamics, purposes and goals of this interventionist framework and assesses the impact of externally-guided policy-making. New

Critical Perspectives on the Responsibility to Protect Interrogating Theory and Practice Edited by Philip Cunliffe, University of Kent, UK This edited volume critically examines the widely supported doctrine of the ’Responsibility to Protect’, and investigates the claim that it embodies progressive values in international politics. Selected Contents: Introduction Philip Cunliffe Part 1: The Responsibility to Protect: History and Politics 2. The Skeleton in the Closet: The Responsibility to Protect in History Noam Chomsky 3. Understanding the Gap between the Promise and Reality of the Responsibility to Protect David Chandler 4. The Responsibility to Protect and the End of the Western Century Tara McCormack Part 2: The Responsibility to Protect: International Law and Order 5. A Dangerous Duty: Power, Paternalism and the Global ‘Duty of Care’ Philip Cunliffe 6. Responsibility to Peace: A Critique of R2P Mary Ellen O’Connell 7. The Responsibility to Protect and International Law Aidan Hehir Part 3: The Responsibility to Protect in Africa 8. The Irresponsibility of the Responsibility to Protect in Africa Adam Branch 9. Responsibility to Protect or Right to Punish? Mahmood Mamdani March 2011: 234 x 156: 160pp Hb: 978-0-415-58623-8: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83429-9 For more information, visit:

Kosovo, Intervention and Statebuilding


Political Economy of Statebuilding Power after Peace Edited by Mats Berdal, King’s College London, UK and Dominik Zaum, University of Reading, UK This volume examines and evaluates the impact of international statebuilding interventions on the political economy of post-conflict countries over the past 20 years. Selected Contents: Introduction Mats Berdal and Dominik Zaum 1. Iraq Toby Dodge 2. Kosovo Dominik Zaum and Verena Knaus 3. East Timor Anthony Goldstone 4. Afghanistan Antonio Giustozzi 5. Burundi Peter Uvin and Leanne Bayer 6. Haiti Robert Muggah 7. Sierra Leone Funmi Olonisakin 8. Sudan Peter Woodward and Atta al-Batahani 9. Georgia Neil MacFarlane 10. Macedonia Kristof Bender 11. Constitutional Design Oisin Tansey 12. Electoral Processes Benjamin Reilly 13. Informal Actors Christine Cheng 14. Corruption and Organised Crime Michael Pugh 15. Regulating Trade in Conflict Commodities Thorsten Benner and Ricardo Soares Oliviera 16. The International Financial Institutions Susan L. Woodward 17. The United Nations Mats Berdal 18. Regional Approaches to Statebuilding I: The European Union Richard Caplan and Spyros Economides 19. Regional Approaches to Statebuilding II: The African Union and ECOWAS Kwesi Aning and Naila Salihu November 2011: 246 x 174: 368pp Hb: 978-0-415-60478-9: £85.00 For more information, visit:


Statebuilding and Police Reform The Freedom of Security Barry J. Ryan, University of Keele, UK This book explores how and why police reform became an international phenomenon in the era of statebuilding that followed the end of the Cold War. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Freedom, Within Reason 2. Securing Reasonable Force 3. An Exceptional Evolution 4. A Policing Machine: The UN 5. The Logos of EU Policing Power 6. OSCE and Policing Power 7. Constellating a Security Sector. Conclusion March 2011: 234 x 156: 200pp Hb: 978-0-415-55833-4: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86774-7 For more information, visit:

The International Community and the Transition to Independence

November 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-68079-0: £80.00

Edited by Aidan Hehir, University of Westminster, UK

For more information, visit:

2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-56167-9: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86179-0 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

i n te r n ati on al s e c uri t y



Statebuilding and State-Formation

Statebuilding in Afghanistan

A New Framework of Analysis

Edited by Nik Hynek, Institute of International Relations, Prague, Czech Republic and Péter Marton, Corvinus University of Budapest, Hungary

Edited by Berit Bliesemann de Guevara, Helmut Schmidt University, Hamburg, Germany This book focuses on the social processes surrounding statebuilding and explores what actually happens when conscious efforts at statebuilding ‘meet’ social contexts, and are transformed into daily routines. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: The Limits of Statebuilding and the Analysis of State-Formation Berit Bliesemann de Guevara Part 1: Questioning the Ontology of Statebuilding from a State-Formation Perspective 2. Coupled Arenas: Why Statebuilding is so Difficult Klaus Schlichte and Alex Veit 3. State-Formation in Tajikistan in the Global Context: Failed State or Failed Analysis? John Heathershaw 4. What you see is what you get: Analytical Lenses and the Limitations of Post-Conflict Statebuilding in Sierra Leone Christof Kurz Part 2: State-Formation, Violence and Political Economy 5. The Monopolisation of Violence as a Risk-Prone Strategy – Externalising Western Security Concerns in Afghanistan Florian P. Kühn 6. Reforming the Police in the Balkans. On Bureaucratic Fields and Practices in International Statebuilding Stephan Hensell 7. Networks of Profit in Georgia’s Autonomous Regions: Challenges to Statebuilding Stacy Closson 8. The Political Economy of State-Formation in Kosovo Jens Stilhoff Sörensen Part 3: Governance, Legitimacy and Practice in Statebuilding and State-Formation 9. The Paradox of Intermediary Rule Alex Veit 10. ’A Feeble Attempt at Singing the National Anthem Quickly Died’: Statebuilding versus State Formation in East Timor Lee Jones 11. Outsiders Inside the State. Post-Conflict Liberia between Trusteeship and Partnership Louise Andersen 12. ’Thanks, But No Thanks’: Self-Led State Formation and International Non-Intervention in the Creation of Somaliland Rebecca Richards Part 4: The ‘International Self’: Statebuilders’ Backgrounds and Subjectivities 13. The State We Are(n’t) In: Liminal Subjectivity in Aid Workers’ Autobiographies Lisa Smirl 14. The International Self in Eastern Congo Kai Koddenbrock 15. The ‘Statebuilding Habitus’: International Civil Servants in Kosovo Berit Bliesemann de Guevara and Catherine Goetze 16. Conclusion September 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-67697-7: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Multinational Contributions to Reconstruction

This edited volume maps and theorizes NATO-ISAF’s multi-national contribution to peacebuilding and reconstruction in Afghanistan. It answers key questions through a series of case studies which together form a comparative study of national contributions to the multilateral mission in Afghanistan. Selected Contents: Introduction: What Makes Coalitions S/tick? 1. Operation Herrick: The British Campaign in Helmand 2. Germany and Regional Command-North: ISAF’s Weakest Link? 3. Between Expectations and Reality: The Dutch Engagement in Uruzgan 4. France in Kapisa: A Combined Approach to State-Building 5. Chapter on Canada 6. PRT Activity in Afghanistan: The Australian Experience 7. The New Zealand PRT Experience in Bamyan Province: Assessing Political Legitimacy and Operational Achievements 8. A Peace Nation in the War on Terror: The Norwegian Engagement in Afghanistan 9. Finland’s ISAF Experience: Rewarding, Challenging and on the Edges of the Politically Feasible 10. Hungary’s Involvement in Afghanistan: Proudly Going through the Motions? 11. From Followers to Leaders as ’Coalition Servants’: The Polish Engagement in Afghanistan 12. Post-Decisional and Alliance-Dependent: The Czech Engagement in Logar 13. Turkey’s ISAF Mission: A Maverick with Strategic Depth 14. Trials and Tribulations of the Lithuanian Participation in the NATO ISAF Mission July 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-62049-9: £80.00

Routledge Studies in Liberty and Security Series Edited by Didier Bigo, Sciences Po, Paris, France, Elspeth Guild and R.B.J. Walker, University of Victoria, Canada This book series will establish connections between critical security studies and International Relations, surveillance studies, criminology, law and human rights, political sociology and political theory. To analyse the boundaries of the concepts of liberty and security, the practices which are enacted in their name will be at the heart of the series. These investigations address contemporary questions informed by history, political theory and a sense of what constitutes the contemporary international order.

Conflict, Security and the Reshaping of Society The Civilization of War

For more information, visit:

Edited by Alessandro Dal Lago and Salvatore Palidda, both at Universita di Genova, Italy


2010: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-57034-3: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84631-5

Violence in Post-Conflict Societies Remarginalization, Remobilizers and Relationships Anders Themnér, Uppsala University, Sweden This book compares post-civil war societies to look at the presence or absence of organized violence, analysing why some ex-combatants return to organised violence and others do not. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Once a Soldier, Always a Soldier? 2. Remarginalisation, Remobilisers and Relationships: Analytical Framework 3. Cases, Concepts and Questions: Research Design 4. The Republic of Congo 5. Sierra Leone 6. Probing the Cases: Comparative Analysis 7. Wrapping it All Up: Conclusions May 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-57922-3: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81459-8 For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:

Mapping Transatlantic Security Relations The EU, Canada and the War on Terror Edited by Mark B. Salter, University of Ottawa 2010: 234 x 156: 320pp Hb: 978-0-415-57861-5: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85067-1 For more information, visit:

Security, Law and Borders At the Limits of Liberties Tugba Basaran, University of Kent, Belgium 2010: 234 x 156: 160pp Hb: 978-0-415-57025-1: £75.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84192-1 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:


i n t ernat ion al se curity


War, Peace and Progress in the 21st Century


The Social and Global Structuration of the EU

Development, Violence and Insecurity

Selected Essays

Edited by Niilo Kauppi and Mikael Rask Madsen

Edited by Mark T. Berger, Naval Postgraduate School, Monterey, USA and University of British Columbia, Canada and Heloise Weber, University of Queensland, Brisbane, Australia


Transnational Power Elites This book argues that European Union institutional mechanics and the EU as a political unit cannot be properly understood without taking into account the elites that make the policy decisions. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: European Power Elites and Their Consequences Part 1: European Power Elites: Social Positions and Socio-Professional Structures 2. Brokering Power in the EU: European Politics in the Global Field of Power 3. European Central Bankers in the European Field of Power 4. Commissioners: A New Power Class? 5. Security Professionals. Exporting the Fundamentals of State Power to the European Level 6. Lawyers. Bringing Structure to an Unstructured Terrain 7. European Diplomats: Inventing a Social Group Part 2: Institutional and Symbolic Consequences 8. Comitology: Sociology of a New Form of Negotiation 9. The Power of Cultural Models: Welfare State Reform in the EU 10. European Treaty-Making as a Semi-Autonomous Process: Revisiting the Drafting of the European Charter of Fundamental Rights 11. Normative Power in the Construction of Europe 12. Explanation, Agency and the European Union in the Political Imagination of Citizens 13. Rhetorical Innovation and Institutional Location: The Case of European Parliamentarians. Epilogue 14. Europe as Transnational Society?. Bibliography December 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-66524-7: £80.00 For more information, visit:


Justice and Security in the 21st Century Liberty, Human Rights and the Rule of Law Edited by Synnove Ugelvik, University of Oslo, Norway and Barbara Hudson, University of Central Lancashire, UK This book examines the question of whether justice or security is the primary virtue of 21st-century Western society. Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Situating the Subjects of Security Part 2: Criminalization, Control and Security Part 3: The New Balancing of Justice and Security Part 4: Changing Structures and Concepts of Legitimacy

Series: ThirdWorlds This book brings together contributions that revisit the dynamics and complexities of the history of war and peace in relation to the pursuit of progress. Selected Contents: 1. War, Peace and Progress: Conflict, Development, (in)Security and Violence in the 21st century Mark T. Berger and Heloise Weber Part 1: The ‘Crisis’ of the Nation-State 2. The Failure of State Building and the Promise of State Failure: Reinterpreting the Security– Development Nexus in Haiti Kamil Shah 3. State Building or Crisis Management? A Critical Analysis of the Social and Political Implications of the Regional Assistance Mission to Solomon Islands Shahar Hameiri 4. What Sustains ‘Internal Wars’? The Dynamics of Violent Conflict and State Weakness in Sudan Benjamin R. Maitre 5. Realities of War: Global Development, Growing Destructiveness and the Coming of a New Dark Age? John Arquilla 6. The Logic of Warlord Politics Gordon H. McCormick and Lindsay Fritz 7. ‘Sons of the Soil’ and Contemporary State Making: Autochthony, Uncertainty and Political Violence in Africa Kevin C. Dunn 8. Violence and Victory: Guerrilla Warfare, ‘Authentic Self-Affirmation’ and the Overthrow of the Colonial State Sebastian Kaempf Part 2: The ‘Crisis’ of Global Development 9. Displacing Insecurity in a Divided World: Global Security, International Development and the Endless Accumulation of Capital Marcus Taylor 10. The Pedagogy of Global Development: The Promotion of Electoral Democracy and the Latin Americanisation of Europe Teivo Teivainen 11. Global Development and Human (In)Security: Understanding the Rise of the Rajah Solaiman Movement and Balik Islam in the Philippines Douglas A. Borer, Sean F. Everton and Moises M. Nayve, Jr. 12. The Rise of a Global God-Image? Spiritual Internationalists, the International Left and the Idea of Human Progress Sebastian Job 13. Securing the State and Developing Social Insecurities: The Securitisation of Citizenship in Contemporary Colombia Cristina Rojas 14. Contemporary Contradictions of the Global Development Project: Geopolitics, Global Ecology and the ‘Development Climate’ Philip McMichael 15. Human (In) Security and Development in the 21st Century Heloise Weber and Mark T. Berger 2010: 246 x 174: 296pp Hb: 978-0-415-58859-1: £85.00 For more information, visit:

Liberal Peace Michael W. Doyle, Columbia University, New York, USA Comprising essays by Prof. Michael W. Doyle, Liberal Peace examines the special significance of liberalism for international relations. These essays shed light on one of the leading debates in the field: whether democracies should and do maintain peace with each other. The volume begins by outlining the two legacies of liberalism in international relations - how and why liberal states have maintained peace among themselves while at the same time being prone to making war against non-liberal states. The essays that follow both engage with international relations theory and explore the policy implications of liberal internationalism. Engaging theory, the author highlights differences among liberal imperialism, liberal pacifism and Kant’s liberal internationalism. He also orients liberal theory within the panoply of international relations theory. Exploring policy implications, the author focuses on the value of the strategic inter-liberal democratic community and how it can be protected, preserved and enlarged, and whether liberals can go beyond a separate peace to a more integrated global democracy. Finally, the volume considers when force should and should not be used to promote national security and human security across borders, and argues against President Bush’s policy of ’transformative’ interventions. The concluding essay engages with scholarly critics of the liberal democratic peace. This book will be of great interest to students of international relations, foreign policy, political philosophy and security studies. Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Kantian Theory of Liberalism 1. Kant, Liberal Legacies, and Foreign Affairs: Part I (1983) 2. Kant, Liberal Legacies, and Foreign Affairs: Part II (1983) 3. Liberalism and World Politics (1986) Part 2: Liberalism in Theoretical Context 4. Politics and Grand Strategy (1993) 5. The Voice of the People: Political Theorists on the International Implications of Democracy (1994) 6. One World, Many Peoples: International Justice in John Rawls’s The Law of Peoples (2006) Part 3: Liberal Grand Strategies: Ethics and Politics 7. An International Liberal Community (1992) 8. A More Perfect Union? The Liberal Peace and the Challenge of Globalization (2000) 9. A Few Words on Mill, Walzer and Nonintervention (2009) Part 4: Conclusion 10. Conclusion: Liberal Peace revisited (2010) August 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-78174-9: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-78175-6: £23.99 For more information, visit:

December 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-68727-0: £80.00 For more information, visit:


Advanced Peace Research Leaving Traces, Selected Articles by J. David Singer J. David Singer, University of Michigan, USA

Professor J. David Singer has been arguably the most important influence on quantitative research into the causes and attributes of war. His pioneering work on the Correlates of War project at the University of Michigan and his numerous books and articles have inspired generations of researchers in the fields of international relations, conflict analysis, security studies and peace science. This collection is a carefully selected overview of his work which provides not only an excellent introduction to his considerable methodological, theoretical and empirical contributions but also an intellectual history of developments in the field of international realtions which are reflected in Professor Singer’s work. This is essential reading for all those with an interest in the use of quantitative methods in social science, the changing nature of the study of international relations and the analysis of war and peace. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: The Making of a Peace Researcher 2. Earlier Evaluations of National Security Policy 3. Public Dove but Policy Wonk 4. Querulous and Suggestive Interventions 5. Conceptual and Methodological Insights 6. From Conventional Concepts to Operational Indicators 7. Scientific Research Payoffs 8. Sermons for the Next Generation December 2011: 234 x 156: 288pp • Hb: 978-0-415-77959-3: £85.00 • Pb: 978-0-415-77960-9: £26.99 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

in te r n ati on al s e c ur i ty

National Security Cultures


Patterns of Global Governance

Security Studies

Edited by Emil J. Kirchner, University of Essex, UK and James Sperling, University of Akron, USA

A Reader

‘The result of empirical research conducted by an impressive international team of scholars, this is a rigorous and systematic examination of national security cultures across a wide swath of the world. The authors follow a common framework in an exemplary collaborative project which reveals important insights into the fundamental question of the relationship between culture and security policy and the extent to which security concepts in the West can be transferred to other regions.‘ – Stephen F. Szabo, Transatlantic Academy, USA Selected Contents: 1. National Security Cultures, Technologies of Public Goods Supply and Security Governance James Sperling Part 1: Europe 2. France: A Departure from Exceptionalism Bastien Irondelle and Sophie Besancenot 3. Germany: The Continuity of Change Sebastian Harnisch and Raimund Wolf 4. Italy: Hard Tests and Soft Responses Paolo Foradori and Paolo Rosa 5. United Kingdom: How Much Continuity? How Much Change? Martin Smith 6. European Union: Moving Towards a European Security Culture? Emil J. Kirchner Part 2: North America 7. Canada: Facing up to Regional Security Challenges Osvaldo Croci 8. Mexico: Current and Future Security Challenges Roberto Dominguez 9. United States: A full Spectrum Contributor to Governance? James Sperling Part 3: Euroasia 10. China: Power, Complementarity and Reflexivity Anthony Coates 11. Japan: From Deterrence to Prevention Haruhiro Fukui 12. Russia: A Global Power? Derek Averre 13. Conclusion: Structure, Agency and the Barriers to Global Security Han Dorussen, Emil J. Kirchner and James Sperling 2010: 234 x 156: 336pp Hb: 978-0-415-77742-1: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-77743-8: £28.99 eBook: 978-0-203-85061-9 For more information, visit:

Edited by Christopher W. Hughes and Yew Meng Lai, both at University of Warwick, UK

This reader brings together key contributions from many of the leading scholars in the field, offering students an informed overview of the most significant work in security studies.

The editors chart the development of the key theoretical and empirical debates in security studies in the Cold War and post-Cold War periods, introducing the ideas of the most influential ‘past masters’ and contemporary thinkers on security in the UK, US and elsewhere. The book has a substantial critical introduction exploring the development of security studies, as well as introductory essays that provide an overview of each section, highlighting clearly how the readings fit together. Suggestions for further reading and key questions for discussion are also included. Selected Contents: Part 1: What is Security? Introduction 1.1 National Security as an Ambiguous Symbol Arnold Wolfers 1.2 Redefining Security Richard Ullman 1.3 The National Security Problem in International Relations Barry Buzan 1.4 The Concept of Security David Baldwin 1.5 Security and Emancipation Ken Booth 1.6 Feminism and Security J. Ann Tickner 1.7 The Third World and Security Studies Amitav Acharya 1.8 Redefining Security (2) Jessica Tuchman Matthews 1.9 Human Security Roland Paris 1.10 The Renaissance of Security Studies Stephen M. Walt 1.11 Securitisation Ole Waever Part 2: Security Paradigms Introduction 2.1 The Nemesis of Utopianism E.H. Carr 2.2 A Realist Theory of International Politics Hans J. Morgenthau 2.3 The Concept of Order in World Politics Hedley Bull 2.4 Anarchic Orders and Balances of Power Kenneth N. Waltz 2.5 Cooperation Under the Security Dilemma Robert Jervis 2.6 The False Promise of International Institutions John J. Mearsheimer 2.7 Economics and the Moral Case for War Norman Angell 2.8 Neoliberal Institutionalism Robert Keohane 2.9 Democratic Peace Michael W. Doyle 2.10 Neo-Kantian Perspective Bruce Russett 2.11 The Social Construction of Power Politics Alexander Wendt 2.12 Norms, Identity and National Security Thomas U. Berger Part 3: Security Dimensions and Issues Introduction 3.1 Nuclear Deterrence Ned Lebow and Janice Gross Stein 3.2 Arms Races Barry Buzan and Eric Herring 3.3 Nuclear Proliferation Scott Sagan 3.4 New Military Conflict Lawrence Freedman 3.5 Technology and War Michael O’Hanlon 3.6 Resources and Conflict Thomas Homer-Dixon 3.7 Migration and Security Myron Weiner 3.8 Transnational Crime and Security Phil Williams 3.9 AIDS/HIV and Security P.W. Singer 3.10 Economics and Security Jonathan Kirshner Part 4: Security Frameworks and Actors Introduction 4.1 The Long Peace John Lewis Gaddis 4.2 The Unipolar Illusion Christopher Layne 4.3 Alliance Politics Glenn Snyder 4.4. Alliance Futures Stephen M. Walt 4.5 Multilateralism John Gerard Ruggie 4.6 Regimes Robert Jervis 4.7 Security Communities Emanuel Adler 4.8 Interventionism Adam Roberts 4.9 Economic Sanctions Robert A. Pape 4.10 Private Military Companies David Shearer Part 5: The Future of Security Introduction 5.1 Security in the Twenty First Century Barry Buzan 5.2 Instability in Europe? John J. Mearsheimer 5.3 Security Dilemmas in East Asia? Thomas J. Christensen 5.4 Structural Realism Redux Kenneth N. Waltz 5.5 Security and Global Transformation Ken Booth 5.6 Globalisation and Security Victor D. Cha 5.7 Terrorism Walter Laqueur 5.8 The War on Terrorism Michael Howard February 2011: 246 x 174: 472pp Hb: 978-0-415-32600-1: £100.00 Pb: 978-0-415-32601-8: £27.99 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:

p e ac e a n d c on f l ict s tu d i e s

Peace and Conflict Studies Cass Series on Peacekeeping Series Edited by Michael Pugh, University of Bradford, UK This series examines all aspects of peacekeeping, from the political, operational and legal dimensions to the developmental and humanitarian issues that must be dealt with by all those involved with peacekeeping in the world today. Forthcoming

Corruption and Peacebuilding A Framework for Post-Conflict Environments Edited by Dominik Zaum, University of Reading, UK and Christine Cheng, Exeter College, Oxford, UK This volume brings together leading international scholars and practitioners to develop a framework for thinking about character and impact of corruption in peacebuilding environments, and examines them in the context of different case studies. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Key Themes in Peacebuilding and Corruption Christine Cheng, and Dominik Zaum Part 1: Conceptualising Corruption in Peacebuilding Contexts 2. Peacebuilding and Corruption Mark Philp 3. Corruption and Government Susan Rose-Ackerman 4. Corrupting Peace? Corruption, Peacebuilding, and Reconstruction Philip LeBillon Part 2: Case Studies 5. The Political Economy of Corruption in Bosnia and Herzegovina Michael Pugh and Boris Divjak 6. Adaptation, Compensation and Imposition: Paradigms for Purging the Bosnian Judiciary Per Bergling 7. AntiCorruption Efforts in Liberia: Are They Aimed at the Right Targets? Will Reno 8. Corrupting or Consolidating the Peace: The Drug Economy and Post-conflict Peacebuilding in Afghanistan Jonathan Goodhand 9. Reconstruction and Peace Building Under Extreme Adversity: The Problem of Pervasive Corruption in Iraq Robert Looney 10. The Nexus of Militarization and Corruption in Sri Lanka Zachariah Mampilly Part 3: Anti-Corruption Measures in Peacebuilding Contexts 11. Post-conflict Reconstruction, Legitimacy, and Anti-Corruption Commissions John Heilbrunn 12. Fighting Corruption After War: The Role of Local Civil Society Roberto Belloni 13. International Campaigns for Transparency: Leveraging EITI and PWYP for Broader Political Reforms Alexandra Gillies August 2011: 234 x 156: 304pp Hb: 978-0-415-62048-2: £80.00 For more information, visit:


p eace a nd con flict studies




Peace Operations and Organized Crime

Rethinking the Liberal Peace

Enemies or Allies?

Edited by Shahrbanou Tadjbakhsh, Sciences Po Center for Peace and Human Security, France

Edited by James Cockayne, Center on Global Counterterrorism Cooperation and Adam Lupel, International Peace Institute, New York, USA Peace operations are increasingly on the front line in the international community’s fight against organized crime; this book explores how, in some cases, peace operations and organized crime are clear enemies, while in others, they may become tacit allies. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Rethinking the Relationship between Peace Operations and Organized Crime James Cockayne and Adam Lupel 2. Framing the Issue: UN Responses to Corruption and Criminal Networks in Postconflict Settings Victoria K. Holt and Alix J. Boucher 3. Symbiosis between Peace Operations and Illicit Business in Bosnia Peter Andreas 4. Problems of Crime Fighting by ‘Internationals’ in Kosovo Cornelius Friesendorf 5. Understanding Criminality in West African Conflicts William Reno 6. Peace Operations and International Crime: The Case of Somalia Roland Marchal 7. Organized Crime, Illicit Power Structures, and Threatened Peace Processes: The Case of Guatemala Patrick Gavigan 8. Winning Haiti’s Protection Competition: Organized Crime and Peace Operations Past, Present, and Future James Cockayne 9. Counterinsurgents in the Poppy Fields: Drugs, Wars, and Crime in Afghanistan Vanda Felbab-Brown 10. Organized Crime and Corruption in Iraq Phil Williams 11. Closing the Gap between Peace Operations and Postconflict Insecurity: Towards a Violence Reduction Agenda Robert Muggah and Keith Krause 12. Conclusion: From Iron Fist to Invisible Hand – Peace Operations, Organized Crime, and Intelligent International Law Enforcement James Cockayne and Adam Lupel May 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-60170-2: £80.00 For more information, visit:


UN Peace Operations and Post-Conflict Reconstruction Learning Lessons From Haiti Eirin Mobekk, University of Bradford, UK This book looks at UN Peace Operations in Haiti and why they went so dramatically wrong first time around, resulting in much deep-seated conflict, in order that these lessons can be taken into account in future operations elsewhere. Selected Contents: 1. UN Peace Operations: An Overview 2. Haiti and the Need for Multilateral Interventions 3. Disarmament, Demobilisation and Reintegration (DDR) 4. Security Sector Reform 5. Justice and Reconciliation 6. External Democracy Promotion 7. Sustainable Economic Development 8. Conclusion December 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-48086-4: £80.00 For more information, visit:

External Models and Local Alternatives

This book presents a critical analysis of the liberal peace project and offers possible alternatives and models. Selected Contents: Introduction: Liberal Peace in Dispute Shahrbanou Tadjbakhsh Part 1: Theory and Critics of the Liberal Peace 1. Open Societies, Open Markets: Assumptions and Illusions Shahrbanou Tadjbakhsh 2. Becoming Liberal, Unbecoming Liberalism: Liberal-Local Hybridity via the Everyday as a Response to the Paradoxes of Liberal Peacebuilding Oliver P. Richmond 3. Peace, Self-Governance and International Engagement: From Neo-Colonial to Postcolonial Peacebuilding Kristoffer Lidén Part 2: Liberal Democracy 4. The Liberal Peace: Statebuilding, Democracy and Local Ownership David Chandler 5. Democracy and Security: A Shotgun Marriage? Robin Luckham 6. What’s Law got to do with it? The Role of Law in Post-Conflict Democratization and its (Flawed) Assumptions Michael Schoiswohl 7. No Such Thing as Cosmopolitanism: Field-dependent Consequences in International Administrative Governance and Criminal Justice Nicholas Dorn Part 3: Market Liberalism 8. Curing Strangeness in the Political Economy of Peacebuilding: Traces of Liberalism and Resistance Michael Pugh 9. Economic Dimensions of the Liberal Peace and its Implications for Conflict in Developing Countries Syed Mansoob Murshed Part 4: Case Studies 10. Reconstructing Post-2006 Lebanon: A Distorted Market Christine Sylva Hamieh and Roger Mac Ginty 11. Is Liberal Democracy Possible in Iraq? Amal Shlash and Patrick Tom 12. Liberal Peace and the Dialogue of the Deaf in Afghanistan Shahrbanou Tadjbakhsh Conclusion: Typologies and Modifications Proposed by Critical Approaches Shahrbanou Tadjbakhsh and Oliver P. Richmond March 2011: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-60055-2: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81905-0

Conflict, Development and Peacebuilding Series Edited by Keith Krause, Thomas Biersteker and Riccardo Bocco, all at Graduate Institute of International and Development Studies, Geneva, Switzerland This series publishes innovative research into the connections between insecurity and under-development in fragile states, and into situations of violence and insecurity more generally. It adopts a multidisciplinary approach to the study of a variety of issues, including the changing nature of contemporary armed violence (conflict), efforts to foster the conditions that prevent the outbreak or recurrence of such violence (development), and strategies to promote peaceful relations on the communal, societal and international level (peacebuilding). Forthcoming

Local and Global Dynamics of Peacebuilding Post-conflict Reconstruction in Sierra Leone Cubitt Christine, Bradford University, UK

For more information, visit:

This book explores the contradictions which emerge during international peacebuilding missions when the quest to build strong and legitimate government structures sidelines local priorities for building long-term peace.

Statebuilding and Justice Reform

Selected Contents: 1. History of the Conflict in Sierra Leone 2. The Arrival of Peace 3. Reform and the Politics of Intervention 4. Public Ownership of Public Goods 5. Popular Participation 6. The New State and its Citizens. Conclusion. Appendix. Bibliography

Post-Conflict Reconstruction in Afghanistan Matteo Tondini 2010: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-55894-5: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86578-1 For more information, visit:

October 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-66491-2: £75.00 For more information, visit:


Peacebuilding and Local Ownership Post-Conflict Consensus-Building Timothy Donais, York University, Toronto This book explores the meaning of local ownership in peacebuilding and examines the ways in which it has been, and could be, operationalized in post-conflict contexts. Selected Contents: 1. Making Sense of Local Ownership in Peacebuilding Contexts 2. The Liberal Peace and the Ownership Question 3. Elite Ownership: Elections and Beyond 4. Civil Society as Local Owner 5. Bosnia: Ownership through Imposition 6. Afghanistan: Peacebuilding, Political Culture, and the Limits of Social Engineering 7. Haiti: Ownership and the Political Economy of Peacebuilding 8. Conclusion December 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-58874-4: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

p e ac e an d c on f l ict s tu d i e s



The Peace In Between

Peace and Conflict Studies

Post-War Violence and Peacebuilding

A Reader

Edited by Mats Berdal, King’s College London, UK and Astri Suhrke, Chr. Michelsen Institute, Bergen, Norway

Edited by Charles Webel, University of New York in Prague and Jorgen Johansen

Selected Contents: 1. The Peace in Between Astri Suhrke Echoes from History 2. Violence and the Post-Conflict State in Historical Perspective: Spain 1936-1948 Michael Richards 3. Reconstruction and Violence Post-Bellum American South 1865-77 Michael Beaton Europe and the Middle East 4. Post-War Violence in Bosnia Mats Berdal, Gemma Collantes-Celador and Merima Zupcevic Buzadzic 5. Revenge and Reprisal in Kosovo Michael J. Boyle 6. Political Violence in Post-Civil War Lebanon Are Knudsen and Nasser Yassin 7. From Regime Change to Civil War: Violence in Post-Invasion Iraq Toby Dodge Asia 8. Armed Politics in Afghanistan Antonio Giustozzi 9. Warlordism: Three Biographies from Southeastern Afghanistan Kristian Berg Harpviken 10. Violence in Post-War Cambodia Sorpong Peu 11. Conflict and Violence in Post-Independence in East Timor Dionisio Babo-Soares Africa 12. Sexual Violence: The Case of Eastern Congo Ingrid Samset 13. The Political Economies of Violence in Post-war Liberia Torunn Wimpelmann Chaudhary 14. Violence, Denial and Fear in Post-Genocide Rwanda Trine Eide Latin America 15. The Multiple Forms of Violence in Post-War Guatemala John-Andrew McNeish and Oscar López Rivera Conclusions 16. Reflections on Post-War Violence and Peacebuilding Mats Berdal July 2011: : 368pp Hb: 978-0-415-60932-6: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-80892-4 For more information, visit:

The Political Economy of Peacemaking Achim Wennmann, Graduate Institute of International and Development Studies, Geneva, Switzerland 2010: 234 x 156: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-58626-9: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83517-3 For more information, visit:


Peacebuilding and Subjectivities of Peace Memory, Reconciliation and Healing Edited by Bruno Charbonneau and Genevieve Parent, both at Larentian University, Canada November 2011 Hb: 978-0-415-68364-7: £80.00 For more information, visit:

This Reader is a comprehensive and intensive introduction to the key works in the growing field of peace and conflict studies. The volume editors frame the discussion in an extensive introduction and provide short introductions to each section as well as suggestions for further reading and student questions. This book will be essential reading for students of peace and conflict studies and conflict resolution, and highly recommended for students of peace operations, peacebuilding, sociology, international security and IR in general. Selected Contents: Part 1: The Meanings and History of Peace; The Advent of Peace and Conflict Studies Part 2: The Meanings and Nature of Conflict Part 3: The History of Peace and Conflict Part 4: Conflict Management, Resolution, and Transformation Part 5: Nonviolent Action and Social Change Part 6: Building Cultures and Paradigms of Peace October 2011: 246 x 174: 432pp Hb: 978-0-415-59128-7: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-59129-4: £27.99 For more information, visit:

Series Edited by Tom Woodhouse, and Oliver Ramsbotham, both at University of Bradford, UK The field of peace and conflict research has grown enormously as an academic pursuit in recent years, gaining credibility and relevance amongst policy makers and in the international humanitarian and NGO sector. The Routledge Studies in Peace and Conflict Resolution series aims to provide an outlet for some of the most significant new work emerging from this academic community, and to establish itself as a leading platform for innovative work at the point where peace and conflict research impacts on International Relations theory and processes. New

A Post-Liberal Peace Oliver P. Richmond, University of St. Andrews, UK

Pathways from Ethnic Conflict Institutional Redesign in Divided Societies Edited by John Coakley, University College Dublin, Ireland Series: Routledge Studies in Nationalism and Ethnicity 2010: 246 x 174: 248pp Hb: 978-0-415-55402-2: £85.00 For more information, visit:

related journal

’Postwar peace is never easy and only rarely fully consolidated. In this important new collection of wide-ranging case studies, editors Astri Suhrke and Mats Berdal demonstrate the added-value of disaggregating peaces into four distinct categories – peace imposed by victors, challenged by losers, accepted by parties and divided among factions. They show how each has its own challenges and why confusing them can be fatal to mitigating conflict.’ – Michael Doyle, Columbia University, USA

Routledge Studies in Peace and Conflict Resolution

Small Wars & Insurgencies Editors: Paul B. Rich, University of Cambridge, UK, Thomas-Durell Young, Naval Postgraduate School, USA and Thomas Mockaitis, DePaul University, USA Volume 22, 2011, 4 issues per year Print ISSN: 0959-2318, Online ISSN: 1743-9558 Small Wars & Insurgencies provides a forum for the discussion of the historical, political, social, economic and psychological aspects of insurgency, counter-insurgency, limited war, peacekeeping operations and the use of force as an instrument of policy. Including an authoritative review section, it aims to provide an outlet for historians, political scientists, policy makers and practitioners to discuss and debate theoretical and practical issues related to the past, present and future of this important area of both international and domestic relations.

Browse and order online:

This book examines how the liberal peace experiment of the post-Cold War environment has failed to connect with its target populations, which have instead set about transforming it according to their own local requirements.

Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: The Romanticisation of the Local 1. Civil Society, Needs, Welfare 2. The Culture of Liberal Peacebuilding 3. Critical Perspectives of Liberal Peacebuilding: Cambodia, Bosnia Herzegovina, Kosovo, and Timor Leste 4. De-Romanticising the Local: Implications for Post-Liberal Peacebuilding Part 2: Hybridity and The Infrapolitics of Peace 5. Everyday Critical Agency and Resistance in Peacebuilding 6. De-Romanticising the Local, De-Mystifying the International: Aspects of the Local-Liberal Hybrid. Conclusion: The Birth of A Post-Liberal Peace June 2011: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-66782-1: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-66784-5: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-81026-2 For more information, visit:

Governing Ethnic Conflict Consociation, Identity and the Price of Peace Andrew Finlay, Trinity College Dublin, Ireland 2010: 216 x 138: 168pp Hb: 978-0-415-49803-6: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84731-2 For more information, visit:


p eace a nd con flict studies





Post-War Security Transitions

Gender, Nationalism and Conflict Transformation

Peace Research

New Themes and Old Problems in Northern Ireland

Peter Wallensteen, Uppsala University, Sweden

Participatory Peacebuilding after Asymmetric Conflicts Edited by Veronique Dudouet, Hans J. Giessman and Katrin Planta This book explores the conditions under which non-state armed groups participate in post-war security and political governance. Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Security Transition Processes in Post-War Societies 1. International Approaches to Post-war Security Transition Mark Knight 2. Shortcomings and Blindspots in Existing Approaches to Post-War Security Promotion Veronique Dudouet, Hans J. Giessmann and Katrin Planta 3. Security Transition Processes: An Innovative Peacebuilding Framework Veronique Dudouet, Hans J. Giessmann and Katrin Planta Part 2: Case Studies 4. The Difficult Path to Democracy in Colombia: M-19’s Peace Process Vera Grabe and Mauricio García 5. South Africa’s Political and Security Negotiations Gavin Cawthra 6. South Africa’s Military Integration and the Creation of the New South African National Defence Force Aboobaker Ismail 7. The Guarantee of Security: FMLN’s Political Transformation Julio Martínez 8. Female Combatants in Security Transition Processes: Lessons from El Salvador Morena Herrera 9. Ex-Prisoners, Ex-Combatants and Conflict Transformation in Northern Ireland Kieran McEvoy 10. The Demobilisation and Integration of Former Kosovo Liberation Army Members Ramadan Qehaja 11. Challenges of Negotiating and Implementing Security Sector Reform and the Integration of Combatants in Burundi Julien Nimubona and Joseph Nkurunziza 12. Transitional Security Promotion in Southern Sudan William Deng Deng 13. Guns, Soldiers and Votes: Lessons from the DDR Process in Aceh Aguswandi 14. Ex-Combatants Reintegration in Post-Conflict Aceh: A Process of Women’s Marginalisation Shadia Marhaban 15. Challenges of Security Sector Restructuring in Nepal Khagendra Neupane 16. Integrating Rebels into a National Army: View from Maoist Cantonments in Nepal Kiyoko Ogura 17. Conclusion: Empirical Findings on Security Transition Challenges Veronique Dudouet, Hans J. Giessmann and Katrin Planta. Bibliography December 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-68080-6: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Economic Assistance and Conflict Transformation Peacebuilding in Northern Ireland Sean Byrne, University of Manitoba, Canada This book examines the role of economic aid in the management and resolution of protracted ethnic conflicts, focusing on the case study of Northern Ireland. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Economic Assistance: Building the Peace in Northern Ireland 2. Economic Inequality, Civil Rights, and Working-Class Politics in Northern Ireland 3. International Economic Assistance and the Economy of Northern Ireland 4. The Role of the International Fund for Ireland and the European Union Peace II Fund in Promoting Peace and Reducing Violence in Northern Ireland 5. Images of Bureaucratic Challenges 6. Images of Peacebuilding and Reconciliation 7. Images of Economic Development and Community Capacity Building 8. Conclusions: Economic Assistance and the Northern Ireland Conflict

Theory and Practice

Comprising essays by Peter Wallensteen, this book presents an overview of the thematic development of peace research, which has become one of the most dynamic and innovative areas of war and conflict studies.

Fidelma Ashe, University of Ulster at Jordanstown, UK This book genders the process of conflict transformation in Northern Ireland and both documents and analyzes the effects of the restructuring of its politics on gender and sexual equality. Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: EthnoNationalist Conflict, Gender and Sexuality 2. Gender and Nationalism in Ireland 3. Gender, Ethnicity and Conflict Transformation Part 2: Gender, Sexuality and Political Institutions 5. Gender Equality, the Political Parties and the Assembly 6. Equality Discourses and Institutions 7. Gendering Policing and Security Part 3: Gender and Conflict Transformation in Civil Society 8. The Continuing Struggle of Women’s Groups 9. Gender, Demilitarisation and Restorative Justice 10. Gendering Forgetting and Remembering 11. Conclusion. Bibliography October 2011: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-55816-7: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86579-8 For more information, visit:


Liberal Peacebuilding and Global Governance Beyond the Metropolis David Roberts, University of Ulster, UK This book examines the limits to cosmopolitan liberal peacebuilding caused by its preoccupation with the values and assumptions of neoliberal global governance. Selected Contents: Preface. Introduction: Global Governance and Postconflict Peacebuilding 1. Postconflict Peacebuilding 2. Crisis of Institutionalism 3. Crises of state and Institutional Memory 4. Crises of Legitimacy and Dispossession 5. From Third to Fourth Generation Peacebuilding 6. Fourth Generation Peacebuilding 7. Legitimacy, Popular Peace and Global Governance. Conclusion February 2011: 234 x 156: 160pp Hb: 978-0-415-49743-5: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-82581-5 For more information, visit:

Political Discourse and Conflict Resolution Debating Peace in Northern Ireland

Selected Contents: Part 1: Making Peace Researchable 1. Making Peace Researchable 2. The Uppsala Code of Ethics for Scientists Part 2: Knowing War – Understanding History 3. War in Peace Research 4. Four Models of Major Power Politics: Geopolitik, Realpolitik, Idealpolitik and Kapitalpolitik 5. Major Power, Confrontation and War, 1816-1976 6. Universalism vs. Particularism. On the Limits of Major Power Order 7. Global Governance in A New Age: The UN between P 1, G2 and A New Global Society Part 3: Towards Conflict Resolution Analysis 8. Widening the Researchable: Conflict, Resolution and Prevention 9. The Uppsala Conflict Data Program, 1978-2010: The Story, the Rationale and the Program 10. Conflict Prevention: Methodology for Knowing the Unknown 11. Armed Conflict and Peace Agreements 12. Dag Hammarskjöld and the Psychology of Diplomacy Part 4: Sanctions and Peace Research 13. Sanctions and Peace Research 14. A Century of Economic Sanctions: A Field Revisited 15. Sanctions and Peace Building. Lessons from Africa Part 5: Academics in Peacemaking 16. Academics in Peacemaking 17. The Strengths and Limits of Academic Diplomacy: The Case of Bougainville 18. An Experiment in Academic Diplomacy: The Middle East Seminar in 1990. Bibliography June 2011: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-58088-5: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-58089-2: £26.99 eBook: 978-0-203-80896-2 For more information, visit:


Genocide and ConflictComplementarity The Continuing Crisis in Darfur Johan Brosché, Uppsala University, Sweden and Daniel Rothbart, George Mason University, USA December 2011: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-68978-6: £75.00 For more information, visit:

Edited by Katy Hayward, Queen’s University, Belfast and Catherine O’Donnell 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-56628-5: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84249-2 For more information, visit:

2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-59481-3: £85.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83822-8 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

p e ac e an d c on f l ict s tud i e s



Small Arms, Crime and Conflict

Theory and Practice of International Mediation

Global Governance and the Threat of Armed Violence Edited by Owen Greene, University of Bradford, UK and Nic Marsh, PRIO (Peace Research Institute), Oslo, Norway This book critically examines the nexus between arms availability and armed violence. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Owen Greene and Nicholas Marsh 2. The Tools of Insurgency: A Review of the Role of Small Arms and Light Weapons in Warfare Nicholas Marsh 3. Small Arms and Light Weapons Spread and Conflict Mike Bourne 4. Lethal Instruments: Small Arms and Deaths in Armed Conflict Joakim Kreutz and Nicholas Marsh 5. Regaining State Control: Arms and Violence in Post-Conflict Countries Joakim Kreutz, Nicholas Marsh and Manuela Torre 6. Armed Violence within Societies Owen Greene and Nicholas Marsh 7. Guns and Deaths: A Critical Review Thomas Jackson and Nicholas Marsh 8. Armed Violence Taking Place Within Societies: SALW And Armed Violence In Urban Areas Valentina Bartolucci and Anna Betsy Kanneworff 9. Arms, Private Militias and Fragile State Dynamics Owen Greene and Ariel Macaspac Penetrante 10. Governance and Small Arms and Light Weapons Owen Greene and Nicholas Marsh 11. Governance and Control of SALW After Armed Conflicts Mike Bourne and Owen Greene 12. Small Arms and Light Weapons Production as Part of a National and Global Defence Industry Dimitar Dimitrov and Peter Hall 13. What Do the Natives Know: Societal Mechanisms for Controlling Small Arms Michael Ashkenazi 14. Conclusions and Priorities for Further Research Owen Greene and Nicholas Marsh August 2011: 234 x 156: 320pp Hb: 978-0-415-56700-8: £80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-57755-7: £24.95 For more information, visit:

Transforming Violent Conflict Radical Disagreement, Dialogue and Survival Oliver Ramsbotham, University of Bradford, UK

This book investigates intractable conflicts and their main verbal manifestation radical disagreement – and explores what can be done when conflict resolution fails.

Selected Contents: Prologue: Having the First Word Part 1: Radical Disagreement and Conflict Intractability 1. Radical Disagreement and Discourse Analysis 2. Radical Disagreement and Conflict Analysis 3. Radical Disagreement and Conflict Resolution Part 2: Taking Radical Disagreement Seriously 4. Methodology: Studying Agonistic Dialogue 5. Phenomenology: Exploring Agonistic Dialogue 6. Epistemology: Understanding Agonistic Dialogue 7. Praxis: Managing Agonistic Dialogue 8. Re-entry: Feeding back into Conflict Settlement and Conflict Transformation Part 3: Radical Disagreement and the Future 9. Radical Disagreement and Human Difference 10. Radical Disagreement and Human Survival. Epilogue: Having the Last Word

Selected Essays Jacob Bercovitch, University of Canterbury, New Zealand Series: Routledge Studies in Security and Conflict Management This volume brings together some of the most significant papers on international conflict mediation by Professor Jacob Bercovitch, one of the leading scholars in the field. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction; Or how to Study and do Research on Mediation Part 1: The Nature and Theory of Mediation 2. Introduction: Putting Mediation in Context 3.The Study of International Mediation: Theoretical Issues and Empirical Evidence with Allison Houston 4. Social Research and the Study of Mediation: Designing and Implementing Systemic Archival Research 5. Mediation in International Conflicts: Theory, Practice and Development 6. Mediation Success or Failure: The Search for the Elusive Criteria Part 2: Case Studies in Mediation 7. Case Study of Mediation as Method of International Conflict Resolution: The Camp David Experience 8. Conflict Management and the Oslo Experience: Assessing the Success of IsraeliPalestinian Peacemaking Part 3: Quantitative Studies in Mediation 9. Negotiation or Mediation? An Exploration of the Factors Affecting Choice of Conflict Management in International Conflict with Richard Jackson 10. Why Do They Do it Like This: An Analysis of the Factors Influencing Mediator Behaviour in International Conflicts with Allison Houston Part 4: Current Issues in Mediation Research 11. Managing Internationalised Ethnic Conflicts: The Role and Relevance of Mediation 12. Culture and International Mediation: An Empirical Assessment with Ole Elgström 13. The Management and Termination of Intractable International Conflicts: Conceptual and Empirical Considerations with Paul Diehl and Gary Goertz 14. Preventing Deadly Conflicts: The Contribution of International Mediation January 2011: 234 x 156: 304pp Hb: 978-0-415-46958-6: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83112-0 For more information, visit:


UN Sanctions and Conflict Responding to Peace and Security Threats Andrea Charron, Carleton University, Canada Series: Routledge Studies in Security and Conflict Management This book examines the application of the UN Security Council’s mandatory sanctions since 1946, and, in particular, the regimes adopted for specific types of conflict. Selected Contents: 1. Setting The Context 2. Interstate Conflicts 3. Intrastate Conflicts 4. International NormBreaking States 5. Terrorism 6. Conclusion: The Art of Tailoring

War, Politics and Experience Series Edited by Christine Sylvester, University of Lancaster, UK This series will publish interdisciplinary, single-authored and edited volumes that address the experiences of war and the everyday politics of war-making that shape and are shaped by those experiences. These works will push boundaries of knowledge and disciplinarity by offering new, theoretically sophisticated, and empirically rich approaches to understanding the experiential politics of war in the post-World War II period.

Experiencing War Edited by Christine Sylvester

This edited collection explores aspects of contemporary war that affect average people – physically, emotionally, and ethically through activities ranging from combat to television viewing.

Selected Contents: 1. Experiencing War: An Introduction Christine Sylvester 2. The Passions of Protection: Sovereign Authority and Humanitarian War Anne Orford 3. Gendered Humanitarianism: Reconsidering the Ethics of War Kimberly Hutchings 4. Wars, Bodies, and Development Brigitte Holzner 5. Ruling Exceptions: Female Soldiers and Everyday Experiences of Civil Conflict Megan MacKenzie 6. Experiencing the Cold War Heonik Kwon 7. On The Uselessness of New Wars Theory: Lessons From African Conflicts Stephen Chan 8. Dilemmas of Drawing War Jill Gibbon 9. Pathways to Experiencing War Christine Sylvester 2010: 234 x 156: 152pp Hb: 978-0-415-56630-8: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-56631-5: £23.99 eBook: 978-0-203-83999-7 For more information, visit:


Joy and International Relations A New Methodology Elina Penttinen, University of Lapland, Finland

July 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-59835-4: £80.00

This innovative book offers a new methodology for the study of International Relations based on joy, informed by current thinking on physics and feminism.

For more information, visit:

December 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-61632-4: £80.00

2010: 234 x 156: 288pp Hb: 978-0-415-55207-3: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-55208-0: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-85967-4 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:

For more information, visit:


p eace a nd c o nf lict studie s



Gender and U.S. Foreign Policy Militarization, Resistance and the Discourse of Motherhood Tina Managhan, Oxford Brookes University, UK This book examines motherhood as a discursive practice in IR against the backdrop of US foreign policy formation. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Reading International Relations through Bodies, Reading the Maternal(ized) Body as Political Event 2. The Vicissitudes of Life: Women’s Complex Entanglement with Peace and War 3. Shifting the Gaze from Hysterical Mothers to ‘Deadly Dads’: Spectacle and the Antinuclear Movement 4. (M)others, Biopolitics and the Gulf War 5. Grieving Dead Soldiers, Disavowing Loss: Cindy Sheehan and the Im/possibility of the American Antiwar Movement – 11,000 words 6. The Maternal Body as Alibi: Understanding the Centrality of the Maternal Body to Sovereign Representation. Bibliography December 2011: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-78195-4: £80.00 For more information, visit:


The Political Psychology of War Rape Inger Skjelsbæk, Peace Research Institute (PRIO), Oslo, Norway This book presents a new conceptual framework for understanding war rape and its impact. Selected Contents: Preface. Introduction Part 1: The Elephant in the Room 1. What Do We Know about War Rapes before the 1990s? 2. Turning Points in the 1990s 3. The First Generation of Systematic Documentation 4. A New Momentum and New Challenges since 2000 Part 2: Studies from Bosnia-Herzegovina 5. Designing a Study of the Aftermath of War Rapes in Bosnia 6. Perceptions of ’Good Womanhood’ in Focus Groups in Bosnia 7. Therapeutic Work with Victims of War Rape in Bosnia. Narrated Social Identities of Women Who Experienced War-Rape in Bosnia. Conclusions. Bibliography September 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-67117-0: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Armed Groups and Contemporary Conflicts Challenging the Weberian State Edited by Keith Krause, Graduate Institute of International & Development Studies, Switzerland 2010: 234 x 156: 216pp Hb: 978-0-415-57457-0: £80.00 For more information, visit:

the r e s p on s i bi l i ty to prote ct

The Responsibility to Protect

Global Politics and the Responsibility to Protect From Words to Deeds Alex J. Bellamy, Griffith University, Australia Series: Global Politics and the Responsibility to Protect

Global Politics and the Responsibility to Protect Series Edited by Alex J. Bellamy, Griffith University, Australia, Sara E. Davies, Queensland University of Technology, Brisbane, Australia, Monica Serrano, Ralph Bunche Institute for International Studies, CUNY, USA This book series aims to gather the best new thinking about the Responsibility to Protect into a core set of volumes that provides a definitive account of the principle, its implementation, and role in crises, reflecting a plurality of views and regional perspectives. Forthcoming

Sri Lanka and the Responsibility to Protect Politics, Ethnicity and Genocide Damien Kingsbury, Deakin University, Australia Series: Global Politics and the Responsibility to Protect This book is about the issues and challenges facing the implementation of the Responsibility to Protect principle in the case of Sri Lanka, where the Tamil Tigers have been fighting to create a separate state. Selected Contents: 1. The Meaning and Application of R2P 2. Politics and Ethnicity 3. The War in Sri Lanka 4. Competing Nationalisms 5. Total War 6. Cultural Dominance or Cultural Genocide? 7. Sri Lanka and International Law 8. Sri Lanka’s Opposition to R2P 9. Geo-Strategic Factors, R2P and Sri Lanka. Conclusion September 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-58884-3: £80.00

This book provides an in-depth introduction to, and analysis of, the issues relating to the implementation of the recent Responsibility to Protect principle in international relations

The Responsibility to Protect (RtoP) has come a long way in a short space of time. It was endorsed by the General Assembly of the UN in 2005, and unanimously reaffirmed by the Security Council in 2006 (Resolution 1674) and 2009 (Resolution 1894). UN Secretary-General Ban Ki-moon has identified the challenge of implementing RtoP as one of the cornerstones of his Secretary-Generalship. The principle has also become part of the working language of international engagement with humanitarian crises and has been debated in relation to almost every recent international crisis – including Sudan, Sri Lanka, Myanmar, Georgia, the Democratic Republic of Congo, Darfur and Somalia. Concentrating mainly on implementation challenges including the prevention of genocide and mass atrocities, strengthening the UN’s capacity to respond, and the role of regional organizations, this book introducing readers to contemporary debates on R2P and provides the first book-length analysis of the implementation agenda. The book will be of great interest to students of the responsibility to protect, humanitarian intervention, human rights, foreign policy, security studies and IR and politics in general. Selected Contents: Introduction 1. From Idea to Norm 2. Implementing RtoP at the UN 3. Humanitarian Crises since 2005 4. An Assessment after Five Years 5. Economic Development and Democratisation 6. Early Warning 7. Regional Arrangements (with Sara E. Davies) 8. The UN Security Council and the Use of Force. Conclusion 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-56735-0: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-56736-7: £23.99 eBook: 978-0-203-83716-0 For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:

Humanitarian Intervention and the Responsibility to Protect Security and Human Rights Cristina Gabriela Badescu, University of Toronto, Canada Series: Global Politics and the Responsibility to Protect 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-58627-6: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83454-1 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

th e r e s p on s i bi l i ty to p rote ct Forthcoming

The Evolution of the Responsibility to Protect Imperfect Duties? Edited by Brett O’Bannon, DePauw University, USA and John Roth, Claremont McKenna College, USA Series: Global Politics and the Responsibility to Protect This book’s primary objective is to examine the evolution of the Responsibility to Protect (R2P) norm, and to analyze the ’fit’ between the R2P and Africa. Selected Contents: Preface Gareth Evans. Introduction Brett O’Bannon and John K. Roth Part 1: Political, Legal, and Ethical Challenges for R2P 1. Understanding the Gap between the Promise and the Reality of ‘The Responsibility to Protect David Chandler 2. Why the Responsibility to Protect (R2P) as a Doctrine or (Emerging) Norm Is on the Decline: Principles, Pragmatism, and International Relations Jeremy Sarkin 3. The Responsibility to Protect and the Limits of International Authority Anne Orford 4. Crying Out for Action: Do the Dead Say Anything about the Responsibility to Protect? John K. Roth Part 2: Situating R2P in the African Topography 5. R2P in the DR Congo: The Failure of Intervention Séverine Autesserre 6. UN Peacekeeping in Post-Conflict Southern Sudan: Protecting Whom and to What End? Carol Berger 7. Endemic Conflicts and Intervention in the Horn of Africa: Implications of the End of the Cold War Assefaw Bariagaber 8. Africa: Implications of Statelessness for a State-Centric Human Protection Norm Brett O’Bannon 9. Conclusion Karen AbuZayd. Bibliography

The Responsibility to Protect Norms, Laws and the Use of Force in International Politics Series: Global Politics and the Responsibility to Protect


This volume is a collection of the key writings of Professor Ramesh Thakur on norms and laws regulating the international use of force.

Terror in Our Time

The adoption of the Responsibility to Protect (R2P) principle by world leaders assembled at the UN summit in 2005 is widely acknowledged to represent one of the great normative advances in international politics since 1945. The author has been involved in this shift from the dominant norm of non-intervention to R2P as an actor, public intellectual and academic and has been a key thinker in this process. These essays represent the author’s writings on R2P, including reference to test cases as they arose, such as with Cyclone Nargis in Myanmar in 2008. Comprising essays by a key thinker and agent in the Responsibility to Protect debates, this book will be of much interest to students of international politics, human rights, international law, war and conflict studies, international security and IR in general.

A New Map Edited by Monica Serrano, Ralph Bunche Institute for International Studies, CUNY, USA and Claudio Fuentes, Diego Portales University, Santiago, Chile

2010: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-78168-8: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-78169-5: £24.99

For more information, visit:


The Responsibility to Protect in Latin America

Series: Global Politics and the Responsibility to Protect This books assesses the opportunities for the normative and practical advancement of the Responsibility to Protect (R2P) in Latin America.

Terrorism Studies

Ramesh Thakur, Australian National University

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Norms and Laws in International Relations 2. Non-Intervention in International Relations: A Case Study 3. Kosovo, Humanitarian Intervention and the Challenge of World Order (with Albrecht Schnabel) 4. Global Norms and International Humanitarian Law: An Asian Perspective 5. Intervention, Sovereignty and the Responsibility to Protect: Experiences from ICISS 6. In Defence of The Responsibility to Protect 7. Collective Security and the Use of Force: Reflections on the Report of the High-Level Panel on Threats, Challenges and Change 8. The Responsibility to Protect and Prosecute: The Parallel Erosion of Sovereignty and Impunity (with Vesselin Popovski) 9. R2P: From Idea to Norm – and Action? (with Thomas G. Weiss) 10. The Responsibility to Protect and the North-South Divide 11. R2P and the Protection of Civilians in Armed Conflict 12. Conclusion: Normative Incoherence, Inconsistency and Contestation

August 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-66757-9: £80.00

te r ror i s m s tud i e s

For more information, visit:

Selected Contents: Introduction Claudio Fuentes and Mónica Serrano Part 1: Mapping the Responsibility to Protect in Latin America 1. Argentina and the R2P: Foreign Policy and Human Rights Carina Solmirano 2. Brazil, the R2P and the Shaping of Regional Order Marcelo Biato Fortuna 3. Small Country, Big Challenges: R2P in Chile’s Foreign Policy Claudio Fuentes 4. Costa Rica and R2P: Trailblazer or Mouthpiece of the North? Jorge A. Ballestero 5. Mexico and the R2P: From Non-Intervention to Active Engagement? Mónica Serrano and Diego Dewar 6. Guatemala: A Test-Case for the R2P? Manolo E. Vela Castañeda 7. Bolivia: Violence in Pando & the R2P George Gray Molina and Gustavo Bonifaz 8. Colombia: A Free-Rider with a Vested Interest in the (Non)-Development of R2P? Diego Dewar and Annette Idler Part 3: Implementing the Responsibility to Protect 9. Preventing and Responding to Mass Atrocities: The Role of National Human Rights Institutions Thomas Pegram 10. Developing R2P Regional Institutional Capacities Thomas Legler 11. Latin American Responsibilities in Vulnerable States: The Case of Haiti Mónica Hirst. Select Bibliography December 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp Hb: 978-0-415-78221-0: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:

Ken Booth, Aberystwyth University, UK and Tim Dunne, University of Queensland, Australia

The 9/11 terror attacks profoundly altered the way in which intellectuals, practitioners, and the public thought about the meaning of security and terrorism. This book evaluates the impact of ‘international terrorism’ on global order ten years after 911, addressing a series of key issues in short accessible essays.

Selected Contents: Prologue 1. 9/11+10 2. Terror 3. Risks 4. Base 5. Islam 6. Evil 7. America 8. War 9. Security 10. Governance 11. Democracy 12. Endings. Epilogue September 2011: 198 x 129: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-67830-8: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-67831-5: £15.99 For more information, visit:


Terrorism Studies A Reader Edited by John Horgan, and Kurt Braddock, both at Pennsylvania State University, USA

This new Reader aims to guide students through some of the key readings on the subject of terrorism and political violence.

This wide-ranging Reader seeks to equip the aspiring student, based anywhere in the world, with a comprehensive introduction to the study of terrorism. Containing many of the most influential and groundbreaking studies from the world’s leading experts, drawn from several academic disciplines, this volume is the essential companion for any student of terrorism and political violence. The Reader, which starts with a detailed Introduction by the editors, is divided into seven sections, each of which contains a short introduction as well as a guide to further reading and student discussion questions. Selected Contents: Part 1. Terrorism in Historical Context Part 2. Definitions Part 3. Understanding and Explaining Terrorism Part 4. Terrorist Movements Part 5. Terrorist Behaviour Part 6. Counterterrorism Part 7. Current and Future Trends in Terrorism July 2011: 246 x 174: 520pp Hb: 978-0-415-45504-6: £95.00 Pb: 978-0-415-45505-3: £29.99 For more information, visit:


t erro rism studie s


Contemporary Terrorism Studies



Evaluating Counterterrorism Performance

Putting Terrorism in Context Lessons Learned from Global Data

A Comparative Study

Gary LaFree, Laura Dugan and Erin Miller


Beatrice de Graaf, Leiden University, the Netherlands

Conducting Terrorism Field Research

This book offers a new model for measuring the success and impact of counterterrorism strategies, using four comparative historical case studies.

This is the first book that provides a comprehensive empirical overview of the nature and evolution of both modern transnational and domestic terrorism, based on statistical data.

A Guide

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. The Dutch Approach Restrained and Fragmented 3. The Federal Republic of Germany: Democracy Under Fire 4. Counterterrorism in the United States: Countering Subversives, Revolutionaries and Communists 5. Counterterrorism in Italy: Deception or Mismanagement? 6. The performative Power of Counterterrorism 7. Police Practice as Signifier 8. Intelligence Signifiers 9. Terrorists on Trial: The Courtroom as Stage 10. The ‘Performance’ of Counterterrorism Policy

Edited by Adam Dolnik, University of Wollongong, Australia This book offers a detailed and practically oriented guide to the challenges of conducting terrorist fieldwork. This edited volume presents a collection of articles from experienced authors representing different risk groups, disciplines, methodological approaches, regional specializations, and other context-specific aspects. Each contributor provides a road-map to their own research, describing planning and preparation phases, the formalities involved in getting into conflict zones, gaining access to sources, managing contacts, interviewing militants in the field, detailed discussion on the risks involved, ethical dilemmas, translation issues, effective interviewing and rapport-building steps, and other practical aspects of conducting field research. The text will also help researchers set realistic expectations of how the process of interviewing militants and secretive government sources in conflict zones is organized, what the likely outcomes are, and assist with many other practical issues such as how to navigate through challenges posed by government forces unsympathetic to researchers, how to reduce risk of physical harm when travelling in conflict zones, how to behave at hostile checkpoints, how to answer specific questions militants tend to ask prior and during interviews. The end product is a ’how to’ guide to field research on terrorism, which will be of much value to terrorism experts and novices alike, providing detailed insights into the challenges and obstacles in doing field research on terrorism, as well as advice on how these can be overcome. Selected Contents: Introduction Adam Dolnik 1. The Need for Field Research on Terrorism Adam Dolnik 2. A More Accessible Population?: Interviewing Former Terrorists John Horgan 3. Field Research on Counterterrorism: Interviewing Government Sources Brian Jackson and Lindsey Clutterbuck 4. Interviewing al Qaida, Jason Burke and Peter Bergen 5. The Participant Observer Method Keith Akins and Gerard Chaliand 6. The Use of Surveys in Field Research on Terrorism Christine Fair 7. Field Research on Terrorism in Colombia Michael Kenney 8. Field Research on Terrorism in Africa Anneli Botha 9. Field Research on Terrorism in Southeast Asia 10. Researching Terrorism in Pakistan: An Insider’s Perspective Amir Rana 11. Interviewing Islamist Militants as a Woman 12. How to Research ’Us’?: A Terrorists’ Perspective. Conclusions: Researching Terrorism in the Field: A ’How To’ Guide Adam Dolnik September 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-60930-2: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-60931-9: £24.99 For more information, visit:

March 2011: 234 x 156: 376pp Hb: 978-0-415-59886-6: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-82817-5 For more information, visit:

International Terrorism Post-9/11 Comparative Dynamics and Responses Edited by Asaf Siniver, University of Birmingham, UK 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-55230-1: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85200-2 For more information, visit:

Talking to Terrorists Concessions and the Renunciation of Violence Carolin Goerzig, European Union Institute for Security Studies (EUISS), France Series: Contemporary Terrorism Studies 2010: 234 x 156: 192pp Hb: 978-0-415-57997-1: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-84697-1 For more information, visit:

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Section 1: General Characteristics of Terrorism 2. Longitudinal Trends in Terrorism 3. Geospatial Trends in Terrorism Section 2: Characteristics of Terrorist Attacks 4. Domestic versus International Terrorism 5. Terrorist Weapons 6. Casualties Produced by Terrorists Section 3: Terrorist Groups 7. Life Cycles of Terrorist Organizations 8. Terrorist Movements, with Erin Miller, University of Maryland Section 4: Government Responses to Terrorism 9. Government Responses to Terrorism, with Erica Chenoweth, Wesleyan University 10. Terrorist Group Strategies Section 5: Implications and Conclusions 11. Discussion and Conclusions. Technical Appendix. Bibliography October 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-67142-2: £80.00 For more information, visit:


Freedom and Terror Reason and Unreason in Politics Gabriel Weimann, University of Haifa, Israel and Abraham Kaplan This book examines reason and unreason in the legal and political responses to terrorism. Selected Contents: Introduction. Foreword Carl Cohen 1. The Age of Madness 2. Knowledge and Political Action 3. Politics, Law and Behavioral Sciences 4. Historical Interpretation 5. The Politics of Protest 6. The Ethics of Terror 7. The Psychodynamics of Terror 8. The Theater of Terror: Modern Terrorism and the Mass Media 9. Moral Responsibilities and Political Realities 10. The Ethics of Power 11. The Politics of Prejudice 12. In Defense of Freedom 13. The Limits of Reason January 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-60598-4: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83120-5 For more information, visit:


The Evolution of EU CounterTerrorism Policy


The EU and Counter-Terrorism

European Security Policy from 9/11 to 7/7

Politics, Polity and Policies after 9/11

Raphael Bossong

Javier Argomaniz, University of St. Andrews, UK

This book presents a detailed empirical account of the evolution of EU counterterrorism policy between 2001 and 2005, from 9/11 up to the 7/7 attacks in London.

This book offers a theoretically informed analysis of how coherently the European Union fights terrorism in the post-9/11 era.

November 2011 Hb: 978-0-415-68857-4: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Post-9/11 Institutionalisation of European Union 3. The Institutional Framework of EU Counter-Terrorism 4. Institutional Consistency 5. The Policy Dimension of EU CounterTerrorism 6. Horizontal Consistency 7. Vertical Consistency 8. Conclusion June 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-56525-7: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-86170-7 For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

te r ror i s m s tud i e s


Counterterrorism in Turkey Policy Responses to the PKK (Kurdistan Workers’ Party) Mustafa Cosar Unal, Intelligence Department, Turkish National Police Series: Extremism and Democracy Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Political Violence in Turkey 3. The PKK 4. The Characteristics of the PKK 5. Counterterrorism in General 6. Analyses of Official Turkish Policies 7. Incapacitating PKK Members 8. Analysis of Policies from the PKK’s Perspective 9. PKK’s Ability to Initiate, Increase and/or Decrease Violence 10. Conclusion October 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-60749-0: £80.00 For more information, visit:


The End of Terrorism? Leonard Weinberg, University of Nevada, Reno, USA Series: Extremism and Democracy This book considers not the beginning or origins of terrorism but how groups that use terrorism end. Terrorism as a tactic is unlikely to disappear, however virtually all the groups that employed terrorist violence during the 1960s and 1970s have passed from the scene in one way or another. Likewise most of the individuals who embarked on ‘careers’ in terrorism over these same years now engage in other pursuits. The author argues that al-Qaeda and the various violent Islamist groups it has inspired are, like their predecessors, bound to bring their operations to an end. Rather than discussing the defection or de-radicalization of individuals the book aims to analyze how terrorist groups are defeated, or defeat themselves. It examines the historical record, drawing on a large collection of empirical data to analyze in detail the various ends of these violent organizations. This book provides a unique empirically informed perspective on the end of terrorism that is a valuable addition to the currently available literature and will be of interest to scholars of terrorism, security studies and international politics. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. The Ends of the Affair 3. Defeat 4. Success 5. Transformation 6. Conclusions August 2011: 216 x 138: 144pp Hb: 978-0-415-78117-6: £80.00 Pb: 978-0-415-78118-3: £25.99 For more information, visit:

Political Violence Series Edited by Paul Wilkinson, University of St. Andrews, UK and David Rapoport, UCLA, USA This book series contains sober, thoughtful and authoritative academic accounts of terrorism and political violence. Its aim is to produce a useful taxonomy of terror and violence through comparative and historical analysis in both national and international spheres. Each book discusses origins, organisational dynamics and outcomes of particular forms and expressions of political violence.

Explaining Terrorism Causes, Processes and Consequences Martha Crenshaw, Stanford University, USA ’The leading global thinker on the study of terrorism, Martha Crenshaw has for thirty years produced the most creative, rigorous and important contributions our field has known. And now these can all be found in one place. This book is simply the one indispensable text that every student, scholar and researcher of terrorism and political violence must have. Literally the best of the best.’ – John Horgan, Pennsylvania State University, USA This volume comprises some of the key essays by Professor Crenshaw, from 1972 to the present-day, on the causes, processes and consequences of terrorism. Selected Contents: Introduction: Definitions, Approaches, Trajectories, and Responses Part 1: What and Why? 1. The Concept of Terrorism 2. The Causes of Terrorism 3. ’Old’ vs. ’New’ Terrorism Part 2: Explaining Terrorism: Organizations, Strategies, and Psychology 4. The Organizational Approach 5. Subjective Realities 6. The Logic of Terrorism 7. Psychological Constraints on Instrumental Reasoning Part 3: Responding to Terrorism 8. Coercive Diplomacy 9. Strategies and Grand Strategies 10. Counterterrorism Policy and the Political Process Part 4: How Terrorism Ends 11. How Terrorism Declines 12. Why Terrorism is Rejected or Renounced 2010: 234 x 156: 280pp Hb: 978-0-415-78050-6: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-78051-3: £23.99 For more information, visit:

Negotiating with Terrorists Strategy, Tactics, and Politics Guy Olivier Faure, Sorbonne University, France and I. William Zartman, Johns Hopkins University, USA 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-56629-2: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85559-1 For more information, visit:


Fault Lines in Global Jihad Organizational, Strategic and Ideological Fissures Edited by Assaf Moghadam, US Military Academy, West Point, USA and Brian Fishman This book deals with the causes, nature, and impact of the divisions within the jihadi movement, and the splits between jihadis and other Islamic groups. Selected Contents: Introduction: Jihadi ’Endogenous’ Problems Assaf Moghadam and Brian Fishman Part 1: Inter-Jihadi Fault Lines 1. Takfir and Violence against Muslims Mohammed M. Hafez 2. The Near and Far Enemy Debate Steven Brooke 3. Jihadis Divided between Strategists and Doctrinarians Brynjar Lia 4. Classical and Global Jihad: Al-Qa’ida’s Franchising Frustrations Vahid Brown 5. Arab and non-Arab Jihadis Anne Stenersen 6. Jihadi Recantations and their Significance: The Case of Dr Fadl Nelly Lahoud Part 2: Fault Lines Dividing Jihadis and Other Muslims 7. Islam Divided between Jihad and the Muslim Brotherhood Marc Lynch 8. Al-Qa’ida and Shiism Bernard Haykel 9. Jihadists and Nationalist Islamists: Al-Qa’ida and Hamas Reuven Paz 10. Fault Lines in Cyberspace Scott Sanford Conclusion Conclusion: Jihadi Fault Lines and Counterterrorism Policy Brian Fishman and Assaf Moghadam May 2011: 234 x 156: 280pp Hb: 978-0-415-58624-5: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81492-5 For more information, visit:


Irish Republican Terrorism and Politics A Comparative Study of the Official and the Provisional IRA Kacper Rekawek, Warsaw School of Social Sciences and Humanities, Poland This book examines the post-ceasefire evolutions and histories of the main Irish republican terrorist factions, and the interconnected character of politics and militarism within them. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. The Official Republican Terrorism 1972-1992 3. The Provisional Republican Terrorism 1994-2005 4. The Official Republican Politics 1972-1992 5. The Provisional Republican Politics 1994-2005 6. Post-Ceasefire Terrorisms and Politics Compared 7. Conclusions March 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp Hb: 978-0-415-58801-0: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-81698-1 For more information, visit:

Terrorist Groups and the New Tribalism Terrorism’s Fifth Wave Jeffrey Kaplan, University of Wisconsin, USA 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp Hb: 978-0-415-45338-7: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-85752-6 For more information, visit:

Browse and order online:


t erro rism studie s





Militancy and Political Violence in Shiism

State Terrorism and Human Rights

Terrorist Rehabilitation and Counter-Radicalisation

Trends and Patterns

International Responses since the Cold War

New Approaches to Counter-Terrorism

Edited by Assaf Moghadam, Interdisciplinary Center (IDC) Herzliya, Israel

Paul Wilkinson, University of St. Andrews, UK

Edited by Lawrence Rubin, Rohan Gunaratna, IDSS, Singapore and Jolene Anne R. Jerard

This book is the first systematic assessment of current trends and patterns of militancy in Shii communities in the Middle East and South Asia - specifically in Iran, Iraq, but also in Lebanon, Saudi Arabia, Pakistan, Afghanistan, Kuwait, and Bahrain. It addresses two key questions: What trends emerge in the types of militancy Shii actors employ both inside and outside of the Shii heartland? And what are the main drivers of militancy in the Shii community? Selected Contents: Part 1: Historical, Doctrinal and Religious Context 1. The Rise of Shia Ideology in Pre-Revolutionary Iran 2. Ayatollah Khomeini and the Velayat-e Faqih Part 2: Trends and Patterns in the Shii Heartland and Beyond 3. Iran 4. Iraq 5. Lebanon 6. Saudi Arabia 7. Pakistan 8. Afghanistan 9. Kuwait and Bahrain July 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-61992-9: £80.00 For more information, visit:

Terrorism and the Olympics Major Event Security and Lessons for the Future Edited by Anthony Richards, Peter Fussey and Andrew Silke, all at University of East London, UK 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-49939-2: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83522-7 For more information, visit:

Terrorism, Identity and Legitimacy The Four Waves Theory and Political Violence Edited by Jean E. Rosenfeld, UCLA, USA 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp Hb: 978-0-415-57857-8: £80.00 eBook: 978-0-203-83432-9

This book aims to improve our understanding of the broad trends in the use of political violence by examining the use of state terror in world politics.

There are numerous military regimes and other forms of dictatorship where the use of terror techniques for internal control is routine. While there are some effective multilateral measures that can be taken to discourage and reduce state sponsorship of terrorism as a weapon of intervention in foreign states, the international community generally and the major democracies in combination, face huge difficulties in attempting to influence those regimes that are inflicting major human rights violations on their own populations. For most states, the international norms of non-intervention have tended to restrict government and IGOs to expressions of humanitarian concern, condemnatory resolutions at the UN, and perhaps support for international economic sanctions against the offending regime. This book will analyse the major types of international response to state terror since the Cold War and their outcomes and wider implications for the future of international relations. The conclusion will attempt to develop proposals for more effective international responses to state terror in full capability with international law and the protection of human rights. Selected Contents: 1. Concept and Typology of Regime Terror 2. Regime Terror as a Political Weapon in Modern History 3. Trends in the use of Terror by States since the End of the Cold War 4. Obstacles to International Action against State Terror in the Post-Cold War International System 5. The Case of Saddam Hussein’s Terror against the Kurds and the International Response 6. Indonesian Terror against East Timor Separatists and the International Response 7. The Use of State Terror in Former Yugoslavia and the International Response 8. Terror in Rwanda in 1994 and the Failure of International Response 9. Conclusions: Towards a More Effective International Response to State Terror, based on Democratic Principles and the Protection of Human Rights. Bibliography. Index

For more information, visit:

October 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-47423-8: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-47424-5: £22.99


For more information, visit:

Islamist Radicalisation in Europe An Occupational Change Process Daniela Pisoiu, University of Hamburg, Germany This book examines the Islamist radicalisation process in Europe, and develops a new theoretical model, based on the evolution of Islamist radicals in their social environment. Selected Contents: 1. Conceptualising Radicalisation 2. Islamist Radicalisation in Europe: A Reaction to Grievance? 3. Becoming an Islamist Radical: A Matter of Occupational Choice 4. Choosing the Radical Islamist Occupation 5. Closing the Circle: The World Through Radical Eyes 6. Dealing with Islamist Radicalisation. Conclusion July 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp Hb: 978-0-415-66525-4: £80.00

This book seeks to explore the new frontiers in counter-terrorism research, analyses and practice, focusing on the imperative to rehabilitate terrorists. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Rohan Gunaratna and Lawrence Rubin 2. Islamist DeRadicalization in Algeria: The Case of Islamic Salvation Army and Affiliated Militias Omar Ashour 3. Non-Kinetic Approaches to Counter-Terrorism: A Case Study of Egypt and the Islamic Group Lawrence Rubin 4. Terrorist Rehabilitation: The Singapore Experience Rohan Gunaratna and Mohamed Feisal Bin Mohamed Hassan 5. Terrorist Rehabilitation Abdulrahman Al-Hadlaq 6. Extremist Disengagement in Saudi Arabia: Prevention, Rehabilitation and Aftercare Christopher Boucek 7. Thinking Strategically About Terrorist Rehabilitation: Lessons from Iraq Major General Douglas Stone 8. Dialogue and its Effects on Countering Terrorism:The Yemeni Experience Judge Hamoud Abdulhameed Al-Hitar 9. Challenges of Establishing a Rehabilitation Programme in Pakistan Tariq Parvez 10. Aspects of Deradicalisation Arie W. Kruglanski, Michele J. Gelfand, and Rohan Gunaratna January 2011: 234 x 156: 176pp Hb: 978-0-415-58293-3: £80.00 For more information, visit:

The Psychology of Counter-Terrorism Edited by Andrew Silke, University of East London, UK

‘Not only has Andrew Silke provided the first textbook on the psychology of counterterrorism, but he has provided a gold standard for all others to follow. An outstanding collection of thoughtprovoking and sometimes controversial essays. This is essential reading for researchers and responders alike.’ – John Horgan, Penn State University, USA

Selected Contents: 1. The Psychology of Counterterrorism: Critical Issues and Challenges Andrew Silke 2. Understanding Terrorist Psychology Randy Borum 3. The Psychology of Violent Radicalisation Brooke Rogers 4. Why People Support Terrorism Reena Kumari 5. The Evolutionary Logic of Terrorism Rick O’Gorman 6. The Internet and Terrorism Lorraine Bowman-Grieve 7. The Impact of the Media on Terrorism and Counterterrorism Deborah Browne and Andrew Silke 8. Disengaging from Terrorism Neil Ferguson 9. Terrorists and Extremists in Prison: Psychological Issues in Management and Reform Andrew Silke 10. Interrogation Tactics and Terrorist Suspects John Pearse 11. Terrorist Tactics and Counter-Terrorism Graeme Steven 12. Deterring Terrorism: Target-Hardening, Surveillance and the Prevention of Terrorism Pete Fussey 13. Countering the Psychological Impact of Terrorism: Challenges for Homeland Security Anthony Richards 2010: 234 x 156: 216pp Hb: 978-0-415-55839-6: £90.00 Pb: 978-0-415-55840-2: £24.99 eBook: 978-0-203-84026-9 For more information, visit:

For more information, visit:

Complimentary Exam Copy

e-Inspection New in Paperback

Companion Website

te r ror i s m s tud i e s

Routledge Critical Terrorism Studies Series Edited by Richard Jackson, Marie Breen Smyth and Jeroen Gunning, all at Aberystwyth University, Wales, UK This book series will publish rigorous and innovative studies on all aspects of terrorism, counter-terrorism and state terror. It seeks to advance a new generation of thinking on traditional subjects, investigate topics frequently overlooked in orthodox accounts of terrorism and to apply knowledge from disciplines beyond International Relations and Security Studies. Books in this series will typically adopt approaches informed by criticalnormative theory, post-positivist methodologies and non-Western perspectives, as well as rigorous and reflective orthodox terrorism studies. Forthcoming

Counter-Terrorism and State Political Violence The ’War on Terror’ as Terror Edited by Scott Poynting, Manchester Metropolitan University, UK and David Whyte, Liverpool University, UK This edited volume aims to deepen our understanding of state power through a series of case studies of political violence arising from state ‘counter-terrorism’ strategies. Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: From Political Violence to State Terrorism Scott Poynting and David Whyte Part 1: State Political Violence and Counter-Terrorism in the UK 2. Pursue and Prevent: The British State’s ‘Counter-terror’ as Counterinsurgency David Miller and Rizwaan Sabir 3. Immigration laws and the State Terror Framework Hicham Yezza 4. The Terror of Expulsion Jonny Burnett 5. Operation Kratos, the de Menezes Killing, and ‘Due Process’ Graham Smith 6. British Counter-insurgency practice in the North of Ireland in the 1970s ? A Legitimate Response or State Terror? Paul O’Connor, Alan Brecknell and Maggie O’Conor Part 2: State Political Violence and Counter-Terrorism Across the World 7. Masters of Terror Noam Chomsky 8. The Great Game John Pilger 9. Terrorising Tamil Ealam Vicki Sentas 10. Israeli State Terrorism against Palestinians in Gaza 2008-9 Victoria Mason 11. Untouchable Compradores? Colombian State Narco-Terrorism and the People’s Struggle for National Liberation Oliver Villar 12. The Criminalisation of Anti-Colonial Struggle in Puerto Rico Jose Atiles-Osoria 13. ‘War on Terror’ and Spanish State Violence against Basque Political Dissent Stefanie Khoury and Pablo Ciocchini 14. Indonesian State Terrorism in Timor-Leste and West Papua Elizabeth Stanley 15. State Terrorism in the Sahara: The US and European Dimensions Jeremy Keenan

An Intellectual History of Terror


War, Violence and the State

Women Suicide Bombers

Mikkel Thorup, Aarhus University, Denmark